EE Raceway Modeling

Reference Guide
Document Number DPDS3-PB-200005B DPDS3-PB-200005C DPDS3-PB-200005D DPDS3-PB-200005E Version PDS 7.2 PDS 7.2 PDS 7.3 PDS 8.0 SE Date February 2003 February 2003 October 2004 November 2005 Pages 1-594 595-643 644-679 Cover/Notice

Copyright
Copyright © 1984-2005 Intergraph Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade secret law, and international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization.

Restricted Rights Legend
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c) of the Contractor Rights in Technical Data clause at DFARS 252.2277013, subparagraph (b) of the Rights in Computer Software or Computer Software Documentation clause at DFARS 252.227-7014, subparagraphs (b)(1) and (2) of the License clause at DFARS 252.227-7015, or subparagraphs (c) (1) and (2) of Commercial Computer Software---Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable. Unpublished---rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. Intergraph Corporation Huntsville, Alabama 35894-0001

Warranties and Liabilities
All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in your purchase contract, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date. The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document. The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not supplied by Intergraph or its affiliated companies. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.

Trademarks
Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, SmartSketch, FrameWorks, SmartPlant, INtools, MARIAN, and PDS are registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. MicroStation is a registered trademark of Bentley Systems, Inc. ISOGEN is a registered trademark of Alias Limited. Other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.

_ _______________
Table of Contents
If You Need Assistance ........................................................................................................ Intergraph Directory ............................................................................................................. Preface ................................................................................................................................................. Document Purpose ................................................................................................................ Document Prerequisites / Audience ...................................................................................... Related Documents/Products ................................................................................................ About this Document ............................................................................................................ Ordering Information ............................................................................................................ Additional Information ......................................................................................................... General Conventions .................................................................................................................... Keyboard Conventions ......................................................................................................... Terminology ......................................................................................................................... 1. Introduction .................................................................................................................................. About the Reference Guide .......................................................................................................... Basic Workstation Skills .............................................................................................................. 2. Installation Instructions ................................................................................................................ Assumptions ......................................................................................................................... Overview ............................................................................................................................... Upgrading the Workstation .......................................................................................................... Installation Procedure .................................................................................................................. Databases ..................................................................................................................................... 3. Electrical Engineer (EE) Environment ......................................................................................... Using the Electrical Engineer Menus ........................................................................................... Create ........................................................................................................................................... Enter ............................................................................................................................................. Product Menu ............................................................................................................................... Copy ............................................................................................................................................. Delete ........................................................................................................................................... Archive ......................................................................................................................................... Restore ......................................................................................................................................... Database Utilities ......................................................................................................................... RIS schema utilities .............................................................................................................. Update Project Schema .........................................................................................................

Table of Contents

17 17 19 19 19 19 19 20 20 21 22 23 25 25 26 27 27 27 28 29 33 35 36 39 40 42 43 44 46 48 50 51 52

3

_ _______________
Update Reference Schema .................................................................................................... 4. Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment ......................................................................... Create ........................................................................................................................................... Design .......................................................................................................................................... Process ......................................................................................................................................... Overview ............................................................................................................................... Operating Modes .................................................................................................................. EDEN ........................................................................................................................................... Operating Modes .................................................................................................................. Entering Time in Batch Mode .............................................................................................. Report ........................................................................................................................................... Overview ............................................................................................................................... A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume .................................................................. Rule Checks ................................................................................................................................. Overview ............................................................................................................................... Utilities ......................................................................................................................................... Copy ...................................................................................................................................... Delete .................................................................................................................................... Undelete ................................................................................................................................ Purge ..................................................................................................................................... Rename ................................................................................................................................. Send ...................................................................................................................................... Receive ................................................................................................................................. Archive ................................................................................................................................. Restore .................................................................................................................................. Output ................................................................................................................................... 5. EE Graphics Interface Elements .................................................................................................. Start-up Sequence ........................................................................................................................ Screen Display ............................................................................................................................. EERWAY Command Menu Bar .................................................................................................. Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment .................................................................... Identifying Elements .................................................................................................................... Working Units and Precision Key-ins ......................................................................................... Working Units in MU:SU:PU .............................................................................................. Precision Key-ins .................................................................................................................. 55 59 61 63 64 64 65 67 68 69 70 70 72 73 73 75 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 86 87 89 91 92 93 96 97 103 104 104 105

4

_ _______________
6. Workflow and Procedures ............................................................................................................ The Drawing Process ................................................................................................................... System Manager Setup ......................................................................................................... Drawing Setup ...................................................................................................................... Define Systems and Set Active Systems .............................................................................. Define One-Line Type and Set Active One-Line Type ........................................................ Set Symbology ...................................................................................................................... Set Active Parameters ........................................................................................................... Set Propagation Parameters .................................................................................................. Place One-Line ..................................................................................................................... Propagation ........................................................................................................................... Sketch and Eden Modes ........................................................................................................ Manual Fitting Placement ..................................................................................................... Seamless Tubing Representations ........................................................................................ Databases ..................................................................................................................................... Reference Database ............................................................................................................... Project Database ................................................................................................................... Reports ......................................................................................................................................... Interference Detection .................................................................................................................. 7. Precision Input Form .................................................................................................................... View ...................................................................................................................................... Maximize/Minimize ............................................................................................................. Cancel ................................................................................................................................... Reject .................................................................................................................................... Accept ................................................................................................................................... Move/Move To Toggle ......................................................................................................... Display Fields ....................................................................................................................... Active Point Coordinates Display ........................................................................................ Justification Point ................................................................................................................. Height and Width .................................................................................................................. Construct Point ............................................................................................................................ Midpoint/Any Point on Segment ................................................................................................. Extend/Reduce Run ..................................................................................................................... Distance and Direction ................................................................................................................. Runtime Setup .............................................................................................................................. 8. Design Commands ....................................................................................................................... Commands ............................................................................................................................ Using the Design Commands .......................................................................................................

Table of Contents

107 108 109 110 110 110 110 111 111 112 113 113 113 114 115 115 115 117 118 119 120 120 120 120 120 121 121 121 122 122 123 123 125 126 127 129 129 131

5

_ _______________
When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Place One-Line ............................................................................................................................. Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Route Around Vessel ................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Insert RCP .................................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Rotate Cross Section .................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Place Drop Point .......................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Place Equipment Pointer .............................................................................................................. Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Define Active Point ...................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Set Active Parameters .................................................................................................................. Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Place Manual Fitting .................................................................................................................... Conduit Sizing ............................................................................................................................. Field Descriptions ........................................................................................... Insert One-Line Vertex ................................................................................................................ Place Field Routed Raceway ....................................................................................................... Define Duct Cross Section ........................................................................................................... Place Stub Up ............................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ 131 131 131 131 132 134 135 136 138 138 140 140 142 142 144 144 145 145 146 146 147 155 156 160 161 164 167 169

6

_ _______________
9. Modify Commands ...................................................................................................................... Using the Modify Commands ...................................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Modify Element Commands ........................................................................................................ Using the Modify Element Commands ................................................................................ When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Annotate Element ................................................................................................................. Field Descriptions ................................................................................................................. Copy Element ....................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Move Element ....................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Clone Element ...................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Move One-Line Segment ...................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Move One-Line Vertex ......................................................................................................... Propagate Element ................................................................................................................ Edit/Insert Manual Fitting ..................................................................................................... Modify One-Line .................................................................................................................. Place Fitting by Rule ............................................................................................................ Combine Coincident RCPs ................................................................................................... Delete Duplicate One-Lines .................................................................................................. Delete Element ...................................................................................................................... Remove RCP ........................................................................................................................ Delete Fitting ........................................................................................................................ Remove One-Line Vertex ..................................................................................................... Minimize Joints .................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................

Table of Contents

173 174 174 174 174 174 175 177 177 177 177 177 178 179 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 194 198 204 207 209 211 212 214 216 217 219 220

7

_ _______________
Change System Parameters ................................................................................................... Modify Group Commands ........................................................................................................... Topics ................................................................................................................................... Using the Modify Group Commands ................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Define Group ........................................................................................................................ Steps ................................................................................................................ Copy Element by Group ....................................................................................................... Annotate Element by Group ................................................................................................. Clone Element by Group ...................................................................................................... Propagate by Group .............................................................................................................. Place Fitting by Rule by Group ............................................................................................ Steps ................................................................................................................ Add Systems Group .............................................................................................................. Replace Systems by Group ................................................................................................... Minimize Joints by Group .................................................................................................... Delete Element by Group ..................................................................................................... 10. Setup Commands ....................................................................................................................... Using the Setup Commands ......................................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Set Raceway Defaults .................................................................................................................. Define System .............................................................................................................................. Define One-Line Type ................................................................................................................. Set Symbology Control ................................................................................................................ Steps ................................................................................................................ Symbology Control ...................................................................................................................... Set Text Defaults .......................................................................................................................... Set Conduit Sizing Attributes ...................................................................................................... Create Cell Commands ................................................................................................................ Using the Create Cell Commands ......................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ 221 223 223 225 225 225 225 225 226 230 231 233 239 241 243 244 245 246 248 251 253 255 255 255 255 255 256 258 260 262 263 264 266 268 269 270 270

8

_ _______________
Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Create Model Cell ................................................................................................................. Create Equipment Pointer Cell ............................................................................................. Create Drop Point Cell .......................................................................................................... Model Commands ........................................................................................................................ Using the Model Commands ................................................................................................ When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Lock Model ........................................................................................................................... Move Model Annotation ....................................................................................................... Unlock Model ....................................................................................................................... Annotate Model .................................................................................................................... 11. Runtime Setup Commands ......................................................................................................... Using the Runtime Setup Commands .......................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Set Active One-Line Type Parameters ......................................................................................... Set Active One-Line Type ........................................................................................................... Set Active System ........................................................................................................................ Propagation Setup ........................................................................................................................ Set Active Levels ......................................................................................................................... Display Element Information ....................................................................................................... 12. Utilities Commands .................................................................................................................... Using the Utilities Commands ..................................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Toggle Construction Display On/Off ........................................................................................... Highlight Element by Sector/Word ............................................................................................. Highlight Sector/Word With Filename .................................................................................

Table of Contents

270 270 270 271 274 277 280 281 281 281 281 281 282 283 284 285 287 288 288 288 288 288 289 294 295 297 299 301 303 305 305 305 305 305 306 307 307

9

_ _______________
Highlight Element by ASID ID ................................................................................................... Highlight ASID ID With Filename ....................................................................................... Highlight Element by Link .......................................................................................................... Highlight Link With Filename .............................................................................................. Highlight Propagation Errors ....................................................................................................... Display Sector/Word Value ......................................................................................................... Display Element Type and ASID ID ........................................................................................... Display Link ................................................................................................................................. Display System and One-Line Type ............................................................................................ Active Coordinate System ........................................................................................................... 13. Database Commands .................................................................................................................. Using the Database Commands ................................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Load Database .............................................................................................................................. Steps ................................................................................................................ Report ........................................................................................................................................... A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume .................................................................. Rule Checks ................................................................................................................................. 14. Raceway Processes ..................................................................................................................... Load Database .............................................................................................................................. Batch File Option ............................................................................................ Unload Design ............................................................................................................................. Unload Sheet ................................................................................................................................ Cleanup Database ......................................................................................................................... Create Interference Envelope (default name) .............................................................................. Create Interference Envelope (given name) ................................................................................. 15. Eden Processes ........................................................................................................................... Compile EDEN Symbol ............................................................................................................... Delete EDEN Symbol .................................................................................................................. 309 309 312 312 314 315 316 317 318 320 321 322 322 322 322 322 323 325 326 327 329 331 332 335 336 338 340 342 344 347 349 351

10

_ _______________
Steps ................................................................................................................ List EDEN Symbol Library ......................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ List EDEN User Functions .......................................................................................................... Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries ................................................................................................... Compress EDEN Symbol Library ............................................................................................... Extract EDEN Symbol From Library .......................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Extract EDEN User Function From Library ................................................................................ Edit EDEN Symbol File .............................................................................................................. Steps ................................................................................................................ 16. Integrated Commands ................................................................................................................ Using the Integrated Commands .................................................................................................. When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... 16.1 Review PDS Attributes ............................................................................................................ Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 16.2 Reference PDS Model .............................................................................................................. Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 16.3 Window to Named PDS Item ................................................................................................... Options .................................................................................................................................. 16.4 Review PDS Clash ................................................................................................................... Parameters ............................................................................................................................. Appendix A: Appendix B: Error Messages ........................................................................................................... System/Application Manager Information .................................................................

Table of Contents

352 353 354 355 357 359 361 362 363 366 367 369 370 370 370 370 370 371 371 372 372 374 374 375 375 377 415 417 422

Customizing ................................................................................................................................. EE Environment Variables ..........................................................................................................

11

_ _______________
Appendix C: EE Databases .............................................................................................................. 425 426 427 427 428 430 430 430 432 432 433 433 433 434 435 435 436 437 437 438 438 439 440 440 441 443 444 445 446 448 449 449 449 450 451 454 454 454 455 456 457 458 Relational Interface System (RIS) ............................................................................................... Database and RIS Procedures ...................................................................................................... For New Users ...................................................................................................................... Update Schema (create_db) Process ............................................................................................ Reference Schema - General Description .................................................................................... Default Attributes ................................................................................................................. Keys ...................................................................................................................................... Codelists ............................................................................................................................... Approval Status Codelist Table ............................................................................................ Cardinal Codelist Table ........................................................................................................ Drawing Type Codelist Table ............................................................................................... Manual Fitting Part Codelist Table ....................................................................................... One-Line Type Codelist Table ............................................................................................. RCP Type Codelist Table ..................................................................................................... System Codelist Table .......................................................................................................... Three-Line Type Codelist Table ........................................................................................... Three_Line Subtype Codelist Table ..................................................................................... Three-Line Qualifier Codelist Table ..................................................................................... Units Codelist Table ............................................................................................................. Vendor Codelist Table .......................................................................................................... Wire/Cable Code Codelist Table .......................................................................................... Wire/Cable Configuration Codelist Table ............................................................................ Wire/Cable Size Codelist Table ............................................................................................ Wire/Cable Color Codelist Table ......................................................................................... Wire/Cable Voltage Codelist Table ...................................................................................... Wire/Cable Insulation Type Codelist Table ......................................................................... Yes-No Codelist Table ......................................................................................................... Fitting Environment Rules .................................................................................................... Project Schema - General Description ......................................................................................... Updating Schemas ....................................................................................................................... Updating a Project Schema ................................................................................................... Updating Reference Schemas ............................................................................................... Schema Names ...................................................................................................................... Modifying the Reference Schema ................................................................................................ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ............................................................... approv_status ........................................................................................................................ away_part .............................................................................................................................. away_spec ............................................................................................................................. cardinal ................................................................................................................................. cond_body ............................................................................................................................. cond_fill_calc .......................................................................................................................

12

_ _______________
cond_part .............................................................................................................................. cond_spec ............................................................................................................................. drawing ................................................................................................................................. drawing_type ........................................................................................................................ drop_point ............................................................................................................................. duct_spec .............................................................................................................................. ee_cond_x_area .................................................................................................................... ee_graphic_only .................................................................................................................... ee_pcbl_code ........................................................................................................................ ee_pcbl_color ........................................................................................................................ ee_pcbl_config ...................................................................................................................... ee_pcbl_insul ........................................................................................................................ ee_pcbl_size .......................................................................................................................... ee_pcbl_volt .......................................................................................................................... ee_pseudo_cable ................................................................................................................... ee_system .............................................................................................................................. ee_units ................................................................................................................................. ee_unique .............................................................................................................................. ee_yes_no ............................................................................................................................. envelope ................................................................................................................................ light_fixture .......................................................................................................................... manual_part .......................................................................................................................... mscatalog .............................................................................................................................. mscodelist ............................................................................................................................. mscolumns ............................................................................................................................ ol_type .................................................................................................................................. one_line ................................................................................................................................. panel ...................................................................................................................................... project ................................................................................................................................... pullbox .................................................................................................................................. rcp ......................................................................................................................................... rcp_type ................................................................................................................................ tl_fit_env ............................................................................................................................... tl_qual ................................................................................................................................... tl_subtype .............................................................................................................................. tl_type ................................................................................................................................... to_equip ................................................................................................................................ to_support ............................................................................................................................. tray_part ................................................................................................................................ tray_spec ............................................................................................................................... vendor ................................................................................................................................... wway_part ............................................................................................................................. wway_spec ............................................................................................................................ EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description .................................................................... cabsch_spec .......................................................................................................................... cndsch_spec .......................................................................................................................... drawing ................................................................................................................................. drop_point .............................................................................................................................

Table of Contents

459 460 461 461 462 462 463 463 464 464 464 465 465 465 466 466 467 467 467 468 469 471 471 472 473 474 475 475 476 477 478 478 479 480 480 480 481 481 482 483 484 484 485 487 487 489 491 491

13

................................................................................................................................................................................................................... mscatalog ........................................................ Appendix D: Specification ........................................................................................................ Symbol Processor File ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... one_line .................... rcp_to_sys ....................................................................................... fitting ......... envelope ..... Appendix F: EE File Structure .................................................................................................................................................................................................. str_to_sys .....................................................................................dat ............ to_support ...................................................................................... mscolumns ................. Available Fittings ............ process........................... project .................................... panel_to_drw .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................unl Files ..........................................................................................................................dat .............................................................................................................................................................................dat ........................................................................................................................................................... Update Reference Schema ............................................... ol_to_sys ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ee_system ....................................... rcp_to_drw ....................................._ _______________ duct_fill .....................................dat ...................................................................................................................................................dat ................................................................................................. panel ........................................................................................ report........................... rule_chk.................................................. Sample ..................................................................................................................................................................... rcp .............................................................................................................................. sys_to_drw .................................. 492 492 493 493 494 495 496 497 498 498 500 500 501 501 502 502 503 504 505 505 507 507 509 510 512 513 513 519 520 524 531 531 533 534 535 536 537 Preparing the Specifications ............................................................................................ EE Nucleus File Structure ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ EE Raceway File Structure ................................................................................................................... straight .................................. Appendix G: Customizing Environment Files ........................................ Appendix E: Eden Symbol Generation ..................... print................................................................................................................................................ fit_to_sys ............................... 14 ......................... eden......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ee_pseudo_cable ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... manager........dat ......................................................................................

............................................................. Appendix K: RIS Schema Manager ..............................................................................................cmd file ........................................................................................... Data Definition Form ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Schema File Form ................................................................................................................................................................................................. Information Output: .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... Table Information Form ................................................................................................................................................................................... RIS Report Processing ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Raceway Bill of Materials Report (rway_bom) ............................................................................... Information Output: ............................ Information Output: ................................ A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume .................... Associated Software/Files .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Project Drawing List (drwlst) ................................................................... Associated Software/Files .................................... Associated Software/Files ...................................... Information Output: .......................................................................... 15 ..........................._ _______________ Appendix H: alias.................................................................... Associated Software/Files ....................... Create Table Form ........................................................... Alter Schema Form ................................................................................................................................................ Material Takeoff Report (mto_rpt) ....................... Information Output: .......................................cmd ...................................... Appendix I: rway.................................................................................................................... Create Schema Form ..................... Raceway Bill of Materials by Volume Report (rway_bom_vol) ............................. Set Form ............................................................................................................................... Associated Software/Files .............................................................................. Drop Table Form ........................................................................................................................................... Alter Table Form .. Table of Contents 539 543 545 545 547 547 547 547 548 548 548 549 549 549 550 550 551 551 552 552 552 553 554 555 556 556 557 557 558 559 559 560 560 Schema Information Form .................................................................................................................... Drop Schema Form .......................................................... Raceway Blank Part IDs (blank_ids) ........ Appendix J: Reports ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Sorted by (Highest to lowest priority) ................

........................................_ _______________ Appendix L: Appendix M: RIS Schema Definition File ..................................................................................................... EE Manager ............................................................... Appendix N: EE Configure ........................... Glossary ............ Database Edit Functions .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 561 565 566 567 571 573 581 In this Appendix .......................................... 16 ............................. Index ..............................................

S. Only) 1-256-730-5400 (Outside the U. convenient. Table of Contents Support For the lasest Support Services information. Our web address is: http://www.A. please call your local Intergraph office.intergraph.) Mailing Address Intergraph Process._ _______________ If You Need Assistance Intergraph Online Our web site brings you fast.com. please call your local Intergraph office. Alabama 35758 U. services. If you are outside the United States. The most upto-date list of international offices and distributors is available on the web at http://www.asp. If you are outside of the United States.com. Intergraph Directory The following numbers are only valid in the United States unless otherwise indicated. use a World Wide Web browser to connect to http://www.com/ppo/services/support.com. Intergraph General Information All countries — 1-256-730-2000 Training Registration 1-800-766-7701 (U. 17 .intergraph. Power & Offshore 300 Intergraph Way Madison.S. and direction.S. up-to-the-minute information about Intergraph’s products.intergraph. You can also reach us by electronic mail at info@intergraph.

If you have any suggestions on where we can improve the documentation or where you think more information is needed._ _______________ Documentation Contacts We are constantly working on updates and improvements to the documents and other educational media. AL 35758 18 . let us know. Power & Offshore Documentation Manager 300 Intergraph Way Madison. You can reach us by: Mail Intergraph Process.

Document Prerequisites / Audience This document is intended for designers who have a working knowledge of the standard interactive graphics system. Oracle. Information about RIS capabilities can be found in the following documents: Relational Interface System (RIS) Reference Manual Relational Interface System (RIS) Operator Training Guide About this Document This document contains front matter. Also. This document is designed as a reference. a glossary. these include Informix. It is recommended that you work through the EE Raceway Modeling Course Guide to learn the basic concepts of the product. modify. EE Raceway is a MicroStation graphics based software and lets you design. much of this document is devoted to a description of those commands. along with a relational database management system (RDBMS) supported by RIS. and an index. Currently. Knowledge of 3-D design systems is helpful but not necessary._ _______________ Preface Document Purpose Preface This document is a reference guide for Intergraph Corporation’s Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Modeling tm software package. Related Documents/Products MicroStation  software is required to operate EE Raceway. and model electrical raceway systems in a three-dimensional environment. 19 . such as vi or EMACS. and Ingres. you should be familiar with a text editor. numbered sections. Use this guide when you need to look up a specific EE Raceway function. Because the design process is controlled by executing commands. Information about MicroStation capabilities can be found in the following documents: MicroStation Reference Guide MicroStation User’s Guide Intergraph Corporation’s Relational Interface System (RIS)TM is required to operate EE Raceway. appendices. grouped according to function. it is organized around the structure of the product rather than presenting a typical work flow.

This includes information on accessing the product and creating and manipulating product files. forms. Provides special notices to the customer. Describe the product environment. Describe the command groups and operating sequences of each command within the command groups. Lists any exceptions made to the certification.txt Contents Describes changes and additions to the product since the last version. This includes information on the screen display. Describes the graphics environment for the product. Provides installation instructions. Describes the typical workflow using EE Raceway. Section 5 Section 6 Sections 7-16 Ordering Information To order documents: Within the United States. contact the Intergraph subsidiary or distributor from whom you purchased your workstation. For international locations. Includes Comments and Trouble Report numbers which describe what problems have been fixed.February 2003 Section 1 Section 2 Sections 3 & 4 Provides an overview of the product and the document. menus. contact your Customer Engineer or Sales Account Representative. File Name readme. Lists the names and dates of the files in the current release._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . For a fixes release. and on-line Help. the files which have been modified are appended to the top of the initial file to provide a history of all changes to the product. 20 . Additional Information The following informational files are delivered with the EE Raceway software in the win32app\ingr\eerway directory.

For example. phrases.dat to load the ASCII file. Select first segment of alignment Bold Typewriter Indicates what you should literally type in. or groups of related information. Symbols help abbreviate and identify commonly used words. parameter name. 21 . For example. Bold Indicates a command name.rpt file. Command paths are shown using an arrow between command names. For example. which requires an action be taken by the user. Sans serif Indicates a system prompt or message. For example. or dialog box title. Preface Typefaces Italic Indicates a system response._ _______________ General Conventions This document contains many visual cues to help you understand the meaning of certain words or phrases. which is an explanation of what the software is doing. Normal Typewriter Indicates an actual file or directory name. The text is placed in the viewing plane. The ASCII report is stored in the layout. Choose File > Open to load a new file. For example. The use of different fonts for different types of information allows you to scan the document for key concepts or commands. Key in original.

February 2003 Symbols This document uses the following symbols to represent mouse buttons and to identify special information: <C> <D> <R> <T> Command button Data button (usually the left mouse button) Reset/reject button (usually the right mouse button) Tentative button (usually the center mouse button) Note — Important supplemental information. To press the Escape key. then K. which map menu selections to key combinations. Warning — Critical information that could cause the loss of data if not followed. Map or path — shows you how to get to a specific command or form. Keyboard Conventions The following list outlines the abbreviations this document uses for keyboard keys and describes how to use them in combination. provides a tip or hint for doing the exercises. ALT CTRL DEL ENTER ESC CTRL+z ESC. 22 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .k Alternate key Control key Delete key Enter key Escape key To hold down the Control key and press Z. Need a hint — used with activities and labs. More information — indicates there is additional or related information. Technical tip or information — provides information on what the software is doing or how it processes information. You can make some menu selections through the use of keyboard accelerators.

then click Delete to remove it from the directory. This term implies that you are clicking the data button (<D>) as part of a menu or dialog box action.dat from the list box. For example. you would select items to define parameters. Drag To press and hold the data button (<D>) while moving the mouse or hand-held cursor. To select and execute a command by clicking the mouse or hand-held cursor button twice in rapid succession. After selecting an item. such as selecting toggle buttons. you tentative-select by pressing a left-button. For example. Select the line string to define the graphic template.dat to load it into the new surface. In addition. Tentative-select To place a tentative point on an existing graphic element in a design file. Double-click on the file original. right-button chord. Preface Double-click Type Key in 23 . Select the file original._ _______________ Terminology Click To use a mouse or key combination to pick an item that begins an action. In a dialog box. This also applies to selecting graphic elements from the design file. pressing TAB after keying in data will enter the data and move the cursor to the next field. To type in data and press ENTER to enter the data and execute the default action. If you are using the Windows NT operating system. Click Apply to save the changes. For example. Select To mark an item by highlighting it with key combinations or by picking it with your cursor. To key a character string into a text box. you click the action you want to affect the item. For example. Selecting does not initiate an action.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 24 .

modify. Separate sections outline the preparation and responsibilities for the system and/or application manager. You can also use EE Raceway models as background drawings for designs created in other PDS facility design disciplines. Introduction 1. Introduction EE Raceway allows you to design. and model electrical raceway systems in a threedimensional environment. It describes the basic workflow for creating an electrical raceway model. Interference detection – Creates the raceway component interference envelope files for input to the PDS interference detection task. 25 . including: Model building – Uses either a centerline or a three-line component graphic to build a three-dimensional raceway model. provides descriptions of EE Raceway commands and processes. Introduction About the Reference Guide This document. the EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide. Material takeoff – Extracts a list of material required to construct a raceway model. EE Raceway serves a variety of general purposes._ _______________ 1.

February 2003 Basic Workstation Skills The following basic workstation drafting skills are necessary to use the EE Raceway Modeling product. These and other skills can be learned in Microstation Training materials: Fit view Window area Zoom in & out File design Compress Update Toggle between virtual screens Turn views on & off 26 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

all projects have been archived. Installation Instructions Assumptions The following assumptions have been made in the writing of this section. The software covered includes baseline and application software. or Ingres. Installation Instructions This section is an instruction sheet both for initial installation and for updating the workstation software. Download/Install Overview This chapter covers the following topics pertaining to installation/upgrading: Upgrading the Workstation Installation Procedure Databases 27 . and EE Raceway Modeling. EMACS. 2. Oracle. such as vi. If you are updating. You must be familiar with the PDS Loader. On-line Informix. Electrical Engineer (EE) Nucleus software. You will need to consult individual documentation for these products for detailed information. Products will be used with any one of the following databases: Standard Engine (SE) Informix. You must be familiar with a text editor. or Notepad._ _______________ 2.

you should load system nucleus software. A database can reside locally on each workstation. 28 . the workstation as server. you have three options: — Placing both project and reference databases locally on each workstation.February 2003 Upgrading the Workstation This section describes the loading procedure and details the software you will need to operate your system. — Placing the project database locally on each workstation and the reference database remotely on a server. or remotely on a server. — Placing both project and reference databases remotely on a server. You must also know before beginning to download products that the order in which you load them is very important. it describes the applications software necessary for each of three possible configurations: the stand-alone workstation. you must select the Relational Database Management System (RDBMS) you plan to use and decide where to locate it on your system. Based on these two setups. followed by the EE application products. The chapter also outlines the basic workflow for database setup and refers you to appropriate database documentation. Additionally. First. and the server-client workstation._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . followed by system application software (including EE Nucleus). For the purposes of this installation. There are several things you must do before loading any software to your workstation.

Pressing Enter will have no effect until all fields have been entered. and serial number (as delivered). including a valid serial number. This will invoke the product selection form. First. follow these steps to download all of the desired products to a Windows NT/2000/XP system. This form expects your user name. based on your system configuration. Once you know what application software you need. 2. Download/Install 3. Select Continue to invoke the Intergraph Registration Data form. the loader delivered to stand-alone EE Raceway sites may vary slightly. 4. This may be a networked drive. Double-click on setup. The Continue button will remain inactive until a valid serial number has been keyed in. Installation Procedure 2. 1. Select Continue when the button is no longer inactive. connect to the drive on which the distribution software resides._ _______________ Installation Procedure This section’s examples assume that you are running the loader delivered with PDS. or it may be on your local system.exe to invoke the Intergraph PDS Component Loader. 29 . company.

If local is selected. A message box will appear. This will invoke the installation data form for each selection. you must key in the path to the location to which you want to install the software._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you must provide the name of the server which will be hosting the session. select OK. you must provide the installation path. 30 . (Note that the icon path changes as you edit the install path. This will return control to the Intergraph PDS Component Loader. select Load Components.February 2003 5.) If client is selected. Place an X next to the software you wish to install. (Note that the icon path changes as you edit the install path.) When all information has been provided. and a local path to the icon associated with the software. If server is selected. or server). as well as path to the software on the server. you will be asked to select the Installation Type (local. Among other installation options that vary according to product. When all software to be loaded has been selected. client.

Download/Install 8. and EE Nucleus icons. Copy the ee.txt.cfg file._ _______________ Installation Procedure Select Yes to continue. (Your login directory will be fine. Before executing the software. you must set the environment variables in your ee. and it needs to be placed somewhere that it will not be over-written when you next update the software.cfg file found in the win32app/ingr/eenuc directory into another directory not in the EE or PDS structure. This program group contains the EE Manager. Before you can enter the EE environment. 6. Use the browse command to locate and open the new ee. you will modify this copied file.) 7. Double-click on the EE Configure icon to display the Configure EE Environment form. 2. otherwise select No. A message box will display that tells you which products are being loaded. EE Readme. EE Help. When the software has successfully loaded. and not to a previously-selected file. EE Configure. 9. The Reset command should always be used at this point to ensure that the environment variables in the display window are those that belong to the file you just selected. Set your user environment variables.cfg file that you copied in the earlier step. you will need to set at least the following variables: 31 . the EENUC (Common) program group will be created.

select OK to save the modifications to the ee. This will close the EE Configure utility. 32 . After all variables have been set properly for your environment. key the desired value into the Value field. This displays the current value and description for that variable. To modify the value of that variable._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and no more changes are needed. then select Set.cfg file.February 2003 PROJECT_LOCATION EE_SCHEMA EE_REFDB DB_TYPE Select the variable to be set.

— You will do this through the EE Environment and the RIS Schema Manager product. Download your RDBMS product and the Relational Interface System (RIS) software. see the appendix entitled RIS Schema Manager in this reference guide or refer to the Relational Interface System (RIS) Reference Manual. — See the section of this guide entitled Software Requirements for information about the RIS products. 1. — For information about using the RIS Schema Manager product. and 202 for reference schema. — Refer to the Software Requirements section for information on database location options. Download/Install 33 . — Decide where on the system to locate your databases. see the Relational Interface System (RIS) Reference Manual. — Informix users must create all databases in ANSI mode with this release. In order for the EE Raceway project to integrate to PDS there must be two entries in pdtable_102 corresponding to type_of_rdb_data: 200 for project schema. — For information about accessing RIS Schema Manager. see your individual RDBMS documentation for installation instructions and general information about the product. Also. see Appendix C of this reference guide or refer to your individual RDBMS documentation. and you should consult your individual RDBMS and RIS documentation for detailed instructions on database setup.* file in the /usr#/informix/release directory for details about creating databases in ANSI mode. Create new databases/upgrade existing databases. 2._ _______________ Databases This section provides an overview of the workflow involved in creating a database and schemas. Only after these entries are in the table will the user be able to update the project and reference database for use with PDS. Select and install the RDBMS you will use. Databases 2. — For detailed information about creating and updating databases. See the RIS Reference Manual for information about this process or look in the RISNOTES*. 4. Create empty RIS schemas. Also. 3. What follows is a very basic outline. see the section entitled Database Utilities in this reference guide.

Update your project and reference schemas. The Database Utilities section contains instructions for updating both project and reference schemas. — You will use the Database Utilities option in the EE Environment to accomplish this. — See the Database Utilities section in this reference guide.February 2003 5._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 34 .

35 . When you key in EE. click Electrical Raceway Environment on the main PD_Shell form. To enter the Electrical Engineer form. All EE drawings are organized by project. Electrical Engineer (EE) Environment Electrical Engineer (EE) Environment Electrical Engineer (EE) products are accessed through the Electrical Engineer (EE) form. EE Environment A project is a group of related electrical drawings and their associated database which you create._ _______________ 3. the Project Menu displays: 3. The Project Menu and other EE Environment menus provide easy access to all the product functions.

the necessary information in the input fields in the input/output area. check with your system manager. These options can display additional forms or menus. For some options you will need to know net addresses for the input data boxes.control the EE form. and then to select. Options List .lists available project and design files Input/Output Area . To edit information you key in to input fields. Message Area . If you do not know the appropriate addresses.February 2003 Using the Electrical Engineer Menus The following areas make up the Electrical Engineer form: Menu Icons . or key in. Listing Area . use standard EMACS commands.displays messages from the software._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The basic procedure for using EE menus is first to select an option from the options list. 36 .a list of options which require additional input or other selections before you can continue. To turn off an active option. select another option.for keying in or displaying data about a project.

you are not allowed to print a design file from the Drawing Utility form. operating or error messages will display in the message area at the bottom of the form._ _______________ Scrolling Through Listings The listing area in the EE form provides you access to the projects and design files you will manage using the available menu options. and then select Confirm (√). 3. you can scroll up and down the list using the scroll bar. in any combination: Confirm (√) accepts the current form settings. The menus will not allow you to perform illegal operations. Message Area Once you have selected and confirmed a option. For example. You can monitor lengthy processes by reviewing the message area. EE Environment Cancel (X) exits the EE application entirely. the item you select from the listing area will display in the appropriate input field. Using the Electrical Engineer Menus Icons There are three icons that can display on EE forms. and executes the active process. provide the necessary input. Remember that the basic procedure for executing a given process is to select a form option. When a particular option is active. Summary The best way to familiarize yourself with the environment form and their functions is simply to practice using the available features. Reset returns you to the previous form and cancels the current form settings. all of the available listings are currently displayed. The bar above the arrows indicates where you are in the listing. When listings fill more than one page. If the bar fills the space above the arrows. 37 .

Archive — Archives EE project files to a floppy disk or network nodes. Enter — Accesses available EE applications and enters existing EE projects.February 2003 Project Menu Options The individual Project Menu options are discussed in the following sections: Create — Creates new EE projects. Database Utilities — Accesses EE Update Schema utilities and RIS Schema Manager. if there are more than one. 38 . Delete — Deletes EE project files. — EE Product Menu — Displays (and allows you to select from) those EE applications that are loaded on the workstation. Restore — Restores archived EE project files from a floppy disk or network nodes._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Copy — Copies existing project files to new projects.

prj extension is automatically appended to the project file name when you select Confirm (√). Multiple files can exist within a single project. Create 3. The Project name field displays below the scrolling area. so you are not required to key in this extension. 39 . Select the Project name field. see RIS Schema Manager. You may also want to create a new project schema when you create a project. Steps 1. Your project name should have eight or fewer characters. and key in the new project name. A . Select Confirm (√) to create the project. Select Create from the Project Menu option list._ _______________ Create This option creates a project in which your design file(s) reside. though uppercase letters are automatically converted to lowercase. page 553 . — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Create process. For information about creating a project schema. 2. which itself can span multiple products. EE Environment Field Descriptions Project name — This field allows you to enter the project name in uppercase or lowercase letters. 3.

You may also key project names into this field. Field Descriptions Project name — This field reflects the project name that is selected in the project listing area. You can override the default selection by keying in another schema name. Reference schema — This field is automatically updated with the reference schema name associated with the selected project name. Schema password — This field accepts a password for entering the respective schema. Refer to the section about EE Environment Variables in Appendix B of this document for more information on environment variables. Project schema — This field is automatically updated with the project schema name associated with the selected project name. and is the first step in entering the Electrical Engineer environment. and the schema passwords. if they exist. if one has been defined. This field may also be defined by the environment variable EE_REFDB. 40 . the project and reference schemas. You will need to input the names of the project. This field may or may not display the password once it has been entered. depending on the setting of the appropriate Password Echo toggle. Refer to the section about EE Environment Variables in Appendix B of this document for more information on environment variables. You can override the default selection by keying in the desired schema name.February 2003 Enter This option accesses a specified project. This field may also be defined by the environment variable EE_SCHEMA._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

The project listing displays. Enter schema passwords if they were created for either schema. see RIS Schema Manager. Select Confirm (√). Enter Password Echo — This toggle controls whether or not the password is displayed in the respective password fields._ _______________ Steps 1. and key in a project name. If only one EE product exists on your workstation. The project schema (defaults to project name) and the current reference schema display automatically. EE Environment 41 . Select Enter from the Project Menu option list. The EE Product Menu displays. If no password was defined for the schemas. if needed. 2. Select a project from the listing area. the environment bypasses the Product Menu and goes directly into the Drawing Menu. 3. 3. You can make modifications to these fields. and key in the password. page 553 . 4. leave these fields blank. For information about schema passwords. Identify the appropriate Schema password field. — OR — Select the Project name field.

only the EE Raceway product is on menu.) 42 . then the environment bypasses the Product Menu and goes directly into the selected product’s Design Menu. Steps 1._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The Design Menu displays. available for use. Only the EE products you actually have installed on your workstation will be displayed on this menu. Select the desired EE application from the Product Menu form. If only one EE product exists on your workstation. In this example.February 2003 Product Menu The Product Menu form displays all of the available EE products on your workstation. (See the chapter entitled EE Raceway Environment for more information about the Design Menu.

and key in a project to be copied. EE Environment Steps 1. Select a project to be copied from the listing area. Select Confirm (√) to copy the project. 3. 4. Select the Copy project to input field. Copy project to — Key in the destination project name. 43 . Select Copy from the Project Menu option list. Copy Field Descriptions Copy project from — Key in the source project name (or select it from the list). this cannot be the name of a project that already exists. and key in the new project name. — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Copy process. 3. You cannot key in the name of an existing project in the Copy project to field. — OR — Select the Copy project from input field. 2._ _______________ Copy This option copies all the files within an existing project to a new project.

44 . and key in the project name. 2. Select Confirm (√). 3. Field Descriptions Project name — Key in (or select from the list) the project to be deleted._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Delete This option completely deletes all the files and databases within an existing project. Select Delete from the Project Menu option list. Steps 1. Select the project name from the listing area. a warning displays indicating that you should drop the schema corresponding to the database contained within the project. — OR — Select the Project name field. If a database exists in the project directory.

For information about dropping a schema. 3. while selecting Cancel cancels the Delete function. 45 ._ _______________ Delete Selecting Accept on the warning form deletes the project and its database. a warning displays indicating that you are about to delete an entire project. while selecting Cancel cancels the Delete function. page 553 . If a database does not exist in the project directory. EE Environment Selecting Accept on the warning form deletes the project. see RIS Schema Manager. — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Delete process.

Username on remote node — This field accepts the user name for the destination node. TCP/XNS — This toggle allows you to choose between TCP and XNS network protocols. Password — This field accepts the password (if one exists) for the destination node.February 2003 Archive This option stores an entire project and associated database on a network host or on a floppy disk. Password Echo — This toggle allows you to display the user password you enter in the Password field._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . A password is required if you are using the TCP option. Remote path/directory — This field accepts a key-in for the destination node of the project. 46 . The path must exist on the remote node. A password is required if you are using the TCP option. Field Descriptions Remote node name/address — This field accepts the node name or address of the system to receive the project. The project name is appended to this path.

Select Archive from the Project Menu option list. contact your system administrator._ _______________ Steps 1.) When archiving using a floppy disk. 3. and remote directory may be assigned in the user’s . EE_USERNAME. user name. 4.EErc file. Toggling to Floppy changes the displayed form information.EErc file. — OR — Select the Project name field. Select Confirm (√) to begin archiving. Network is the default setting on the Network/Floppy toggle. (If you need more information about the . — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Archive process. Select the Project name from the scrolling area. 2. Default values for the remote node name. you must have a formatted floppy disk placed in the disk drive. and key in a project name. Archive 3. Select the storage facility for your project files. and EE_REMDIR. using the global symbols EE_NODENAME. EE Environment 47 .

48 . Username on remote node — This field accepts the user name for the node of origin. TCP/XNS — This toggle allows you to choose between TCP and XNS network protocols._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Password — This field accepts the password (if one exists) for the node of origin. Be sure to verify that archived project will not overwrite existing projects with the same name. You must delete or rename the current project to complete the restore process. Field Descriptions Remote node name/address — This field accepts the node name or address of the system from which to receive the project. you cannot restore a project that is currently listed in the listing area.) Password Echo — This toggle allows you to display the user password you enter in the Password field. A password is required if you are using the TCP option. A password is required if you use the TCP option.February 2003 Restore This option retrieves an entire project and any associated database from a network or a floppy disk. When restoring from a floppy. Remote path/directory — This field accepts a key-in for the project’s node of origin. you can restore a project that is currently listed in your listing area. The project on the floppy will overwrite the project in your directory. When restoring from a network.

4. Select Confirm (√) to begin restoring. Indicate the storage location for your project. Select the Project name field. — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Restore process. Select Restore from the Project Menu. When restoring from a floppy disk. EE Environment 49 . and key in a project name. Toggling to Floppy changes the displayed form information._ _______________ Steps 1. you must have the disk in the disk drive. Network is the default setting on the Network/Floppy toggle. Restore 3. 2. 3.

February 2003 Database Utilities This option accesses the RIS Schema Manager environment and the EE schema updating processes. RIS schema utilities Update Project Schema Update Reference Schema 50 . The Database Utilities options are described in detail in the following sections._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

RIS Schema Manager. drop. RIS schema utilities 3. and maintain project and reference database schemas._ _______________ RIS schema utilities This option accesses the RIS Schema Manager form. For more information. Proceed through the necessary RIS Schema Manager processes. 2. page 553 . Before using this utility. you must have an existing database and user name. see RIS Schema Manager. 51 . Steps 1. select the RIS schema utilities option from the Database Utilities menu. With this utility you can create. Consult your relational database management system (RDBMS) documentation for specific information about database installation. To access the RIS Schema Manager form. EE Environment Normally this is a procedure for a system or application manager. page 553 supplies examples of Create Schema input for several RDBMSs.

though doing so will slow processing time. page 425 . You can use individual or multiple EE applications to update the schema. Schema name — Defines the project database’s schema name. For additional information about updating schemas. To enter the schema name. Password Echo/No echo — This toggle defines if you want to display the schema password input. Error file — Defines the error processing message file name. To enter the password. Application checkboxes – These boxes allow you to select the EE application(s) with which you are updating the schema. Schema password — Defines the schema password. select the field and key in the name of an existing project schema. To display the schema password input.February 2003 Update Project Schema This option allows you to modify the structure and data of an existing project schema. select the field and key in the name of the password corresponding to the schema name you entered._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 52 . set the toggle to Echo. if one exists. see EE Databases. You can update the schema with multiple products. Field Descriptions Output file — Defines the processing message file name. Only those products loaded on your workstation will display as options.

see Process. Processing toggle — This toggle indicates the operating mode for the update process. Update Project Schema Steps 3. the system displays a processing message file (create_db.EErc file. To specify command and SQL files for usr-defined data._ _______________ You can also update the schema with your own data by selecting the User Defined checkbox. Select Confirm (√) to update the project schema. To change the displayed default files. or Batch. Select the Update project schema option from the Database Utilities form.. Sql and Cmd file — These fields display the command and SQL files associated with each application. The update process displays the message Processing . Set up the form to meet your specifications. Return to step 1.EErc file. or export EE_CUSTOM_SQL and EE_CUSTOM_CMD for the customized SQL and command files.. 4. select the field. 53 . EE Environment 1. The Update project schema form displays: 2. You can set the toggle to Foreground (default). The delivered default files are defined in the win32app\eenuc\bin\. it will display one of two message files to the screen: — If the schema is updated without errors.EErc file or by redefining the variables in your $HOME\. and key in the full pathname for those files. You can redefine the defaults by editing this .msg). Background. — OR — Select Reset to return to the Database Utilities form without retaining your input. page 64 . and key in the desired filenames. When Update project schema finishes processing. 3. select the fields next to the User Defined checkbox. For more information about operating modes.

the system displays an error message file (create_db.February 2003 — OR — — If errors occur during the update process. 54 . For more information. 5. page 89 . Select Reset again to exit the process and return to the Database Utilities form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . using the Output option on the Utilities form. 6. Select Reset on the message file form to return to the Update project schema form. You can also access these message files.err). see Output. located in the current project’s /tmp directory.

To enter information. see EE Databases. Password Echo/No echo — This toggles define if you want to display the schema password. To specify command and SQL files for usr-defined data. To display the schema password input. Only those products loaded on your workstation will display as options. select the field._ _______________ Update Reference Schema This option allows you to modify the structure and data of an existing reference schema. or Batch. Error file — Defines the error processing message file name. You can redefine the defaults by editing this . For additional information about updating schemas. and key in the full pathname for those files. and key in the desired filenames. select the fields next to the User Defined checkbox. For more information about operating modes. Application checkboxes — These boxes allow you to select the EE application(s) with which you are updating the schema. You can set the toggle to Foreground (default). You can also update the schema with your own data by selecting the User Defined checkbox. Sql and Cmd File — These fields display the command and SQL files associated with each application. page 425 . see Process. page 64 . Update Reference Schema Field Descriptions Output file — Defines the processing message file name. 3. select the field. Schema name — Defines the reference database’s schema name. To change the displayed default files. though doing so will slow processing time. if one exists. select the field. To enter information.EErc file. and key in the name of an existing reference schema. Background. Schema password — Define the schema password. set the toggle to Echo. or export EE_CUSTOM_REFSQL and EE_CUSTOM_REFCMD for the customized SQL and command files. Processing mode — This toggle indicates the operating mode for the update process. You can update the schema with multiple products.EErc file or by redefining the variables in your $HOME\. You can use individual or multiple EE applications to update the schema. and key in the name of the password corresponding to the schema name you entered. The delivered default files are defined in the win32app\eenuc\bin\. EE Environment 55 .EErc file.

— OR — — If errors occur during the update process. The Update reference schema form displays.err)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 3.February 2003 Steps 1. 2.msg). — If the schema is updated without errors. it will display one of two message files. — OR — Select Reset to return to the Database Utilities form without retaining the form parameters. Select the Update reference schema option from the Database Utilities form.. When Update reference schema finishes processing. Set up the form to meet your specifications. 56 . Select Confirm (√) to update the reference schema.. The update process displays the message Processing . the system displays a processing message file (create_db. Return to step 1. the system displays an error message file (create_db. 4.

6. page 89 . 5. see Output. located in the current project’s /tmp directory. EE Environment 57 . 3. Select Reset on the message file form to return to the Update reference schema form. using the Output option on the Utilities form. For more information. Select Reset again to exit the process and return to the Database Utilities form._ _______________ Update Reference Schema You can also access these message files.

February 2003 58 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

EERWAY Environment The rest of this chapter describes all the options on this menu. If you are a new user. Commands The following sections describe each option in detail and show the menu as it displays when each option is selected. 59 . 4. — OR — Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment The EE Raceway Design Menu. page 42 for more information)._ _______________ 4. Create — Allows you to create a design file. Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment When you select the Enter option from the Project Menu. one of two menus display: The EE Environment Product Menu. if you have multiple EE products installed on the workstation (see Product Menu. you may want to skip all but the Create and Design options.

Utilities — Allows you to access functions needed to manipulate EE Raceway design. It also processes work on design files and/or databases. Rule — Displays the design rule errors occurring in the design process. 60 . and message files.February 2003 Design — Allows you to enter a design file and attaches the EE menus. Process — Allows you to list and select EE Raceway processes._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . rule. report. EDEN — Allows you to design your own symbols for raceway elements. Report — Displays the information in an EE Raceway database.

You can change this directory by redefining the EERWAY_SEED symbol in the directory or in your login directory. Select Create from the Design Menu. 2. Select the drawing name input box and key in a drawing name and. If there is more than one seed file available. it is displayed as the default. 3. EE Raceway is delivered with both a metric (mseed. the seed file subdirectory is win32app\ingr\eerway\dgn\seed.dgn). 61 . The seed file contains basic information that EE Raceway uses. EE Raceway will convert PDS seed files to raceway design files the first time you enter the EE Raceway graphics environment. Select the seed file. you are actually copying a seed file (a template). EERWAY Environment Steps 1. Choose a seed file either by accepting the default (this happens automatically when you select Confirm (√)) or by selecting a seed file from the scrolling area. a file extension. You can also use seed files that were generated in a Plant Design (PDS) environment. 4. A seed file can also contain customized information like company borders and logos. By default. Create When you create a drawing.dgn) and English seed file (seed._ _______________ Create This option creates design files. optionally. the listing area displays all these files. based on a specified seed file. If there is only one seed file.

62 . Select Confirm (√). The drawing name and its file extension become the filename of the drawing._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The drawing is added to the active project. — OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Create process.February 2003 A file extension of .dgn is automatically appended to the drawing name if you do not enter your own file extension. 4.

The system invokes the graphics environment. 3. Select Design from the Design Menu. Design Steps 1. 4. EERWAY Environment 63 . Select Confirm (√). Select the drawing name from the listing area._ _______________ Design This option accesses the graphics environment. 2. taking you into a specified existing design file. — OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Design process.

These processes allow you to manipulate drawings and the project database. page 331 for more information about individual processes.dat file in win32app\eerway\data.February 2003 Process This option accesses all available EERWAY processes. See Raceway Processes. The screen above lists the processes currently delivered with the product. Overview This section provides general information about running all processes._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The system manager can add or delete processes from the list by modifying the process. 64 .

you cannot perform other functions within the same window in which you are running the process. For example. The ? character can also be used as a wild card for a single character. An asterisk (*). if you enter a*. You can override default values by keying in your own information. Operating Modes The Processing toggle allows you to select the operating mode for a process. when placed in the Enter Drawing Name input field. A process in Foreground runs immediately. The default mode is Foreground. EERWAY Environment 65 . You must key in a time and/or date when you want the process to start. is a wild card character which can be used to list a subset of your drawings. you regain control immediately. A process in Batch does not run until the time you specify. all drawings beginning with the letter "a" will be displayed. Process You must key in any information not already shown as defaults. All drawings are displayed on the screen scrolling area. A process in Background runs immediately. an input screen displays. but you can toggle between that option and the Background and Batch options. After providing this information. and you regain control immediately._ _______________ When you enter a specific process. In other words. 4. select Confirm (√) to execute the process. and you do not regain control until the process is finished. Once you have entered all necessary information.

MIDNIGHT.and two-digit numbers are taken to be hours._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . an input box displays. the system assumes it should run the job TODAY if the specified hour is greater than the current hour. One. The time can be entered as 1. a 24-hour clock (military time) is understood. 2. If you input no date. Select Confirm to invoke the input form for the specified process. Select Process from the Design Menu. The time can also be specified as two numbers separated by a colon (hour:minute). The system recognizes the words TODAY and TOMORROW. otherwise. — OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Process option. Optionally. NOW and NEXT. The system also recognizes the names NOON. 3. The suffix AM or PM may be appended. allowing you to enter the time and date when you want the process to run. you can specify a date using either a month name followed by a day number or a day of the week (fully spelled or abbreviated to three characters).February 2003 Entering Time in Batch Mode If you select Batch mode. 66 . 2 or 4 digits. Legitimate commands include: 0815am Jan 24 8:15am Jan 24 Now + 1 day 5pm Friday Steps 1. and TOMORROW if the specified hour is less than the current hour. four digits to be hours and minutes. Select a process from the listing area.

EDEN Eden is a high-level symbol definition language (modeled after the FORTRAN programming language) that allows you to design your own symbols for straights. page 347 ._ _______________ EDEN The following screen displays the Eden options delivered with this version of EE Raceway. 4. and special parts. The system manager can add or delete displayed options by modifying the eden. For detailed information about individual Eden options. EERWAY Environment 67 . This section provides general information about running all Eden program options. fittings. see Eden Processes.dat file.

Once you have entered all necessary information. and you cannot regain control until the process is finished. An option in foreground mode runs immediately. background. You must key in a time and/or date when you want the process to start. If necessary. 68 . select Confirm (√) to begin the option process. A process in batch does not run until the time you specify. After providing this information._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you can override the default values that already display. These selections are the three methods of running an option: foreground. and you regain control immediately. The default mode is foreground. Operating Modes A box on the right side of the menu allows you to select the operating mode for the selected option. an input screen displays.February 2003 When you select an option from the Eden menu (and confirm the selection using Confirm (√)). An option in background mode runs immediately. and batch. The circular arrow on the right indicates that this box leads to other selections. You must key in all information not displayed as defaults. and key in your own information. In other words. you regain control immediately. you cannot perform other functions within the window in which the option is running.

Legitimate commands include: 0815am Jan 24 8:15am Jan 24 Now + 1 day 5pm Friday 4. the system assumes that if the specified hour is greater than the current hour. The special names NOON. The time can also be specified as two numbers separated by a colon (hour:minute). an input box displays. and if the specified hour is less than the current hour. EDEN The time can be entered as 1. it will run the job TOMORROW. You can specify an optional date in the form of either a month name followed by a day number or a day of the week (spelled in its entirety or abbreviated to three characters). One. a 24-hour clock (military time) is understood. it will run the job TODAY._ _______________ Entering Time in Batch Mode If you select batch mode. NOW and NEXT are also recognized. allowing you to enter the time and date when you want the option to begin processing. MIDNIGHT. The suffix AM or PM may be appended. otherwise. 2 or 4 digits. If you input no date.and two-digit numbers are taken to be hours. EERWAY Environment 69 . The system accepts the words TODAY and TOMORROW. four digits to be hours and minutes.

The system manager can change the names of the reports that display in the listing area and can add additional reports by editing the report. You must load the project database before running any reports. 70 .dat file (win32app\eerway\data)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Overview This section contains general information about running all EE Raceway reports. page 545 for more detailed information about individual reports. See Reports.February 2003 Report This option accesses the standard EERWAY reports. These reports report on the project and reference databases.

Select Report from the Design Menu. 3. the new file will overwrite that file. (No file extension is automatically appended to the name you key in. You should give each report you want to save a unique name. 4. Steps 1. allowing you to enter all input necessary to run the report. select the output file box and key in a new name. an input screen displays. you should name the output files yourself. If a new output file has the same name as an existing file. 2. You can change the name of the output file or error file. To change the output filename. EERWAY Environment 71 . Report Key in any information that is not supplied by default._ _______________ When you process a report. Select Confirm (√) to invoke the input form for the specified process.) If you want to save reports throughout a project. — OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Report option. Select a report from the listing area.

For instance.February 2003 A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume When running a Bill of Materials by Volume report. These low and high ranges define a cubic volume from which the report is pulled. you are required to define a low and high range in PDS coordinates. and a southing coordinate of 3000 should be keyed in as a value of -3000 in the northing direction. a westing coordinate of 100 should be keyed in as a value of -100 in the easting direction. The coordinate values need to be in subunits and entered in the form field with a space between the coordinates: easting northing elevation For example. 72 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can find the coordinates you want to use by using the active point coordinate display on the precision input form. Any Raceway component extending outside the clipping volume defined by the High and Low Range Coordinates will not be included in the report output. 234 532 34 It should be understood that westing and southing coordinates must be the negative of their opposite directional coordinate.

These rule checks are reports that identify violations of certain design rules by working on the project database. For more detailed information about each rule check.dat file in win32app\eerway\data. EERWAY Environment 73 . You must load the project database before running any rule checks. The system manager can change the names of the reports or add new reports to the listing area by editing the rule_chk. see Reports. 4. page 545 . Overview This section contains general information about running all EERWAY rule checks._ _______________ Rule Checks Rule Checks This option accesses the standard EERWAY Rule Checks.

or change that information according to your specifications._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Steps 1. the new file will destroy the previously created file. If a new output file has the same name as another file created previously. Select Confirm (√) to invoke the input form for the specified process. 2. If you want to save reports throughout a project.February 2003 When you process a rule check. you should name the output files yourself. Select a rule check report from the listing area. The name of the rule check report displays at the top. 3. Select Rule from the Design Menu. You should give each report that you want to save a unique name. an input screen displays. Accept the default information that displays in the input fields. — OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Rule option. 74 .

4. 75 . When you select Utilities from the Design Menu. All manipulations are performed on those files residing in the current project’s directories. EERWAY Environment Files in the current project sub-directories will be listed in four columns._ _______________ Utilities Utilities This option manipulates files within a project. the Drawing Utility Menu displays. Each column will list a different subdirectory.

rpt) . Commands The commands on the Drawing Utility Menu are described in their respective sections later in this chapter. Rename — Renames a file.All report files generated by standard reports. Restore — Restores an archived file from a network node or floppy disk. Enter necessary form information for the active option.All files output by Raceway processes. 2. Receive — Receives a file from a network node. (<project_name>/eerway/dgn) Report (. (<project_name>/eerway/chk) Message (.All report files generated by rule checks reports._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Steps 1. Delete — Deletes a file (mark for purging). (<project_name>/eerway/rpt) Rule (. 76 . Select the desired option from the Drawing Utility Menu. Select Utilities from the Design Menu.February 2003 Drawing (. Copy — Copies a file. or plotter.dgn) . Output — Outputs a file to a printer.tmp) . and error files generated by standard reports and rule check reports. Archive — Archives a file to a network node or floppy disk.All drawings. Undelete — Undeletes a file (unmark for purging).chk) . screen. 3. Purge — Purges (permanently deletes) a file. Send — Sends a file to a network node. (<project_name>/eerway/tmp) Utilities options will operate on all of the above file types. and then select the file(s) on which to perform that option.

_ _______________ 4. Utilities 4. — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the active option. EERWAY Environment 77 . Select Confirm (√) to accept the settings and execute the active option.

rpt. Field Descriptions Copy file from — This field displays the name of the file to be copied.February 2003 Copy This option copies an existing file to another file. and so forth) to the new file. or key in the name of the file to be copied. Copy file to — This field displays the name that the copy (destination) file will be called._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 78 . You must specify a unique filename for the destination file.dgn. elect a file from the list. key in a unique destination file name into this field. . Copy DOES NOT automatically append a file extension (.

EERWAY Environment 79 . Note that files you delete with this option take up storage space._ _______________ Delete Delete This option removes your access to a specified file. you must select the Purge option. To physically remove the file from the workstation. have access returned to them) until you actively Purge them. 4. but can be undeleted (that is.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Undelete This option returns your access to a file that you removed using Delete. Once you have removed files using Purge. you cannot undelete them with this option. 80 .

_ _______________ Purge This option permanently removes all the files you marked for deletion using the Delete option. you can select specific files from the list by placing a data point on them. Once you Purge a file. To de-select a selected file. Purge Field Descriptions Purge Files toggle — This toggle allows you to choose between purging ALL files that have been deleted. or no files at all. selected files that have been deleted. EERWAY Environment 81 . you cannot recover it. When the toggle is set to Select files to purge. 4. place a data point on it.

February 2003 Rename This option changes the name of an existing file.dgn.rpt. 82 . Field Descriptions Rename file from — This field displays the current filename. It does not automatically append a file extension (. You can select the file from the list. and so forth) to the new filename._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Rename file to — Key in the name that you desire to rename the current file. or key the name into this field. .

or key in the appropriate name. turn on the IGDS toggle. Doing so will store the file in contiguous blocks on the VAX. Otherwise. depending on the setting of the Password Echo toggle. Send Field Descriptions Password Echo toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the password of the remote machine is visible or hidden upon keyin to the password field. test1. EERWAY Environment 83 . You can either select the desired file from the list. the setting should be No IGDS. Remote path directory — This field expects the path on the remote machine to which you want to send the file. Username on remote node — This field expects the username on the receiving machine. IGDS/No IGDS toggle — This toggle should be set to the IGDS setting when sending to a VAX system._ _______________ Send This option copies a file to a network node. If you are sending a design file to a VAX. File name — This field reflects the name of the file to be sent. Be sure to include the entire filename including the extension (for example. 4.dgn). Password — This field expects the password that corresponds with given username on the receiving machine. The password may or may not be visible in the field. TCP/XNS Protocol toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the transfer uses the TCP or XNS protocol to communicate between machines. Remote node name/address — This field expects the node name or address of the machine to which you want to send the file.

or key in the appropriate name. The password may or may not be visible in the field. Username on remote node — This field expects the username on the sending machine. File name — This field reflects the name of the file to be received. Remote path directory — This field expects the path on the remote machine from which you want to receive the file. Be sure to specify the complete filename. Remote node name/address — This field expects the node name or address of the machine from which you want to receive the file.February 2003 Receive This option copies a file from a network node. specify the local path to the file. Also. Receive will overwrite any file having the same name as the file you are receiving. You can either select the desired file from the list. depending on the setting of the Password Echo toggle. TCP/XNS Protocol toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the transfer uses the TCP or XNS protocol to communicate between machines. 84 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Field Descriptions Password Echo toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the password of the sending machine is visible or hidden upon keyin to the password field. Password — This field expects the password that corresponds with given username on the sending machine. otherwise the file will be placed in the <project_name>/eerway directory. including its extension.

chk. EERWAY Environment 85 . Receive 4. tmp) — This field expects the path to the desired location of the file being received._ _______________ Local path (dgn. rpt.

Remote node name/address — This field expects the node name or address of the machine to which you want to archive the file. Password — This field expects the password that corresponds with given username on the remote machine. Network/Floppy toggle — The setting of this toggle determines if the file will be archived over a network or to a floppy disk._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . depending on the setting of the Password Echo toggle. Toggle between Network and Floppy by selecting the toggle button. 86 . Username on remote node — This field expects the username on the receiving machine. Remote path directory — This field expects the path on the remote machine to which you want to archive the file.February 2003 Archive This option creates a backup copy of a file to a network node or to a floppy disk. For more information about the fields that display on the form when Network is active. page 46 . Archive file name — This field expects you to key in the desired name of the archive file. The password may or may not be visible in the field. Field Descriptions Password Echo toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the password of the archiving machine is visible or hidden upon keyin to the password field. TCP/XNS Protocol toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the communication between machines uses the TCP or XNS protocol. see the description of Archive in Archive.

Restore Field Descriptions 4. EERWAY Environment Password Echo toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the password of the archiving machine is visible or hidden upon keyin to the password field. Use the Network/Floppy toggle to select between the two options. For more information about the fields that display on the form when Network is active. Archive file name — This field expects you to key in the name of the archive file to be restored. TCP/XNS Protocol toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the communication between machines uses the TCP or XNS protocol. Network/Floppy toggle — The setting of this toggle determines if the file will be archived over a network or to a floppy disk._ _______________ Restore This option copies a backup file from a network node or floppy disk. Remote path directory — This field expects the path on the remote machine from which you want to restore the archive file. 87 . see the description of Restore in Restore. page 48 . Remote node name/address — This field expects the node name or address of the machine from which you want to restore the archive file. This option will overwrite any file having the same name as the file you are restoring.

The password may or may not be visible in the field. 88 . depending on the setting of the Password Echo toggle._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Password — This field expects the password that corresponds with given username on the remote machine.February 2003 Username on remote node — This field expects the username on the remote machine.

or user programs may be added to support specific output requirements. plotter. NQS options. 89 . Local commands. or select it from the list. or laser printer. EERWAY Environment File name — Key in the name of the file to be submitted to the output process. Output Destination List — Select the appropriate output device._ _______________ Output This option sends files to the printer. Field Descriptions 4.dat) controls the available output options. IPLOT commands. the selection displayed at the top of the list is the default selection. for example – are not allowed. If you do not specify an output destination. screen. Output An external data file delivered with the environment (win32app\eenuc\data\print. The system manager may modify this file to add desired options. Invalid operations – sending a drawing to the printer.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 90 .

the panel menu is located on the right side of your screen and the bar menu is at the top. see Document Conventions in the Preface to this document. EE Graphics Interface Elements EE Graphics Interface Elements This chapter describes the graphics environment you will encounter while working in a design file. By default. EERWAY Graphics 91 . This chapter contains the following sections: Start-Up Sequence Screen Display EERWAY Command Menu Bar Palettes in the EERWAY Graphics Environment Identifying Elements Working Units and Precision Key-ins All of the EERWAY graphics commands are menu-driven. 5. You can also invoke commands by keying in the command name and pressing <Return>. or reset button <R> in reference to the cursor or mouse. You will use the panel menus and the bar menu to select the commands. If you are not familiar with the following terms: command button <C>. data button <D>. This chapter contains more detailed information about using menus._ _______________ 5. It also documents the on-line Help system and provides other general information needed to work in a design file.

February 2003 Start-up Sequence When you enter an EERWAY design file (see Design. page 63 ). the system goes through the following processes: Displays all active design file views. Displays a command window at the bottom of the screen._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 92 . Initializes RIS with the reference schema.

cmds file.displays a list of window actions. MicroStation Command Window . (Check with your system manager if you have a customized rway. EERWAY Graphics — Window Menu Button ._ _______________ Screen Display The screen display you will see when you enter a design file is described below. When the correct item highlights. release the data button. press and hold the data button and move the cursor through the list. To select an action.contains the following six fields that display system messages and your inputs from the keyboard: 5. Only the Lower and Sink actions are available from the command window. Screen Display If you have modified the default application menu configuration file. 93 .) 1. your screen display may be different. as described in the previous section.

— Current Command Field . 4.displays elements as you place them. The number and name of each view appears in the window title area. 94 .displays startup file information and product name. Windows . Command Menu Bar . 2. — Command Status Field . — System Prompt Field ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .contains the primary types of commands used in the EERWAY graphic environment.displays the name of the current active command. Select the type of command you want to use with a data point to see the pull-down menu of available commands or command palettes. 3. — Key-In Field . Working Area .provide ways for you to change the way you look at your design. All your design work occurs in the screen working area.displays a system prompt that directs you through a command.moves the command window below views and other windows of its own type.February 2003 — Sink Box .displays alphanumeric values you enter from the keyboard.

Minimize Button .appear when the cursor is placed over the window border.moves a window around the workspace.deletes a window. Maximize Button . Close . Resize Borders . the window is restored to its previous size and location. Minimize .appear when the cursor is placed at the top or bottom border. Lower . Vertical Arrows .appear when the cursor is placed at the left or right border.displays a list of window actions. press and hold the data button and move the cursor through the list. the window is restored to its previous size and location.enlarges a window to its maximum size. Size .changes the height and width of the window in the direction indicated by the pointer. If you select the maximize button on a window that is already at its maximum size.appear when the cursor is placed at the border corners.provide ways to move and resize windows. Press and hold the data button to change both the height and width of the window without changing the position of the opposite corner. Diagonal Arrows . Move . EERWAY Graphics 95 . Window Menu Button . Double-clicking on this button deletes the window. Press and hold the data button to change the width of the window as you move the cursor. Horizontal Arrows . Press and hold the data button to change the height of the window as you move the cursor. Press and hold the data button to move the window.provide ways to manipulate windows.moves a window to the bottom of the window hierarchy._ _______________ Window Manipulation Buttons . If you select this entry on a window that is already at its maximum size. When the correct item highlights. Maximize .enlarges a window to its maximum size. release the data button. Move Arrows .collapses a window. Screen Display 5. Restore . To select an action from the menu.restores a minimized or maximized window to the previous size and location.collapses a window.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Integrated Commands . and exits the graphics environment to return control to the EE Raceway menu interface.Invokes the Bar Commands palette.Invokes the Integrated Commands menu.Removes all palettes that have been invoked. Each keyword leads to a pull-down menu that contains commands for various EERWAY tasks. Using the Command Menu Bar The command menu bar is a logical menu. Compress Design . which allows access to the following commands: EERWAY Palette .Invokes the EERWAY command palette. Exit . which allows access to the most frequently-used MicroStation commands. For instance. Bar Commands . place the cursor over the button and press <D>.Invokes MicroStation’s Compress Design command.February 2003 EERWAY Command Menu Bar The EERWAY command menu bar appears near the top of the MicroStation command window. Each keyword on the command menu bar allows access to a menu of options relating to that keyword. To select a keyword. 96 . you can also access command palettes from these pull-down menus. selecting File initializes the File pull-down menu. when applicable.Executes the File Design command. Remove Palettes .

then selecting EERWAY from the resulting menu._ _______________ Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment This section presents the palettes that are used in the EE Raceway graphics environment. You should become familiar with the name and functionality of each command on each palette. Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment EERWAY This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. Each command is described in full in later sections of this text. Next to each icon is the name of the form or command it represents. then selecting Integrated Commands > Palette from the resulting menu. 5. This section presents the palettes in the order that they are accessible if you look at each menu going from left to right across the EERWAY command menu bar on the MicroStation command window. EERWAY Graphics 97 . Integrated Commands This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. Palettes are groups of commands that are accessible from the EERWAY command menu bar on the MicroStation command window.

Modify Element This palette is activated by selecting Modify Element from the EERWAY palette. This palette can also be activated by selecting Modify from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Bar Commands from the resulting menu. 98 .February 2003 Bar Commands This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. This palette contains the MicroStation commands as discussed in the MicroStation documentation. then selecting Modify Element Commands from Modify menu. or it can be activated by selecting Modify Element from the Modify palette as shown later in this section._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . then selecting Palette.

Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment Modify This palette is activated by selecting Design from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Palette from the resulting menu._ _______________ Design This palette is activated by selecting Design from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Modify from the resulting menu. EERWAY Graphics 99 . 5.

then selecting Palette. 100 . then selecting Palette. You can also activate this palette by selecting Modify from the MicroStation command window.February 2003 Modify Group This palette is activated by selecting Modify Group from the Modify Palette._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . then selecting Modify Group Commands. Setup Commands This palette is activated by selecting Setup from the MicroStation command window.

_ _______________ Model Commands This palette is activated by selecting Model Commands from the Setup Commands palette. EERWAY Graphics 101 . 5. Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment Runtime Setup This palette is activated by selecting Runtime from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Palette.

102 . then selecting Palette._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Utilities This palette is activated by selecting Utilities from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Palette. Database This palette is activated by selecting Database from the MicroStation command window.

or shape you place is called an element. If there is more than one element in the location you want to identify. place a data point on it. To identify an element. press <D> again to accept the element. If the wrong element highlights. The system highlights the element. Several of the command descriptions include steps where the accepting data point also serves as the placement point. press <R> to reject that element._ _______________ Identifying Elements Any structure. When you are moving an element. the wrong element may highlight. line. The system then highlights another element. In many commands. For example. the point you place to accept the element becomes the point from which the element is moved. one data point can serve more than one function in the same command. EERWAY Graphics 103 . If the correct element highlights. you must identify an element to perform certain manipulations. Identifying Elements 5.

1 foot) SU — Subunit. and Positional Units. a division of a master unit (1 inch) PU — Positional Unit. are established based on the project type (metric or English). Precision key-ins let you accurately place elements by using a working units system based on Master Units. we recommend that you use these default settings: Unit 1 Master Unit 1 Subunit 1 Positional Unit Imperial 1 foot = 12 subunits 1 inch = 8000 positional units 1/8000 inch Metric 1 meter = 1000 subunits 1 millimeter = 10 positional units 1/10 millimeter While these are the suggested working units for delivered cell libraries. Working Units in MU:SU:PU For Intergraph electrical designs. EERWAY lets you key in values (called precision key-ins) as well as place data points. called MU:SU:PU.February 2003 Working Units and Precision Key-ins When you place elements or manipulate them. if a user-created cell library is being used. you are not limited to using only them. If using this cell library._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . the working units of measurement. Therefore. The following explains the format of MU:SU:PU. You may set your working units to any desired value. also known as MU:SU:PU. The working unit dictates the degree of accuracy for placement of elements in a drawing and determines the scale relationship of elements in the design.) 104 . MU — Master (main) Unit of measurement (for example. the smallest degree of accuracy that is possible in the design file (a fraction of an inch) In EERWAY. Subunits. but placing data points does not always provide the accuracy you need. predetermined values for working units in imperial and metric projects were used to create the delivered cell library. Working units are coordinate units corresponding to the position and definition of a point in the design file. you can often use data points. You must understand the MU:SU:PU system before you can use precision key-ins. (See your system manager for more information about the working units settings used at your location.

_ _______________ Below are some examples of values and how to key them in: 1/2 foot = :6 (6 subunits) = . or you can specify the delta values in X and Y to place another point. For example. key in the distance in MU:SU:PU working units and the direction in degrees that you want the point to be placed. For example. You specify a distance and an angle from the last point placed. The new point is placed relative to the previous point. if you want to place a point 18 inches over and 18 inches up. EERWAY Graphics XY= (absolute coordinates) To place a precision point.5 (1/2 master unit) 1/2 inch = :. The new point is placed relative to the previous point. DL= (delta coordinates) To place a precision point. 105 . 5.0.5 (1-1/2 master units) = 1:6 (1 master unit and 6 subunits) Working Units and Precision Key-ins Precision Key-ins Precision key-ins let you place points accurately to create elements and shapes with exact lengths and areas. Key-ins are entered through the alphanumeric keyboard. key in DI=0:10. direction) To place a precision point. as described below: DI=(distance. key in DX=1:6. if you want to place a point 10 inches directly to the right. There are several ways to key in precision points. key in the delta x and delta y in MU:SU:PU that you want the point to be placed.1:6.5 (1/2 subunit) = :1/2 (1/2 subunit) = :0:4000 (4000 positional units) 18 inches = 1. key in its absolute x and y coordinates.

February 2003 106 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Workflow and Procedures Workflow and Procedures 6. 107 . this section will refer you to other documentation wherever possible. creating a raceway model. Preparation for the application or system manager is described in System/Application Manager Information. page 415 . This section covers the following topics: The drawing process EE Databases Reports Interference detection Because the steps of the workflow are covered in detail elsewhere in the document. This includes setting up the design file. Workflow This section describes the overall workflow of EE Raceway Modeling software._ _______________ 6. as an operator would typically use it. and running reports and processes on the file.

Typically you begin drawing raceways with one-line elements (one-lines). The following steps comprise the drawing process and this section: System manager setup Drawing setup Place one-lines Propagation 108 . it is important to describe basic raceway concepts. These one-line drawings are the centerlines of raceways and through propagation become the threedimensional shapes (three-lines) that occupy the volume of the raceways. On the right are the same elements after propagation. EE Raceway Modeling software allows you to place one-lines and then propagate them into three-lines or raceways. The figure below displays one-line elements on the left. This section is divided into individual descriptions of the steps involved in the drawing process._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you should perform these steps in the order in which they are described.February 2003 The Drawing Process Before outlining a typical workflow for drawing a raceway. In general.

_ _______________ System Manager Setup System Manager Setup 6. using the Set Raceway Defaults command (see the section entitled Setup Commands for information about this command). Workflow Before you begin an individual drawing. page 507 for information about adding specifications to the database). specifications. For additional system manager information. for example). and vendor names) and the desired systems and one-line types to the reference database (see Specification. You can review the default and parameters settings while in the design file. 109 . see the appendix entitled System/Application Manager Information and the section entitled Installation Instructions. Your system manager should also tell you the project name and design filename. The system manager must also add vendor catalogs (parts. the system/application manager should determine the defaults and parameters that will affect your project and drawing (tray sizes.

Use the Define System command to define your system(s) for the design file from the reference database. page 260 for more information. you must have at least one one-line type defined and active in order to draw raceways. If you need systems not available to you. Then. page 262 for more information. You can change the active one-line type throughout your drawing session. See Define One-Line Type. use the Set Active One-Line Type command to specify the one-line type you want active as you are drawing raceways. You must have at least one raceway system defined and active in the design file. Use the Set Symbology Control command to define the matrix of systems and one-line types for the design’s symbology control. See Set Active System. ask the system manager to add them to reference database. Set Symbology Once you have defined your systems and one-line types. See Set Symbology Control. Use the Symbology Control command to review and modify the symbology settings for those systems and one-line types you selected with the Set Symbology Control command. You can change the active system throughout the design session. Then.February 2003 Drawing Setup Define Systems and Set Active Systems Every one-line type is part of a system that reflects the purpose of the raceway. page 264 for more information. See Define System. page 258 for more information. use the Set Active System command to specify the system you want active as you are drawing raceways. ask the system manager to add them to the reference database. See Set Active One-Line Type. The command displays all systems available in the reference database. See Symbology Control. page 295 for more information. page 294 for more information. If you need one-line types that are not available to you. Doing so involves two commands: Set Symbology Control and Symbology Control. 110 . Define One-Line Type and Set Active One-Line Type Just as you must define systems from the reference database in the design file and set an active system. The command displays all one-line types available in the reference database. you can change the default symbology settings for them. Use the Define One-Line Type command to define one-line types for the design file from the reference database._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can also review and modify the default symbology settings with this command.

page 297 for more information. you should review the active propagation parameters. 111 . Workflow Each one-line type has its own set of parameters or catalogs. page 289 for more information. and whether or not certain commands will automatically propagate one-lines. See Set Active One-Line Type Parameters. what one-lines will be propagated. you are also placing the data associated with that one-line type in the reference database into the design file for loading later into the project database. These parameters determine how the system defines fittings. Set Propagation Parameters Before you propagate one-lines in your model. To review and modify these parameters you will use the Propagation Setup command. See Propagation Setup. To review and modify this data you will use the Set Active One-Line Parameters command. As you place one-line segments._ _______________ Set Active Parameters Drawing Setup 6.

initially in phantom mode. a phantom run disappears.February 2003 Place One-Line You will place all one-lines. using the Place One-Line or Place Manual Fitting commands. A run is a group of connected segments that do not branch or change specification. and Precision Input Form. page 147 . page 129 for a description of the Place One-Line command. page 132 . See Place One-Line. first place one-line segments (centerlines) in connected groups called runs. The following figure displays the parts of a run. placing tentative segments. When you accept the run. page 119 for more information on these commands. regardless of type. To draw a raceway. 112 . and the Precision Input form. you can continue placing one-lines. If not accepted. An accepted run has a Raceway Connect Point (RCP) attached to each end of the run. Place Manual Fitting. it becomes a permanent part of the design file (unless you later choose to delete it)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Each run has a cross section on each end depicting the type of raceway and its orientation (for trays and wireways). until you accept them with the Accept option on the Precision Input form. Once you place and accept a run. See Design Commands.

all information necessary for sketching the three-line is stored in the design file. one-lines are propagated into three-lines based on the specification information. Workflow Sketch and Eden Modes There are two modes of propagation in EE Raceway: Sketch and Eden. see Propagate Element. and light fixtures) must be placed manually. Sketch: In sketch mode. use the Propagate command. The default fitting radius determines the radius of any bends between raceway segments. page 194 for more information. where two tray sections come together at a 90 degree angle. so reference database access is not required. the specification dimensions and part information are sent to the Eden symbol library where the symbol is generated. When you propagate a one-line segment into a three-line element. To convert this onedimensional view of the raceway to a three-dimensional view. extension. This may be particularly useful for later interference detection. The system analyzes the environment in which the one-lines meet when determining the type of fitting to place. If you require mitred elbows for production. propagation will automatically sketch a 90 degree elbow. the three-dimensional elements are drawn in-line without accessing the Eden symbol library. see Place Manual Fitting. 113 . page 147 for more information. you can define the fitting through Eden. Propagation 6. First. the three-line element’s shape is determined by the one-line type (tray. you may need to place fittings manually when dealing with tight spaces. one-lines are propagated into three-lines based on the cross section and the radius. All special fittings (conduit bodies. pullboxes. Once found. While this mode of propagation is considerably slower than sketch. for example). EE Raceway provides rounded tray elbows. Manual Fitting Placement You can place fittings manually in the design file using the Place Manual Fitting command. Eden propagation allows you greater detail and accuracy in three-dimensional fitting design. Eden: In Eden mode. or fitting-to-fitting placement. You can use manual placement in situations where placing a sparse model will not be sufficient or is not possible. Second. For example. For example. For example._ _______________ Propagation A one-dimensional raceway is composed of one-line segments. It then searches the database for the appropriate part for the proper specification. and transition information stored for the one-lines and RCPs. Sketch propagation places the sketched fittings based on the environment in which the onelines come together. unusual angles. and the width and height (or diameter) of a segment are determined by the active parameters when you placed the one-line. This radius is used to propagate fittings between straight segments. The length of each three-line segment is determined by the length of the one-line. it allows you to define the shape of your fittings. Sketch is the quicker mode of propagation for two reasons.

You can turn off the one-line levels for display and plotting purposes. Any repropagation of such fittings will yield the same Eden symbols as well. and specification. After propagation (whether performed in sketch or Eden mode). Seamless Tubing Representations In the following three-line representation of a bent conduit. You have the option of hiding these circles by turning off level 63. thus displaying a more realistic graphical representation of seamless tubing. select the Highlight Propagation Errors command. definition. the corners that do not have an RCP display circles that make the bent conduit look like an elbow. see Error Messages. To highlight errors that occur during propagation. regardless of the active propagation mode. This ensures that fittings will always be repropagated with the same orientation. For a detailed description of these error messages. In order for the circles to be placed on level 63. see Highlight Propagation Errors. the one-line elements remain in the design file.February 2003 Fittings placed through the manual placement command are Eden symbols. page 377 . page 314 . the propagation mode must be set to sketch._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 114 .

The EE Raceway reference database provides a simple method for generating this repetitious annotation. three-lines. (The system manager may customize these values. The reference database automatically supplies default annotation values for the project database. (The project database can be created any time before the Load Database process is run._ _______________ Databases A basic understanding of EE Raceway databases is necessary for efficient use of the software. one-lines. Workflow Reference Database A large amount of annotation is used in raceway models. one-lines. a database is a collection of information about raceway models. Project Database The project database contains information about all the particular elements (RCPs. For title blocks. Databases 6. The form that displays with this command contains the reference database key value in a separate field below the annotation input area (see Annotate Element. 115 . The override key gives you the ability to add to and/or modify default database information for RCPs. The default annotation information. can now be overridden by specifying another valid database key. three-lines. There are two databases that can be associated with your drawing: the reference database and the project database. you can report on this information using the reports available through the EE Raceway Drawing Menu. Once the project database is loaded. You can both key in override values and display different annotation information.) You can also add this information to this drawing using the Annotate Element command. and title blocks. and title blocks. The Raceway parameter information is supplied from the vendor catalog in the reference database.) It will contain information about a particular drawing only after the Load Database process has been run on that drawing. supplied by the reference database. one-lines. The default annotation can be associated with RCPs. Much of this annotation is repetitious and not unique to any element in the drawing. the default can be unique for each title block cell. using the annotation forms. The Annotate Element command is used to place and modify the override key linkages. three-lines. The override key acts as a pointer to a row of data in the EE reference database. page 178 ). title blocks) in each drawing in a project. Override Keys EE Raceway supports EE reference database override keys. For the purposes of this discussion. The project database is normally created when the project is created.

etc. The database is the file where the non-graphic drawing data (onelines._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and also identifies which users will be allowed to use the database.) are stored.February 2003 With the addition of RIS to the EE Raceway product. three-lines. 116 . A schema is a RIS-specific file that contains a description of the columns and tables of the database. a distinction is now made between schema and database.

_ _______________ Reports Reports 6. page 545 . Workflow Currently. there are several reports delivered with the EE Raceway Modeling software: four standard reports and a rule check report. See Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment. You can access these reports from the EE Raceway Drawing Menu by selecting the Report option. These reports run on the project and reference databases. For more detailed information about the individual reports. see Reports. 117 . page 59 for general information about running reports.

However. the EE Raceway Modeling product creates an envelope file for input to the Plant Design interference detection task._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . See Create Interference Envelope (default name).February 2003 Interference Detection Interference detection is processed through Plant Design software. This process reads the design file and then creates a data file that contains envelopes (spaces in which valid raceway shapes reside). 118 . page 342 for more information about the Interference Detection process. You will use the Interference Detection Envelope File Creation process to create the envelope file needed for interference detection.

Precision Input Form 7. 119 . the form displays the active command name as its title. Several designs of the precision input form are delivered with EE Raceway. a precision input form displays and remains in view as long as you are working in the command. The precision input form is used to: Accept/reject/cancel in response to the active prompt. Specify a series of coordinate changes to move. For each command. This section describes each button and field available on the precision input form. Precision Input Identify an absolute point Specify a delta coordinate to move. When you select a command from the menu._ _______________ 7. page 415 for instructions about changing the form design. Precision Input Form This chapter describes all the options available on the precision input form and how to use them. Specify an absolute coordinate to move. See System/Application Manager Information. Since you will use the form with a number of commands. refer to the individual command sections for a description of operating sequences.

It also accepts any information you have entered through the form.February 2003 View This field displays the active working view. Reject Enters a negative response to an active prompt. To change the displayed working view. Pressing <D> in a view for the placement of points simultaneously overrides the active view setting. Accept Enters an affirmative response to an active prompt. In most cases. select the field._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . It can also reset a current command action by one step. while collapsing the precision input form. and prompts the system to continue to the next step. The displayed view determines the orientation of the elements you are placing in the design. Accept performs the same actions as pressing <D>. Cancel Terminates the active command. Maximize/Minimize Enlarges the form to its maximum size or reduces the form to its normal size. You can exit a command at any point by selecting Cancel. and scroll through the available views until the appropriate view displays. The orientation of elements is most visible when placing annotation. Reject performs the same actions as pressing <R>. 120 . In most cases.

Using Move. you move to a point that is at coordinate 20 (in master units) in the north direction. you move to a point that is 20 master units north of the original active point. Display Fields Displays some of your active parameters and general messages. 7. For example. The bottom field displays various precision input messages. The coordinates display in the following order: East/West North/South Elevation The following two options are only available when placing ductbanks. Precision Input The Move To (absolute move) toggle allows you to place an active point at an exact coordinate. by selecting North and keying in 20. Using Move To. Both options accept key-in for distance. The middle field displays the active one-line type specification description. A set of directional buttons accompanies each option. The top field displays the active system and one-line type. you will select a directional button and key in an absolute coordinate. you will select a directional button and key in a distance to place a point. while only Move To accepts a data point for input. and direction. For example. by selecting North and keying in 20._ _______________ Move/Move To Toggle Used to specify a delta distance or absolute coordinates. 121 . Precision Input Form The Move (delta move) toggle allows you to specify the distance and direction to place an active point. Active Point Coordinates Display The Active Point Coordinates display shows the coordinates of the active segment point.

122 . you can build duct bank elements similar to the one shown below. Height and Width These fields are used to define a ductbank element’s dimensions during placement.February 2003 Justification Point The justification point defines the location of the three-line duct bank graphic in relation to the one-line graphic._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Three justification points are available: lower left. lower center. and lower right. By using the justification point and the height and width option described below.

Selecting the Reject button discontinues the command and returns you to the last point you placed before entering Construct Point mode. and set the toggle to Any Point if it is not already active. The command highlights one of the segment’s endpoints. 3. When you identify a one-line. the option calculates and then enters its midpoint. but they are only tentative until you select the Accept button. If you do select Accept._ _______________ Construct Point This command specifies a series of movement options before accepting the shortest distance to the displayed location. 7. When you select the command. and return to the previous step to identify another one-line. Precision Input 123 . 2. Activate the Any Point option. — OR — Press <R> to reject the segment. The operating sequence for the Any Point option is: 1. In Construct Point mode. you can route segments nonorthogonally. You may place as many points as you want in this mode. The Any Point option allows you to identify either end of a segment and then specify a distance along that segment at which to place a point. The command highlights the identified segment. Select the Midpoint/Any Point command on the precision input form. a toggle displays with the following options: The Midpoint option finds the midpoint of a specified one-line. only the coordinates of the last point you placed are accepted by the command. Raceway one line Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the one-line segment. Construct Point Midpoint/Any Point on Segment This command identifies a midpoint or any point on a segment at which to place an active point. Identify Raceway One-Line Segment Identify the one-line segment on which you intend to place a point.

— OR — Press <R> to return to Step 2. the command still calculates the point from the endpoint. — OR — Select Accept to enter the active endpoint. The command calculates the distance from the endpoint and then enters the point on the segment. — OR — Press <R> to highlight the other segment endpoint. 5. moving in the direction of the segment. and select Accept. If the specified distance exceeds the length of the one-line. and then press <D> to accept it as the reference point. Accept/reject end point Press <D> to accept the highlighted endpoint as your reference point. 124 .February 2003 4. Specify Distance Key in the distance from the reference point to the point you want to enter._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

The distance you key in displays in master units at the bottom of the form. or any distance you key in. Precision Input 125 . When you select the Distance button. The Reduce Run toggle allows you to reduce the length of an upcoming segment by the value you specify. you can enter the full height/width of the active one-line type. or half the height/width of the active one-line type as the distance by which to reduce the run. Using the toggle. Only after you select Accept will the system reduce the upcoming run by the displayed distance. When you select the Distance button. When you select the Height or Width buttons. When you select the Height or Width buttons. you must key in a value by which to extend the run. You must already have defined an active point to establish the active direction before using Extend/Reduce Run. When you select the command. you must key in a value by which to reduce the run. the Full/Half toggle displays. The distance displays at the bottom of the form. The command accepts as values the height and width of the active one-line type (as defined in its specification)._ _______________ Extend/Reduce Run Extend/Reduce Run The Extend/Reduce Run command allows you to extend or reduce the length of an upcoming run by the value you specify. Using the toggle. Only after you select Accept will the system extend the upcoming run by the displayed distance. 7. The distance you key in displays at the bottom of the form. Only after you select Accept will the system reduce the run by the displayed distance. the Full/Half toggle displays. The distance displays at the bottom of the form. you can enter the full height/width of the active one-line type. You cannot use this command to place a first point. the following toggles display: The Extend Run toggle allows you to increase the length of an upcoming run by the value you specify. or half the height/width of the active one-line type as the distance by which to extend the run. Only after you select Accept will the system extend the run by the displayed distance.

126 .Define the true length from the active point in the direction to be defined. You can define the direction from the active point one of two ways: Active Direction . You can define distance with this command using the Move To and Move toggles or by specifying the true length from an active point. Select the direction and key in the absolute coordinate or snap to an element to retrieve its corresponding coordinate. Negative values are acceptable. You can define direction by keying in values for horizontal and vertical angles. Select the Distance and Direction command from the main precision input form. Move . Angles .These options define the change in the selected coordinate for the point in the direction entered.February 2003 Distance and Direction The Distance and Direction command specifies the distance and direction from an active point to place a point or vertex. The coordinates of the active point and the angles of the active direction are displayed on the form.Key in the horizontal angle and the vertical angle in decimal degrees. 2. 3. Specify Distance/Direction You can define the distance in one of three ways: Distance . The Distance and Direction form displays. Steps 1._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Move to .These options define the absolute coordinate for the point in the direction to be defined.The direction is defined by the active horizontal and vertical angles initially displayed.

If counterclockwise._ _______________ Distance and Direction The direction is always determined by both the horizontal and the vertical angles. The default setting is clockwise. See Runtime Setup Commands. Precision Input Runtime Setup The Runtime Setup command is used to define. 7. — OR — Select the Reset button or press <R> to reject the distance and direction option and return to the main Precision Input form. and review the active drawing parameters in your design file. the horizontal angle starts at the North coordinate (zero degrees). 4. Accept/Reject Distance and Direction Select the Process button to accept the displayed distance and direction and return to the main Precision Input form. The vertical angle is measured up or down from the horizontal plane of the active point. the horizontal angle starts at the east coordinate (zero degrees). 127 . page 287 for more information on the available commands. modify. This option is set in the PDS product. — OR — Select the Cancel button to terminate the active command. If clockwise. The horizontal angle can be measured clockwise or counterclockwise.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 128 .

then selecting Palette from the resulting pull-down menu. There are also commands available for routing one-lines around vessels and for inserting vertices in an existing one-line. change the active design parameters. Define Active Point — Places an active point in the design file. drop points. and right cylinder. Place Drop Point — Places a drop point symbol in the design file. You can also use these commands to enter an active point. raceway connect points (RCPs). and equipment pointer symbols – in the design file. manual fittings. and size conduit and duct banks. circle. Route Around Vessel — Routes elements parallel to an arc._ _______________ 8. Design 129 . Design Commands Design Commands The Design palette is activated by selecting Design from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. rotate cross sections. Insert RCP — Places a raceway connect point (RCP) in your raceway model. 8. Commands Place One-Line — Places the centerlines of raceway elements. Set Active Parameters — Sets the active parameters in the design file based on an identified one-line or RCP. Rotate Cross Section — Rotates a cross section at the current cross section angle. Place Manual Fitting — Places a manual fitting in the design file at the specified orientation and location. Place Equipment Pointer — Places an equipment pointer symbol in the design file. The commands on this palette place raceway elements – one-lines.

130 . Place Stub Up — Places conduit stub ups from an underground ductbank. These sections represent raceway components that are field routed by the installer._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Place Field Routed Raceway — Places short raceway sections from the raceway model to equipment. Insert One-Line Vertex — Places a vertex in an existing one-line. Define Duct Cross Section — Defines the cross section configuration of the contained conduit for an underground conduit duct bank.February 2003 Conduit Sizing — Sizes conduit by "placing" cables in the conduit to determine the percent fill.

see Precision Input Form. For detailed information about precision input. page 287 for instructions about setting up your systems and oneline types. Design You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Design commands. 131 . 8. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file. page 119 . you can use these commands throughout the design session. Likewise. you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. page 253 and Runtime Setup Commands. you must have ductbank one-lines placed before you can use the Define Duct Cross Section command. because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements._ _______________ Using the Design Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands. Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for using the commands in this group. You must have conduit one-lines placed in the design file before you can use the Conduit Sizing command. See Setup Commands. Using the Design Commands Before Using These Commands These commands require that you have an active system and one-line type defined in the design file.

Connect will place a drop point cell on the identified one-line at the point of identification. or when you place a fitting. Valid connections to one-lines are determined by the priority level assigned to each one-line type in the database. you can connect to an existing one-line. The values are defined by the ee_priority_level column in the ol_type table. The chart below illustrates the parameters that are assigned to one-lines as you place or modify them. One-line routes begin and terminate with a raceway connect point (RCP). the system places a new RCP and breaks the existing one-line into two one-line segments. These two segments will retain the systems. Connect to One-Line — If you identify either a one-line or an RCP for the beginning and/or termination point. This allows you to use the existing RCP as a beginning and/or termination point._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . based on every possible combination of routing options. you will have at least one of five possible routing options. One-line types with lower priority can only connect to one-line types with higher priority. You can also combine two existing one-line segments using Continue. and annotation of the original one-line. Attach to RCP — If you identify an RCP for the beginning and/or termination point. one-line type. raceway parameters. Break One-Line — If you identify a one-line for the beginning and/or termination point. Active raceway parameters supply the default data associated with each one-line segment as you sketch. and so forth). Any one-line segment you are placing in space. RCPs are required when you are changing the system.February 2003 Place One-Line This command places the centerlines of raceway elements based on points you give it. then connect will not be an option. 132 . unattached to another element. If the priority levels are equal between one-line types. conduit. Drop points establish connectivity between one-lines and RCPs where they are of different one-line types. Whenever you begin or terminate a one-line segment. you can attach to an existing RCP. is new. The active one-line type determines the type of one-line you place (tray. or specifications of a one-line. Continue One-Line — If you identify an RCP for the beginning and/or termination point. you can resume routing an existing one-line. while the active system determines the system to which the one-line belongs. The following list describes each routing option in detail: New RCP — If you do not identify a one-line or RCP for the beginning and/or termination point. one-line type. the system places a new RCP and routes the one-line from/to the RCP.

Last — Indicates that the one-line you are placing is assigned the parameters of the last one-line you identified._ _______________ Place One-Line In the above chart: Active — Indicates that the one-line you are placing is assigned the active raceway parameters. 8. If you reject all routing options for the beginning and/or termination points of a oneline. then the identified one-line must be of the same one-line type as the active one-line type. Design 133 . the command will not allow the continue option. or continue. This allows RCPs to be placed on top of one another without establishing connectivity. attach. or continue. If the beginning or termination action is break. then the command places a new RCP by default. You should keep the following points in mind when using the Place One-Line command: If an RCP on the end of a one-line belongs to a manual fitting. You can attach to or continue manually placed straights. If the beginning and termination actions are continue. though it is not a recommended practice. If the beginning or termination action is break. then the two identified one-lines must have all systems in common. First — Indicates that the one-line you are placing is assigned the parameters of the first one-line you identified. attach. then the identified one-line or RCP must have at least one system in common with the active systems.

Select the Place One-Line command. page 119. 3. At any point during this operating sequence. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Data Point Accepts. The Place One-Line precision input form displays.February 2003 Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Steps 1. The system saves the rotation and returns to the beginning of the command. Complete the routing. accept input. page 287 . reset a command action. In addition. reject input. 134 . you should be familiar with the Set Raceway Defaults command (see Set Raceway Defaults. 2. page 256 ). The system rotates the cross section and prompts you again to accept or continue rotating it. and return to step 2. Begin entering points to sketch the one-lines. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. see Precision Input Form. you can locate elements. route one-lines._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . For detailed information about precision input. Refer to the description of routing options at the beginning of this section to determine proper routing. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Using the form. The system places cross sections and RCPs (if they do not already exist) on the ends of the one-line. See Set Active One-Line Type and Set Active System in Runtime Setup Commands. prompting you to Enter first data point. — OR — Press <R> to rotate the cross section by the rotation angle defined in Raceway Defaults. You must set an active one-line type and system in the design file. 4. Reset Rotates Press <D> to accept the cross section rotation. and exit a command.

page 119. the fitting angle will be used when routing off the RCP and around the vessel. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Wye and tee fittings cannot be used. the route will come off the RCP at a 90 degree angle to the one-line. The route is attached to two terminating RCPs which may or may not have a fitting on them. see Precision Input Form. accept input. 135 . Design Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. reject input. At any point during this operating sequence. you can locate elements. such as an elbow. circle. Using the form. If the RCP does not have a fitting. If the RCP has a fitting on it. or right cylinder element can be a single MicroStation element._ _______________ Route Around Vessel Route Around Vessel This command routes the active one-line type around a vessel (represented by an arc. or part of a cell. The arc. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. For detailed information about precision input. reset a command action. and exit a command. route one-lines. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. or right cylinder) selected in either the active or reference design file. 8. circle. A fitting on the RCP can only have two attach points.

3. Identify vessel to route around Select the vessel (the arc. Key in minimum distance from vessel Key in the minimum distance. The minimum distance key-in defines the closest the route can come to the vessel. — OR — Press <R> to back up one step and respecify the second RCP. Identify second RCP Select the RCP on the other side of the vessel where you want the route to end and press <D> to accept it. or right cylinder element) between the RCPs. be sure that the distance from the RCPs to the vessel is the same as the minimum distance you key in. 5. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Identify first RCP Select the RCP where you want the route to begin and press <D> to accept it. — OR — Press <R> to back up one step and respecify the first RCP. 4. Select the Route Around Vessel command. If you want the route to maintain the minimum distance all the way around the vessel. which you want to route around and press <D> to accept it. 2.February 2003 Steps 1. The precision input form displays. You cannot key in a negative value. the route can be placed to the vessel. The route is not placed at the minimum distance from the vessel all the way around. circle. — OR — Press <R> to back up one step and respecify the vessel to route around. 136 . the closest._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

7. Route Around Vessel 8. — OR — Press <R> to place the elements on the other side of the vessel. The number of segments must be greater than one (two segments or more). Key in the number of one-line segments Key in the number of one-line segments to use when routing around the vessel. — OR — Press <R> twice to back up one step and key in a new number of one-line segments. — OR — Press <R> to back up one step and key in a new minimum distance from vessel value. Design 137 ._ _______________ 6. Accept/reject Press <D> to accept that the elements should be placed on that side of the vessel. The route is calculated and the elements display on one side of the vessel.

Identify Raceway One-Line Identify a one-line in the design file. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Using the form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . At any point during this operating sequence. see Precision Input Form. reset a command action. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. and exit a command. Select the Insert RCP command from the menu.February 2003 Insert RCP This command breaks an identified one-line in the design file and inserts a raceway connect point (RCP). For detailed information about precision input. 2. route one-lines. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. If you do not locate an acceptable one-line element. The Insert RCP precision input form displays. accept input. you can locate elements. The system highlights a valid one-line. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. 138 . the system displays the message Element not found. reject input. page 119. Steps 1.

If you accept the one-line. the command inserts the RCP as specified. 4. Insert RCP 8. Design 139 . the system prompts you to identify another. — OR — Exit the command. — OR — If you reject the one-line. Go to Step 2. Continue inserting RCPs. Go to Step 2. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept or reject the highlighted one-line._ _______________ 3.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . If you identified a duct bank cross section. You can change the rotation angle in the EE Raceway Defaults form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. For duct bank cross sections.February 2003 Rotate Cross Section This command rotates a cross section using the current cross section rotation angle. At any point during this operating sequence. Identify Cross Section Identify a cross section and accept it with a <D>. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. reject input. see Precision Input Form. but changes the duct bank justification location. this command does not rotate duct bank’s cross section. accept input. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. The Rotate Cross Section precision input form displays. and exit a command. Using the form. you can locate elements. reset a command action. page 119. For detailed information about precision input. 2. go to step 4. Steps 1. 140 . page 256 for more information. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Otherwise continue to step 3. see Set Raceway Defaults. route one-lines. Select the Rotate Cross Section command.

3. The system rotates the cross section by the defined rotation angle. the system displays the message Element not found. 4. The duct bank justification changes and the command exits. If you do not locate an acceptable element. the elements will repropagate at the new orientation angle. Select New Cross Section Justification Select a new justification point from the precision input form and accept it. Reset Rotates Press <D> to accept the current cross section orientation and exit the command. page 256 for information about changing the angle of rotation. — OR — Press <R> to rotate the cross section. Repeat this step. If Automatic Propagation is on. Design 141 . Data Point Accepts. Rotate Cross Section The system highlights a valid cross section. 8. The message disappears when you identify a valid cross section. See Set Raceway Defaults._ _______________ — OR — Exit the command.

for instance.February 2003 Place Drop Point This command places a drop point symbol in the design file. Select the Place Drop Point command. 10 is of lesser priority than 5. the drop-out point will be calculated by determining the closest point on the one-line to the drop point symbol. Identify Raceway RCP Identify an RCP in the design file. 2. The message disappears when you identify a valid RCP. 142 . You can place drop points between RCPs and one-lines of the same and/or different one-line type. For example. Valid connections to one-lines are determined by the priority level assigned to each one-line type in the database. Using the form. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. If you do not locate an acceptable element. The values which determine priority status are defined in the ee_priority_level column in the ol_type table. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. The point on the one-line where you place the drop point symbol defines the drop-out point. see Precision Input Form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. You can. If the drop point symbol is not on the one-line. Steps 1. reject input. For detailed information about precision input. page 119. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. reset a command action. accept input._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can also establish connectivity between two one-lines where graphic coincidence does not occur. The Place Drop Point precision input form displays. Drop points establish connectivity between a RCP and a one-line. The system highlights a valid RCP. route one-lines. At any point during this operating sequence. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. and exit a command. the system displays the message Element not found. a higher number indicates a lesser priority. you can locate elements. establish connectivity between a piece of conduit and a tray at the point where the cables drop out of the tray into the conduit.

— OR — Reject the one-line. and returns you to the previous prompt. 5. Go to step 2. — OR — Press <R> or Reject to identify a different RCP. — OR — Reject the highlighted RCP._ _______________ 3. The identification point is the point at which the system will place the drop point. 4. Place Drop Point 8. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the one-line. Design 143 . The system prompts you to identify another RCP. The system highlights the identified one-line. Go to step 2. Go to step 4. Raceway connect point Accept/reject Accept the highlighted RCP. The system places the drop point as specified. The system prompts you to identify another one-line. Identify Raceway One-Line Identify a one-line in the design file.

If you do not locate an acceptable element. page 119. Identify Raceway RCP Identify an RCP in the design file and accept it. and exit a command. 144 . To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. 3. see Precision Input Form. Using the form. reset a command action. Continue placing equipment pointer symbols in the design. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. The message disappears when you identify a valid RCP. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Select the Place Equipment Pointer command. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. The system places the equipment pointer symbol as specified. An equipment pointer symbol serves as a tag that identifies a particular piece of equipment. Enter data point to place Place a data point at the desired location for the equipment pointer symbol. the system displays the message Element not found. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. route one-lines._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The equipment pointer should match the corresponding symbol in the PDS Equipment Modeling product. — OR — Press <R> to select another RCP. At any point during this operating sequence. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. accept input. 2. reject input. For detailed information about precision input.February 2003 Place Equipment Pointer This command places an equipment pointer symbol in the design file. Steps 1. you can locate elements. The system highlights a valid RCP.

Design 1._ _______________ Define Active Point This command defines a new active point in your design file. The Enter Active Point precision input form displays. page 119. At any point during this operating sequence. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. accept input. you can locate elements. Steps 8. 2. route one-lines. The command makes the specified data point the active point. and exit a command. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Using the form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. see Precision Input Form. reject input. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. For detailed information about precision input. Select the Define Active Point command. and exits the command. 145 . Enter active point Specify a data point in the design file where you want the active point to be. Define Active Point Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. reset a command action.

The command exits automatically. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted element. Using the form. reset a command action. 3. to those of a one-line or RCP you identify. route one-lines. active systems. accept input. page 119. and one-line type parameters based on the highlighted element.February 2003 Set Active Parameters This command sets the active parameters. and exit a command. Return to step 2. you can locate elements. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. At any point during this operating sequence._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The Set Active Parameters precision input form displays. The system highlights the identified element. 2. Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the element as the one to use. and raceway parameters. see Precision Input Form. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. reject input. The system sets the active one-line type. one-line type. system. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Select the Set Active Parameters command. Identify Raceway One-Line or RCP Select a one-line or RCP to use to set the active parameters. 146 . To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Steps 1. For detailed information about precision input.

You will use manual placement in situations where placing a sparse model will not be sufficient or is not possible. the system derives the default orientation for placing the new fitting from the placement point. and so forth) using this command. then the system places the new fitting by itself._ _______________ Place Manual Fitting This command identifies a unique part from the reference database and places it in the design file at whatever orientation and location you specify. the location of a manual fitting is determined by the location of the active point. When placing a straight section. If the new fitting and the existing one do not share the same system and one-line type. Place Manual Fitting 8. For example. You can place special fittings (conduit bodies. the system extends the one-line for that straight to terminate on the RCP of the fitting. pullboxes. When attaching a manual fitting to the placement point of another fitting (or a straight). or fitting-to-fitting placement. During placement. the system locates the closest attachment point on that fitting. unusual angles. vertical tees. Otherwise. you may need to place fittings manually when dealing with tight spaces. or placing a fitting on the end of a straight section. the new fitting is attached to the existing fitting and a one-line is automatically placed. If the active point lies in the vicinity of a fitting. Such a fitting is placed with its own RCP. and light fixtures) as well as spec driven fittings (horizontal elbows. Design 147 .

To change the displayed qualifier. Subtype — Displays the active subtype for the displayed Type value. Modifying Type or Subtype values may change the available qualifiers. See Define Active Point. select a value from the list. page 145 . wye. etc. 148 . the command derives the orientation from the place point. page 294 . page 295 . rigid. one-line type. See Set Active Parameters. the previous orientation will be retained. straight. To change the displayed subtype. Changing the active parameters updates the part information elsewhere on the form.) for that specification.) for the active type and subtype in the current specification. and active one-line type parameters in the design. See Set Active System. See Set Active One-Line Type. The list contains all available three-line types (elbow. select a value from the list. Otherwise. Modifying the value for Type also may change the active and available subtypes. select a value from the list.) for the active type and subtype in the current specification. To change the displayed three-line type. The list contains all available qualifiers (adjustable. Field Descriptions Type — Displays the active three-line type for the current specification.February 2003 Commands Define Active Point — Defines the active point in the design file for the placement of fittings. page 146 . horizontal. Set Active System — Displays the current active system and allows you to select a new active system. Selecting a new active one-line type updates the part information elsewhere on the form. If manual placement cannot locate a fitting. Set Active Parameters — Defines the active system. Qualifier — Displays the active qualifier for the displayed Type and Subtype. inside vertical. The list contains all available subtypes (vertical. etc._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Set Active One-Line Type — Displays the current active one-line type and allows you to select a new active one-line type. etc. Modifying the value in the Part field may also change the active and available Type values.

the Length field does not display on the form. Part — Displays the active part. and key in the new value. Place Manual Fitting Length — Displays the length by which to project a straight. Angle — Displays the active angle associated with the Type. select an angle from the list or select the field. Subtype. Spec1. Design 149 . (if applicable) Spec2. 8. Qualifier. key in a negative angle. select the field. To change the displayed angle._ _______________ Symbol — Displays the name of the Eden symbol you are placing. To change the displayed part. If straight is not your active Type. Subtype. To change the displayed length. and key in the new value. When placing a fitting (such as a vertical tee). if the placepoints and RCPs do not line up correctly. select a value from the list. The list contains all available parts for the current specification. and Qualifier. — OR — Change any of the values for Type. select a value from the list. You can only review the values in this field. Spec1 — Displays the active specification for the displayed Type. Subtype. select the corresponding Display button. and Qualifier for the current specification. To display the specification itself. or Angle (if applicable). To change the displayed specification. Doing so displays a specification form. The list contains available angles. (-90 degrees) to shift the RCPs and placepoints to the correct location. The list contains all available specifications.

You can only review the information in this column. You can display the current specification itself by selecting the Display button. List . To change a value. You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button. You can review and modify the values in this column. and Qualifier. Subtype.Displays the column name values currently associated with the specified type. then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values. To display the codelist. the existing RCP location is fixed. If Cutback Mode is off. If only one row matches this criteria. 150 .February 2003 Column name . For a list of valid operators. which automatically activates it. Then select the field. Column value . then the column value has an associated codelist. If more than one row matches the criteria. Spec2 — Displays the active secondary specification. Type. If Cutback Mode is on. Override .Clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form. displays. containing all matching rows. If an * displays in the List column. See Spec1 for a description of the form. The list contains all available secondary specifications for the current settings. page 178 . select the Override button.Allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R). and drag it along the scale until it reaches the appropriate value. see Annotate Element.Displays the aliases of those columns in the database that are associated with the specified type. Overrides from the secondary specification are not passed to the Eden symbol.Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form. Select . Clear ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and key in a new value. Doing so displays a specification form. Secondary specifications are generally used with reducers. To change the active placepoint. Placepoint — Defines the point of attachment for the fitting you are currently placing.Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist. the RCP will be moved accordingly. and then automatically depresses the Override button so that you can select a different row(s) from the specification. for the given Spec1. select the slide bar. then a second form. You can use certain relational operators as search criteria. if any. Cutback Mode — Defines whether a straight section is to be cutback when placing a manual fitting. select the *.

Place Manual Fitting The fitting size is determined by comparing the spec table nominal size of all one-lines at the RCP and selecting the largest nominal size among them. and key in a new value. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. You must specify the manual fitting type before using the button. Secondary._ _______________ Automatic Size — Automatically selects the correct size fitting.Defines the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. About . Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. and toggle between the three axes (Primary. If there is no nominal size fitting larger than the one-line nominal size. That nominal size is then compared to the fitting table nominal sizes. 8. If you set the Driven By Spec/Table toggle to Table. the Place Manual Fitting form displays. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. then the largest fitting available is used. Automatic Fit — Re-orients the fitting in reference to the one-line it is associated with. If in the fitting table there is a nominal size the same as the largest one-line nominal size. Design 151 . If there is no fitting of that nominal size. then the first fitting that is of greater nominal size than the one-line nominal size is used.Defines the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. Rotate Orientation — Defines the active orientation matrix. To change the displayed axis. select the field. then that fitting is used. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. select the field. — OR — Identify the appropriate axis name (text) on the orientation matrix diagram (to the right of the Angle and About fields.) I Button — Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. Angle . To change the displayed angle.

see the descriptions earlier in this section. then only those types that are 1/2 inch in size from vendor 3 and made of feraloy will be displayed in the types list. In other words. if you set material to feraloy. then only the sizes the form 7c comes in. size. 152 .February 2003 Field Descriptions Table — Displays the active special part table from the database. type. made of feraloy from vendor 3. You can display the current table information for the part by selecting the Display button. if you set type to form 7c. vendor to 3. and vendor display as the active attributes. When set to All. The attribute display lists are used to interactively query the database for the desired Part Key. you set the active Table to cond_body. Attribute — The next four display lists on the form are the first four Part Key attributes from the active table and will change depending on which Table is active. material to feraloy. The list contains the available special part tables from the database. regardless of the other attribute settings. For example. and size to 1/2 inch. all available values for that attribute are displayed in the list. Select/All toggles — Overrides the interactive queries of the attribute fields. See the description of the Spec1 field earlier in this section for detailed information about the form parameters. These fields and the commands operate identically in either Driven By Spec or Driven By Table modes. will be displayed in the size list. Similarly. For information about the Placepoint and Rotate Orientation fields as well as the form commands. Modifying the Table value also changes the active and available Part values. Each attribute displays only those values that have corresponding matching values for the other three attributes in the database. material._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . select a table name from the list. To change the active special part table. and vendor to 3. Part Key — Displays the current part for the displayed Table that matches the attribute values.

) to construct the three-line symbols. For more information. 4. etc. page 119 . Such fittings are called special parts. orientations. The system accepts the fitting at the specified location and orientation. set the toggle to Driven By Table. On the other hand. Design Steps 1. Change fitting descriptions. Specification-driven fittings rely on the specification information (width._ _______________ Before Using This Command You should be familiar with precision input and its functions. Go to step 4. height. some fittings derive their information from their own database tables because they are not so easily classified into a common group of parts. set the toggle to Driven By Spec. 153 . Set the Driven By Spec/Table toggle to meet your requirements. orientation. Place Manual Fitting When deciding whether your fitting information will come from a specification or from a table in the database. — OR — To derive fitting attributes from a special part table in the database. radius. The Place Manual Fitting form displays. All parts of a given specification will inherit the attributes of that specification. Select the Place Manual Fitting command. see Precision Input Form. 2. 3. Select Accept to accept the fitting with the current settings. The following table indicates fittings that are specification-driven and those that are special parts: Specification-Driven Fittings straight elbow wye cross dropout Special Parts pullbox conduit body light fixture 8. you should first consider a few points. To derive fitting attributes from a specification in the database. and location. and location until the desired fitting is seen in dynamics (phantom mode) in the design file.

154 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 5. — OR — Exit the command. Continue placing manual fittings.

Conduit Sizing 8._ _______________ Conduit Sizing This command places cables (wires) in a conduit to determine the correct conduit size based on the conduit’s percent fill calculation. Design 155 .

The queried values must have every character aside from the underline in common with the given value. select the *. This operator is a wild card. You should be familiar with the following operators: Symbol Name Data Type numeric Description = equal to This is the default operator. A code list is a list of valid database values for that Column Alias. Value — Select and key in values to use as search criteria to find corresponding cables in the database. 156 . To display the code list. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than the given value.February 2003 Field Descriptions Column Alias — Displays the column aliases for each column in the database table. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than or equal to the given value. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than the given value. then the Value has an associated code list. If an * displays in the column. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than or equal to the given value. The queried values must have every character aside from the % in common with the given value. the system assumes =. This command also accepts certain relational operators as search criteria. > greater than numeric < less than numeric >= greater than or equal to less than or equal to not equal to numeric <= numeric != numeric % wild card CHAR _ underline CHAR Code List — Indicates whether a Value has an associated code list._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . representing a single character. If you do not enter another operator. This operator is a wild card. This operator indicates that the queried values should NOT be equal to the given value. representing zero or more characters.

The field displays in red and the message Warning: Percent Fill exceeds maximum allowed displays when the conduit has reached its capacity as defined by the electrical code you are using. Selected Cables — Displays information on all cables that have been selected to go in the active conduit. Select Conduit — Displays the Conduit Sizing precision input form. — Increase/Decrease size . Any cables in the active conduit before the copy are removed. it is added to the conduit. Process Query — Queries the database to find cables matching the search criteria defined in the Value fields.The smallest conduit available in the spec that meets the percent fill criteria is used. Using this form you can select another conduit in which to route cables without having to exit the command. Field Descriptions Increase Size ONLY / Increase/Decrease size — Defines how the conduit should be sized. Percent Fill — Displays how full the conduit is as a percentage. The Percent Fill calculation is based on the conduit’s cross-sectional area divided by the summation of all of that conduit’s cables’ cross-sectional areas. from which you can select a cable or cables to route in the conduit. Copy Contents — Copies cables from a selected conduit into the active conduit._ _______________ Initialize Query — Clears all entries in the Value fields. 8. the PseudoCable form displays.When a conduit is calculated to be full. Append Contents — Adds cables from a selected conduit into the active conduit leaving any cables in the active conduit there. If more than one cable matches the search criteria. Add Cable — Mode for adding cables to a conduit. the next size larger conduit in the spec table is used until an adequately sized conduit is found. There are two methods to choose from: — Increase Size ONLY . If only one cable is found that matches the criteria. Design 157 . Conduit Size — Displays the size of the conduit in spec units.

3. 2. Select the Conduit Sizing command. Delete All Cables — Deletes all cables in the active conduit. reject input. 4. reset a command action. you can locate elements. You can query the database and select them from the form or copy them from a conduit that has "cable" in it. You must use the Set Conduit Sizing Attributes command to define how the conduit sizes will be selected. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. page 119. Define the cables for the conduit. Quantity — Defines the number of cables of that type. At any point during this operating sequence. Using the form. The Conduit Sizing precision input form displays. page 268 for more information. 158 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . This field can be edited to take positive integers other than zero (zero and blank are invalid entries). Set the Increase size ONLY / Increase/Decrease size toggle to the sizing method you want. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. route one-lines. accept input. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. and exit a command. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element.February 2003 Remove Cable — Mode for removing cables from a conduit. Identify CONDUIT Identify the conduit to size and accept it with <D> The Conduit Sizing form displays. For detailed information about precision input. This option is available only when Remove Cable is selected. Steps 1. see Precision Input Form. See Set Conduit Sizing Attributes.

Design 159 . — OR — Select Cancel to exit the command and ignore any changes you have made._ _______________ 5. Select Accept to calculate and size the conduit. Field Descriptions 8. If the largest size conduit available does not satisfy the percent fill calculation. a warning message displays.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Identify Raceway One-line Select the one-line to which to add the vertex. page 192 for more information. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. The point that identifies the one-line in this step is the point where the vertex is inserted. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. use the Move One-Line Vertex command. see Precision Input Form. Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the one-line. and exit a command. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Steps 1. 2. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Using the form. Select the Insert One-Line Vertex command. 3. route one-lines. page 119.February 2003 Insert One-Line Vertex This command places a vertex in an existing one-line. the one-line will repropagate and the vertex will display with its cross-section. If Automatic Propagation is on. 160 . reset a command action. — OR — Press <R> to reject the one-line. reject input. At any point during this operating sequence. For detailed information about precision input. see Move One-Line Vertex. accept input. The vertex is inserted. you can locate elements. The Insert One-line Vertex precision input form displays. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. To move an inserted vertex. The selected one-line highlights.

_ _______________ Place Field Routed Raceway The Place Field Routed Raceway command places short raceway sections from the raceway model to equipment. When on. To change the displayed length. Design Field Descriptions Column name — Displays the aliases for the columns (attributes) in the reference schema that unique identify equipment. To change the value. the value is displayed in the design. Field routed raceway sections are needed to get appropriate material takeoff (MTO) reports and to facilitate cable routing. The Distance to equipment specifies the field routed length (in subunits) of the placed one-line. Display — Enables or disables the annotation of the Column value. field route length. 161 . there are instances where the raceway does not terminate at equipment and cables must be routed through airways (space) by the installer from the raceway to the equipment. The column names reside in the ee_unique table in the reference schema. This command is intended primarily to support field routed conduit and airways. This field is informational only. conduit less than a particular size is typically not modeled in the plant model but is installed in the field by the installer. Similarly. For example. This length represents the estimated length of raceway to the equipment from the beginning point of the placed one-line.) When set to Keyin. but can also be used for other raceway types that are field routed. you must key in the length in the Distance to equipment field. Column value — Defines a value for the corresponding equipment identifying attribute in the Column name field. These sections represent raceway components that are field routed by the installer. select the field and key in a new length. Keyin/Calculate — Defines the method for entering the distance from the beginning of the placed one-line to the equipment (that is. select the field and key in the new value. Place Field Routed Raceway 8. You are prompted to position the annotation after the equipment pointer is placed in the design.

select the field. The calculated distance is stored with the one-line as field routed length. you are prompted for the first point (that is.) I Button — Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. select the field. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. For detailed information about precision input. Using the form. To change the displayed axis. and exit a command. and toggle between the three axis (Primary. After specifying the orientation and the length of the one-line. The software calculates the orthogonal distance (that is. placement point) of the one-line element. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form.February 2003 When the Keyin/Calculate toggle is set to Calculate. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. To change the displayed angle. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Angle — Defines the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. select the field. y. About — Defines the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. When placing the one-line element using the Beginning & Ending Point method. First Point & Orientation/Beginning & Ending Point — Defines the method for entering the plant coordinates of the one-line element. 162 . you are prompted to identify the location of the equipment. Length of Placed Raceway Field — Displays the length by which to project the oneline along the orientation tee from the first point. see Precision Input Form. you are prompted for the beginning and ending plant coordinates of the one-line. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. Or you can identify the appropriate axis name (text) on the orientation matrix diagram (to the right of the Angle and About fields. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. accept input. sum of the x. At any point during this operating sequence. and key in a new value. and key in a new value. you can locate elements. reject input. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . reset a command action. Secondary. page 119. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. z deltas) from the beginning of the placed one-line to the identified equipment location. To change the displayed length. When placing the one-line element using the First Point & Orientation method the Rotate Orientation gadgets display. route one-lines.

3._ _______________ Operator Sequence 1. Place Field Routed Raceway 8. The Place Field Routed Raceway form displays. Identify Raceway One-Line Identify a one-line element to which you want to connect the field routed raceway section and accept it when it highlights. Select the Place Field Routed Raceway command. Define the form parameters to meet your specifications. — OR — Exit the command. 2. The precision input form displays. Design 163 .

164 . Copy section layout from — Copies an existing duct cross section layout from a specified duct into the active duct. Field Descriptions Button Matrix — Each button represents an area in the duct bank’s cross section that extends the size of the duct bank. All assigned buttons (areas) are then used to calculate the duct bank’s cross section. By assigning a conduit. Unassigned or unused buttons in the matrix are not used in calculating the ductbank’s cross sectional size unless they are in the middle of assigned buttons.February 2003 Define Duct Cross Section This command defines the cross section configuration of the contained conduit or cable for underground duct banks._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The duct bank will automatically resize after configuration to accommodate the defined conduit or cable. you assign that area in the duct bank. cable or gap to a button.

page 256 for more information. You can define any control number that is loaded to the project database. Gap Distance — Defines a gap between two conduit/cables in the matrix. 8. this information is retrieved from the drawing_numb column of the cabsch_spec table. If conduit routing is selected. Modify — Removes an existing button assignment and replaces it with new assignment. The gap distance will appear on the button after assignment. The conduit/cable identification will appear on the button after assignment. Control Number — Displays the control number to use for retrieving the conduit/cable information from the project database. See Set Raceway Defaults. These tables are the cable/conduit schedule listings used for this project. cable or gap to a matrix button. You define whether you are routing conduit or cables by setting the Duct toggle in the EE Raceway Defaults form. The gap is measured from the center of the left conduit/cable to the center of the right conduit/cable and can only be defined on the top row of buttons. Design 165 . If cable routing is selected. Horizontal spacing — Defines the horizontal spacing between each button (area). Define Duct Cross Section Delete — Removes a conduit/cable or gap from a matrix button. A form displays all available conduit/cables in the project database for the defined control number. Move — Moves a conduit/cable or gap from one matrix button to another._ _______________ Add — Assigns a conduit. The cable schedule is not the same table as the cable table in the EE Wiring Diagram and Panel Design software. Vertical spacing — Defines the vertical spacing between each button (area). this information is retrieved from the drawing_numb column of the cndsch_spec table.

Define cross section layout using the various commands. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. you can locate elements. all conduit/cable information. accept input. and exit a command. The precision input form displays. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. The duct bank size is checked and resized as necessary. Select Confirm (√) to exit the form and save your changes. reset a command action. a warning form displays confirming that you want to exit without saving changes. For detailed information about precision input. is assigned to the duct one-line. you cancel your "exit without saving" and are returned to the command. 2. Define whether you are placing conduit or cables in the duct bank by setting the Duct toggle in the EE Raceway Defaults form. If you select Cancel after having modified the ductbank’s layout. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. you can define a margin width. page 256 for more information. Likewise. If you select Confirm (√) on the warning form. The duct bank section layout. a space between the button matrix and the outside of the ductbank in the EE Raceway Defaults form. Identify duct element Select the duct bank element for which to define the cross section layout and accept it with <D>. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. The Duct Cross Section Layout form displays. see Precision Input Form. 4. If you select Cancel on the warning form. If Automatic Propagation is on. Using the form. At any point during this operating sequence. route one-lines. 166 . page 119. both width and height. 3. any changes you made will be ignored. reject input. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the form without saving any changes._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . See Set Raceway Defaults.February 2003 Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Steps 1. Select the Define Duct Cross Section command. the duct bank will automatically repropagate.

167 . You must select the a conduit specification using the Set Active One-Line Type Parameters command. page 289 . You must define conduit as the active one-line type using the Set Active One-Line Type command. page 260 . See Define Duct Cross Section. material) are used to determine the conduit stub up sizes available. page 164 . You must define the conduit sizing attributes using the Set Conduit Sizing Attributes command. page 268 . See Set Active One-Line Type. Stub ups are pieces of conduit associated with a conduit or cable contained in an underground duct bank and are placed in the raceway model for making above ground conduit connections. 8. units. Design Before Using this Command You must define conduit as an available one-line type using the Define One-Line Type command. The conduit specification and the conduit sizing attributes (for example. page 294 . You must define the duct cross section layout using the Define Duct Cross Section command._ _______________ Place Stub Up Place Stub Up This command manipulates conduit stub ups. See Set Active One-Line Type Parameters. The stub up is connected to the corresponding underground duct bank section by means of a drop point. vendor. See Define One-Line Type. See Set Conduit Sizing Attributes.

February 2003 Field Descriptions Button Matrix — Each button represents an area in the duct bank’s cross section that has or has not been assigned during the Define Duct Cross Section command. Delete Stub Up — Deletes a conduit stub up. Stub Up Length — Displays the conduit stub up length as measured in the model master units (feet. 168 . this field displays the associated conduit stub up size. the size of stub up will be retrieved from the conduit schedule table in project schema based upon conduit number that user selected from matrix. This matrix is used in the Change Association and Place Stub Up options to identify which cross section (that is. Stub Up Size — After selecting the Place Stub Up button and selecting a conduit/cable from the active duct segment. If underground cable routing is selected for this model or the conduit size is not defined for the conduit number. You can optionly override the displyed value by selecting a conduit stub up size from the available sizes as determined by matching the conduit sizing attributes to the active conduit specification. Place Stub Up — Places a conduit stub up in the raceway model associated with a conduit/cable in the active duct segment. If underground conduit routing is selected for this model. meters) The user can optionally override the displayed value. you are required to select the desired size from the available sizes._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . conduit/cable) to manipulate. The displayed value is simply the value from the previous place stub up selection. Change Association — Changes the association of a conduit stub up from the currently associated conduit/cable to another conduit/cable in the active duct segment. Select Duct Segment — Selects an existing duct segment in the raceway model as the active duct segment.

— OR — Select the Change Association option. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. 5. The precision input form displays._ _______________ Steps 1. Go to Step 14. Steps 8. The Place Stub Up form displays. 3. Go to Step 4. 169 . Select the Place Stub Up command. — OR — Select the Place Stub Up option. — OR — Select the Delete Stub Up option. Select Option Select the Select Duct Segment option. Go to Step 2. 2. Go to Step 9. — OR — Exit the option. Select the Select Duct Segment option. The identified element highlights. Go to Step 2. Go to Step 6. Identify duct element Identify a duct one-line in the design file. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. The identified duct one-line’s cross section layout displays in the Button Matrix. Design — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command. 4.

Conduit/Cable Number = [conduit/cable number] Select another cable/conduit to modify existing stub up. 7. Select the Change Association option. Go to Step 7. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. Go to Step 2. The identified element highlights. Identify stub up element Identify a stub up one-line in the design file. annotation. 8. — OR — Exit the option. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. 12. The identified element highlights. and RCP’s that are associated with the selected one-line. The precision input form displays. Identify stub up element Identify a stub up one-line in the design file. 10. — OR — Exit the option. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. Go to Step 2. The precision input form displays. Go to Step 10.February 2003 6. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. It also deletes all cross sections. 170 . Select the Delete Stub Up option. propagated elements. is displays in the form message field. 11. Go to Step 7. 9. Select stub up for modification._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Select cable/conduit to connect stub up. Select a button from the Button Matrix. Steps 8. — OR — Exit the placement of the selected conduit/cable. 13. has been changed. Go to Step 2. 14. Place a data point at the desired location for the top of the conduit stub up. — OR — Select a option button. 171 . — OR — Override the stub up size or length. 15._ _______________ Select a button from the Button Matrix. The stub up is placed down from the given data point. 17. displays in the message field. Go to Step 17. displays in the message field. Design Go to Step 14. The precision input form displays. Stub up spec. Select cable/conduit to connect stub up. Go to Step 2. 16. Select the Place Stub Up option. Select location to place stub up. The system places the stub up and connects it to the duct bank by means of a drop point located on the duct bank one-line closest to the bottom of the conduit stub up. Select a button from the Button Matrix. Go to Step 2. Select location to place stub up.

February 2003 172 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. deleting. Modify Modify Group Commands — Define elements for inclusion in a group and manipulate elements belonging to the active group. and three-lines. annotating. and so forth). You can elect to manipulate either single elements or those elements belonging to an active group. such as RCPs. within the design file. and propagation. Modify Commands Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. then selecting Palette. three-lines. Commands The commands on the Modify palette both activate other command palettes. These palettes and their commands will be described in this chapter._ _______________ 9. 9. Available element manipulations include copying. annotation. The Modify palette is activated by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. moving. Modify Commands The Modify commands manipulate elements. Modify Element Commands — Manipulate single elements within the design file. 173 . Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. one-lines.

you should use these commands. Before Using These Commands These commands require that you have existing raceway elements in your design file (see the Design Commands. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Modify commands. For reliable results. For detailed information about precision input. you can use these commands throughout the design session.February 2003 Using the Modify Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. page 119 . You must also have an active system and one-line type defined in the design file. any time you are modifying raceway elements. page 253 and Runtime Setup Commands. See Setup Commands. Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. see Precision Input Form. 174 . page 129 for information about placing elements in the model). page 287 for instructions about setting up your systems and one-line types. because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. not MicroStation manipulation commands. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file. Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for the commands in this group.

Modify Element commands also allow you to propagate onelines in your raceway model. then selecting Palette. Move Element — Moves an element to a specified location in the design file. reviews. annotation. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. Commands Annotate Element — Places. one-lines. three-lines. then selecting Modify Element Commands. to review or edit element annotation. copy. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (oneline. Move One-Line Vertex — Moves an internal one-line vertex. and so forth). 9. and three-lines. or by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. and edits intelligent annotation for raceway elements. and delete specified elements._ _______________ Modify Element Commands The Modify Element palette is activated by selecting the Modify Element command from the Modify palette. Move One-Line Segment — Moves a one-line segment while maintaining connectivity to existing elements. Modify Copy Element — Copies an element as specified within the design file. 175 . including RCPs. Propagate Element — Expands one-line elements into three-dimensional elements. and to check for duplicate one-lines and coincident RCPs in the design file. Clone Element — Copies an element multiple times in the same direction. You can use individual commands to move. Modify Element Commands The Modify Element commands manipulate individual elements. within the design file.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Check Duplicate One-lines — Checks for duplicate or overlapping one-lines in the design file. Remove One-Line Vertex — Deletes an internal vertex from an existing one-line. and elements associated with it.February 2003 Edit/Insert Manual Fitting — Modifies fittings that were manually placed in the model. Place Fitting by Rule — Places a non-standard fitting at an RCP using a set of rules defined in the reference database. Delete Element — Removes a valid raceway element. Change System Parameters — Changes the system percentage and the project rule for a selected element. from the design file. 176 . Check Coincident RCPs — Checks for coincident RCPs in the design file. Remove RCP — Deletes a specified RCP (raceway connect point) from the design file. Minimize Joints — Reduces the number of vertices in an identified one-line to a minimum. Delete Fitting — Removes fittings from the design file. Modify One-Line — Modifies the route of an existing one-line element.

you can use these commands throughout the design session. see Precision Input Form. page 287 for instructions about setting up your systems and oneline types. 9. For reliable results. three-lines. page 119 . You must also have an active system and one-line type defined in the design file. See Setup Commands. For detailed information about precision input. you should use these commands. and so forth). Modify Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file. Using the Modify Element Commands Before Using These Commands These commands require that you have existing raceway elements in your design file (see Design Commands. 177 ._ _______________ Using the Modify Element Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. annotation. any time you are modifying raceway elements. page 253 and Runtime Setup Commands. page 129 for information about placing elements in the model). Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for using the commands in this group. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Modify Element commands. not MicroStation manipulation commands.

though the product does not recognize such annotation nor can the product add it to an EE database.February 2003 Annotate Element This command places. The following graphic shows the Annotate Element form for an RCP. straights. By definition. and fittings. You can also add cosmetic text to a raceway model for display purposes. you are allowed only to review the annotation. you can change the specifications or sizes of raceway components. three-lines. Raceway Connect Points (RCP). The Annotate Element command recognizes one-lines. Using this command. The following graphic shows the Annotate Element form for a one-line. 178 . For straights and fittings._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and edits intelligent annotation for individual raceway elements. reviews. intelligent annotation is recognized by the EE Raceway product and can be added to an EE database.

the value is saved back to user data. If an * displays in the List column. it becomes an override key to the reference database. an error message displays and the annotation form returns to the previous values. and corresponding database values are retrieved and displayed on the annotation form. select the *. then the column value has a corresponding codelist. Modify 179 . then the value derives from the design file. Display On/Off — Enables or disables the graphic display for each column value. To change the values associated with the element. using your keyboard space bar. The next time you enter the annotation form. The displayed columns reside in the mscolumns table in the database. Any annotation you placed in the drawing will override the reference database defaults on the form. Once you have deleted the override. the value will display in the design where you place it. If Ref displays in the column. Column value — Displays the current value for the column whose alias displays in the Column name field. You will be prompted to place displayed values when placing one-lines in the drawing. the cursor will jump to the end of the blanks when the field is tagged beyond value. If you can view and modify (read and write) the column value. Where the toggle is On. To delete an override on a reference database attribute. If the specified key does not exist in the reference database. enter nothing into the design. If you change a column value. Otherwise. the Access column displays a R/W. You can enter blank spaces into the design. You can only review the Column name column information. select the field. the Source column will display either Ref or Dgn. and key in the new value. the column displays New until you select Confirm (√) to save your changes. 9. List — Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist. Field Descriptions Source — Displays the source of the corresponding column value. The key field is updated. the corresponding column value comes from user data. If blanks exist for a field._ _______________ Field Descriptions Column name — Displays the aliases for those columns in the database that are associated with the specified element. If you can only view (read) the column value. then it will display an R. To display the codelist. a value will display in the field only if the value can be retrieved from the reference database. Reference Database Key — This field allows you to insert an override key into the reference database. Empty <Return>s. the field remains null. Entering a space or a text value for an attribute will override that value in the reference database. however. select the Column value field and delete the blank character. Access — Indicates whether or not you can manipulate a particular column value. You can review and modify the values in this field. Where UD displays in the column. If Dgn displays in the column. You can only review the information in this column. then the value derives from the reference database. When you enter a new value in the EE Reference Database Key field. When modified. where New had displayed.

To change the displayed value. If only one row matches the select criteria you provide. From this form you can select the row(s) containing the desired values. To add values from the displayed specification table rows. then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values. select the field. The select criteria are those values that display in the Column value column on the lower portion of the annotation form. but cannot delete it. 180 . and then select Confirm (√). and key in a new value. Available operators are described later in this section. You can only review the information in this field. a value will automatically redisplay if it can be retrieved from the reference database.February 2003 If you delete the value in this field. Override — This button allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R). then a second form containing all matching rows displays. Clear — Clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form. the Default key is used. the system cancels the form and retrieves the values from the EE spec key field on the original form. the field remains null. You can use relational operators when keying in your own select criteria. You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button. If more than one row matches the criteria. Otherwise. Select — Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form. then the cell name or the Default key will be used to locate default data. Once you place an override key on an element. the key specified in the user element is used. If the linkage is not present on a connect point or one-line. and then automatically depresses the Override button to select a different row(s) from the specification table. you can modify it. select the row you want. If an override linkage is not present on a device or a title block. If no key exists in the user element._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . which automatically activates it. Key Description — Displays the description from the reference database of the current EE Reference Database Key. Clearing the column values allows you to key in new select criteria. The lower portion of the Active [One_Line Type] Parameters form displays a specification table. The EE spec key field on the upper portion of the form is used as the key for the Column name values on the lower portion of the form. If you select Cancel (X).

representing zero or more characters. Using the form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. accept input. This operator is a wild card. At any point during this operating sequence. 181 . The queried values must have every character aside from the underline in common with the given value. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than or equal to the given value. This operator indicates that the queried values should NOT be equal to the given value._ _______________ This command accepts certain relational operators as search criteria. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. If you do not enter another operator. page 119. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than or equal to the given value. see Precision Input Form. Field Descriptions > greater than numeric < less than numeric >= greater than or equal to less than or equal to not equal to numeric <= numeric != numeric % wild card CHAR _ underline CHAR 9. This operator is a wild card. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than the given value. and exit a command. You should be familiar with the following operators: Symbol Name Data Type numeric Description = equal to This is the default operator. route one-lines. The queried values must have every character aside from the % in common with the given value. reject input. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than the given value. you can locate elements. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. reset a command action. Modify Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. the system assumes =. For detailed information about precision input. representing a single character.

Return to step 2. the system displays the message Element not found. Accept/Reject Press <D> to accept the highlighted element. drop point. The system highlights the specified element. The form displays all the current values associated with the element. The annotation form displays when you accept the element. Return to Step 2. three-line. The new value displays in the design file. and place a data point. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the annotation form without saving your changes. 4. 6. 182 . Position the column value. This step repeats for each new value. The message disappears when you identify a valid element._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The column value displays in drag mode attached to the cursor. 2. reset <R> to skip.February 2003 Steps 1. It also identifies all the possible values (column values) associated with this element. or RCP). The prompt indicates the column alias being placed. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted element. Identify Raceway element Identify the element to annotate (one-line. Placing [column alias] Data point <D> to place. When there are no more values to place. return to Step 2. 5. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the annotation form. equipment pointer. 3. — OR — Exit the command. The Annotate Element precision input form displays. If you do not locate an acceptable element. Select the Annotate Element command. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications.

Field Descriptions 9. these values are loaded into the project database._ _______________ Any value placed with the Annotate Element command will be entered into the drawing and. When you annotate any raceway element. optionally. repropagate all of the connected raceway elements. When you load the project database. if you see graphics extending into the next raceway element. displayed. Modify 183 .

184 .February 2003 Copy Element This command copies raceway elements to specified locations within the design file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . reject input. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Equipment pointers and drop points cannot be copied using this command. For detailed information about precision input. accept input. This command will copy a single RCP provided that no one-lines are attached. You can use this command to copy one-lines and their associated elements. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. you can locate elements. route one-lines. see Precision Input Form. At any point during this operating sequence. page 119. reset a command action. and exit a command. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Using the form.

9._ _______________ Steps 1. Repeat this step. The system copies the element to the specified location in the design file. 2. Return to Step 2. Identify Raceway One-Line or RCP Identify the one-line or RCP element you intend to copy and accept it with <D>. 3. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. If you do not locate an acceptable element. Steps The system highlights the specified element. — OR — Press <R> to select another element to copy. Select the Copy Element command. Modify 185 . The Copy Element precision input form displays. Enter placement point Specify a location for the copied element. the system displays the message Element not found.

and exit a command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. and annotation. you can locate elements. reset a command action. drop points. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. equipment pointers. At any point during this operating sequence. If an RCP is moved. 186 . three-line fittings. All associated annotation. all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . three-line fittings. reject input. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. see Precision Input Form. all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. and equipment pointers will also be moved. accept input. All associated annotation. RCPs.February 2003 Move Element This command moves individual raceway elements as specified within the design file. If a one-line is moved. route one-lines. page 119. Using the form. You can use this command to move one-lines. and equipment pointers will also be moved. For detailed information about precision input.

3. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. Identify Raceway element Identify the element you intend to move and accept it with <D>. 2. Steps The system highlights the specified element. Return to Step 2. If you do not locate an acceptable element. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. The Move Element precision input form displays. the system displays the message Element not found._ _______________ Steps 1. 9. Select the Move Element command. Modify 187 . Enter placement point Specify the new location for the element. Repeat this step. — OR — Press <R> to select another element to move. The system moves the element to the specified location.

reset a command action. At any point during this operating sequence. This command will copy a single RCP provided that no one-lines are attached. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. reject input. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. you can locate elements. Using the form. and exit a command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Equipment pointers and drop points cannot be copied using this command. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. accept input. You can use this command to copy one-lines and their associated elements. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. page 119. For detailed information about precision input. route one-lines. see Precision Input Form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Clone Element This command copies raceway elements multiple times to specified locations within the design file. 188 .

Enter placement point Identify the location of the first copy. The element highlights. Return to step 2. 4. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. 3. 2. Identify Raceway One-Line or RCP Identify the element you want to clone (copy) and accept it with <D>. Confirm (√) the number of times to clone the element. — OR — Cancel the form and reenter the number of clones. The point you identify the element with becomes the origin of the copy. The clone elements are placed in the design file. Key in number of clones Key in the number of times to clone the identified element. A warning box displays verifying the number of times you want to clone the identified element. Modify 189 . If you are placing more than one clone. Steps 9. each successive clone is placed the same distance and direction from the previous clone as the first clone is from the original element. 5. Select the Clone Element command._ _______________ Steps 1.

the attached RCP will also move. Segments attached to the moved one-line segment will stretch or shrink to maintain connections with the moved one-line segment. reject input. accept input. reset a command action. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. page 119. any RCPs that are associated with a segment by a drop point will move only if the RCP and the drop point are coincident. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. see Precision Input Form. 190 . To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element.February 2003 Move One-Line Segment This command moves one-line segments. Using the form. At any point during this operating sequence. you can locate elements. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Also. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. For detailed information about precision input. and exit a command. route one-lines. If the first or last segment of a one-line is moved._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Any one-lines attached to the RCP will stretch or shrink to maintain connections with the moved one-line segment.

— OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Identify Raceway One-Line Segment Select the one-line segment you want to move and accept it with <D>. page 297 for more information on this toggle. The point that identifies the one-line segment in this step will be reference point used when placing the one-line segment at the new location. If you have the Automatic Propagation toggle set to on. the one-line will automatically repropagate after the move. Enter data point to place Identify the new location of the one-line segment. The system moves the segment to the specified location. 2. — OR — Press <R> to select another one-line segment to move._ _______________ Steps 1. 3. Repeat this step. Select the Move One-Line Segment command. The selected one-line segment highlights. Steps 9. See Propagation Setup. Modify 191 .

also move with the vertex. The one-line vertex closest to the point where you identify the one-line is automatically selected._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. 2. page 119. the attached RCP. accept input. Using the form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. equipment pointers. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. reject input. and equipment pointer annotation that is associated with the RCP. along with any annotation. The selected vertex highlights. Select the Move One-Line Vertex command. At any point during this operating sequence. 192 . Identify Raceway One-Line Vertex Select the vertex of the one-line you want to move and accept it with <D>. see Precision Input Form. For detailed information about precision input.February 2003 Move One-Line Vertex This command moves a one-line vertex. and exit a command. If a one-line end vertex is moved. you can locate elements. route one-lines. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Steps 1. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. reset a command action. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Any segments attached to a moved vertex will stretch or shrink to maintain connection.

_ _______________ 3. page 297 for more information on this toggle. See Propagation Setup. — OR — Press <R> to select another one-line vertex. Move One-Line Vertex 9. If you have the Automatic Propagation toggle set to on. Repeat this step. the one-line will automatically repropagate after the move. Enter data point to place Identify the new location of the vertex. Modify 193 .

route one-lines. see Propagation Setup. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. The Propagate Element command automatically adds propagated (three-dimensional) fittings between non-straight raceway segments with a common RCP. reject input. Manually placed or edited fittings will propagate exactly as placed.err file. page 297 . select the Highlight Propagation Errors command. At any point during this operating sequence. page 314 . All other element will propagate depending on the specific situation of the element. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. reset a command action. 194 . For detailed information about precision input. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. A description of some of the delivered fittings follows the operating sequence in this section. accept input. You can set active parameters for propagation through the Propagation Setup form. Using the form. To view errors that occur during propagation. This command displays to the screen the pro. which resides in the <current_project>/rway/tmp directory._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . page 119.February 2003 Propagate Element This command expands one-line segments and RCPs into three-dimensional elements (a process called propagation). you can locate elements. see Precision Input Form. For information about the form. and exit a command. see Highlight Propagation Errors.

Go to step 2. Reducers: fittings produced by propagating two or three intersecting one-line segments which have different raceway parameters. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. Wyes: fittings produced by propagating three intersecting one-line segments. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. 3. Fittings are produced through propagation and can be divided into the following categories: Straights: fittings produced by propagating a one-line segment. The Project Run precision input form displays. Select the Propagate Element command. Crosses: fittings produced by propagating four intersecting one-line segments. For information about this table. page 507 . Go to step 1. 195 . If you do not locate an acceptable one-line or RCP. Modify This section describes some of the fittings available with the delivered raceway one-line types. see Specification. The system propagates the identified one-line and returns you to step 2 to continue identifying elements for propagation. The attributes associated with each fitting are contained in the tray_part table in the reference database. — OR — Exit the command._ _______________ Steps 1. Identify Raceway element Identify a raceway one-line or RCP. 2. Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. Fittings 9. the system displays the message Element not found. Elbows: fittings produced by propagating two intersecting one-line segments. Propagate Element The system highlights the specified element.

February 2003 The following illustrations detail some of the fittings available for each raceway one-line type: Tray Fittings Wireway Fittings 196 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Modify 197 ._ _______________ Conduit Fittings Propagate Element 9.

Subtype — Displays the active subtype for the displayed Type value. Symbol — Displays the name of the Eden symbol you are placing. Field Descriptions Type — Displays the active three-line type for the current specification. select a value from the list. The list contains all available three-line types (elbow. page 214 . select a value from the list. rigid. The list contains all available subtypes (vertical._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 198 . Modifying the value in the Part field may also change the active and available Type values. To change the displayed angle.) for that specification. and Qualifier for the current specification. To change the displayed three-line type. etc. etc. Modifying the value for Type also changes the active and available subtypes. select an angle from the list or select the field. Options Remove RCP — Deletes an RCP from the design file. You can only review the values in this field.) for the active type and subtype in the current specification. See Remove RCP. Subtype. horizontal. straight. The list contains available angles. To change the displayed subtype. Angle — Displays the active angle associated with the Type.) for the active type and subtype in the current specification. and key in the new value. Qualifier — Displays the active qualifier for the displayed Type and Subtype. To change the displayed qualifier. select a value from the list. etc. inside vertical. Modifying Type or Subtype values may change the available qualifiers. The list contains all available qualifiers (adjustable. wye.February 2003 Edit/Insert Manual Fitting This command is used to edit fittings that have been manually placed in the design file.

199 . and key in the new value. Then select the field. select the corresponding Display button. and Qualifier. Spec1 — Displays the active specification for the displayed Type. You can only review the information in this column. If straight is not your active Type. Subtype. To display the specification itself. the Length field does not display on the form. select a value from the list. 9. The list contains all available parts for the current specification. Subtype. Modify The specification form has these parameters: — Column name .Displays the column name values currently associated with the specified type. Part — Displays the active part. Spec1. and key in a new value. To change the displayed specification. Edit/Insert Manual Fitting Length — Displays the length by which to project a straight.Displays the aliases of those columns in the database that are associated with the specified type. To change the displayed length. The list contains all available specifications. key in a negative angle. — Column value . if the placepoints and RCPs do not line up correctly. To change the displayed part. You can review and modify the values in this column. (-90 degrees) to shift the RCPs and placepoints to the correct location._ _______________ When placing a fitting (such as a vertical tee). select the Override button. You can also change any of the values for Type. select a value from the list. To change a value. Qualifier. select the field. and (if applicable) Spec2.

and drag it along the scale until it reaches the appropriate value. If only one row matches this criteria.Clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form. if any. see Annotate Element. then the column value has an associated codelist. For a list of valid operators. then a second form containing all matching rows displays. Overrides from the secondary specification are not passed to the Eden symbol. If more than one row matches the criteria. To change the active placepoint. To display the codelist.February 2003 — List . If an * displays in the List column. select the slide bar. Automatic Size — Automatically selects the appropriate size fitting base on the onelines connected to the fitting. See Spec1 for a description of the form. That nominal size is then compared to the fitting table nominal sizes. which automatically activates it. select the *.Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist. If in the fitting table there is a nominal size the same as the largest one-line nominal size. and then automatically depresses the Override button so that you can select a different row(s) from the specification. Secondary specifications are generally used with reducers. The list contains all available secondary specifications for the current settings. — Clear . and Qualifier. You can display the current specification itself by selecting the Display button.Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form. Type. for the given Spec1. — Select . If there is no fitting of that nominal size. then the largest fitting available is used._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — Override . Subtype. You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button. Doing so displays a specification form.Allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R). then that fitting is used. If there is no nominal size fitting larger than the one-line nominal size. page 178 . then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values. Spec2 — Displays the active secondary specification. You can use certain relational operators as search criteria. Rotate Orientation — These fields define the orientation matrix: 200 . Placepoint — Defines the point of attachment for the fitting you are currently placing. The fitting size is determined by comparing the spec table nominal size of all one-lines at the RCP and selecting the largest nominal size among them. Automatic Fit — Correctly orients the fitting to the one-lines. then the first fitting that is of greater nominal size than the one-line nominal size is used.

the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis._ _______________ — Angle .Defines the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. OR Identify the appropriate axis name (text) on the orientation matrix diagram (to the right of the Angle and About fields. vendor to 3. Attribute — The next four display lists on the form are the first four Part Key attributes from the active table and will change depending on which Table is active. — About .Defines the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. select the field. will be displayed in the size list. The attribute display lists are used to interactively query the database for the desired Part Key. type. 9. if you set material to feraloy. if you set type to form 7c. Secondary. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. then only those types that are 1/2 inch in size from vendor 3 and made of feraloy will be displayed in the types list. The list contains the available special part tables from the database. material. In other words. Modify 201 . and size to 1/2 inch. then only the sizes the form 7c comes in. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. Field Descriptions Table — Displays the active special part table from the database. To change the displayed angle. To change the active special part table. and key in a new value. Similarly. and toggle between the three axes (Primary. the form changes. made of feraloy from vendor 3.) Edit/Insert Manual Fitting I Button — Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. size. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. If you set the Driven By Spec/Table toggle to Table. material to feraloy. Each attribute displays only those values that have corresponding matching values for the other three attributes in the database. For example. select the field. and vendor display as the active attributes. select a table name from the list. you set the active Table to cond_body. and vendor to 3. To change the displayed axis.

Part Key — Displays the current part for the displayed Table. you should first consider a few points. regardless of the other attribute settings. The list contains all available parts from the table. select a part from the list. When deciding whether your fitting information will come from a specification or from a table in the database. The following table indicates fittings that are specification-driven and those that are special parts. Specification-driven fittings rely on the specification information (width. Modifying the Table value also changes the active and available Part values. page 119 . All parts of a given specification will inherit the attributes of that specification. radius. height. see the descriptions earlier in this section. On the other hand. You can display the current table information for the part by selecting the Display button.February 2003 Select/All toggles — Overrides the interactive queries of the attribute fields. Before Using This Command You should be familiar with precision input and its functions. These fields and the commands operate identically in either Driven By Spec or Driven By Table modes. Such fittings are called special parts. Specification-Driven Fittings straight elbow wye cross dropout Special Parts pullbox conduit body light fixture 202 . see Precision Input Form.) to construct the three-line symbols. To change the active part. all available values for that attribute are displayed in the list. For information about the Placepoint and Rotate Orientation fields as well as the form commands. etc. See the description of the Spec1 field earlier in this section for detailed information about the form parameters._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . When set to All. some fittings derive their information from their own database tables because they are not so easily classified into a common group of parts. For more information.

Select the Edit/Insert Manual Fitting command. The Edit/Insert Manual Fitting form displays. set the toggle to Driven By Spec. 3. 2. Go to step 4. set the toggle to Driven By Table. Edit/Insert Manual Fitting 9. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. 4. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the form without editing the fitting or RCP. Identify Raceway Fitting or RCP Select the fitting or RCP you want to edit and accept it with <D>. To derive fitting attributes from a specification in the database._ _______________ Steps 1. — OR — To derive fitting attributes from a special part table in the database. Modify 203 . Set the Driven By Spec/Table toggle to meet your requirements. Select Confirm when finished. Edit the fitting as needed.

Using the form. The Modify One-Line precision input form displays. accept input. page 119._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . one segment of the one-line will display as a solid line with increased line weight. You cannot modify the termination points of a one-line. You can reverse the segment to be modified by pressing <R>. For detailed information about precision input. When identified. The message will disappear when you identify a valid element. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. route one-lines. and exit a command. you can locate elements. the system displays the message Element not found. the other segment appears as a dashed line. reject input. At any point during this operating sequence. reset a command action. Steps 1. The system highlights a valid one-line. 204 . Identify Raceway One-Line Identify a one-line in the design.February 2003 Modify One-Line This command modifies the route of an existing one-line. 2. see Precision Input Form. If you do not locate an acceptable element. You will identify the one-line to be modified at the point where modification should begin. Select the Modify One-Line command. The dashed segment will then be modified. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form.

6. Modify 205 . and return to step 2. — OR — Reject the one-line element as displayed. Accept/reject Accept the one-line element as displayed. The command prompts you to identify another one-line. Part of the one-line displays with an increased line weight. Modify One-Line 9. — Pressing <R> (or Reject) a second time rejects the one-line. — OR — Reject the element. — Pressing <R> (or Reject) once reverses the segments to be modified. 4. Go to step 2. Enter next point Enter points to draw new one-line routes. To terminate the new routes. Data Point Accepts. Reset Rotates Accept the cross section. Go to step 2. place a data point on the original one-line. Raceway one-line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. The system saves the rotation and returns to the beginning of the command. The one-line highlights._ _______________ 3. Accepting the element identifies the one-line for modification. You can press <R> (or Reject) to reject the last segment drawn. — OR — Reset to return to the previous step. or at the RCP containing the end of the one-line you are modifying. The command reroutes the one-line according to your specifications. while the part to be modified displays as a dashed line. Repeat this step. 5. prompting you to Identify Raceway One-Line. — OR — Rotate the cross section by the rotation angle defined in Raceway Defaults.

— OR — Continue rotating the cross section._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 7. Accept the rotation and return to step 2.February 2003 The system rotates the cross section and prompts you again to accept or continue rotating it. 206 .

For example. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. page 119. then the first fitting that is of greater nominal size than the one-line nominal size is used. The spec table and the fitting table are defined in the rule._ _______________ Place Fitting by Rule This command places a non-standard fitting at an RCP using a set of rules defined in the reference database. see Precision Input Form. If there is no fitting of that nominal size. then that fitting is used. reset a command action. page 425 for a list of the delivered default rules. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. you can locate elements. If there is no nominal size fitting larger than the one-line nominal size. a LB fitting be placed. and exit a command. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. then the largest fitting available is used. Place Fitting by Rule 9. route one-lines. Modify Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. one rule might define that at a 90 degree intersection of two conduits. Using the form. You can add to or replace the delivered rule set by editing the tl_fit_env table in the database. You must define the rules in the reference database. accept input. See EE Databases. If in the fitting table there is a nominal size the same as the largest one-line nominal size. That nominal size is then compared to the fitting table nominal sizes. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. The fitting size is determined by comparing the spec table nominal size of all one-lines at the RCP and selecting the largest nominal size among them. At any point during this operating sequence. 207 . For detailed information about precision input. reject input.

Select the Place Fitting by Rule command. 2._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Otherwise the correct fitting as defined by the rule is placed on the RCP.February 2003 Steps 1. 208 . displays. then the message Unable to find a rule that applies. Identify Raceway Fitting or RCP Select the RCP on which you want to place the fitting. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. If no rule is defined for the selected RCP’s situation.

the Combine Coincident RCPs form displays listing the coincident RCP information. 209 . Combine — Merges the coincident RCPs into one RCP. If no coincident RCPs are found. All RCPs must have a system in common._ _______________ Combine Coincident RCPs Combine Coincident RCPs This command is used to check for coincident RCPs in the design file. Steps 1. the message No coincident RCPs found displays and the command exits. One-Line Type — Displays which one-line type each RCP belongs to. you are given a choice of which RCP to keep. then the RCPs can be merged. Systems — Displays which system each RCP belongs to. All coincident RCPs must be of the same one-line type. If Invalid. 9. Status — Defines if the RCPs can be merged. If Combinable. Modify Each set of coincident RCPs is listed in the form separated by the horizontal dotted line. If coincident RCPs are found and can be combined. RCPs can be combined if the following criteria are true: No more than four (4) RCPs are coincident. Select the Combine Coincident RCPs command. Connectivity is re-established for the attached one-lines after RCPs have been combined. — OR — If coincident RCPs are found. then you need to fix the coincident RCPs in your model.

210 . select the RCP information on the form to highlight the associated elements in the model. 4. You can not combine RCPs that have an Invalid status. Choose which RCP in the set of RCPs you want to keep and leave that line highlighted. The RCPs are combined._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . changes to Kept. and the Status of the remaining RCP. 3.February 2003 2. For each set of coincident RCPs. The status of the removed RCP changes to Combined. the one you selected. Select the Combine button to merge that set of coincident RCPs.

Select the Delete Duplicate One-Lines command._ _______________ Delete Duplicate One-Lines This command is used to check for and correct duplicate one-lines (having only two vertices) that occupy the same geographical space and terminate on the same RCPs. then the Delete Duplicate One-Lines form displays. select the one-line information on the form to highlight that one-line in the model. If no duplicate one-lines are found. Modify 3. then the message No duplicate one-lines found displays and the command exits. 4. Continue to select the one-line to keep and deleting the other. Select the Delete button to delete the other one-line(s). The Status of the one-line you chose changes to Save. 9. The one-line is deleted and its Status changes to Deleted. Select Cancel when finished. For each set of duplicate one-lines in the form. 5. Choose which one-line out of each set you want to keep. — OR — If duplicate one-lines are found. 211 . Delete Duplicate One-Lines Steps 1. The Status of the one-line you wanted to keep changes to Kept. Each set of duplicate one-lines is listed in the form separated by a dotted horizontal line. 2.

reset a command action. RCPs (only if no one-lines are attached). Using the form. For detailed information about precision input. Select the Delete Element command from the menu. you can locate elements. Identify Raceway element Identify an element for deletion. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. route one-lines. If you do not locate an acceptable element. 212 .February 2003 Delete Element This command removes elements from the design file. and exit a command. The Delete Element precision input form displays. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. reject input. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. see Precision Input Form. the system displays the message Element not found. At any point during this operating sequence. You can use this command to delete one-lines. and annotation. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. cosmetic graphics. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. The system highlights the specified element. 2. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. accept input. page 119. drop points. equipment pointers. Steps 1._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

annotation. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the element for deletion. 9. Modify 213 . — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted element. Return to Step 2. Return to step 2. propagated fittings. Delete Element If you accept the highlighted element._ _______________ — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. the system deletes it. and RCPs (unless shared by another one-line) that are associated with the selected element. It also deletes all cross sections. 3.

214 . You cannot use the Delete Element commands to remove an RCP.February 2003 Remove RCP This command removes a raceway connect point (RCP) from the design file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. — The two attached one-lines are of the same one-line type. unless the RCP has no one-lines attached. accept input. At any point during this operating sequence. the annotation for the second one-line is deleted. and exit a command. — The two attached one-lines belong to identical systems. you can locate elements. the two one-lines form a single one-line element. reset a command action. The command will remove an identified RCP only if all of the following conditions are true: — Two one-lines are attached to the RCP. reject input. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Using the form. route one-lines. page 119. For detailed information about precision input. see Precision Input Form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Once such an RCP is removed. If both onelines are annotated. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form.

The Remove RCP precision input form displays. If you accept the RCP. Select the Remove RCP command. Modify 215 ._ _______________ Steps 1. Raceway connect point Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the highlighted RCP for deletion. The message disappears when you identify a valid RCP. 3. the system displays the message Element not found. the command deletes it or displays an error message to the screen. the system prompts you to identify another. The system highlights the specified element. Identify Raceway RCP Identify an RCP to remove. If you reject the RCP. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted RCP for deletion. Remove RCP 9. Return to step 2. 2. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. If you do not locate an acceptable RCP. Go to Step 2.

useful for removing manually placed special fittings (like pullboxes and conduit bodies) and replacing them with bends. 3. Return to step 2. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted fitting and return to step 2. Select the Delete Fitting command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . This command does not remove the RCP. or the fitting’s RCP. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Steps 1.February 2003 Delete Fitting This command deletes the raceway fitting from a selected RCP. 216 . Identify Raceway Fitting or RCP Select the fitting. Accept/Reject Press <D> to accept the highlighted fitting and delete it. 2. to delete.

Select the Remove One-Line Vertex command. you can locate elements. Remove One-Line Vertex Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. 217 . For detailed information about precision input. route one-lines. You can not delete the end points of the one-line using this command. Modify Steps 1. At any point during this operating sequence. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. accept input. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. 9._ _______________ Remove One-Line Vertex This command deletes an internal one-line vertex. 2. reject input. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. page 119. Identify Raceway One-Line Vertex Select the vertex of the one-line you want to remove. The selected vertex highlights. The one-line vertex closest to the point where you identify the one-line is automatically selected. see Precision Input Form. Using the form. and exit a command. reset a command action.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . the one-line repropagates.February 2003 3. The vertex is removed. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted vertex and choose another one. Return to step 2. Return to step 2. 218 . Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the highlighted vertex as the one to remove. If Automatic Propagation is on.

you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Using the form. page 297 for information about the Automatic Propagation toggle. and exit a command. If automatic propagation is toggled on. the command will repropagate the one-line. while retaining the original geometry of the one-line. (Automatic propagation is on to show the resulting seamless representation. accept input. Modify 219 . For detailed information about precision input. route one-lines.) The following example demonstrates the effect of the Minimize Joints command on a oneline._ _______________ Minimize Joints This command reduces to a minimum the number of vertices in an identified one-line. reset a command action. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command.) Minimize Joints Automatic propagation must be toggled on in order for the results of this command to be visible. (See Propagation Setup. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. see Precision Input Form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. page 119. reject input. 9. At any point during this operating sequence. you can locate elements.

Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted one-line to minimize the number of its vertices.February 2003 Steps 1. Select the Minimize Joints command from the menu. Go to step 2. — OR — Reject the element. The command reduces the number of vertices comprising the one-line to a minimum (while retaining the original geometry). The Minimize Joints precision input form displays. Identify Raceway one line Identify a one-line in the design. Go to step 2. the system displays the message Element not found. 3. The command prompts you to identify another one-line. 220 . The message will disappear when you identify a valid element._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 2. The system highlights a valid one-line. If you do not locate an acceptable element.

_ _______________ Change System Parameters This command changes the system parameters. Project Rule — Displays the Project Rule assigned to each of the selected systems for calculating raceway fill. Modify Percent — Specifies the current Percent space allocation assigned to each of the selected systems. The Project Rule Set determines which rules can be assigned to the active systems. Systems — Displays all the systems associated with the selected element. The total of the system Percents is displayed in the field at the bottom of the Percent column. When a row is selected. All the selected systems percentages are summed to calculate the total percentage. a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process is displayed for review and selection. select the row and select the Cancel (X) on the list of Rules. The primary system determines the symbology of the elements. for the systems associated with a single raceway element. To display a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process. select the *. 9. If an * displays in the List column. This Percent is used when calculating the cable fill of the raceway section in the EECMS product. If the Project Rule Set is not defined. Project Rule Set — Displays the Project Electrical Code from the your project schema’s project table. The Percent represents the portion of the raceway’s width assigned to that system. then the Project Rule can be assigned. Project Rules cannot be assigned. 221 . This is defined in EEmgr with the EE CMS Project Definition process. the system Percent and the Project Rule. Change System Parameters Field Descriptions Primary System — Displays the primary system. To clear the Project Rule. The total Percent space allocation cannot exceed 100 percent. List — Indicates whether or not a Project Rule can be assigned.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. you can locate elements. The precision input form displays. 4. route one-lines. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. accept input. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. 222 . At any point during this operating sequence. Using the form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. reset a command action. 5. 3. page 119. and exit a command. Select the Change System Parameters command. reject input.February 2003 Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Steps 1. see Precision Input Form. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without making any changes to the selected element. 2. The selected element is changed to reflect you selections. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. The identified element highlights. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. For detailed information about precision input. Identify Raceway element Identify an element in the design file. — OR — Exit the command.

and so forth). Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. or by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. Topics 9. The Modify Group commands allow you first to define a group of elements and then to manipulate the group in part or as a whole. then selecting Modify Group Commands. Annotate Element by Group — Places. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. annotation. Propagate Element by Group — Expands some or all one-line elements of a specified group into three-dimensional elements. Copy Element by Group — Copies within the design file some or all elements of a specified group. You can also propagate one-lines in a particular group using these commands. Modify Define Group — Identifies raceway elements for inclusion in a particular group. Clone Group — Copies a group multiple times in the same direction. and edits intelligent annotation for raceway elements within a specified group._ _______________ Modify Group Commands The Modify Group commands define and manipulate groups within a design file. 223 . Groups are temporary associations of Raceway and other elements in your model. reviews. and delete elements of specified groups. Modify Group Commands You can use individual Modify Group commands to move. and to review or edit element annotation. The Modify Group palette is activated by selecting the Modify Group command from the Modify palette. three-lines. then selecting Palette. copy. Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line.

224 . Replace Systems Group — Changes the defined active system type of a one-line. Delete Element by Group — Removes from the design file some or all elements of a specified group.February 2003 Place Fitting by Rule Group — Places non-standard fittings using a set of rules defined in the reference database. Add Systems Group — Defines multiple systems for a single one-line._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Minimize Joints by Group — Reduces to a minimum the number of vertices of some or all one-lines in a specified group.

Modify Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands. 9. and so forth). page 253 and Runtime Setup Commands. not MicroStation manipulation commands. you should use these commands. you can use these commands throughout the design session. you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file. page 119 . See Setup Commands. For reliable results. For detailed information about precision input. because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. You must also have an active system and one-line type defined in the design file. any time you are modifying raceway elements. page 129 for information about placing elements in the model). 225 . Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. Using the Modify Group Commands Before Using These Commands These commands require that you have existing raceway elements in your design file (see Design Commands. annotation. Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. page 287 for instructions about setting up your systems and oneline types._ _______________ Using the Modify Group Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. see Precision Input Form. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Modify Group commands. Group Workflow You must use the Define Group command to create and activate an element group before using other Modify Group commands. three-lines.

Create — Creates a group containing the elements you specify in the EE Element Types list. you can manipulate the group as a whole or in part. and key in a name. To enter a group name. Use caution when you are manipulating groups in Entire Group mode.February 2003 Define Group This command compiles a group from elements you specify. select the group name key-in field. select a group from the list. Available Groups — Lists the groups you have already created. Once you have defined a group of Raceway elements using this command. using the Hilite option. A group is a temporary association of Raceway elements in your model. If the toggle is set to Entire Group. then a command will prompt you once to accept/reject the specified group as a whole before performing the command action. The system prompts you just once to accept/reject a group for manipulation. 226 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you should assign your groups meaningful names that reflect their contents. The key-in field above the list accepts input for group name when you are defining a new group. The system adds the elements using the selection method you specified in the Graphic Method list. If the toggle is set to Single Element. The active group is highlighted in the list. then a command will prompt you to accept/reject every element within a specified group before performing the command action. Identifying the contents of an existing group can be done graphically. To change the active group. All groups you create using this command are dropped when you exit the EE Raceway design session. In general. however. Single Element/Entire Group — Determines how Modify Group commands will act upon existing groups.

_ _______________
To initiate the Create operation, select the button, key in a group name, and select Accept. The system then compiles a group according to your specifications. When processing is complete, review the form Message Area for information about the number of elements the new group contains. Drop — Removes the active group (the highlighted group in the Available Groups list). To initiate the Drop operation, select a group from the Available Groups list, select Drop, and then select Accept. Copy — Copies the specified contents of one group to a new group. To initiate the Copy action, select an existing group from the Available Groups list, select Copy, and key in a new group name. Add to — Adds elements you specify from the EE Element Types list to an existing group. The system compiles the elements using the selection method you specified in the Graphic Method list.

Define Group

To initiate the Add to operation, select an existing group from the Available Groups list, select Add to, and then select Accept. The system compiles the elements using the selection method you specified in the Graphic Method list. When processing is complete, review the form Message Area for information about the number of elements added to the group. Drop from — Removes elements you specify in the EE Element Types list from an existing group. If you remove all elements from a group, the system automatically drops the entire group. To initiate the Drop from action, select an existing group from the Available Groups list, select Drop from, and then select Accept. The system drops the elements using the selection method you specified in the Graphic Method list. When processing is complete, review the form message display for information about the number of elements dropped from the group. Hilite — Highlights in the design file the entire contents of an existing group. To initiate the Hilite action, select an existing group from the Available Groups list, and select Hilite. It is not necessary to select Accept. The system automatically highlights the group contents in the drawing. Clear Hilite — Clears all highlighting placed in the design when you use the Hilite command. EE Element Types — Displays all available element types available for inclusion in or deletion from a group. Types include one-lines, three-lines, RCPs, drop points, to equipment, and all annotation. You must choose at least one element type when creating, adding elements to, or dropping elements from a group.

9. Modify

227

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 Select All — Selects every element type from the EE Element Types list. Clear All — Clears all selected element types from the EE Element Types list. EE Method — This list displays optional restrictions for the items selected in the EE Element Types list. You can use the three options in this list to restrict the elements in your group to those belonging to particular one-line types or systems. – One-Line Type - Displays a list of available one-line types.

When you select a one-line type from this list, only those element types (RCPs, onelines, three-lines, and so forth) belonging to that one-line type will be included in your group. You can select individual one-line types from this list, or you can select all displayed one-line types (using Select All). Clear All cancels the selections you have made from the list. Once you have displayed the One-Line Type list, you must Cancel (X) or Confirm (√) your selections before selecting the Accept button on the main form. – System - Displays a list of available systems.

When you select a system from this list, only those element types (RCPs, one-lines, three-lines, and so forth) belonging to that system will be included in your group. You can select individual systems from this list, or you can select all displayed systems (using Select All). Clear All cancels the selections you have made from the list. Once you have displayed the System list, you must Cancel (X) or Confirm (√) your selections before you can select the Accept button on the main form. – Attributes - Displays a list of available element types from which you can define selection attributes.

228

_ _______________
When you select an element type from this list, an attribute list form displays for that element type in which you can specify the attributes to include in the group identification. Once you have defined the attributes, select the Accept button on the main form. To reset out of the attribute list form and disregard the attributes, select the Cancel (X) button on the attribute form.

Define Group

Graphic Method — Displays the available methods for selecting group elements. You will use these methods to identify elements for group creation, insertion into groups, or deletion from groups. These methods can serve to further restrict the element types you are including in your group. For example, if you identified one-line trays for insertion into a group, and select Fence Block from this list, the system inserts into the group only those one-line trays contained within the fence you place. – Selection - Prompts you to identify specified element types in the design file to drop from or include in a group. – Fence Block - Drops from or includes in a group those specified element types contained within a fence block you place in the design. – Fence Shape - Drops from or includes in a group those specified element types contained within a fence shape you place in the design. – View - Drops from or includes in a group those specified elements types contained in a view you identify. – All Elements - Drops from or includes in a group all specified element types in the design.

9. Modify

229

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Steps
1. Select the Define Group command. The Groups form displays. 2. Create a group of elements: — Key in a name for the group in the field provided. — Select the Create button under Group Operations. — Use the EE Element Types, EE Method, and Graphic Method lists to define which elements to place in the group and how you want to select them in the design file. — Select the Process button at the top of the form. — Using the Graphic Method you defined, select your elements for the group. The group is created. The number of elements added to the group displays at the bottom of the form.

— OR — Select one of the available group from the list 3. Set the Entire Group/Single Element and Hilite On/Hilite Off toggles the way you want. Select one of the group modification commands.

4.

230

_ _______________
Copy Element by Group
This command copies all or selected valid elements in the active group. Equipment pointers and drop points are not copied even if they are part of the defined group.

Copy Element by Group

Before Using This Command
You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Using the form, you can locate elements, route one-lines, accept input, reject input, reset a command action, and exit a command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. For detailed information about precision input, see Precision Input Form, page 119. At any point during this operating sequence, you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element, press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. You must define a temporary group of elements, using the Define Group command, see Define Group, page 226. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. A fence group overrides the active group.

Steps
1. Select the Copy Element by Group command from the menu.

9. Modify

The Copy by Group precision input form displays. If you have not defined a group, the message No active group defined displays. — If you have a fence in the design, go to step 2. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form, go to step 3. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form, go to step 4. 2. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. Go on to step 3 if Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Go to step 5 if Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form.

231

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 3. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. The system highlights another group element if any elements remain uncopied. Repeat this step. Otherwise, the command exits automatically. 4. Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group. — OR — Reject the active group. The command exits automatically. 5. Define origin Enter a point to use as a base for the group copy. Elements within the active group highlight. 6. Enter placement point Enter a point for the location of the element you are copying. The system copies the element as specified. If there are group elements that remain uncopied, you are returned to step 3. Otherwise, the command exits automatically. — OR — Reject the element you are copying. The system returns you to step 3 if there are group elements that remain uncopied. Otherwise, the command exits automatically.

232

_ _______________
Annotate Element by Group
This command places, reviews, and edits intelligent annotation for some or all raceway elements associated with a specified group. Intelligent annotation is recognized by the EE Raceway product and can be added to an EE database. You can also add cosmetic text to a raceway model for display purposes, though the product does not recognize such annotation nor can the product add it to an EE database. The Annotate Element command recognizes one-lines, three-lines, Raceway Connect Points (RCP), straights, and fittings. For straights and fittings, you are allowed only to review the annotation (read only access). Using this command, you can change the specifications or sizes of raceway components.

Annotate Element by Group

9. Modify

Field Descriptions
Column name — Displays the aliases for those columns in the database that are associated with the specified element. The displayed columns reside in the mscolumns table in the database. You can only review the Column name column information. Column value — Displays the current value for the column whose alias displays in the Column name field. You can review and modify the values in this field. To change the values associated with the element, select the field, and key in the new value. You can enter blank spaces into the design, using your keyboard space bar. Empty <Return>s, however, enter nothing into the design. Entering a space or a text value for an attribute will override that value in the reference database. To delete an override on a reference database attribute, select the column value field and delete the blank character. Once you have deleted the override, a value will display in the field only if the value can be retrieved from the reference database. Otherwise, the field remains null.

233

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 If blanks exist for a field, the cursor will jump to the end of the blanks when the field is tagged beyond value. Source — Dislays the source of the corresponding column value. If Ref displays in the column, then the value derives from the reference database. If Dgn displays in the column, then the value has been defined from the design file. If you change a column value, the column displays New until you select Confirm (√) to save your changes. The next time you enter the annotation form, the Source column will display either Ref or Dgn, where New had displayed. Where UD displays in the column, the corresponding column value comes from user data. When modified, the value is saved back to user data. List column — Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist. If an * displays in the List column, then the column value has a corresponding codelist. To display the codelist, select the *. Access column — Indicates whether or not you can manipulate a particular column value. If you can view and modify (read and write) the column value, the Access column displays a R/W. If you can only view (read) the column value, then it will display an R. You can only review the information in this column. Display On/Off — This toggle enables or disables the design display for each column value. Where the toggle is On, the value will display in the design where you place it. You will be prompted to place displayed values when placing one-lines in the drawing. Reference Database Key — This field allows you to insert an override key into the reference database. When you enter a new value in the EE Reference Database Key field, it becomes an override key to the reference database. The key field is updated, and corresponding database values are retrieved and displayed on the annotation form. If the specified key does not exist in the reference database, an error message displays and the annotation form returns to the previous values. Any annotation you placed in the drawing will override the reference database defaults on the form. If you delete the value in this field, a value will automatically redisplay if it can be retrieved from the reference database. Otherwise, the field remains null. If an override linkage is not present on a device or a title block, then the cell name or the Default key will be used to locate default data. If the linkage is not present on a connect point or one-line, the key specified in the user element is used. If no key exists in the user element, the Default key is used. Once you place an override key on an element, you can modify it, but cannot delete it. To change the displayed value, select the field, and key in a new value. Key Description — Displays the description from the reference database of the current EE Reference Database Key. You can only review the information in this field.

234

_ _______________
Global/Single — Determines whether or not the annotation modifications you are making to the specified element will be applied to all identical element types within the group. For example, setting the toggle to Global while annotating an RCP will change the annotation for all RCPs within the group when you select Confirm (√). If the toggle is set to Single for the same RCP annotation, the system will modify annotation only for that RCP when you select Confirm (√). The lower portion of the Active [One_Line Type] Parameters form displays a specification table. The EE spec key field on the upper portion of the form is used as the key for the Column name values on the lower portion of the form. Select — Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form. The select criteria are those values that display in the Column value column on the lower portion of the annotation form. You can use relational operators when keying in your own select criteria. Available operators are described later in this section. If only one row matches the select criteria you provide, then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values. If more than one row matches the criteria, then a second form containing all matching rows displays.

Annotate Element by Group

From this form you will select the row(s) containing the desired values. To add values from the displayed specification table rows, select the row you want, and then select Confirm (√). If you select Cancel (X), the system cancels the form and retrieves the values from the EE spec key field on the original form. Clear — Clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form, and then automatically depresses the Override button to select a different row(s) from the specification table. Clearing the column values allows you to key in new select criteria. Override — This button allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R). You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button, which automatically activates it.

9. Modify

235

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 This command accepts certain relational operators as search criteria. You should be familiar with the following operators: Symbol Name Data Types numeric Description = equal to This is the default operator. If you do not enter another operator, the system assumes =. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than the given value. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than the given value. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than or equal to the given value. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than or equal to the given value. This operator indicates that the queried values should NOT be equal to the given value. This operator is a wild card, representing zero or more characters. The queried values must have every character aside from the % in common with the given value. This operator is a wild card, representing a single character. The queried values must have every character aside from the underline in common with the given value.

>

greater than

numeric

<

less than

numeric

>=

greater than or equal to less than or equal to not equal to

numeric

<=

numeric

!=

numeric

%

wild card

CHAR

_

underline

CHAR

Before Using This Command
You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Using the form, you can locate elements, route one-lines, accept input, reject input, reset a command action, and exit a command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. For detailed information about precision input, see Precision Input Form, page 119. At any point during this operating sequence, you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element, press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. You must define a temporary group of elements, using the Define Group command. (For information about the command, see Define Group, page 226 .) Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. A fence group overrides the active group.

236

_ _______________
Steps
1. Select the Annotate Element by Group command from the menu. The Annotate by Group precision input form displays. — If you have a fence in the design, go to step 2. — If there is not a fence in the design, go to step 3. 2. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. The system highlights the group contents. — OR — Reject the contents of the fence. The command exits automatically. Go to step 1. 3. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted group element. The system displays the Annotate Element form for the identified element. — OR —

Annotate Element by Group

9. Modify

Reject the highlighted group element. The system highlights another group element. Repeat this step. If no group elements remain, the command exits. 4. 5. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the annotation form. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the annotation form without saving your changes. Go to Step 3. 6. Placing [column alias] Data point <D> to place, reset <R> to skip. The prompt indicates the column alias you are placing. The column value displays in drag mode attached to the cursor.

237

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 Position the column value, and place a data point. The new value displays in the design file. The system places all new displayed annotation for the specified element. If you set the toggle to Global, the system places the same annotation for all identical element types in the group. When there are no more values to place for the element type, the system prompts you to annotate other element types within the group. Go to step 3. — OR — If you set the toggle to Single, the system returns you to step 3 to annotate other elements within the group. Go to step 3. Any value placed with the Annotate Element by Group command will be entered into the drawing and, optionally, displayed. When you load the project database, these values are loaded into the project database.

238

_ _______________
Clone Element by Group
This command copies the active group multiple times, useful when the same elements are to be placed at regular intervals. Equipment pointers and drop points are not copied even if they are part of the defined group.

Clone Element by Group

Before Using This Command
You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Using the form, you can locate elements, route one-lines, accept input, reject input, reset a command action, and exit a command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. For detailed information about precision input, see Precision Input Form, page 119. At any point during this operating sequence, you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element, press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. You must define a temporary group of elements, using the Define Group command, see Define Group, page 226. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. A fence group overrides the active group.

Steps
1. Select the Clone Group command.

9. Modify

The Clone Group precision input form displays. If you have not defined a group, the message No active group defined displays. — If you have a fence in the design, go to step 2. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form, go to step 3. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form, go to step 4. 2. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. Go on to step 3 if Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Go to step 5 if Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form.

239

Key in number of clones Key in the number of times to clone the identified group. Confirm (√) the number of time to clone the group. Otherwise. 5. 240 . A warning box displays verifying the number of times you want to clone the identified group. Repeat this step. — OR — Cancel the form and reenter the number of clones. Enter placement point Identify the location of the first copy. Return to step 2. Go to step 6. The command exits automatically. — OR — Reject the active group. If you are placing more than one clone. Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. 7. Define origin Identify a point in the group to use as the origin for the copies. 4. The clone elements are placed in the design file. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. the command exits automatically.February 2003 3. 6. 8. The system highlights another group element if any elements remain uncopied._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . each successive clone is placed the same distance and direction from the previous clone as the first clone is from the original group.

For information about the form. The Project by Group precision input form displays. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. see Propagation Setup. page 314 .err file._ _______________ Propagate by Group This command expands into three-dimensional elements all or selected valid one-line segments and RCPs from the active group. reject input. You can set active parameters for propagation through the Propagation Setup form. using the Define Group command. page 119. — If you have a fence in the design. 241 . go to step 2. For a description of some of the delivered fittings. Propagate by Group Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. page 226. You must define a temporary group of elements. A fence group overrides the active group. accept input. select the Highlight Propagation Errors command. and exit a command. you can locate elements. For detailed information about precision input. see Precision Input Form. Using the form. see Highlight Propagation Errors. At any point during this operating sequence. 9. route one-lines. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Select the Propagate by Group command from the menu. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. For information about using this command. This command displays to the screen the pro. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. reset a command action. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. The Propagate by Group command automatically adds propagated (three-dimensional) fittings between non-straight raceway segments with a common RCP. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. which resides in the <current_project>/rway/tmp directory). page 194 . go to step 3. Modify Steps 1. page 297 . see Propagate Element. see Define Group. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. To view errors that occur during propagation. go to step 4.

February 2003 2. or until you exit the command. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. If no group elements remain for propagation. — OR — Reject the contents of the fence. — OR — Reject the active group. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The system propagates every element belonging to the group. 3. The system propagates the element. The command exits automatically. the command exits automatically. Repeat this step until you have processed all elements within the group. The system highlights another group element for propagation. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to manipulate them as a group. If no group elements remain. the command exits automatically. or until you exit the command. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. and exits automatically. 4. and then highlights another group element for propagation. go to step 3. Repeat this step until you have processed all elements within the group. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. 242 . the command propagates all valid elements within the fence. Go to step 1.

You must define the rules in the reference database. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. A fence group overrides the active group. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. then the first fitting that is of greater nominal size than the one-line nominal size is used. Place Fitting by Rule by Group Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. page 425 for a list of the delivered default rules. Modify You must define a temporary group of elements. see Define Group. page 226. Using the form. accept input. See EE Databases. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. reject input. using the Define Group command. At any point during this operating sequence. For detailed information about precision input. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. reset a command action. If in the fitting table there is a nominal size the same as the largest one-line nominal size. then that fitting is used._ _______________ Place Fitting by Rule by Group This command places a non-standard fitting at an RCP using a set of rules defined in the reference database. The fitting size is determined by comparing the spec table nominal size of all one-lines at the RCP and selecting the largest nominal size among them. you can locate elements. page 119. For example. and exit a command. That nominal size is then compared to the fitting table nominal sizes. 243 . If there is no fitting of that nominal size. 9. then the largest fitting available is used. You can add to or replace the delivered rule set by editing the tl_fit_env table in the database. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. see Precision Input Form. one rule might define that a CLB fitting be placed at a 90 degree intersection of two conduits. The spec table and the fitting table are defined in the rule. If there is no nominal size fitting larger than the one-line nominal size. route one-lines.

The command exits automatically. If you have not defined a group. 244 . — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 4. 2. Go on to step 3 if Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. the message No active group defined displays. Otherwise. The system highlights another group element if any elements remain uncopied. — OR — Reject the active group.February 2003 Steps 1. — If you have a fence in the design. 3. go to step 4. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. The Group Place Fitting by Rule precision input form displays. Repeat this step. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. If no rule is defined for the selected RCP’s situation. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. the command exits automatically. Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group. go to step 2. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. Select the Place Fitting by Rule by Group command. Go to step 5 if Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Otherwise the correct fitting as defined by the rule is placed on the RCP. go to step 3. displays. then the message Unable to find a rule that applies.

— OR — Press <R> to reject the group and exit the command. For example. it will not be duplicated. Press <D> to accept the group as the one to add systems to. 2. Modify 245 . using this command you can add an alarm and control system to an existing element with a communication system. Steps 1._ _______________ Add Systems Group This command defines multiple systems for a single one-line. see Define Group. Add Systems Group Before Using this Command You must define a temporary group of elements using the Define Group command and the group mode must be set to Entire Group. The group that the systems will be added to highlights. This command will not change the master system. If you try to add a system that already exists on the element. A fenced group will override the active temporary group. Select the system or systems you want to add and select Confirm (√). It will only append systems to the element. the system defined at placement. The Add Systems form displays. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the form and command. 9. page 226 . 3. The system(s) is added. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for this command. Select the Add Systems Group command.

This Percent is used when calculating the cable fill of the raceway section in the EECMS product. Selecting a row in this field defines the Active System or Subsystems. Subsystem — This button allows the selection of subsystems. that is. The total of the system Percents is displayed in the field at the bottom of the Percent column. Project Rule Set — Displays the Project Electrical Code from the your project schema’s "project" table. Field Descriptions Systems — This button allows the selection of the active system. The total Percent space allocation cannot exceed 100 percent. If the Project Rule Set is not defined. All the selected systems percentages are summed to calculate the total percentage. Systems — Displays all the available systems. 246 . For example. Project Rules cannot be assigned. all defined systems for the group are removed and replaced by the new systems. the subsystem are all unselected. use this command when you want to change an existing high voltage tray to a low voltage tray. The Project Rule Set determines which rules can be assigned to the active systems._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The active system is automatically included as a subsystem. Changing the active system will cause the graphic symbology to change to the symbology define for the new system. The Percent represents the portion of the raceway’s width assigned to that system. While this button is depressed. the Percent and Project Rule can be defined for each subsystem. This is defined in EEmgr with the EE CMS Project Definition process. This command performs a total replacement of all systems.February 2003 Replace Systems by Group This command changes the defined active system(s) for a group. The active system determines the symbology of the raceway. Percent — Displays the current Percent space allocation assigned to each of the selected systems. When a new active system is selected.

Select the Replace Systems by Group command. You can not replace a system on just one element in a network of elements that have connectivity. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the form and the command. see Define Group. A fenced group will override the active temporary group. Steps 1. To display a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process. Replace Systems by Group Project Rule — Displays the Project Rule assigned to each of the selected systems for calculating raceway fill. you must define a group that contains all elements that have connectivity. To clear the Project Rule. one-lines. When a row is selected. Modify 2. The active group to be changed highlights. Select the new system type from the form and select Confirm (√). — OR — Press <R> to reject the group and exit the command. select the row and select the Cancel (X) on the list of Rules. The active group is changed to the new system type. page 226 . 247 . When defining the group for this command. If an * displays in the List column. Press <D> to accept the group. The Replace Systems form displays. and so forth that are associated through a series of graphically connected one-lines. A network may be thought of as all RCPs. Before Using this Command You must define a temporary group of elements using the Define Group command and the group mode must be set to Entire Group. drop points. 9. select the *. 3. then the Project Rule can be assigned._ _______________ List — Indicates whether or not a Project Rule can be assigned. a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process is displayed for review and selection. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for this command.

) The following example demonstrates the effect of the Minimize Joints command on a oneline. reset a command action. accept input._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you can locate elements. A fence group overrides the active group. Using the form. If automatic propagation is toggled on. page 226.) Automatic propagation must be toggled on in order for the results of this command to be visible. reject input. see Precision Input Form. 248 . To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. At any point during this operating sequence. the command will repropagate each affected one-line. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. For detailed information about precision input. route one-lines. You must define a temporary group of elements. see Define Group. (Automatic propagation is on to show the resulting seamless representation. (See Propagation Setup. page 297 for information about the Automatic Propagation toggle. page 119. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form.February 2003 Minimize Joints by Group This command reduces to a minimum the number of vertices in valid one-line(s) within the active group. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. and exit a command. using the Define Group command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. while retaining the original geometry of the one-line(s).

The Minimize Joints Group precision input form displays. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. go to step 4. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. The system minimizes the number of vertices comprising the one-line. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. The command exits automatically. 2. go to step 3. Go to step 3. Repeat this step. and then identifies another valid one-line within the group (if any remain). Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted one-line. — If you have a fence in the design. the system prompts you to minimize the number of vertices for each one-line within the fence. the command exits automatically. 9. Modify 3. and the command exits automatically. Select the Minimize Joints by Group command from the menu. — OR — Reject the highlighted one-line. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Accept/reject Group ([group name]) 249 . The system then identifies another valid one-line in the group. if any remain. go to step 2. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. If there are no valid one-lines remaining in the group. 4. If there are no valid one-lines remaining in the group._ _______________ Steps 1. Repeat this step. the vertices of all one-lines within the fence are reduced to a minimum number. Minimize Joints by Group — OR — Reject the contents of the fence. the command exits automatically.

250 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — OR — Reject the active group. The system minimizes the number of vertices for all valid one-line elements within the group.February 2003 Accept the active group. The command exits automatically. The command exits automatically.

page 119. go to step 2. reject input. For detailed information about precision input. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. Delete Element by Group Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. and exit a command. route one-lines. 251 . and the command exits automatically. Go to step 3. go to step 3. accept input. page 226. Steps 1. you can locate elements. 9. using the Define Group command. If you have not defined a group. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. You must define a temporary group of elements. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. The Delete by Group precision input form displays. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. — OR — Reject the contents of the fence._ _______________ Delete Element by Group This command deletes all or selected valid elements in an active group from the design file. 2. A fence group overrides the active group. see Define Group. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. the system prompts you to delete each element within the fence. the contents of the group are deleted. At any point during this operating sequence. the message No active group defined displays. see Precision Input Form. reset a command action. Using the form. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. go to step 4. Modify — If you have a fence in the design. Select the Delete Element by Group command from the menu. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form.

3.February 2003 The command exits automatically. If there are no remaining group elements for deletion. Repeat this step. and prompts you to delete another group element. The system deletes all valid elements within the group. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. the command exits automatically. Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group. The system prompts you to delete another group element if any remain for deletion. — OR — Reject the active group. 4. If there are no remaining group elements for deletion. the command exits automatically. The system deletes the element. The command exits automatically._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — OR — Reject the highlighted element. The command exits automatically. 252 .

and cross sections. reviews. Define One-Line Type — Selects any or all available one-line types from those available in the reference database for use in the design file. Cell Creation Commands — Create various types of raceway cells necessary for creating EE Raceway models. Setup 253 . and modify the default parameters. RCPs. Set Conduit Sizing Attributes — Defines which conduit attributes will be used selecting the correct size conduit in the Conduit Sizing command. Setup Commands The Setup commands allow you to define._ _______________ 10. and modifies the raceway default parameters for symbols. 10. Set Text Defaults — Defines. Symbology Control — Defines. reviews. Commands Set Raceway Defaults — Defines. and symbology settings for your design file. Define System — Selects any or all systems from those available in the reference database for use in the design file. Your system/application manager should ensure that the reference database contains the necessary systems and one-line types before you use these commands. you must use the Setup commands before using any other command group. and modifies the default parameters for text. one-line types. Setup Commands In a new design file. text nodes. and engineering units. and modifies the graphic symbology control for those one-line types you specified using the Set Symbology Control command. The Setup palette is activated by selecting Setup from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. systems. then selecting Palette from the resulting pulldown menu. report IDs. reviews. review. model annotation. working view. Set Symbology Control — Selects the standard graphic symbology control for all systems and one-line types in a design file.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Model Commands — Place and manipulate a model information in the design file. 254 .

Setup 255 . Using the Setup Commands Before Using These Commands You must have a valid reference database attached to your design file before using the Setup commands. Some of the setups performed by this group of commands are required for later design work and database operations. For individual command prerequisites. you must have defined at least one system and one-line type from the database using the Define System and Define One-Line Type commands._ _______________ Using the Setup Commands When to Use These Commands You will typically use Setup commands when you enter a design file for the first time. see the appropriate command descriptions. 10. Operating Information See individual command descriptions for specific operating information. Group Workflow Before using the symbology commands in this group (Set Symbology Control and Symbology Control).

Parameters — Displays the EE Raceway default digitizing parameters. To change a displayed value. You can review. see Define Duct Cross Section. and the shell of the duct bank when using the Define Duct Cross Section command. such as Color or Active Angle. To change a displayed value. To change a displayed value._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Use these fields to set the default symbology for different systems in a design file. page 164 for more information. see Define Duct Cross Section. and key in a new value. and key in a new value. and/or modify any of the values in these fields. reviews. define. You can review. existing systems. The system uses these settings when annotating the model either during cell creation or after you have placed one in the design file. represented by the matrix buttons. Margin Width — Defines the distance. including cross section parameters. define. and Raceway Connect Point (RCP) parameters. You will enter all raceway default values through the EE Raceway Defaults form. select the field. Default settings are applied to new systems created in or added to a design file. symbol defaults. select the field. in sub-units. Cross Section — Displays the default Scale Factor and Rotation Angle for cross sections. You can review. Global Symbology — Displays the default symbology settings for Model Annotation. Changes in these fields do not affect existing systems. and/or modify the values in these fields. and modifies raceway defaults. page 164 for more information. Duct — Specifies whether to use conduit or cable when using the Define Duct Cross Section command. select the field.February 2003 Set Raceway Defaults This command defines. and key in a new value. and/or modify the settings. define. Use the Set Symbology Control to make changes to individual. It also allows you to view the reference database contents for RCP. 256 . between the routed cable/conduit.

and/or modify the value in this field. Setup 257 . and key in a new value. 10. You can review. equipment pointer._ _______________ Working view — Displays the current working view for the design file. You can review. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. The information will display in the scrollable list in the lower right corner of the form. precision input uses the working view to place and locates points in the design. and drag it along the scale until the desired view number displays. 2. select the slide bar. You can only view this data. equipment pointer. select first the key field and then the Display button. define. select the field. Default Key — Displays the current default keys for RCP (raceway connect point). and/or modify this key. Additionally. The scale includes views 1 through 8. and key in a new value. To change a displayed value. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit without saving your changes. select the field. This value will also become the default RCP weight on the Symbology Control form. and drop point annotation. or drop point). RCP — Displays the Default Weight for RCPs. define. 3. To change the current working view. To display the current default data from the database for a particular element (RCP. Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements. The EE Raceway Defaults form displays. To change the displayed value. The working view determines the orientation of text and cells you place through precision input. Symbols — Displays the names of the cells that represent equipment pointers and drop points. Set Raceway Defaults Steps 1. Select the Set Raceway Defaults command.

To remove ALL systems from definition in the design file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . as well as those already selected for the current design file. Steps 1. select the Select All button. The systems you select display in the To Design column and will be defined in the design file once you select the Confirm button (√). The System Definition form displays. 2. In order to place one-lines. 258 . The System Definition form displays those systems available for selection from the reference database. so as to avoid duplication of elements. select the Clear All button. you must have at least one system defined in the design file. If you need systems not available to you. Select the Define System command. you should ask the system/application manager to add them to the reference database. Select the systems in the From Database column that you want to define in the present design file. — OR — Select those systems listed in the To Design column that you no longer want defined for the design file. Caution should be used when adding these to the database.February 2003 Define System This command allows you to select any or all available systems from the reference database for use in the design file. To define ALL systems from the reference database in the present design file.

Define System 10._ _______________ The systems you select are deleted from the To Design column and will no longer be defined in the design file. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. 3. Setup 259 .

you should ask the system/application manager to add them to the reference database. as well as those already selected for the current design file. select the Clear All button. 2. Select the one-line types in the From Database column that you want to define in the present design file. such as Set Active One-Line Type and Place One-Line Type. If you need one-line types not available to you. select the Select All button. — OR — Select those one-line types listed in the To Design column that you no longer want defined for the design file. The One Line Type Definition form displays those oneline types available in the database.February 2003 Define One-Line Type This command allows you to select any or all available one-line types from the reference database for use in the design file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . so as to avoid duplication of elements. You must define one-line types for the design file before you can use related commands. 260 . To remove ALL one-line types from definition in the design file. Select the Define One-Line Type command. The One Line Type Definition form displays. To define ALL one-line types from the reference database in the design file. Steps 1. The one-line types you select display in the To Design column and will be defined in the design file once you select the Confirm button (√). Caution should be used when adding these to the database.

Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. Define One-Line Type The one-line types you select are deleted from the To Design column and will no longer be defined in the design file. Setup 261 . — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes._ _______________ 3. 10.

You can also modify the system default symbology details if necessary. You can specify the one-line types for which to change the standard symbology by setting them to override mode. When you enter a new design file. For more information. page 260 . to make any changes in symbology. you must first use the Set Symbology Control command to specify the systems and one-line types that can be changed. The Symbology Control command allows you to set up the symbology details for all the override cases within a system. page 258 and Define One-Line Type. Therefore. The Set Graphic Symbology Control form displays a matrix of systems and one-line types and the standard graphic symbology assigned to each system (all one-line types within a system are originally assigned the same symbology). Before Using This Command You must have defined at least one system and one-line type in the design file. those oneline types will use a system default. For more information. 262 . In cases where you do not specify overrides for the one-line types within a system.February 2003 Set Symbology Control This command defines the standard graphic symbology for all systems and one-line types in a design file. all symbology is taken from the system defaults. see Define System._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . page 264 . see Symbology Control.

The Override settings you selected are deleted from the Override field and the default settings restored. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes._ _______________ Steps 1. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. so default symbology is not necessary for that system. Select the Set Symbology Control command. 10. — OR — Steps Toggle the Available button in each field to None to change the defaults symbology for all one-line types within a system. — OR — Select a one-line type from the list to "turn on" the override for that type in all systems. select the individual area that matches a system and one-line type to "turn on" an override for that case. Each one-line type within the system will then have its own symbology defined. Using your cursor. The Set Graphic Symbology Control form displays. To turn off ALL selected Override settings. The Override setting displays in the appropriate field(s). Setup 263 . — OR — Select the individual Override settings you wish to "turn off" (return to default status). 2. select the No Overrides button. 3.

You must have at least one system and one-line type defined for the design file in order to use this command. The display list contains a list of available systems. and key in the new value. select another system from the list. 264 . or select the field. To change the displayed one-line type (or system default). select another one-line type from the list. The Symbology Control form displays the current symbology settings for all systems and corresponding one-line types. page 262 for more information about this command). One Line Type Overrides — Displays the one-line type within the displayed system for which you can change the symbology settings. You can review and edit these settings. To change a value in the list.February 2003 Symbology Control This command defines. The display list contains a list of available one-line types within the currently displayed system. and modifies the graphic symbology for those one-line types you specified using the Set Symbology Control command (see Set Symbology Control. reviews. and key in a new value. and key in a system name. or select the field. System — Displays the system for which you can currently change the symbology settings. To change the displayed system. System Default will display in the One-Line Type display list. select the field. If you have not set overrides for all one-line types within a system. Symbology — Displays the symbology settings for the selected system and one-line type._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

The Symbology Control form displays._ _______________ Steps 1. Select the Symbology Control command. Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements. 3. 2. Setup 265 . Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. Symbology Control 10.

Text Nodes — These buttons and the associated display list display the current justification for text nodes in the design file. Width — Displays the default text width in a ratio of master units to sub units (#:#). You can modify the justification using either the buttons or the list. and modifies the MicroStation default parameters for text._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You will enter all values using the Text form. Field Descriptions Font — Displays the default font style number. or select a value from the list. 266 . reviews. and engineering units. To change the current text node justification. or select a value from the list. Height — Displays the default text height in a ratio of master units to sub units (#:#). Line length — Displays the default length for lines of text in a ratio of master units to sub units (#:#). Text String — These buttons and the associated display list display the current justification for text strings in the design file. select the button that graphically represents the desired justification. select the button that graphically represents the desired justification. To change the current text string justification. Line spacing — Displays the default vertical spacing between lines of text in a ratio of master units to sub units (#:#). text nodes. You can modify the justification using either the buttons or the list.February 2003 Set Text Defaults This command defines.

The Text form displays. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements. You can only review the displayed settings. Set Text Defaults Steps 1. Sub units. 10. Setup 267 ._ _______________ Engineering Units — These fields (Master units. 2. and Positional units) display the current PDS engineering units. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. Select the Set Text Defaults command. 3.

The Set Conduit Sizing Attributes form displays. 268 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Set Conduit Sizing Attributes This command defines which conduit attributes will be used in selecting the correct size conduit in the Conduit Sizing command. — THEN — Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the form. Steps 1. Define which attributes to use. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the form without saving any changes. Select the Set Conduit Sizing Attributes command. 2.

If you want to modify the delivered library._ _______________ Create Cell Commands The Create Cell commands create various types of raceway cells necessary for creating EE Raceway models. Create Cell Commands 10. in your cell library. Setup 269 . and modify the copied version. copy it to a nonproduction directory. EE Raceway is delivered with a sample cell library. which resides in win32app\eerway\dgn. This section contains detailed descriptions of the following commands: Create Model Cell — Creates or recreates a model cell to carry the sheet name of a drawing. Create Equipment Pointer Cell — Creates an equipment pointer symbol for later placement in the design file. Create Drop Point Cell — Creates a drop point symbol for later placement in the design file. along with all existing cells. You must have write access to the library before modifying it. rway. You must have a cell library attached to the design file in order to activate the Create Cell commands. The cells you create using this command are stored.cel.

page 119 . Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for using the Create Cell commands. see Precision Input Form. Before Using These Commands You must have a cell library with read/write privileges attached to the design file. because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. To display a list of available cell libraries. Operating Information See individual command descriptions for specific operating information.February 2003 Using the Create Cell Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. 270 . key in rc= in the MicroStation Command Window._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . For detailed information about precision input. You should be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Create Cell commands. you can use these commands throughout the design session.

4.) Press <D> to Accept the fence._ _______________ Create Model Cell Make sure you have a cell library attached to the design file before using this command and be sure the library is not read only. Accept/reject fence (This is the first prompt if a fence is already established when you start the command. key in rc=. Do not include any elements within the fence that you do not want as part of the cell. Enter second fence point Place the second data point of a fence block diagonal. 2. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Create Model Cell This command allows you to create a model cell and to store that cell permanently in your cell library. place the first data point of a fence block diagonal. To display a list of available cell libraries. Steps 1. Be sure to include any existing annotation that you want as part of the cell. 3. 10. Go to step 2. 271 . — OR — Press <R> to reject the fence. Setup 5. Select the Model button from the form. Enter first fence point If no fence is defined. Include all the graphic elements of the component. The Select cell type form displays. Make enough room within the fence to include all text elements within the fence. Include all the graphic elements of the component. Be sure to make room to include any text elements within the fence. Select the Create Cell command.

you are prompted to place any new values. see Annotate Element. However. 9. save your modifications by selecting Confirm (√). select the Column value field. allowing you to add annotation to the cell and displaying those values already in the cell. and press <Return>. etc.February 2003 6. a form displays prompting you to Close or Annotate._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The Annotate Element form displays. 8. go to step 10. To make a change or correction. When you accept the fence. When complete. If you select Close. Underlines (for empty enter data fields) will not be displayed on the screen cursor like other new values. Data point <D> to place. key in the value. go to step 7. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving the changes. The prompt tells you which value you are placing. they will be placed in the cell (and visible) when you press <D>. Placing sheet. For detailed information about the annotation form. page 178 . Turn the Display toggle on for any text attribute you want displayed in the cell. If you select Annotate. reset <R> to skip For all new displayed text attributes. To enter a value. Any values (including empty enter data fields) already present in the cell are edited automatically. 272 . 7. Return to step 7. select the field again and key in the new value.

The cell is created and placed into the attached cell library. To enter a value. When you select Close. 10. various error messages will display. To make a change or correction. All new non-displayed text attributes are placed at the center of the active fence. When complete. If you try to close with the fence around invalid elements. the Close cell parameters form displays. Refer to Error Messages. When complete. and press <Return>. You must enter a cell name. key in the value. The description is optional. This step repeats for each enter data field._ _______________ Move the text to the desired position in the drawing and press <D>. 12. Setup 273 . select the input box. Identify cell origin Place a data point to define the cell origin. Return to step 11. Create Model Cell 11. page 377 for descriptions of these messages. This point must be within the graphic extent of the fenced elements. confirm your entries by selecting Confirm (√). 10. select the input box again and key in the new value. The value is placed in the cell as you indicated. you are returned to step 7. — OR — Press <R> to reject the cell. The message Accept/reject Successful Completion displays as long as the fence is still active.

Enter first fence point If no fence is defined. 5. Make enough room within the fence to include all text elements within the fence. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Be sure to make room to include any text elements within the fence. Make sure you have a cell library attached to the design file before using this command and be sure the library is not read only. Steps 1. To display a list of available cell libraries. Select the To Equipment button from the form.) Press <D> to accept the fence. 4. Be sure to include any existing annotation that you want as part of the cell. Accept/reject fence (This is the first prompt if a fence is already established when you start the command.February 2003 Create Equipment Pointer Cell This command allows you to create a equipment pointer symbol and to store that cell permanently in your cell library. 3. The Select cell type form displays. Enter second fence point Place the second data point of a fence block diagonal._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . place the first data point of a fence block diagonal. Include all the graphic elements of the component. Include all the graphic elements of the component. 274 . Go to step 2. Select the Create Cell command from the command menu. Do not include any elements within the fence that you do not want as part of the cell. key in rc=. 2. — OR — Press <R> to reject the fence.

select the Column value field. 9. Setup For all new displayed text attributes. Return to step 7. 275 . The Annotate Element form displays. Underlines (for empty enter data fields) will not be displayed on the screen cursor like other new values._ _______________ 6. If you select Close. allowing you to add annotation to the cell and displaying those values already in the cell. Turn the Display toggle on for any text attribute you want displayed in the cell. they will be placed in the cell (and visible) when you press <D>. Data point <D> to place. Create Equipment Pointer Cell If you select Annotate. Any values (including empty enter data fields) already present in the cell are edited automatically. However. page 178 . reset <R> to skip 10. a form displays prompting you to Close or Annotate. go to step 11. 8. Placing equipment tag. save your modifications by selecting Confirm (√). To make a change or correction. To enter a value. go to step 7. For detailed information about the annotation form. key in the value. and press <Return>. you are prompted to place any new values. When you accept the fence. etc. see Annotate Element. When complete. The prompt tells you which value you are placing. select the field again and key in the new value. 7. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving the changes.

If you try to close with the fence around invalid elements. — OR — Press <R> to reject the cell. key in the value. The message Accept/reject Successful Completion displays as long as the fence is still active. the Close cell parameters form displays. various error messages will display. All new non-displayed text attributes are placed at the center of the active fence.February 2003 Move the text to the desired position in the drawing and press <D>. 10. Return to step 11. confirm your entries by selecting Confirm (√). you are returned to step 7. 12. This step repeats for each enter data field. 276 . To make a change or correction. The value is placed in the cell as you indicated. When complete. When complete. When you select Close. To enter a value. page 377 for descriptions of these messages. You must enter a cell name. select the input box again and key in the new value. The cell is created and placed into the attached cell library. 11. The description is optional. Identify cell origin Place a data point to define the cell origin. select the input box. Refer to Error Messages. This point must be within the graphic extent of the fenced elements._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and press <Return>.

Make enough room within the fence to include all text elements within the fence. Enter second fence point 10. Include all the graphic elements of the component. Accept/reject fence (This is the first prompt if a fence is already established when you start the command. Go to step 2. — OR — Press <R> to reject the fence. Setup Place the second data point of a fence block diagonal. Steps 1. 4. key in rc=. Enter first fence point If no fence is defined. 277 . place the first data point of a fence block diagonal. Do not include any elements within the fence that you do not want as part of the cell. 3. The Select cell type form displays. Be sure to include any existing annotation that you want as part of the cell. Be sure to make room to include any text elements within the fence. Select the Drop Point button from the form. Select the Create Cell command from the command menu. 5. Your cell library must contain a drop point cell for the placement of onelines in the design file (the drop point establishes connectivity between an RCP and a one-line where the two are of a different one-line type). Include all the graphic elements of the component._ _______________ Create Drop Point Cell Create Drop Point Cell This command allows you to create a drop point symbol and to store that cell permanently in your cell library. 2. Make sure you have a cell library attached to the design file before using this command and be sure the library is not read only.) Press <D> to accept the fence. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. To display a list of available cell libraries.

go to step 11. page 178 . select the Column value field. Return to step 7. To make a change or correction. and press <Return>. To enter a value. If you select Annotate. etc. When complete. If you select Close. Turn the Display toggle on for any text attribute you want displayed in the cell. go to step 7. 8._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving the changes. save your modifications by selecting Confirm (√). a form displays prompting you to Close or Annotate. 7. For detailed information about the annotation form. key in the value. 278 . Underlines (for empty enter data fields) will not be displayed on the screen cursor like other new values. Placing drop point tag. Data point <D> to place. Any values (including empty enter data fields) already present in the cell are edited automatically.February 2003 6. see Annotate Element. you are prompted to place any new values. However. The prompt tells you which value you are placing. they will be placed in the cell (and visible) when you press <D>. The Annotate Element form displays. select the field again and key in the new value. When you accept the fence. reset <R> to skip For all new displayed text attributes. allowing you to add annotation to the cell and displaying those values already in the cell. 9.

Return to step 11. Identify cell origin Place a data point to define the cell origin. select the input box again and key in the new value. — OR — Press <R> to reject the cell. The cell is created and placed into the attached cell library. 10. confirm your entries by selecting Confirm (√). You must enter a cell name. When complete. When complete. If you try to close with the fence around invalid elements. and press <Return>. the Close cell parameters form displays. key in the value. The value is placed in the cell as you indicated. Refer to Error Messages. All new non-displayed text attributes are placed at the center of the active fence. Create Drop Point Cell 11. Setup 279 . The description is optional. This step repeats for each enter data field. To enter a value. To make a change or correction. select the input box. various error messages will display. This point must be within the graphic extent of the fenced elements. you are returned to step 7._ _______________ Move the text to the desired position in the drawing and press <D>. 12. 10. page 377 for descriptions of these messages. The message Accept/reject Successful Completion displays as long as the fence is still active. When you select Close.

and the defined one-line types. Commands Lock Model — Locks the symbology control parameters._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 280 .February 2003 Model Commands These commands are used to place and manipulate model information in your design file. Move Model Annotation — Moves the model annotation within the design file. or reviews the sheet name in a model. changes. Unlock Model — Unlocks the model. the defined systems. Annotate Model — Adds.

You should be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Model commands. you can use these commands throughout the design session. Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands. because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. page 119 ._ _______________ Using the Model Commands When to Use These Commands You may want to use the Lock Model command after performing basic design setups to lock the symbology control parameters and the defined systems and one-line types. For detailed information about precision input. Using the Model Commands Before Using These Commands You should complete the symbology and basic design file setups before locking the model. 10. see Precision Input Form. Group Workflow Before you can annotate or move annotation in the model. You must lock the model in order to load the drawing into the project database. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file. Setup 281 . However. you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. you must have locked the model using the Lock Model command.

You must lock the model in order to load the drawing into the project database. the message Model is already locked displays. but before placing graphics in a file in order to protect your parameters. The locking of the model locks the symbology control parameters and the defined systems and one-line types. Steps 1.February 2003 Lock Model This command locks the model. Select the Lock Model command. If the model was locked when you selected this command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you should lock your model after setup. Therefore. 282 . The model is locked.

reject input. see Precision Input Form. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Using the form. Setup 283 . 2. reset a command action. 10. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. — OR — Exit the command. page 119. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. you can locate elements. route one-lines. and place it. accept input. The Move Model Annotation precision input form displays. The command checks the design file for the existing model annotation and places it in drag mode. Select the Move Model Annotation command. and exit a command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. At any point during this operating sequence. Enter placement point Move the annotation to the desired location. For detailed information about precision input. Move Model Annotation Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form._ _______________ Move Model Annotation This command moves the model annotation within a design. Steps 1.

— OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without unlocking the model. 284 . 2.February 2003 Unlock Model This command unlocks the model. Select the Unlock Model command. If you want to change the symbology control or add new systems and one-line types to a model that has been locked. Select Confirm (√) to unlock the model. 3. you must first unlock the model using this command. Steps 1. A warning form displays._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

The Load Database process. 3. 2. This command cannot prevent the duplication of sheet numbers within a project. If you want to display the annotation in the model. The Annotate Element form displays. however. 10._ _______________ Annotate Model Annotate Model This command adds or changes the annotation for the model. toggle the Display fields in the form to On. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. Select Confirm (√) to accept the new annotation. Select the Column value field for sheet on the form and key in a new sheet number. Steps 1. you are prompted to place the annotation in the model. 4. Setup 285 . If you toggled Display to On. Select the Annotate Model command. will prevent such duplication. The sheet number should be unique for each drawing.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 286 .

Display Element Information — Displays characteristics of selected elements. Set Active System — Displays the current active system and allows you to set a new active system. 287 . Runtime Setup Commands 11. Propagation Setup — Sets the active parameters for propagation in the design file. Runtime Commands Set Active One-Line Parameters — Displays the active one-line parameters. Runtime Setup Commands The Runtime Setup commands allow you to define. based on the current active one-line type._ _______________ 11. and allows you to set new active parameters. then selecting Palette from the resulting pull-down menu. The Runtime Setup palette is activated by selecting Setup from the EE Raceway Command Menu Bar. Set Active Levels — Displays the current active level(s) and allows you to turn Off displayed levels and to turn On new level displays. modify. Set Active One-Line Type — Displays the current active one-line type and allows you to select a new active one-line type. and review the active drawing parameters in your design file.

288 . Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for using the commands in this group. Before Using These Commands You must have at least one system and one-line type defined in the design file in order to use these commands. you can use these commands throughout the design session. See Setup Commands._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Using the Runtime Setup Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. Operating Information See individual command descriptions for specific operating information. page 253 for more information about defining systems and one-line types.

289 . a value will display in the field only if the value can be retrieved from the reference database. the field remains null. select this field. page 294 ). Column name — Displays the aliases for those columns in the database that are associated with the specified one-line type. if you defined tray as your active one-line type. You can enter blank spaces into the design. the cursor will jump to the end of the blanks when the field is tagged beyond value. select the column value field and delete the blank character. You can only review the information in this field. and key in the new value. For example. but empty <Return>s enter nothing into the design. When you change the active one-line type or end your design session. then the Active TRAY Parameters form will display when you use this command._ _______________ Set Active One-Line Type Parameters This command displays the active one-line parameters based on the current active one-line type you set using the Set Active One-Line Type command (see Set Active One-Line Type. The previous set of specifications becomes active again. You can review and modify the values in this field. Set Active One-Line Type Parameters 11. Otherwise. Entering a space or a text value for an attribute will override that value in the reference database. Once you have deleted the override. which is based on the current active one-line type. Save to Memory (M) — Temporarily saves your overrides and specification changes. Runtime The Set Active One-Line Type Parameters command allows you to enter values through the appropriate form. To delete an override on a reference database attribute. To change the values associated with a one-line type. you lose the overrides and specifications you saved to memory. Column value — Displays the current value for the column whose alias displays in the Column name field. If blanks exist for a field.

If the linkage is not present on a connect point or one-line. The select criteria are those values that display in the Column value column on the lower portion of the annotation form. EE Reference Database Key — This field allows you to insert an override key in the reference database. The EE spec key field on the upper portion of the form is used as the key for the Column name values on the lower portion of the form. If you delete the value in this field. the Default key is used. When you enter a new value in the EE Reference Database Key field. If the specified key does not exist in the reference database. and key in a new value. and corresponding database values are retrieved and displayed on the annotation form. Otherwise. Select — Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form. select the field. the value will display in the design where you place it. Key Description — This field displays the description from the reference database of the current EE Reference Database Key. but cannot delete it. Access — Indicates whether or not you can manipulate a particular column value. 290 . You can use relational operators when keying in your own select criteria. the Access column displays a R/W. then the cell name or the Default key will be used to locate default data. Where the toggle is On. If no key exists in the user element. Once you place an override key on an element. the key specified in the user element is used. If you can view and modify (read and write) the column value. The lower portion of the Active [One_Line Type] Parameters form displays a specification table. it becomes an override key to the reference database. an error message displays and the annotation form returns to the previous values. the field remains null. then it will display an R. You can only review the information in this field. select the *. To change the displayed value. You will be prompted to place displayed values when placing one-lines in the drawing. then the column value has a corresponding codelist. To display the codelist._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . If you can only view (read) the column value. If an override linkage is not present on a device or a title block. Any annotation you placed in the drawing will override the reference database defaults on the form.February 2003 List — Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist. If an * displays in the List column. you can modify it. Display On/Off — Enables or disables the design display for each column value. You can only review the information in this column. The key field is updated. a value will automatically redisplay if it can be retrieved from the reference database.

291 . then a second form containing all matching rows displays. To add values from the displayed specification table rows. You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button. the system cancels the form and retrieves the values from the EE spec key field on the original form. If you select Cancel (X). Clear button — This button clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form. Override button — This button allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R)._ _______________ If only one row matches the select criteria you provide. and then select Confirm (√). If more than one row matches the criteria. Runtime From this form you will select the row(s) containing the desired values. then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values. select the row you want. which automatically activates it. Set Active One-Line Type Parameters 11. and then automatically depresses the Override button to select a different row(s) from the specification table.

representing zero or more characters. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than or equal to the given value. If you do not enter another operator. The queried values must have every character aside from the % in common with the given value. Select the Set Active One-Line Type Parameters command. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than or equal to the given value. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than the given value. 3. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than the given value. This operator indicates that the queried values should NOT be equal to the given value. This operator is a wild card. the system assumes =. representing a single character. You should be familiar with the following operators: Symbol Name Data Type numeric Description = equal to This is the default operator. 2._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The queried values must have every character aside from the underline in common with the given value. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. > greater than numeric < less than numeric >= greater than or equal to less than or equal to not equal to numeric <= numeric != numeric % wild card CHAR _ underline CHAR Steps 1. An Active One-Line Type Parameters form displays.February 2003 This command accepts certain relational operators as search criteria. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. 292 . This operator is a wild card. Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements.

Set Active One-Line Type Parameters 11. Runtime 293 ._ _______________ Any value you place with the Set Active One-line Parameters command will be entered into the drawing and. optionally. When you load the project database. displayed. these values are loaded into the project database.

294 . Steps 1. The command also highlights the current active one-line type and allows you to select a new one from the set of those available._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . page 260 ). You must set an active one-line type in order to use the Place One-Line Type command. Select the Set Active One-Line Type command. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. select the one-line type you want to make active. The one-line type you selected highlights. based on your selections from the reference database using the Define One-Line Type command (see Define One-Line Type. The Active One Line Type form displays.February 2003 Set Active One-Line Type This command displays all one-line types available in the design file. 3. From the list. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. 2.

When a new active system is selected. The active system is automatically included as a subsystem. You can have multiple systems defined for a single one-line type as a way of defining split trays or elements. The active system determines the symbology of the raceway. The active system determines the symbology of the one-line type. Project Rule Set — Displays the Project Electrical Code from the your project schema’s project table. You can have no more than six systems active for each one-line type. Systems Column — Displays all the available systems._ _______________ Set Active System This command displays the current active system and all available systems. The active system is automatically included as a subsystem. based on those you selected from the reference database using the Define System command (see Define System. If the Project Rule Set is not defined. Active System — Displays the active system which determines the symbology of the raceway. This is defined in EEmgr with the EE CMS Project Definition process. whereas subsystems do not. Runtime Field Descriptions Systems — Selects the active system. the Percent and Project Rule can be defined for each subsystem. the subsystems are all unselected. Set Active System 11. Subsystem — Selects the subsystems. While this button is depressed. The Project Rule Set determines which rules can be assigned to the active systems. This is done by specifying a system and one or more subsystems. page 258 ). 295 . Using the Set Active System form. Selecting a row in this field defines the Active System or Subsystems. Project Rules cannot be assigned. you can select a new active system from the set of those available.

Select the Set Active System command. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. 296 . 4. If an * displays. Define the percentages and the project rules you want to use. When a row is selected. The total of the system percents is displayed in the field at the bottom of the Percent column. This Percent is used when calculating the cable fill of the raceway section in the EECMS product. then a Project Rule can be assigned._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Steps 1. press the Subsystem button. Project Rule — Displays the Project Rule assigned to each of the selected systems for calculating raceway fill. Select the system and subsystem(s) you want to make active. a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process is displayed for review and selection. The Percent represents the portion of the raceway’s width assigned to that system.February 2003 Percent — Displays the current percent space allocation assigned to each of the selected systems. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. 2. The Active System form displays. The total space allocation cannot exceed 100 percent. 3. List — Indicates whether or not a Project Rule can be assigned. All the selected systems percentages are summed to calculate the total percentage. To clear the Project Rule. select the *. select the row and select the Cancel (X) on the list of Rules. To display a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process. To access the list of subsystems.

Part Verification — Enables or disables part verification. Rough . Smooth . All fittings you place manually are propagated with Eden. Set the toggle to Off to skip part verification before propagation. using the dimensions of the cross sections and the transition. Propagation sends these dimensions to the Eden symbol. and extension on the one-lines and RCPs.Propagates straight sections only._ _______________ Propagation Setup This command sets the active parameters for propagating one-line elements in the design file. Eden .Retrieves one-line type and RCP dimensions from specifications in the database and from overrides. Propagation Mode — Defines the active propagation mode. but lacks the detail that Eden propagation provides. Set the toggle to On to verify that an element exists in the database before you propagate it. regardless of the settings on this form. cutting them back to leave room for fittings. Sketch .Sketches standard straights and fittings.Propagates straight sections and fittings.Propagates straight sections. Runtime Field Descriptions Propagation Style — Defines the active style of propagation. Propagation Setup 11. Sketch propagation is considerably faster than Eden propagation. see The Drawing Process. page 108 . Cutback . 297 . For additional information about propagation. radius.

Also. like editing the size. any changes you make to an element. Define the form parameters to meet your specifications. regardless of the status of this toggle. Select the Propagation Setup command. Automatic Propagation — Enables or disables the automatic propagation of elements. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and to exit the command. The Propagation Setup form displays. If you set the toggle to On. will cause the propagation to be deleted and redrawn to reflect the change. elements are automatically propagated when placed. automatic propagation is disabled. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving any changes to the form. 3.February 2003 If Eden is the active propagation mode._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 298 . that affect the graphical display of the propagation. part verification will be performed. 2. When the toggle is set to Off. Steps 1.

but can select the level numbers (in combination with the Turn Levels On/Off toggle).63 indicate whether or not each available level displays in the design._ _______________ Set Active Levels This command displays the current active level(s) and allows you both to turn off any active levels and to activate new levels. 299 . To change the active view. Set Active Levels 11. To turn on or off the display of a particular level. All On — Turns on the display of all levels in the design. Runtime View — Displays the active view. and then select the desired level number displayed in the Systems/One Line list. All Off — Turns off the display of all levels in the design. and key in a new value. You can only review the system and oneline information in these fields. select the appropriate level number. or select the field. and the levels on which they display. Systems/One Line — Displays the available systems. All level display settings on the form are valid for whatever view is active. select the Turn Levels On/Off toggle. When a level has its display turned on. the button appears to be depressed. select a value from the list. Restore — Returns the display of levels in the selected view to its state prior to entering the Set Active Levels command. Turn Levels On/Off — This toggle enables or disables the display for the levels associated with the one-line types in your design file. They also allow you to turn off or on the display of some or all available levels. To turn on or off the display of a particular level. 1 . their corresponding one-line types. Levels — Indicate what levels display in the design.

Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements.February 2003 Graphics — Displays the level display for title block annotation in the design file. 3. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and to exit the command. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. Steps 1. 2. 300 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The Levels form displays. Select the Set Active Levels command.

or an RCP within a run is selected. and coordinate location of ends and bends. Runtime If a fitting or an RCP that is at the termination of a run is selected. Steps 1. Display Element Information 11. location and radius of each bend in the run. This information includes: segment lengths. Select the Display Element Information command. If either a one-line. 2. Identify Raceway element Select the element you want to review. a straight section. Return to step 2. then run information is displayed. Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the element and display that element’s information. 3. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted element and select another element. 301 . a fitting within a run. then the four key attributes associated with the fitting are displayed. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command._ _______________ Display Element Information This command displays raceway element characteristics. Return to step 2.

February 2003 302 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Highlight Propagation Errors — Identifies existing propagation errors in a design file. you can highlight propagation errors in the design file. 303 . Display Sector/Word Value — Displays the sector/word position of an identified element. sector/word position) you provide. You can also use the commands to display the identification criteria of specified elements and the system and one-line type of an identified element. Utilities Commands Toggle Construction Display On/Off — Turns the display of construction class elements on or off. Display Element Type and ASID ID — Displays the element type and ASID ID of an identified element. Highlight Element by Link — Highlights an element with given entity and mslink values. Highlight Element by Sector/Word — Highlights elements with a given sector/word position._ _______________ 12. In addition. Utilities Commands The Utilities commands highlight elements within your design file based on the identification criteria (ASID ID. Display Link — Displays the entity and mslink values of an identified element. Utilities Commands 12. Display System and One-Line Type — Displays the associated system and one-line type of an identified element. Highlight Element by ASID ID — Highlights an element with a given ASID ID.

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 Coordinate System — Activates the Design Volume Coordinate System or Plant Coordinate System associated with the design file, or shows the coordinate system currently active.

304

_ _______________
Using the Utilities Commands
When to Use These Commands
Once you have performed the necessary setups, you can use these commands throughout the design session.

Using the Utilities Commands

Before Using These Commands
12. Utilities
You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Modify commands, because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. For detailed information about precision input, see Precision Input Form, page 119 .

Group Workflow
In general, you will use those commands that display the attribute information of an element (Display ASID ID, for example) before the commands that highlight elements based on the attribute information you specify (Highlight Element by ASID ID, for example).

Operating Information
During the operating sequence for any of these commands, you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file.

305

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Toggle Construction Display On/Off
This command turns On and Off the display for construction elements within each individual view in the design file. All non-displayed EE text elements are automatically placed in construction class. Therefore, this command allows you to view all the non-displayed EE elements as well as any other construction class elements.

Steps
1. Select the Toggle Construction Display On/Off command from the menu. The top of the prompt area displays all views in which the Toggle Construction Display On/Off command is toggled to On. 2. Select view Place a data point in the view in which you want the annotation display toggled On or Off. When construction display is On, the view number displays in a prompt. 3. Press <R> to exit the command. Once you have exited the command, select the Update View command to see the results of the display toggle.

306

_ _______________
Highlight Element by Sector/Word
This command highlights elements by a sector/word position that you specify. The position of the sector and word are compatible with EDG, and both are relative to 1. If the position is valid, the element highlights, but is not added to a working set. If the element is part of a complex element, the entire complex element highlights. The sector/word position must be the location of an element type 2 (cell), 3 (line), 4 (line string), 6 (shape), 7 (text node), or 17 (text).

Highlight Element by Sector/Word

Highlight Sector/Word With Filename
12. Utilities
You can specify a filename instead of the sector/word position to highlight an element. The file must contain the sector/word position of the element(s) you want to highlight. The file will display in a form on the screen, allowing you to select the sector/word value from the displayed file. If you do not specify a pathname for the file, the command searches for it in the <current_project>/rway/tmp directory.

Steps
1. 2. Select the Highlight Element By Sector/Word command. Key in sector and word value or file name Key in the sector and word value separated by a space. — OR — Key in the name of a file containing the sector and word values. Go to Step 4. 3. Point to view for window Identify the view in which you want the element to highlight. 4. Element highlighted The element with the specified sector and word highlights in the view you identified. Key in another sector/word combination to continue highlighting elements by sector and word. Press <Esc> to exit.

307

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 5. Select sector and word value from form A File Display form displays after you enter the filename. Identify a line that contains a sector and word value. After you select a line, select Confirm (√) to accept the sector and word value in the line. Go to Step 6. — OR — Select the Return button to cancel the file display form. Return to Step 1. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command. 6. Point to view for window Identify the view where you want the element highlighted. 7. Element highlighted Point to continue/Reset to exit the file The element with the specified sector and word highlights in the view you identified. Press <D> to select another sector/word value from the File Display form. (When you press <D> the form redisplays.) Go to Step 4. — OR — Press <R> to exit the file you identified in Step 1. Return to Step 1.

308

_ _______________
Highlight Element by ASID ID

Highlight Element by ASID ID

This command highlights elements by an ASID identification (ID) that you specify. If the ASID ID you specify is valid, the raceway element highlights, but is not added to the working set.

Highlight ASID ID With Filename
You can specify a filename instead of the ASID ID to highlight an element. The file must contain the ASID ID of the element(s) you want to highlight. For example, to see where propagation errors exist in your design file, you can specify the file pro.err. The file will display in a form on the screen, allowing you to select the ASID ID from the displayed file. If you do not specify a pathname for a file, the command searches for it in the <current_project>/rway/tmp directory.

12. Utilities

Steps
1. Select the Highlight Element By Asid Id command. The Select hilite asid mode form displays.

2.

Select the appropriate Highlight by ASID ID button. The All Elements button highlights all raceway elements associated with the element having the given ASID ID: the element itself and all of its children. The Parent of Elements button highlights the raceway elements that are the parents of the element having the given ASID ID. The Children of Elements button highlights the raceway elements that are the children of the element having the given ASID ID. The Only the Element button highlights only the raceway element having the given ASID ID. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the command.

309

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 3. Key in asid id or file name Key in the ASID ID. — OR — Key-in the filename of a file containing the ASID IDs. Go to step 6. — OR — Press <R> to select a different Highlight by ASID ID mode. Return to step 2. — OR — Press <Esc> to exit the command. Return to step 1. 4. Point to view for window Identify the view in which you want the elements highlighted. 5. Element highlighted The raceway element(s) associated with the specified ASID ID highlight in the view you identified. Key in another ASID ID to continue highlighting raceway elements. Continue highlighting the elements according to the specified Highlight by ASID ID mode. — OR — Press <Esc> to exit. — OR — Press <R> to select a different Highlight by ASID ID mode. Return to step 2. 6. Select asid id from form After you enter the filename, a file display form displays.

310

_ _______________
Select a line that contains an ASID ID. 7. — OR — Select the Return button to cancel the File Display form. Return to step 2. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to modify the highlight by asid mode. Return to step 1.

Highlight Element by ASID ID

After you select a line, select Confirm (√) to accept the ASID ID in the line. Go to step 8.

12. Utilities

8.

Point to view for window Identify the view in which you want the element(s) highlighted.

9.

Point to continue/Reset to exit the file The element(s) associated with the specified ASID ID highlight in the view you identified. Press <D> to select another ASID ID from the file display form. (When you press <D> the form redisplays.) Go to step 5. — OR — Press <R> to exit the file you identified in step 3. Return to step 3.

311

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Highlight Element by Link
This command highlights elements by given entity (table) and mslink values that you specify. If the entity and mslink are valid, the element highlights, but is not added to a working set. If the element is part of a complex element, the entire complex element highlights. The entity and mslink values must correspond with an element type 2 (cell), 3 (line), 4 (line string), 6 (shape), 7 (text node), or 17 (text).

Highlight Link With Filename
You can specify a filename instead of the entity and mslink combination to highlight an element. The file must contain the entity and mslink of the element(s) you want to highlight. The file will display in a form on the screen, allowing you to select the mslink from the displayed file. If you do not specify a pathname for the file, the command searches for it in the <current project>/rway/tmp directory.

Steps
1. 2. Select the Highlight Element By Link command. Key in entity and mslink (###:###) or filename Key in the entity and mslink values separated by a :. — OR — Key in the name of a file containing the entity and mslink values. Go to Step 4. 3. Point to view for window Identify the view in which you want the element to highlight. 4. Element highlighted The element with the specified entity and mslink values highlights in the view you identified. Key in another entity/mslink combination to continue highlighting elements by mslink. Press <Esc> or <R> to exit. 5. Select entity/mslink value from form A File Display form displays after you enter the filename. Identify a line that contains the entity and mslink values.

312

_ _______________
After you select a line, select Confirm (√) to accept the entity and mslink values in the line. Go to Step 6. — OR — Select the Return button to cancel the File Display form. Return to Step 1. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command. 6. Point to view for window

Highlight Element by Link

12. Utilities

Point to the view where you want the element highlighted. 7. Element highlighted Point to continue/Reset to exit the file The element with the specified entity and mslink values highlights in the view you identified. Press <D> to select more entity and mslink values from the file display form. (When you press <D> the form redisplays.) Go to Step 4. — OR — Press <R> to exit the file you identified in Step 1. Return to Step 1.

313

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Highlight Propagation Errors
This command highlights propagation errors in the design file.

Steps
1. Select the Highlight Propagation Errors command. The pro.err file displays.

2.

Review the errors listed on the form. To highlight a particular error(s) in the design file, select the error(s) from the list, and select Confirm (√). The propagation error(s) highlights in the design file, and the pro.err form redisplays. — OR — Exit the form without highlighting any propagation errors.

3.

Continue highlighting propagation errors. Go to step 2. — OR — Select Reset or Cancel (X) to exit the command.

314

_ _______________
Display Sector/Word Value
This command displays the sector and word position, in the MicroStation command window, of an identified element.

Display Sector/Word Value

Steps
1. 2. Select the Display Sector/Word command. Identify element Select the element to display the sector/word for, and accept it with a <D>. The sector and word for the selected element displays in the MicroStation command window. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command.

12. Utilities

315

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Display Element Type and ASID ID
This command displays the element type and the ASID identification (ID), in the MicroStation command window, of an identified element.

Steps
1. 2. Select the Display Element Type and ASID ID command. Identify element Select the element for which to display the ASID ID and accept it with <D>. The element type and ASID ID display in the MicroStation command window. — OR — Press <R> or <Esc> to exit the command.

316

_ _______________ Display Link This command displays the entity (table) and mslink. of an identified element. mslink = <value> — OR — Press <R> or <Esc> to exit the command. 2. Utilities 317 . Identify element Select the element you want to display the link for and accept it with <D>. Display Link Steps 1. The entity and mslink values display in the MicroStation command window in the following format: Entity (table number) = <value>. Select the Display Link command. 12. in the MicroStation command window.

Steps 1. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. reset a command action._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Identify Raceway element Identify an element in the design file. The identified element highlights. Select the Display System and One-Line Type command from the menu. along with the Print System and One-Line Type form. you can locate elements. accept input. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. and exit a command. Using the form. The precision input form displays. For detailed information about precision input. page 119. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. see Precision Input Form. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. — OR — Exit the command.February 2003 Display System and One-Line Type This command displays the system and one-line type associated with an element you identify. route one-lines. 2. reject input. At any point during this operating sequence. 318 .

— OR — Exit the command. The system prompts you to identify another element. Continue identifying elements in the design file. The system prompts you to identify another element. Go to step 2. 4. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. 319 . system._ _______________ 3. Utilities — OR — Reject the highlighted element. and subsystems (if applicable). Go to step 2. The fields on the form fill with information about the element’s one-line type. Display System and One-Line Type 12.

model graphics do not rotate to reflect the active coordinate system. If you desire to change the coordinate system. When the coordinate system is switched between the PCS and DVCS. Show Active Coordinate System The Show Active Coordinate System command displays the active coordinate system in the status field. The Plant Coordinate System uses this global coordinate system to maintain the relationships among the various models. Activate Design Volume Coordinate System The Activate Design Volume Coordinate System command allows you to work in the Design Volume Coordinate System. you can select either the Activate Design Volume Coordinate System or Activate Plant Coordinate System commands. Instead. the coordinate system rotates when the active coordinate system is changed. This becomes important when attaching reference models to the active model. The Plant Coordinate System is common to all models and drawings in a project. Activate Plant Coordinate System — Activates the Plant Coordinate System (PCS). and Show Active Coordinate System commands.February 2003 Active Coordinate System This palette provides the Active Design Volume Coordinate System. Commands Activate Design Volume Coordinate System — Activates the Design Volume Coordinate System (DVCS) allowing you to define a local coordinate system for a particular model. Activate Plant Coordinate System. The Plant Coordinate System is common to all models and drawings in a project._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Show Active Coordinate System — Displays the active coordinate system in the status field. 320 . Activate Plant Coordinate System The Activate Plant Coordinate System command allows you to work in the Plant Coordinate System.

321 . Reports — Displays the information in an EE Raceway database._ _______________ 13. Database Commands The Database commands are used to load and run reports from the database. Database Rulecheck — Displays the design rule errors occurring in the design process. 13. then selecting Palette from the resulting pull-down menu. The Database palette is activated by selecting Database from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. Database Commands Topics Load Database — Loads the project database with information generated from the EE Raceway drawing.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and screen prompts vary for each command. Operating Information Because the operating sequence. 322 .February 2003 Using the Database Commands When to Use These Commands Use these command to run limited database commands while still in the graphic design session. Before Using These Commands Refer to the individual command descriptions for any requirements which may be necessary before using each command. command key-ins. Group Workflow You must load the database before you can run a report or rulecheck. instructions for using these commands are described in each individual command section.

Indicates what portion of the corresponding one-line is set aside for the corresponding system. The orthogonal distance from the drop point origin to the RCP’s origin. You must create a RIS schema on an existing relational database before loading._ _______________ Load Database This command loads a relational database with information generated by the EE Raceway design file. The distance down the one-line to the point on the one-line closest to the drop point origin. This process calculates the following values: Table Name rcp_to_drw Column Name pds_east* Comments The PDS east coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. The total graphical length of the one-line in master units. The PDS north coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. the command removes the occurrences of the previous load and completely reloads the design file. Information in the design file is merged with information from the reference schema and loaded into the project schema. The PDS elevation coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. using the Database Utilities option from the EE Project Menu Both a project and a reference schema must exist before running the Load Database process. and the orthogonal distance from the drop point origin to the closest point on the oneline. Load Database When you run the Load Database command on a design file that has been loaded previously into the database. Indicates what portion of the corresponding RCP is set aside for the corresponding system. All RCP’s and segments must have a tag number before using this command. Database rcp_to_drw pds_north* rcp_to_drw pds_elev* rcp_to_sys ee_percent*** drop_point ee_dist_down_ol** drop_point ee_dist_to_rcp** one_line ee_ol_length** ol_to_sys ee_percent*** 323 . 13.

The PDS east coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. The PDS north coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. straight pds_north* straight pds_elev* str_to_sys ee_percent*** fitting pds_east* fitting pds_north* fitting pds_elev* fit_to_sys ee_percent*** * The Raceway bill of material by volume report relies on these columns to be in the fitting and straight tables. ** You can override the value for these columns by annotating the appropriate elements in the design file. The PDS elevation coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. The PDS east coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. The PDS elevation coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range.February 2003 straight straight ee_tl_length pds_east* The graphical length of the straight in master units. *** These values indicate the portion of a split raceway dedicated to each system within the split raceway. The PDS north coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. Indicates what portion of the corresponding straight is set aside for the corresponding system. Indicates what portion of the corresponding fitting is set aside for the corresponding system. 324 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The columns are optional for Load Database.

When complete. the message above displays. or accept the displayed defaults. Enter error and output filenames. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. The error file lists all the errors that occurred during processing. and the process begins. 13. The Load database screen displays. It lists everything that was loaded into the database. The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process runs. the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen. Steps 2. 325 ._ _______________ Steps 1. select Confirm (√). When you are finished completing the input information. Accept will load database. the message above displays. and is displayed automatically to the screen. You must specify unique filenames to save the default files. Key in unique filenames in the Error file and Output file fields. Select Load database command. where you may review the errors. This file will be displayed automatically to the screen. Database 3. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. The message file is created on every run of the process.

allowing you to enter all input necessary to run the report. an input screen displays. The system manager can change the names of the reports that display in the listing area and can add additional reports by editing the report. These reports report on the project and reference databases.February 2003 Report This command accesses the standard EE Raceway reports._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . To change the output filename. All reports are kept in the /reports directory. Key in any information that is not supplied by default.dat file (win32app\eerway\data). See Reports. see Create Project for the directory structure. (No file extension is automatically appended to the name you key in. When you process a report. You can change the name of the output file or error file.) 326 . Overview This section contains general information about running all EE Raceway reports. You must load the project database before running any reports. page 545 for more detailed information about individual reports. select the output file box and key in a new name.

These low and high ranges define a cubic volume from which the report is pulled. The coordinate values need to be in subunits and entered in the form field with a space between the coordinates: easting northing elevation For example. you should name the output files yourself. Select the Report command. You should give each report you want to save a unique name. For instance. Select the report you want to run from the list. the new file will overwrite that file. Report Steps 1. Select Confirm (√) to invoke the input form for the specified process. Database You can find the coordinates you want to use by using the active point coordinate display on the precision input form. A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume When running a Bill of Materials by Volume report. Define the report input form as needed and select Confirm (√) to process the report. 13. If a new output file has the same name as an existing file. 4. 234 532 34 It should be understood that westing and southing coordinates must be the negative of their opposite directional coordinate. a westing coordinate of 100 should be keyed in as a value of -100 in the easting 327 . 3. Any Raceway component extending outside the clipping volume defined by the High and Low Range Coordinates will not be included in the report output._ _______________ If you want to save reports throughout a project. you are required to define a low and high range in PDS coordinates. 2.

February 2003 direction._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and a southing coordinate of 3000 should be keyed in as a value of -3000 in the northing direction. 328 .

Database This section contains general information about running all EE Raceway rule checks. You must load the project database before running any rule checks. 329 .dat file in win32app\eerway\data. The name of the rule check report displays at the top. These rule checks are reports that identify violations of certain design rules by working on the project database. The system manager can change the names of the reports or add new reports to the listing area by editing the rule_chk. or change that information according to your specifications. Accept the default information that displays in the input fields. Overview 13. an input screen displays._ _______________ Rule Checks Rule Checks This command accesses the standard EE Raceway Rule Checks. For more detailed information about each rule check. When you process a rule check. page 545 . see Reports.

330 . You should give each report that you want to save a unique name. 2. Select Confirm (√) to invoke the input form for the specified process. you should name the output files yourself. Steps 1. 4. If a new output file has the same name as another file created previously. Select the Rule command. Define the input form as needed and select Confirm (√) to process the rule check report.February 2003 If you want to save reports throughout a project. the new file will destroy the previously created file. 3._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Select the rule check report you want to run from the listing area.

/rway/dgn directory. based on the internal sheet name you specify._ _______________ 14. EERWAY Processes 331 . based on the design filename you specify. You will run all EE Raceway processes from the Process menu found on the EE Raceway Drawing menu. 14.) The individual EE Raceway processes are described in the following sections: Raceway Processes Load Database — Loads the project database with information generated from the EE Raceway drawing. with the name you specify. Unload Design — Removes all the information associated with a particular drawing from the project database. Cleanup Database — Removes any data from a project database that is not currently associated with a design in the project’s . Create Interference Envelope (given name) — Reads the design file and creates a data file. (See Process in the section entitled EE Raceway Environment for information about running all processes. Raceway Processes This chapter provides detailed descriptions of EE Raceway processes. Create Interference Envelope (default name) — Reads the design file and creates a data file that contains envelopes for input to Plant Design interference detection tasks. Unload Sheet — Removes all the information associated with a particular drawing from the project database.. that contains envelopes for input to Plant Design interference detection tasks.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 2. and the orthogonal distance from the drop point origin to the closest point on the oneline. The PDS east coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. Load database tracks drawing information based on the "Drawing" table of the project database. The PDS north coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. one_line ol_to_sys straight straight straight straight ee_ol_length** ee_percent*** ee_tl_length pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* 332 . Information in the design file is merged with information from the reference schema and loaded into the project schema.February 2003 Load Database This process loads a relational database with information generated by an EERWAY design file. The graphical length of the straight in master units. The PDS elevation coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. The total graphical length of the one-line in master units. You must create a RIS schema on an existing relational database before loading. Thus. The PDS elevation coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. using the Lock Model and the Annotate Model commands respectively. Indicates what portion of the corresponding RCP is set aside for the corresponding system. The PDS north coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. Both a project and a reference schema must exist before running the Load Database process. The orthogonal distance from the drop point origin to the RCP’s origin. Indicates what portion of the corresponding one-line is set aside for the corresponding system. This process calculates the following values: Table Name rcp_to_drw rcp_to_drw rcp_to_drw rcp_to_sys drop_point drop_point Column Name pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* ee_percent*** ee_dist_down_ol** ee_dist_to_rcp** Comments The PDS east coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. using the Database Utilities option from the EE Project Menu. 1. you must annotate the drawing or model and enter the unique "SHEET" information. The distance down the one-line to the point on the one-line closest to the drop point origin.

The PDS north coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. Select Load database from the Process menu. The Load database screen displays. * The Raceway bill of material by volume report relies on these columns to be in the fitting and straight tables. and select Confirm (√). Select a design file from the Drawing List or key in a design filename (you may specify multiple design files). EERWAY Processes 2. The PDS east coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range._ _______________ str_to_sys fitting fitting fitting fit_to_sys ee_percent*** pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* ee_percent*** Load Database Indicates what portion of the corresponding straight is set aside for the corresponding system. 14. The PDS elevation coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. ** You can override the value for these columns by annotating the appropriate elements in the design file. The columns are optional for Load Database. Steps 1. *** These values indicate the portion of a split raceway dedicated to each system within the split raceway. Enter drawing name. 333 . Indicates what portion of the corresponding fitting is set aside for the corresponding system.

Enter error and output filenames. The current operating mode is displayed in a box at the lower right of the screen._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 3. select Confirm (√). The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process runs. When you are finished completing the input information. You can view both files using the Output option on the Utilities page. Select the desired operating mode. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. It lists everything that was loaded into the database. 4. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. You must specify unique filenames to save the default files. 5. You may choose between Foreground. the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen. and the process begins. or accept the displayed defaults. where you may review the errors. This file will be displayed automatically to the screen. Confirm your selections. and is displayed automatically to the screen. the message above displays. Key in unique filenames in the Error file and Output file fields. The error file lists all the errors that occurred during processing. When complete. the message above displays. 334 . page 64 ). Background. and Batch operating modes for most processes (see Process. The message file is created on every run of the process.

EERWAY Processes 335 ._ _______________ Batch File Option The load database process can be executed from a batch file. Setup an rway.bat: Batch File Option SET SET SET SET SET SET MS=D:\WIN32APP\USTATION MS_EXE=D:\WIN32APP\USTATION EES_REFDB=CERT60_REF EE_SCHEMA=CERT60_PRJ EERD_MSGS=D:\WIN32APP\INGR\EERWAY\MSG\ EERD_TBLS=D:\WIN32APP\INGR\EERWAY\MSG\ 14.bat file to export the necessary Microstation and EERWAY environment variables to execute the load database process. Include the following EERWAY environment variables: EES_REFDB — RIS Schema name for reference database EE_SCHEMA — RIS Schema name for project database EERD_MSGS — Directory path for EERWAY message files EERD_TBLS — Directory path for EERWAY database table files Example of rway.

Select a design file from the Drawing List or key in a design filename (you may specify multiple design files). You may change the defaults by selecting the fields and keying in new names. The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process is run._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and select Confirm (√). The Unload Design process deletes all records of raceway connect points (RCP).February 2003 Unload Design This process unloads a design from a relational database. 3. 336 . unless you specify unique filenames in these fields. Enter design name. 2. The process will not modify anything in the reference database. Select Unload from the Process menu. The default error and message filenames are displayed in appropriate fields. You must have loaded the database using the Load Database process before unloading. Steps 1. Key in unique filenames for the error and message files (or accept the default filenames). The Unload Design database screen displays. nor will it delete information from user-defined tables. and three-lines that are part of the specified drawing. based on the design filename you specify. one-lines.

background. the message above displays. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. the message above displays. 5. The file is automatically displayed to the screen for your review. select Confirm (√). and the process begins.msg file. Select the desired operating mode.err file. 14. The current operating mode is displayed in a box at the lower right of the screen. Unload Design When you are finished completing the input information. The file is automatically displayed to the screen for your review. You may choose between foreground. You can view both files using the Output option on the Utilities page. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. and batch operating modes for most processes (see Process. page 64 ). and lists everything that was loaded into the database. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. EERWAY Processes 337 . an ASCII file located in the current working directory. the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen. is created on every run of the process. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. The . The . Confirm your selections. When complete._ _______________ 4.

Key in unique filenames for the error and message files (or accept the default filenames). The Unload Sheet process deletes all records of raceway connect points (RCP). and select Confirm (√). Key in a sheet name. The Unload Sheet database screen displays. You must have loaded the database using the Load Database process before unloading. The process will not modify anything in the reference database. and three-lines that are part of the specified drawing. If the sheet name contains blanks. and the sheet name in the title block must match the database entry for that drawing. one-lines. Select Unload Sheet from the Process menu. 3. The default error and message filenames are displayed in appropriate fields. Steps 1. based on the internal sheet name you specify. You may change the defaults by selecting the fields and keying in new names._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . since the process keys off the sheet name in the title block. 338 . 2.February 2003 Unload Sheet This process unloads an EE Raceway drawing from a relational database. The drawing you are unloading must have a title block. it must be specified in single quotes.

Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. 14. You may choose between foreground. 4. 5. unless you specify unique filenames in these fields. and lists everything that was loaded into the database. the message above displays. select Confirm (√). The file is automatically displayed to the screen for your review. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. is created on every run of the process. Select the desired operating mode. When complete. lists all the errors that occurred during processing.err file. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. The current operating mode is displayed in a box at the lower right of the screen. Confirm your selections. The . 339 . EERWAY Processes You can view both files using the Output option on the Utilities page. The file is automatically displayed to the screen for your review. Unload Sheet When you are finished completing the input information. and batch operating modes for most processes (see Process. page 64 ). the message above displays. background. the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen._ _______________ The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process is run.msg file. The . and the process begins.

Steps 1. and three-lines that are part of the project database but which are not part of any raceway design file. It will delete from the database only that information which is not in any current drawing. 340 . and select Confirm (√).February 2003 Cleanup Database This process removes information from the database that is not in any drawing currently loaded in the database. This process also removes information on any EE Raceway drawing which has been deleted. It then makes a list of all valid drawings. The Cleanup Database screen displays. This process will not delete drawings. information may have been added through the Relational Database Management System (RDBMS) to test for a special case or to create customized tables. Key in unique filenames in the Error file and Output file fields. onelines._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The Cleanup Database process deletes all records of raceway connect points (RCP). This process will not unload records of customized tables in the database. 2. but for some reason was not removed from the database. The process uses the filenames in the drawing table of all current drawings. Enter error and output filenames. For example. Select Cleanup Database from the Process Menu. or accept the displayed defaults. and deletes anything from the database which is not connected to one of these drawings.

You must specify unique filenames to save the default files. 3. Confirm your selections. The . Select the desired operating mode. and it includes a log of what was unloaded during processing. The process begins._ _______________ The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process runs. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. The current operating mode is displayed in a box at the lower right of the screen. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. and Batch operating modes for most processes (see Process. Cleanup Database When you are finished completing the input information. 14. You may choose between Foreground. select Confirm (√). lists all the errors that occurred during processing. is created. the message above displays. It will display mostly zeroes. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. The . the message above displays.msg file. Background. EERWAY Processes You can view either file using the Output option on the Utilities screen. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred.err file. page 64 ). the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen. 4. 341 . When complete.

The default error and output files will be overwritten every time you run the process unless you specify unique filenames in the fields. 2. Enter design name._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .env>.February 2003 Create Interference Envelope (default name) This process reads a design file and creates from that design a data file containing envelopes (spaces in which valid raceway shapes reside). 3. Key in unique filenames for the error and output files (or accept the displayed default filenames).prj/rway/dgn/<filename. the process writes the file to <current_project>. 342 . The Create Interference Detection Envelope form displays. Upon completion. After running the Interference Detection process in EE Raceway. Steps 1. you may send the file to Plant Design software and run it against PDS interference detection. Select Interference Detection from the Process menu and select the Confirm button (√). — OR — Select a design file from the Drawing List (use the Select All button to select all files from the list) or key in a design filename. The purpose of the entire process is to ensure that each raceway does not occupy the same space as other raceways.

Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. the above message displays. select the Confirm button (√).msg file. Otherwise. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. and batch operating modes (see the section entitled EE Raceway Environment for information about operating modes). the above message displays.err file. This file displays immediately to the screen for your review. The ._ _______________ 4. Select the desired operating mode. The process begins. The . the process returns one of the two messages (described below) to the screen.prj/rway/tmp directory. You may choose between foreground. When complete.prj/rway/tmp directory. background. EERWAY Processes 343 . lists all errors that occurred during the process. displays all processing information. Create Interference Envelope (default name) When you finish completing the input information. This file displays immediately to the screen for your review. you can view the file through the Output option on the Utilities screen. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. Otherwise. Confirm your selections. an ASCII file located in the <current_project>. 5. an ASCII file located in the <current_project>. you can view the file through the Output option on the Utilities screen. 14.

Upon completion. Select Interference Detection from the Process menu and select the Confirm button (√). Key in unique filenames for the error and output files (or accept the displayed default filenames)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .prj/rway/dgn/<filename. Steps 1. you may send the file to Plant Design software and run it against PDS interference detection. 3. The purpose of the entire process is to ensure that each raceway does not occupy the same space as other raceways. the process writes the file to <current_project>. After running the Interference Detection process in EE Raceway. Key in a name for the envelope file. — OR — Select a design file from the Drawing List (use the Select All button to select all files from the list) or key in a design filename. 4. The default error and output files will be overwritten every time you run the process unless you specify unique filenames in the fields. The Create Interference Detection Envelope form displays: 2. 344 . Enter design name.env>.February 2003 Create Interference Envelope (given name) This process reads a design file and creates from that design a data file containing envelopes (spaces in which valid raceway shapes reside).

EERWAY Processes 345 . You may choose between foreground. lists all errors that occurred during the process. The . The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. select the Confirm button (√). When complete. you can view the file through the Output option on the Utilities screen. Otherwise. 14. you can view the file through the Output option on the Utilities screen. Select the desired operating mode. the above message displays. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. 6.prj/rway/tmp directory. Otherwise. and batch operating modes (see the section entitled EE Raceway Environment for information about operating modes). the process returns one of the two messages (described below) to the screen. Confirm your selections. an ASCII file located in the <current_project>. Create Interference Envelope (given name) When you finish completing the input information. the above message displays. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur._ _______________ 5. background. This file displays immediately to the screen for your review.err file.msg file. an ASCII file located in the <current_project>.prj/rway/tmp directory. The . The process begins. displays all processing information. This file displays immediately to the screen for your review.

February 2003 346 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

see the PDS Eden Interface Reference Guide. Extract EDEN User Function From Library — Extracts a specified user function from an Eden symbol library. manipulate the Eden symbol library. List EDEN User Functions — Lists Eden user functions in a selected Eden symbol library. Eden Processes This chapter provides detailed descriptions of available Eden processes. The delivered default symbol source file path is <current_project>/rway/tmp. 15.EErc file in your home directory. see Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment. For information about accessing the processes. The delivered default symbol library path is win32app\eerway\eden._ _______________ 15. then edit the . page 59 . as follows: Compile EDEN Symbol — Compiles an Eden symbol file. The path to the symbol library called in many of the Eden processes is defined by the variable RWAY_EDEN_LIB. You will use these processes to compile Eden symbols. If you want to place your source symbol files in a different directory. Delete EDEN Symbol — Deletes an Eden symbol from the Eden symbol library. List EDEN Symbol Library — Lists Eden symbols in a selected Eden symbol library. You should also consult the appendix in this guide entitled Eden Symbol Generation . Extract EDEN Symbol From Library — Extracts a specified symbol from an Eden symbol library. The path to the extracted symbol source file called in many of the Eden processes is defined by the variable RWAY_EDEN_SRC. Compress EDEN Symbol Library — Compresses an Eden symbol library to remove unused space left by deleted symbols. You will access the Eden processes from the EDEN option found on the EE Raceway Drawing Menu. and edit the Eden symbol file. and gives you the option of placing the symbol in an Eden symbol library. Each Eden process is described in a separate section. If you want to place your Eden library in a different directory. Eden Processes 347 . then edit the to specify the appropriate directory. exporting RWAY_EDEN_LIB to specify the appropriate directory. Eden Processes For a general description of Eden symbol generation. Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries — Merges the contents of two Eden symbol libraries into one library.

February 2003 Edit EDEN Symbol File — Uses a standard ASCII editor to edit a specified symbol source file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 348 .

Eden Processes Before Using This Command You must create an Eden symbol file._ _______________ Compile EDEN Symbol This process compiles an Eden symbol file. select the field. To change the displayed error filename. and key in a new option. To change the displayed default library name. 15. To enter the symbol source file. page 513 for information about symbol file creation. and then adds the symbol to the specified library. Enter option — Displays the default compile option (-o). see the description at the beginning of this chapter. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. select the field. The -o option lists the compiled Eden symbol file. To change the displayed output filename. and key in a new filename. and key in a filename. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. For information about the path to the symbol source file. and gives you the option of placing the compiled symbol in an Eden symbol library. Compile EDEN Symbol Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. Enter symbol source file — Displays the name of the symbol source file to compile. 349 . For information about the path to the symbol library. To change the displayed option. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. select the field. and key in a new filename. The -l option simply lists the compiled Eden symbol file. select the field. See Eden Symbol Generation. and key in a new library name. select the field.

The . select Confirm (√). 2. You can view either file on the screen._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. see Output. Confirm your selections.msg file. Select Compile EDEN Symbol from the list. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. see EDEN. and batch operating modes. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. For information about operating modes. When you have completed the input information. You can choose between foreground. 4. lists all the errors that occurred during processing.February 2003 Steps 1. The . Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. contains any output from the process.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. and select Confirm (√). The file displays immediately to the screen for your review.err file. and the Eden process begins. the message above displays. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. page 67 . 350 . The Compile EDEN Symbol form displays. 3. background. page 89. the above message displays. The . Select the desired operating mode.

see the description at the beginning of this chapter._ _______________ Delete EDEN Symbol This process deletes an Eden symbol from the Eden symbol library. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. select the field. select the field. select the field. Eden Processes 351 . Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. Enter symbol name — Displays the name of the symbol you intend to delete from the library. select the field. and key in a new filename. For information about the path to the symbol source file. For information about the path to the symbol library. and key in the name. 15. To change the displayed output filename. and key in a new library name. Delete EDEN Symbol Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. To change the displayed error filename. and key in a new filename. To enter the symbol name. To change the displayed library name.

err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. Select the desired operating mode. see EDEN. The Delete EDEN Symbol form displays. When you have completed the input information. the message above displays.err file. You can choose between foreground. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. Confirm your selections. 3. The . 352 . page 67 . select Confirm (√).msg file. The ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . background. 4. the above message displays. 2. You can view either file on the screen. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. Select Delete EDEN Symbol from the list. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. The . For information about operating modes. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. contains any output from the process. and select Confirm (√). and the Eden process begins. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. and batch operating modes. page 89.February 2003 Steps 1. see Output. lists all the errors that occurred during processing.

For information about the path to the symbol library. To change the displayed error filename. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. select the field. List EDEN Symbol Library Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. To change the displayed output filename. select the field. To change the displayed library name. Eden Processes 353 . select the field. and key in a new filename. and key in a new filename. and key in a new library name._ _______________ List EDEN Symbol Library This process lists the Eden symbols in the selected Eden library. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. 15.

The .err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. contains any output from the process. and the Eden process begins. page 67 . an ASCII file located in the current working directory. select Confirm (√). Select the desired operating mode. 2. see EDEN. Confirm your selections._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The . background. You can view either file on the screen. Select List EDEN Symbol Library from the list. 354 . 3. For information about operating modes.err file. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. the above message displays. 4. The List EDEN Symbol Library form displays. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. You can choose between foreground. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. see Output.February 2003 Steps 1. When you have completed the input information. and select Confirm (√). and batch operating modes. page 89. The .msg file. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. the message above displays. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. Set up the form parameters to meet you specifications.

The List EDEN User Functions form displays. You can choose between foreground. 15. List EDEN User Functions Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. select the field. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. and key in a new filename. Set up the form parameters to meet you specifications. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. 2. and select Confirm (√)._ _______________ List EDEN User Functions This process lists the Eden user functions in the selected Eden library. and batch operating modes. Select List EDEN Symbol Library from the list. select the field. 355 . For information about operating modes. For information about the path to the symbol library. Steps 1. To change the displayed output filename. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. background. To change the displayed error filename. see EDEN. To change the displayed library name. and key in a new filename. select the field. 3. page 67 . Eden Processes Select the desired operating mode. and key in a new library name.

an ASCII file located in the current working directory. You can view either file on the screen.err file. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. The . contains any output from the process. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. and the list will display. the message above displays. Confirm your selections. page 89. When you have completed the input information. see Output. the above message displays.msg file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 4.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. select Confirm (√). lists all the errors that occurred during processing. 356 . The . The .

To enter a library name. Merge from library name — Displays the name of the symbol library whose contents you will merge with first library. For information about the path to the symbol library. select the field. 2. select the field. and key in a new filename. To enter a library name. Merge into library name — Displays the name of the symbol library into which you will merge the contents of a second library. and key in a name. To change the displayed error filename. The Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries form displays._ _______________ Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries This process merges two Eden symbol libraries into one. For information about the path to the symbol library. and key in a name. select the field. 357 . Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. Select Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries from the list. and select Confirm (√). To change the displayed output filename. and key in a new filename. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. select the field. Eden Processes Steps 1. 15.

see Output. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. Select the desired operating mode. The . select Confirm (√)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. The . 358 . background. You can choose between foreground. You can view either file on the screen. page 67 . page 89. Confirm your selections.err file. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. the message above displays. see EDEN. and batch operating modes. and the Eden process begins.February 2003 3. The . the above message displays.msg file. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. 4. For information about operating modes. When you have completed the input information. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. contains any output from the process.

The Compress EDEN Symbol Library form displays. Select Compress EDEN Symbol Library from the list. Compressing the library removes the unused space left by deleted symbols. select the field. 359 . To change the displayed error filename. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. and key in a new filename. 15. and key in a new filename. Compress EDEN Symbol Library Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. For information about the path to the symbol library. To change the displayed output filename. Eden Processes 2. and key in the name of the library you intend to compress. Steps 1. You can choose between foreground. background. page 67 . 3. Select the desired operating mode._ _______________ Compress EDEN Symbol Library This process compresses the selected Eden symbol library. select the field. see EDEN. and select Confirm (√). To change the displayed library name. and batch operating modes. select the field. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. For information about operating modes. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent.

the above message displays. select Confirm (√). the message above displays. Confirm your selections. page 89. You can view either file on the screen._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. The .February 2003 4. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur.err file. The . 360 . an ASCII file located in the current working directory. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. see Output. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. and the Eden process begins.msg file. The . contains any output from the process. When you have completed the input information.

Eden Processes 361 . select the field. 15. The delivered default source symbol path is win32app\eerway\eden. The path to the extracted symbol source file is defined by the variable RWAY_EDEN_SRC. To change the displayed output filename. For information about the path to the symbol library. and key in a new filename. To change the displayed library name. select the field. If you want to store your source symbol files in another directory. exporting RWAY_EDEN_SRC to define the appropriate directory. then edit the . for example). and key in a new filename. and key in a new library name. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name.EErc file in win32app\eenuc. Extract EDEN Symbol From Library Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. To change the displayed error filename._ _______________ Extract EDEN Symbol From Library This process extracts a symbol from the selected library. select the field. Enter symbol name — Displays the name of the symbol you intend to extract from the library. The extracted symbol is the form of an ASCII file that you can edit using a standard editor (vi or emacs. To enter the symbol name. and key in the name. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. select the field. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. The symbol is not deleted from the library when you extract it.

and batch operating modes. For information about operating modes. When you have completed the input information. page 67 . 4. background. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. Confirm your selections. contains any output from the process. see EDEN. Select Extract EDEN Symbol From Library from the list. Select the desired operating mode. The . Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. You can choose between foreground. page 89. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. and the Eden process begins. 3. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. The .err file.msg file.February 2003 Steps 1. see Output. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. The . select Confirm (√). and select Confirm (√). the message above displays.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. 362 . The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. The Extract EDEN Symbol From Library form displays. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. the above message displays. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. You can view either file on the screen. 2._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

The extracted user function is the form of an ASCII file that you can edit using a standard editor (vi or emacs. select the field. The delivered default source user function path is win32app\eerway\eden. exporting RWAY_EDEN_SRC to define the appropriate directory._ _______________ Extract EDEN User Function From Library Extract EDEN User Function From Library This process extracts a user function from the selected library. Eden Processes 363 . If you want to store your source user function files in another directory. The path to the extracted user function source file is defined by the variable RWAY_EDEN_SRC. For information about the path to the symbol library. select the field. and key in a new library name. The user function is not deleted from the library when you extract it. for example). 15. Enter symbol name — Displays the name of the user function you intend to extract from the library. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. and key in a new filename. select the field. To change the displayed library name.EErc file in win32app\eenuc. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. To change the displayed output filename. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. select the field. and key in the name. To enter the user function name. To change the displayed error filename. then edit the . and key in a new filename.

3. page 67 . The Extract EDEN User Function From Library form displays. background. You can choose between foreground. Select Extract EDEN User Function From Library from the list.February 2003 Steps 1. 4. The . 364 . and the Eden process begins. see EDEN._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . For information about operating modes. Confirm your selections. The . the message above displays. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. lists all the errors that occurred during processing.err file. and batch operating modes.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. Select the desired operating mode. When you have completed the input information. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. and select Confirm (√). select Confirm (√). The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. 2.

The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. contains any output from the process.msg file. the above message displays. The . You can view either file on the screen. see Output. Eden Processes 365 . page 89. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. Extract EDEN User Function From Library 15._ _______________ Process successfully completed If no errors occurred.

366 . select the field._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . It is only available on a graphics terminal. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. Enter editor — Displays the name of the default ASCII editor (vi) that you will use to edit the Eden symbol file. and key in a new filename. select the field. To change the displayed error filename. select the field. Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. and key in a symbol file name. To change the displayed editor.February 2003 Edit EDEN Symbol File This process allows you to edit a symbol source file using a standard ASCII editor. Enter symbol file name — Displays the name of the symbol file you intend to edit. To enter a symbol filename. For information about the path to the symbol source file. and key in a new filename. select the field. and key in a new standard ASCII editor name. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. To change the displayed output filename.

select Confirm (√)._ _______________ Steps 1. an ASCII file located in the current working directory.msg file. When you have completed the input information. and batch operating modes. Select the desired operating mode. The Edit EDEN Symbol File form displays: 2. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. see Output. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. Steps Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. see EDEN.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. The . You can view either file on the screen. lists all the errors that occurred during processing.err file. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. You can choose between foreground. Select Edit EDEN Symbol File from the list. contains any output from the process. page 67 . For information about operating modes. and the Eden process begins. The . Eden Processes 367 . The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. the above message displays. 4. 15. page 89. the message above displays. The . and select Confirm (√). Confirm your selections. 3. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. background.

February 2003 368 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

_ _______________ 16. providing greater interoperability among the various disciplines. Integrated Commands The Integrated Commands are common to EE Raceway and several other PDS modules. create a window containing a specific element. and display information about the reference models attached to the current model. These commands allow you to review an element’s attributes. review the PDS clashes in a model. then selecting Palette from the resulting pull-down menu. 16. not when running standalone EE Raceway. Integrated Commands The Integrated Commands palette is activated by selecting Integrated Commands from the EE Raceway File Menu Bar. The Integrated Commands are only available when running EE Raceway inside PDS. Integrated Commands 369 .

Before Using These Commands Review PDS Attributes – You must have an existing component in the active model or in an attached PDS reference file. Operating Information See individual command descriptions for specific operating information.February 2003 Using the Integrated Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. Reference PDS Model – There are no prerequisite conditions for using this command. Review PDS Clash – You must first have run IFC Clash Detection._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Window to Named PDS Item – You must have existing items in the active model or in an attached PDS reference file. 370 . you can use these commands throughout the design session. and must have an existing clash in the design area. Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for using the commands in this group.

Items being reviewed can be in the active model or in an attached PDS reference file. Use the MicroStation Settings > View Attributes > Turn on construction command. 16. Integrated Commands 371 . Close – Exits the Review PDS Attributes dialog box.1 Review PDS Attributes The Review PDS Attributes command displays the database attributes of a selected component. Value – Displays the item’s attribute value that is defined in the database. Review PDS Attributes Parameters Attribute Name – Lists the item’s attributes._ _______________ 16. To view pipe centerlines (to review the line segments). you need to display construction type elements.

You must select a Discipline and a Design Area before you can select a reference model to attach. Detach – Detaches the selected reference model. Areas – Lists all design areas defined in the active project. Attach – Attaches a reference model._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — Attach by Model – Displays all models in the design area so you can select which model you want to attach.February 2003 16. The model to attach can be from any discipline and design area in the project. then. Select the design area which contains the model you want to attach. then. Area/Model – Specifies whether to attach all models in a design area or an individual model. click Attach. 372 . click Attach. Propagated/Sparse – Specify whether you want to attach the sparse model or the corresponding propagated model. — Attach by Area – Attaches all model in the selected design area. Select the discipline which contains the model you want to attach. You must click Show Attachments and select the reference model you want to detach before clicking Detach. This option only displays if you are attaching a structural model.2 Reference PDS Model The Reference PDS Model command attaches and detaches models from the PDS project to the model as reference files. Parameters Disciplines – Lists all disciplines.

Exit – Exits the Reference Model command. Integrated Commands 373 . Reference PDS Model 16._ _______________ Show Attachments – Displays all reference models attached to the active model.

Instrument Component Number. Depending on which discipline you select. Restore View of Model – Restores the view setting. 374 . You can search for items in the active model or in attached PDS reference files. Options Active Model / Reference Files – Specifies whether to look for the item in the active model or in the attached reference files. or Equipment ID Item Name – Specify the attribute value to search for. One Line Tag. Pipe Tag. or Pipe Support Number — Equipment Attributes – Equipment Number or Equipment and Nozzle Number — PE HVAC Attributes – System ID or Item ID — Raceway Attributes – RCP Tag. Drop Point Tag. Discipline – Specifies the discipline of the item you are looking for. Equipment. — Piping Attributes – Line Number Label. Line ID._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . PE HVAC. Piping Component Number. or Raceway. You can select: Piping. the item attributes you can search for changes.February 2003 16.3 Window to Named PDS Item The Window to Named PDS Item command zooms in on an item whose attribute you identify. Inspection Iso ID.

4 Review PDS Clash The Review PDS Clash command edits and reviews existing clashes and approves existing clashes._ _______________ 16. Clash Marker – Displays the number of the current clash. Unapprove Clash – Changes the status of the clash from approved to unapproved. 16. Select a marker number with the left and right arrows. Approve Real Clash – Approves the clash as a real clash in the Project Control Database. or. Clash Type – Displays the clash type. Approve False Clash – Approves the clash as a false clash in the Project Control Database. select the field and key in a marker number. Integrated Commands 375 . Date – Displays the date and time the clashes were detected. Review Unapproved Clash / Review Approved Clash – Specifies if you want to review approved or unapproved clashes. Review PDS Clash Parameters Project Name – Displays the active project name. Design Area – Displays the active design area name.

Click Select View then select the view you want to update. The descriptions of the clashing component display below the model name and design area. Comments – Displays existing comments about the active clash. You can also select the field and type in any additional information. The descriptions of the clashing component display below the model name and design area. Select View – Zooms in and updates the selected view.February 2003 Item A – Displays the model name and the corresponding design area that has the one item of the clash._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Highlight Clash – Highlights the clash in the selected view. Item B – Displays the model name and the corresponding design area that has the one item of the clash. 376 .

<string> connected to invalid system! Reason: The element belongs to a system that failed to load. Ambiguous Command Reason: The command name you keyed in is not unique. fitting connected to invalid system! Reason: The fitting is attached to a one-line or RCP belonging to a system that failed to load._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Appendix A Error Messages A: Error Messages This appendix has an alphabetical listing of error messages you may receive when you are running EE Raceway Modeling. 377 . Recovery: Make corrections so that the one-line loads without errors. Asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Key in an acceptable command name. Recovery: Use the Set Active One-Line Type to set an active one-line type. Active Raceway type not found Reason: There is no active one-line type defined in the design file. Asid <numeric value>. fitting connected to invalid oneline! Reason: The fitting is connected to a one-line that failed to load. The likely reason for the error and the recovery are listed with the error message wherever this is possible. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system loads without errors. Asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system loads without errors.

Recovery: Make corrections so that the system will load without errors. raceway connect point has invalid codelist value! Reason: Element annotation does not match with entries in a codelist table. then the given specification does not have that part defined in its part table. Recovery: Make corrections to the RCP so that it loads without errors. Asid <numeric value>. If the fitting is a specification-driven part. Asid <numeric value>. 378 . straight connected to invalid oneline! Reason: The straight is attached to a one-line that failed to load.February 2003 Asid <numeric value>. raceway connect point connected to invalid system! Reason: The RCP belongs to a system that failed to load. Recovery: Change element annotation. Recovery: Make corrections so that the one-line will load without errors. Recovery: Review the fitting in the design._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Asid <numeric value>. Asid <numeric value>. <string> not on valid raceway connect point! Reason: The element is attached to an RCP that failed to load. Asid <numeric value>. <string> has invalid codelist value! Reason: Element annotation does not match with entries in a codelist table. part could not be found for fitting! Reason: A part matching the description of the fitting could not be found in the part table. Recovery: Change element annotation.

Recovery: Be sure the database exists and that you have privilege. Recovery: None. straight connected to invalid system! A: Error Messages Reason: The straight is attached to a one-line belonging to a system that failed to load. 379 . Bad user data in design file: cannot continue! Reason: Element has been corrupted. Bad user data on raceway element Reason: Element has been corrupted. Cannot attach to database Reason: The database does not exist or you do not have privilege. when highlighting by sector and word. Recovery: Give the correct filename or access to the file. Recovery: Contact Intergraph support. Asid:<numeric value> <string> Reason: Display the element’s asid number along with a message._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Contact Intergraph support. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system will load without errors. Cannot access filelist <string>! Reason: The file containing the filelist is not available.

digits. Recovery: Key-in in only characters. Recovery: Verify that a valid one-line type is active. 380 . If the problem persists. Reason: There is a corrupt one-line segment or the system user element has been removed._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Verify that a valid system is active. Reason: There is a corrupt one-line segment or the one-line type user element has been removed. the name input already exists in the attached cell library. Recovery: Key in another cell name. call Intergraph support. Recovery: Either key in another name or delete the cell from the cell library so it may be recreated.February 2003 Cannot convert to RAD50: <<string>> Reason: A key-in contains characters that cannot be converted to RAD50. "$". Recovery: The program will restore the original text. or ". Cannot Override <string> Reason: The field or key cannot be overridden. If the problem persists. Invalid olt on oneline.". Cannot Place Cross Section. and replace the one-line. Cell <string> not found in library Reason: The cell name you keyed in does not exist in the cell library. Invalid sys on oneline. Cannot Place Cross Section. Cell exists in library: <string> Reason: During cell creation. and replace the one-line. call Intergraph support.

Recovery: None._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Color not in range 0 to 127 Reason: The input is not within the valid range for a color. Could Not Read PDS Data Element Reason: The PDS user element is not found in the design file. Either the element was removed externally or this design file is not a Raceway or PDS design file. Could not find a cross section on one line Reason: Cross section was removed using the Delete command. Recovery: Key in another column number for the given table. Recovery: Use the Delete command to remove the associated one-lines and then replace them. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range 0 to 127. Recovery: Contact Intergraph support. Could not find alias file Reason: The alias file containing the command names and acceptable key. A: Error Messages Column does not exist Reason: The given column number is greater than the number of columns in the table. Recovery: Have the system manager place the file where it belongs. 381 . Corrupt or no informational link on raceway element Reason: Element has been corrupted.ins is not in the proper location.

February 2003 Could not find EE_CURPRJ. Recovery: Add entries to appropriate tables. Recovery: Replace the corrupted element or call Intergraph support. Recovery: Check the file permissions and the existence of the file. Could not get one line type from user data. 382 . Could not get one line type part table from user data. Could not open <string> Reason: No permission to open file or the file does not exist._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Please export this variable. Reason: Environment variable EE_CURPRJ needs to be exported in order to run this process from the command line. Reason: Corrupt user data on one-line or RCP. Recovery: Check the file permissions and the existence of the file. Reason: Corrupt user data on one-line or RCP. Recovery: Export EE_CURPRJ = <current or project directory> Could not get defaults from reference db Reason: Entries for element not found in reference database. Recovery: Replace the corrupted element or call Intergraph support. Could not open design file Reason: No permission to open file or the file does not exist.

Could not read the PDS 2 user element Reason: The Raceway design file was not created using a PDS or EE Raceway seed file. Could not read one-line user element Reason: Rmon could not read the one-line user element. Could not read the PDS 1 user element Reason: The Raceway design file was not created using a PDS or EE Raceway seed file. Recovery: Check to see that the design file has a type 63 element and at least 7 blocks in it. Recovery: Check to see that the design file has a type 63 element and at least 7 blocks in it. based on cause of error. 383 . Recovery: There are various recoveries. Recovery: Check the file permissions and the existence of the file. Could not read system user element Reason: Rmon could not read the system user element. Recovery: None. A: Error Messages Could not open logfile <string> Reason: A number of factors may result in this error._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Could not open file <string> Reason: No permission to open file or the file does not exist. Recovery: None.

Design file <string> does not exist! Reason: The referenced design file was cannot be found. Cutback Error at oneline <numeric value> Reason: Problems occurred in calculating the cutback from the fitting at the end of a one-line. Recovery: Enter correct filename. Could not retrieve codelist values Reason: The value placed in the codelist column does not appear in the codelist table._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Make sure the key is correct. Recovery: Key in a new key value. Recovery: Check to see that the design file has a type 63 element and at least 7 blocks in it. Could not retrieve specifications for key <string> Reason: You key in a value for the key to the secondary table. If the key does not exist. 384 . Could not write to TCB. The database is case-dependent. Recovery: Change the value to one that appears in the codelist table. Defaults do not exist for <string> key = <string> Reason: An entry in the database does not exist for the specified key. insert it into the reference database.February 2003 Could not read the Raceway user element Reason: Rmon could not read the Raceway user element. Recovery: Make sure you have write access to the design file. status = <numeric value> Reason: The process tried to write a TCB variable to the design file.

Drop point cell ‘‘<string>’’ not found in library Reason: The drop point cell does not exist in the library. Elbow Error: acute angle at oneline index <numeric value>. A: Error Messages Design filename required! Reason: No filename entered. Recovery: Enter design filename. Recovery: None. 385 . change the spec. or replace the one-line so that it has enough room to create the fitting._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Design file name <string> too long Reason: The filename you specified exceeds 128 characters. Recovery: Create a drop point cell and/or enter the correct drop point cell name in the EE Raceway defaults form. Elbow Error with cutback <numeric value> at index <numeric value>. Reason: Acute bends are not supported in this release. Reason: There was inadequate room to place fitting. Recovery: Modify the radius or extension of the fitting. Directory <string> not found Reason: A referenced directory cannot be found. Recovery: Key in a filename with fewer than 128 characters. so it will go past the previous fitting or end of linestring. Recovery: Enter correct directory name.

Recovery: Try to rotate cross sections or place one-line again. Elbow Error: skewed angle at oneline index <numeric value>. Elbow Error: contradictory vertical directions at index <numeric value>. Reason: Widths of the cross sections must be equal.February 2003 Elbow Error: contradictory heights at index <numeric value>. Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. Recovery: Try to rotate cross sections or place one-line again. Reason: The cross sections were not placed with the same horizontal orientation._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Reason: Height of the cross sections must be equal. Elbow Error: contradictory horizontal directions at index <numeric value>. 386 . Reason: Cross section cannot be propagated around bend without being skewed. Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. Elbow Error: contradictory widths at index <numeric value>. Recovery: Rotate the cross section or place one-line again. Reason: The cross sections were not placed with the same vertical orientation.

A: Error Messages Element not found Reason: There does not exist an element with the given sector/word or asid. Recovery: Enter a new asid number. Error building user data Reason: Could not build user data. Error could not write to design file! Reason: No write access to design file. Recovery: Make sure the pro. Error could not write user element! Reason: No write access to design file. Error closing propagation log file. Recovery: Change access to design file._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Element has no parent Reason: The element with the given asid has no parent element.err file and the rway/tmp directory have read/write privileges.err did not close properly. 387 . Recovery: Enter a new value. Reason: File pro. Propagation status may not be recorded. Recovery: Change access to design file. Recovery: Exit the command and retry.

Recovery: Place or annotate title block. Recovery: Add entries to reference database._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Error getting mslinks for tables! Reason: Tables missing in project database. Error getting values from reference for table <string>! Reason: Values for table not found in reference database.February 2003 Error getting annotation information for element! Reason: Element in design file is corrupt. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Error getting information from <string> table! Reason: Table not found in schema. Recovery: Add appropriate tables to project database. Recovery: Delete and replace element in design file. Recovery: Add table to schema or change schema. 388 . Error getting column names from reference for table <string>! Reason: No privilege. Error getting sheet name from design file! Reason: Title block not found or not annotated.

Recovery: Add privilege to database. 389 . Recovery: Make sure that RWAY_EDEN_LIB and EDEN_LIB are set up properly in your . Recovery: Add mscodelist table to reference table. A: Error Messages Error initializing eden library ‘‘<string>’’. Reason: Could not open Eden symbol library. Error loading drawing! Reason: No privilege for operation. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Recovery: Add the ee_unique table to the reference database.EErc file. Error invalid column name in unique table! Reason: Incorrect entry in ee_unique table. Recovery: Correct entry. Reason: Internal error._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Error in graphic bang placement. Error initializing validity table! Reason: Mscodelist table not found. Error initializing unique table! Reason: ee_unique table missing from the reference database.

Error loading one-lines! Reason: No privilege for operation. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Error loading straights! Reason: No privilege for operation. 390 . Recovery: Add privilege to database.February 2003 Error loading drop point! Reason: No privilege for this operation. Error loading fittings! Reason: No privilege for operation. Recovery: Add privilege to the database. Error loading systems! Reason: No privilege for operation. Error loading raceway connect points! Reason: No privilege for operation. Recovery: Add privilege to database._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Error No Placepoints or No Elements._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Error loading to equipment! Reason: No privilege for this operation. Recovery: Modify the Eden symbol. Recovery: Refer to Microstation documentation for recovery. Error opening database! Reason: Schema not found. A: Error Messages Error marking elements for deletion! Reason: ee_to_drw column missing a table. Reason: The Eden symbol definition must contain at least one placepoint. Recovery: Change annotation of element. 391 . one datum point. and one element. Recovery: Add privilege to the database. Error merging annotation from design file! Reason: Element annotation columns do not match columns in project database. Recovery: Add schema or enter correct schema name. Recovery: Add columns and try again. Error opening design file <string>. ustn returned status of <numeric value>! Reason: Microstation could not open specified design file.

Recovery: Add schema to database or change schema name. Error parsing cross section Reason: An error occurred while parsing a cross section. Recovery: Delete the one-line and place it again. Error opening reference database! Reason: Schema not found. Recovery: Delete the one-line containing the RCP and place it again.sql file. Error querying ref db for mscatalog Reason: The mscatalog table does not exist or there is no connect permission. Error parsing one-line Reason: An error occurred while parsing a one-line. Recovery: Add schema to database or change EES_REFDB._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 392 . Recovery: Run the Create Database process with the rwayref.February 2003 Error opening project database! Reason: Schema not found. Error parsing RCP Reason: An error occurred while parsing a raceway connect point (RCP). Recovery: Delete the one-line containing the RCP and place it again.

Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Error reading file list <string>! Reason: No access to read file list. A: Error Messages Error reading TCB of design file! Reason: TCB corrupted. Error reading database table names! Reason: Table name in mscatalog table invalid. Recovery: Correct entry in mscatalog.sql file. Error reading user element of design file! Reason: User element missing or corrupt in design file. Recovery: Run the Create Database process with the rwayref._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Error querying ref db for mscodelist Reason: The mscodelist table does not exist or there is no connect permission. Error reading database column names! Reason: No access to column names. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Recovery: Add privileges to database. Recovery: Change file list name or protection on file list. 393 .

394 . Error sheet name cannot be duplicated! Reason: A drawing with the given sheet name already exists in the database. Recovery: Edit the sheet name. Error unloading connect points! Reason: No privilege to delete from database. Error unloading Sheet! Reason: Sheet not found. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Recovery: Add privilege. The sheet name must be unique within the database. Error spawning server Reason: Could not open reference schema._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Error unloading drawing! Reason: No privilege to delete from database. Recovery: Enter correct sheet name.February 2003 Error saving symbology .Design file may be corrupted Reason: Could not save the symbology to the design file. Recovery: Return to the environment and make sure you are using the correct reference schema.

The process creates a zero-length envelope. Recovery: Key in a value. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Fatal error! Vector length was negative. Recovery: Fix other errors. Recovery: Read previous error messages to determine cause. Recovery: None. Reason: Internal error. Errors occurred during interference detection process! Reason: Fatal error occurred during process. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Field may not contain an empty value Reason: Field cannot be left blank._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Error starting or stopping graphic bang. Reason: Interference detection found an item of size = 0 (length). A: Error Messages Error updating row in <string> table! Reason: No privilege to write to database. 395 . Errors existed during unload Reason: Errors in other procedures.

all four one-lines must be at right angles to each other. Recovery: Replace the one-line that forms the illegal angle. 396 . Fitting Error: contradicting at RCP asid <numeric value>. Fitting Error: Illegal angle at RCP asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Write over the existing file or attach new file to existing file. Reason: Heights of cross sections are inconsistent._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. Fitting Cutback Error at RCP asid <numeric value>. Reason: There was inadequate room to place fitting. change the spec. or replace the one-line so that it has enough room to create the fitting. at a cross. Reason: An illegal angle exists. extension or transition of the fitting. For example. overwrite or append? Reason: The specified file already exists. Reason: Widths of cross sections are inconsistent and no reducing fitting is allowed in this case. Fitting Error: contradicting widths at RCP asid <numeric value>. Reason: The cross sections cannot be propagated at the fitting without being skewed. Recovery: Try rotating cross sections or replacing the one-lines. so it will go past the previous fitting or linestring. Recovery: Modify the radius. Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. Fitting Orientation Error at RCP asid <numeric value>.February 2003 File <string> exists.

a form could not be displayed by the software. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range 0 to 255. A: Error Messages Form could not be created Reason: A form could not be created by the software. Form could not be displayed Reason: Once created. Form error could not find form file <string> Reason: The referenced form file could not be found in the path defined by EE_FORM_PATH. 397 ._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Font not in range 0 to 255 Reason: The input was not within valid range for a font. Form creation error Reason: The software could not create a form. Form error reading form file <string> Reason: I-Forms could not read the referenced form file. Recovery: Make sure the referenced form file exists in the path defined by EE_FORM_PATH which is defined in the product. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Recovery: Exit and re-enter the product. Possible memory allocation problem. Try to exit and re-enter the software. Recovery: Make sure the referenced form file exists in the path defined by EE_FORM_PATH which is defined in the product. Recovery: Fatal error.

Recovery: Enter a value within the range of -32768 to 32767. Recovery: Fix problem as specified by earlier error messages. Recovery: Exit and reenter the product._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 398 . Interference Detection initialization error! Reason: Could not open design filelist or read the design file. Function locked out: no permission Reason: This function has been disallowed by the system manager. Graphic group not found Reason: No elements found in the design file with the given graphic group.February 2003 Forms environment not initialized Reason: Fatal error. Integer not in range -2147483648 to 2147483647: <string> Reason: The value entered exceeds the range or the input is corrupted. Recovery: Remove the function name from the EERWAY_LOCKED_OUT variable in the ./config/assign file. Recovery: Delete the highlighted element or move it outside the fence area. Integer not in range -32768 to 32767: <string> Reason: The value entered exceeds the range or the input is corrupted. Recovery: Enter a value within the range of -2147483648 to 2147483647. Invalid annotation type Reason: Annotation of the wrong type was found inside the fence block annotation when trying to close a cell.

Reason: Could not create Eden symbol with the given criteria. Recovery: Key in another asid id. Place Title Block must be given a title block cell. For example. Recovery: Change the criteria on the Manual Placement form or modify the symbol._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Invalid asid id Reason: An element cannot be found in the design file with the given asid id. 399 . Recovery: Create a valid drop point cell through cell creation. Recovery: Key in a cell of the type the command is expecting. Invalid Eden Processor Input. <numeric value>. Reason: The symbolname is blank. Invalid Eden Symbolname ’<string>’. Recovery: Make sure the priority level of the identified RCP is less than or equal to the priority level of the one-line. A: Error Messages Invalid cell: <string> Reason: The given cell is not the type the command expected. Recovery: Modify the reference database to contain a symbolname for each part. Invalid drop point cell: ‘‘<string>’’ Reason: The cell is not a valid drop point. Invalid Connection Reason: The identified RCP has a higher priority level than the identified one-line.

Invalid height/width for cross section type <string>. Recovery: Select another graphic group number._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Modify reference database height/width for the active specification. Reason: The height or width is less than or equal to zero. quantity must be an integer greater than 0. click on the REMOVE button to delete. Invalid key in . 400 . Recovery: Key in a new value greater than 0.February 2003 Invalid graphic group number Reason: The graphic group number is outside the valid range. Recovery: Enter an integer value.quantity can not be set to 0 Reason: The value you entered is not a valid input. Recovery: Key in another value. If it is a cable entry. For example. Invalid integer: <string> Reason: The value entered is not a valid integer. Invalid mix of EDF and text: <string> Reason: Field consists of text and Enter Data Fields for the same string. Recovery: Make the field either all text or all EDF. Invalid input Reason: You entered an incorrect value.

Recovery: Enter a valid response. Invalid RCP . Invalid response Reason: You entered an invalid response to a system prompt. Recovery: Re-enter a valid real number. Reason: The elbow or straight at the one-line cannot be verified with the database. A: Error Messages Invalid Part Found at oneline asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Turn Part Verification off OR add the fitting to the database._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Invalid Part Found at RCP asid <numeric value>. Invalid real number: <string> Reason: The value entered must contain a decimal with a preceding number. Reason: The fitting at the RCP cannot be verified with the database. Recovery: You can only remove an RCP with exactly two one-lines attached.Only two one-lines can be attached Reason: The RCP has more or fewer than two one-lines attached. Recovery: Turn Part Verification off OR add the elbow or straight to the database. 401 . vertex <numeric value>. Recovery: Delete the RCP and place the one-line again. Invalid RCP – No one-lines attached Reason: There are no one-lines associated with the raceway connect point (RCP).

Recovery: Delete the element and place it again or recreate the element. Recovery: Create a valid equipment pointer through cell creation. Recovery: Key in another title block cell name. Level not in range 1 to 63 Reason: The input was not within the valid range for a level. Invalid equipment pointer cell: ‘‘<string>’’ Reason: The cell is not a valid equipment pointer. Recovery: Enter another entity/mslink. Recovery: Enter another sector/word value. Invalid title block Reason: Not a valid title block. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range of 1 to 63.February 2003 Invalid/No ris link on element Reason: An element with the given entity/mslink could not be found in the design file. 402 . Invalid ulink on element Reason: Not a valid ulink for the element. Invalid sector/word values Reason: An element could not be found at the given sector/word location in the design file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Recovery: Enter LT. 403 . Reason: Invalid text justification entered. A: Error Messages Max run angle = <numeric value>.or RB in the justification field. Must be LT. CB. CT.. RT. More than one title block found! Reason: More than one title block exists in the design file. and place the element or RCP. Recovery: Delete all but one of the highlighted elements. Recovery: Delete all but one title block. RC._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Load initialization error! Reason: Some other initialization error procedure failed. Recovery: Delete the highlighted area. LC. Mismatched annotation Reason: Annotation was found that has no parent inside of the fence area. CC. Recovery: Terminate before exceeding the max. or RB. LB. LC. Multiple annotation for column <numeric value> Reason: Only one annotation element per column is allowed. Recovery: Fix other problems. current = <numeric value> Reason: The sum of all the angles in the current one-line exceeds the maximum as defined in the one-line type. ..

Recovery: Define an active system using the Set Active System command. No columns available for annotation Reason: The database does not contain the EE Raceway database tables. 404 . Recovery: Specify a group to be active. Recovery: Attach a cell library (rc=celllibraryname.cel).February 2003 Must enter cell name to close Reason: You tried to close a cell without keying in a name. No cell library attached Reason: A cell library is not attached to the design file. No active system defined Reason: You did not define an active system in the design file. Recovery: Add the EE Raceway tables to the database. No active one line type defined Reason: You did not define an active one-line type in the design file. Recovery: Key in a cell name to close or exit the command. Recovery: Define an active one-line type using the Set Active One-Line Type command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . No active group defined Reason: The selected group operation requires that you define an active group.

405 . or C in the active specification._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages No Duplicate Group Name Allowed Reason: The new group name matches the name of an existing group. No memory available for form Reason: The forms software could not allocate enough memory for creation of the form. Recovery: Press the Override button and key in the value again. No memory available! Recovery: Exit the process and re-enter and/or reboot the workstation. No raceway one-line type defined Reason: You must have at least one one-line type defined from the reference database in the design file. A: Error Messages No elements in fence Reason: The defined fence does not contain a valid element within its borders. Recovery: Key in another name. B. C for the cross section type. Recovery: Exit completely and re-enter the product. No overrides allowed without override button on Reason: The Override button is not depressed. B. Reason: The cross section must be of type A. No or Illegal Cross section type <string>. Recovery: Define a one-line type from the reference database using the Define One-Line Type command. Recovery: Modify the reference database to include A. Recovery: Redefine the fence to include a valid element.

Recovery: Add read/write permissions to file. Recovery: Populate the database.February 2003 No read/write access to file <string> Reason: No permission to read and write to the specified file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 406 . Recovery: Populate the database with parts. No systems defined in this design file Reason: You must have at least one system defined from the reference database in the design file. No valid parts exist for this oneline type Reason: The database has no parts for this specification of the one-line type. No valid elements in group Reason: The active group does not contain any valid elements for the specified group manipulation command. Recovery: Define a system from the reference database using the Define System command. Recovery: Populate the database with parts. No valid dimensions exist for this oneline type Reason: The database has no parts for this specification of the one-line type. No valid spec exist for this oneline type Reason: No specifications exist in the database for this one-line type. No valid spec keys exist for this oneline type Reason: Problem retrieving the active specification. Recovery: Make sure the active specification is in the database through Define Raceway Parameters.

No values found in the codelist Reason: The codelist table contains no rows. One-lines do not contain same systems Recovery: Identify one-lines that contain the same systems. Recovery: Populate the database. Recovery: Attach a cell library that has read/write permissions or assign write permission to the current cell library. One-line is a member of a different system Recovery: Change the active systems to that of the identified one-line. Not an EE RACEWAY design file Reason: The design file was not seeded with the EE Raceway seed file._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages No valid special part tables exist Reason: There are no special parts tables in the database. 407 . Recovery: Populate the database. A: Error Messages No valid special parts exist for this table Reason: There are no special parts defined in the active table. Recovery: Insert the rows into the codelist table that corresponds to the column. Recovery: The design file must be created using the EE Raceway seed file. No write access to cell library Reason: The attached cell library is read only.

Recovery: Give length in the Length field on the Manual Placement form. Recovery: Modify the Eden symbol. Reason: The straight must be place with a length greater than 0. Reason: One-line type user data corrupt on one-line OR the system symbology user elements have been corrupted. Placepoints/Datumpoints are not defined properly. Project schema not defined Reason: EE_SCHEMA has not been exported._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Call Intergraph support. 408 . Recovery: None. Reason: Eden symbol must have at least one datumpoint and at least one placepoint defined. Placing Straight Section with No Length. Recovery: Select another option. Projecting oneline with asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Export the variable EE_SCHEMA. Reason: This identifies which one-line is being projected. Problem retrieving symbology from one line type element. Problem with shared memory! Reason: Internal error.February 2003 Option not allowed Reason: The selected option is not allowed.

Reference schema table missing required columns Reason: A required column in the table for the element you are annotating is NOT in the table or in the mscolumns table. A: Error Messages Raceway title block not found Reason: Unable to locate a title block in the design file. Recovery: Identify one of these elements. Reference schema name required! Reason: EES_REFDB has not been exported. Recovery: Specify new find criteria. Select failed. Schema name required Reason: No schema name entered. no rows found fitting the given criteria Reason: Could not find rows in the database fitting the specified find criteria. Recovery: Place a title block in the design file. Recovery: Export EES_REFDB. The required columns’ names are prefixed with "ee_". 409 . three-line. Recovery: Create the appropriate table. Recovery: Enter schema name. title block._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Raceway element not found Reason: Unable to locate a valid raceway element (one-line. RCP).

Symbol file not found: <string> Reason: The symbol file EE_SYM_FILE could not be found in the symbol path EE_SYM_PATH. Table number <numeric value> not in mscatalog Reason: The specified table number / table name entry does not exist in the reference database. Recovery: Add the missing entry into the mscatalog table by loading the mscat.February 2003 Sheet Name is required Reason: No sheet name entered. Text element not found Reason: A text element could not be located. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range 0 to 7. 410 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Make sure EE_SYM_FILE and EE_SYM_PATH are defined in the directory. Recovery: Identify a valid text element.unl file or inserting a row through SQL. Sheet not found in database! Reason: Sheet name not in drawing table. Recovery: Change sheet name. Style not in range 0 to 7 Reason: The input was not within the valid range for style. Recovery: Enter sheet name.

snap to the angle. Truncated <numeric value> characters Reason: The number of characters allowed in the field has been exceeded by <numeric value> characters. Too many one-lines at RCP <numeric value> Reason: Cannot propagate with this many one lines. Recovery: Add privileges to the database. Recovery: Place a manual fitting. Warning Cannot calculate envelope for non-planar complex shape with Asid = <numeric value> Reason: Found a cell containing a complex shape which does not meet any lines or surfaces at a 90 degree angle.Some fields review only Reason: Some fields are locked once you place the title block and. cannot be edited. A: Error Messages Title block placed . Recovery: Highlight the cell with that Asid and look to see if an envelope needs to be built for the complex shape in that cell. therefore. Recovery: None. 411 . Recovery: None Unload initialization error! Reason: No privilege to read table or column names. To ensure a measure of 90 degrees. Rebuild cell so that the complex shape meets a line or surface at 90 degrees. The system cannot calculate the height and direction of projection of this complex shape. Recovery: Enter a new value greater than zero._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages The value must be greater than zero Reason: The width must be greater than zero.

Recovery: Modify the specification or parts through annotation OR modify or replace the one-lines./config/assign file and that its value is a full path. Recovery: Accept or reject the one-line type selection form. not in project! Reason: The referenced column was found in the reference not the project database.February 2003 Warning Column <string> found in reference. Warning Drawing not valid type! Reason: The title block annotation does not match the annotation type table. Recovery: Change the title block annotation. 412 . Warning invalid symbol path: <string> Reason: The symbol path EE_SYM_PATH could not be found. Warning invalid form path: <string> Reason: The form path EE_FORM_PATH could not be found. Recovery: If necessary. Recovery: Make sure EE_FORM_PATH is defined in the . Warning Fittings at oneline <numeric value> overlap Reason: Fittings at either end of the one-line overlap./config/assign file and that its value is a full path._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you can add a column to the project database and copy the values over. Warning must accept/reject One Line Type selection Reason: You must accept/reject the one-line type selection form before performing a group operation. Recovery: Make sure EE_SYM_PATH is defined in the .

_ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Warning must accept/reject System selection Reason: You must accept/reject the system selection form before performing a group operation. 413 . Recovery: Enter a new value within the range of 0 to 31. Weight not in range 0 to 31 Reason: The input was not in the valid range for weight. Recovery: Key in the desired group name. Recovery: Accept or reject the system selection form. A: Error Messages Warning must keyin a group name Reason: When performing the selected group operation. you must key in a group name.

February 2003 414 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Appendix K: RIS Schema Manager contains a detailed description of the RIS Schema Manager utility.cmds file. rule checks. It identifies the files that can be modified and describes some important files. This file is run automatically when you enter EE Raceway. Also included in this appendix are two descriptions and printouts related to customizing the alias. B: System/App Mgmt. Appendix I: rway. It attaches the panel menu.cmd file and customizing menus. reports.cmd file as it is delivered. The key-in names for commands can be modified by editing these files. Included in these appendices are important references and procedures needed to prepare and customize the EE Raceway product: Appendix C: EE Databases describes the EE databases and contains schema descriptions for both the reference and project databases.cmd file contains the alias. You will need this appendix to locate files that you want to modify. Appendix H: alias._ _______________ Appendix B: System/Application Manager Information Appendix B System/Application Manager Information This appendix and the following appendices outline the responsibilities for the EE Raceway system or application manager. Important new procedures related to RIS and the databases are described in this section. You can modify or disable this function through the file. Appendix J: Reports contains detailed descriptions of the standard and rule checks reports delivered with the product. Appendix D: Specification describes vendor specifications and how to prepare them. and printers in the EE Raceway Environment. Appendix G: Customizing Environment Files explains how to modify the files that list the processes.cmds contains the rway. Appendix F: EE File Structure contains the file structure for both EE Nucleus and EE Raceway. Appendix L: RIS Schema Definition File describes the file that maintains all schema definitions known to RIS. 415 . Appendix E: Eden Symbol Generation describes generation of Eden symbols and provides a sample symbol processor file.

416 .February 2003 Appendix M: EE Manager contains a description of the EE Manager utility and its Edit Database process. Appendix N: EE Configure describes the EE environment variables and how to configure them._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

The available precision input forms (described below) reside in win32app\eerway\sym. Adding a One-Line Type This section outlines the basic steps necessary to add a new one-line type to the reference database. Refer to the MicroStation Applications Programmer’s Guide for this latter procedure. Add the <one-line_type>_spec and <one-line_type>_part tables to the reference database. 1.EErc file (win32app\eenuc) to a different form name. Precision Input Form B: System/App Mgmt. as in the following example: create table trench_spec ( vendor integer not null. Such customization includes writing processes and user commands using the MicroStation software. For detailed information about editing your ._ _______________ Appendix B: Customizing Customizing Some simple customization is described in the appendices entitled Customizing.unl files and database tables. 417 . and rway.cmd. ee_extension real. These instructions are intended as a basic workflow. ee_out_ht_diam real not null.cmds (all involve modifying existing text files using an editor). alias. consult the appendix entitled EE Databases. Several designs of the precision input form are delivered with EE Raceway. ee_units integer not null. ee_out_width real. Form Name piform* piform_tal1 piform_tal2 piform_thn1 piform_thn2 Description default tall/thin (design 1) tall/thin (design 2) long/thin (design 1) long/thin (design 2) * The chapter entitled Precision Input Form contains a detailed illustration of the default form design (piform). More extensive customization is possible for advanced users. ee_dimension_1 real. set the variable EE_PIFORM in the . ee_dimension_2 real. To change the form design.

For sample files. create table trench_part ( ee_tl_type integer. grant all on trench_part to public. 418 . 3. Create a <one-line_type>_spec. create index i_fsvendor on trench_spec(vendor). ee_spec_key char(28). create unique index i_fpeekey on fit_part(ee_part_key). ee_part char(20). ee_weight real. Add any new vendors to the vendor table in the reference database.unl files that are delivered with EE Raceway. 2. ee_angle real. ee_symbol char(6). ee_tl_subtype integer. create index i_fpskey on trench_part(ee_spec_key)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . All delivered . char(40) ). ee_tl_qual integer. create unique index i_fseekey on trench_spec(ee_spec_key). You can add the necessary rows directly to the vendor codelist table in the database. or you can add the data to your vendor. create index i_fswidth on trench_spec(ee_out_width). ee_spec2_key char(28). ee_part_key char(28) not null.February 2003 ee_transition ee_radius weight material ee_xs_cell ee_spec_key description real. char(20).unl file.unl files reside in win32app\eerway\db.unl file which contain the required default values for the one-line type. real. char(6). refer to the tray_spec and tray_part .unl file and a <oneline_type>_part. real. ee_description char(40) ). char(28) not null. create index i_fsheight on trench_spec(ee_out_ht_diam). grant all on trench_spec to public.

You can accomplish this either by adding rows directly to the mscatalog table or by inserting records in the mscatref. For detailed information about editing your .unl file.cmd file.unl file.unl file. You can accomplish this either by adding rows directly to the mscolumns table or by inserting records in the mscolref. 9. 8. Add the special fitting table to the reference database. Add the new one-line type to the ol_type table. consult the appendix entitled EE Databases. B: System/App Mgmt. see the appendix entitled EE Databases. Add necessary rows to the mscodelist table in the reference database for any columns that are codelisted for the one-line type. as in the following example: create table transit ( vendor integer not null.unl" DELIMITER "|". 419 . Add records to the mscolumns table (in the reference database) for both the <one-line_type>_spec and the <one-line_type>_part tables.unl file and the <oneline_type>_part.unl file. These instructions are intended as a basic workflow. 7. Adding a Special Fitting This section outlines the basic steps necessary to add a special fitting to the reference database. You can accomplish this either by adding rows directly to the mscodelist table or by inserting records in the mscodref. Run the Update reference schema process to add your new one-line type to the database. 6. in a format like the following: FILE "tray_part.unl files and database tables. 1. Customizing 5. For information about codelists._ _______________ Appendix B: 4. You can accomplish this either by adding the row directly to the ol_type table or by inserting records in the olt. Add records to the mscatalog table (in the reference database) for both the <one-line_type>_spec and the <one-line_type>_part tables. INSERT INTO tray_part.unl files to the rwayref. Add the newly-created <one-line_type>_spec.

3.unl that contains the required default values for your fitting. grant all on transit to public. char(20). refer to the pullbox. create index i_tsitvendor on transit(vendor).unl" DELIMITER "|". For a sample special fitting . 7. Create any new Eden symbols needed to graphically display the new special fitting. Add the new special fitting to the three-line type codelist table. 2. INSERT INTO pullbox. Add the newly-created <special fitting>. real. Add any new vendors to the vendor table in the reference database. real not null. You can add rows directly to the vendor codelist table in the database. char(6). create unique index i_tsiteekey on transit(ee_part_key). or you can insert records in the vendor. create index i_tsitwidth on transit(ee_out_width).unl file to the rwayref. 4. in a format like the following: FILE "pullbox. char(28) not null. 6. For basic information about creating Eden symbols. create index i_tsitheight on transit(ee_out_ht_diam). 5. or you add the data to your tlt. see the appendix entitled Eden Symbol Generation. char(40) ). Add a row to the mscatalog table (in the reference database) for the special fitting table.cmd file.February 2003 ee_units ee_out_ht_diam ee_out_width ee_dimension_1 weight material ee_part ee_symbol ee_part_key ee_description integer not null. char(20).unl file. create index i_tsitdepth on transit(ee_dimension_1). 420 .unl file. real.unl file. You can add the entry directly to the tl_type table in the database.unl file that is delivered with EE Raceway. real. Create a <special fitting>._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Run the Update reference schema process to add your new special fitting to the database. or by inserting a record in the mscatref. the hard-coded error message name is to the left of each = (equal sign). 11. or by inserting a record in the manprt.unl file. You can accomplish this either by adding rows directly to the mscodelist table or by inserting records in the mscodref. For information about codelists.msg files in both win32app\eerway\msg and win32app\eenuc\msg. To the right of each = is the message itself. You can accomplish this either by adding the row directly to the mscolumns table in the database. or by inserting a record in the mscolref. Use a standard text editor to modify the error. Add a row to the mscolumns table (in the reference database) for the special fitting table. 10. Reports may also be created using the native RDBMS report writing product. which you can modify.unl file. The report template library is delivered in the win32app\eerway\report directory. 8. 421 . You cannot change this name. You can accomplish this either by adding a row to the manual_part table in the database.unl file. see the appendix entitled EE Databases.msg files. In these files. Error Messages Error messages for the delivered commands are located in the error. Customizing Add necessary rows to the mscodelist table (in the reference database) for any columns that are codelisted for the special fitting. B: System/App Mgmt. Add the new special fitting entry to the manual part table. Delivered reports are created using the RISRPT product and are compatible with the DB Access (DBA) product. Reports You can create or modify standard and rule check reports. 9._ _______________ Appendix B: You can accomplish this either by adding a row directly to the mscatalog table.unl file.

They include Microstation. Sets the directory that holds the menu file mgds. "am=ustn.cfg file contains detailed descriptions of the MicroStation and Umenu environment variables. or "am=n._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Used as a pointer to application programs. 422 . the file MicroStation uses to save data about the attached menu. Sets the directory where application executable files are found when activated from a user command TSK statement.sb1"). Defines the path to the on-line Help files. The following environment variables are defined in the win32app\eerway\ee. "am=n.ndx) files. The following environment variable is defined in the win32app\eerway\bin\c400 or c100/rmonshell file: MS_CACH Sets the memory to be allocated for a design file editing session. Directory path to the EE Raceway symbols. Sets the directory where application-/user-defined menus are to found when activated from an "am=n.men. This directory is also the location of user command index (. Sets the directory for the on-line Help files. and EE Raceway-specific variables.cfg file: For MicroStation: MS_CELL MS_APP MS_EXE MS_APPMEN Sets the directory that holds the cell libraries.e. Directory for the database table files Directory path to the EE Raceway forms. For EE Raceway: EERD_COMPRESS EERD_MSGS EERD_TBLS RWAY_FORM_PATH EE_SYM_PATH EE_SYM_FILE Compresses the file when you exit a design session. File containing EE Raceway symbols. Directory for the message files. MS_DATA MS_TMP MS_HELPFILE MS_HELPPATH The MicroStation\Program\MicroStation\config\msconfig. This variable will override the user preferences setting.sb" (i.h1".February 2003 EE Environment Variables This section lists and describes the environment variables that are delivered when you download EE Raceway. EE Nucleus.cs". Sets the directory for temporary files. These environment variables can be modified using the Start > Programs > EENUC > EE Configure command.

Project Database cmd file. User-defined project database sql file. Directory path and filename of password file to enter system manager page. Name of the precision input form that displays during the design session. The following are the environment variables defined in the win32app\eenuc\. EE_CURPRJ* EE_DBS* EE_NODENAME EE_REMDIR EE_SCHEMA EE_USERNAME SYS_PASSW_FILE EE_CUSTOM_SQL EE_CUSTOM_CMD EE_CUSTOM_REFSQL EE_CUSTOM_REFCMD EE Environment Variables Directory path for current EE project. An asterisk (*) indicates that you cannot override a particular value. User-defined reference database cmd file. delivered with the EE Nucleus product. A variable used for ORACLE databases. Default nodename for archive/restore. Default remote path for archive/restore._ _______________ Appendix B: The following are the environment variables that are recognized by the EE Nucleus product. Filename for the Eden symbol library. Directory path for the RIS product. Font used by MicroStation for window and menu display. An asterisk (*) indicates that you cannot override a particular value. User-defined reference database sql file. Default username for archive/restore. User-defined project database cmd file. Reference Database cmd file. An asterisk (*) indicates that you cannot override a particular value. B: System/App Mgmt. Directory path for data files. For EE Raceway: EE_RWAY* EERWAY_DAT EERWAY_SEED RWAY_CMD RWAY_SQL RWAYREF_CMD RWAYREF_SQL EDEN_LIB RWAY_EDEN_LIB EE_PIFORM Directory path for the EE Raceway product. Project Database sql file. it must be set to "A". The following are the environment variables defined in the win32app\eenuc\bin\EE file. Directory path for data files. The following are the environment variables defined using the EE Configure command. Defines the "tty" type you are running on. 423 . MS_DIR RIS_DIR EE_NUC* ENV_MSGS EENUC_DAT Directory path for the MicroStation product. Schema name for project database. Reference Database sql file. Directory path for message files. Directory path for seed files.EErc file. delivered when you download the EE Nucleus product. Directory path and project database name. Directory path for EE Nucleus product. delivered when you download the EE Nucleus product. MS_USERPREF MS_CMDWINDRSC MS_SYSFONTS EE_TERM ORACLE_SID Directory path and filename of user preference file. Directory path and filename of command window resource file. Directory path for the Eden symbol library.

Directory path for EE forms. Data files for DB Access Support. Directory path for ORACLE executables.February 2003 DBA_SUPPORT EES_REFDB EES_REFSER EE_FORM_PATH EE_SYM_FILE EE_SYM_PATH For ORACLE databases: ORACLE_HOME For INGRES databases: II_SYSTEM For INFORMIX databases: INFORMIXDIR Directory path for INFORMIX executables. Directory path for INGRES executables. EE reference database server process._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Directory path for EE symbol file. Filename of EE symbol file. 424 . Schema name for reference database.

Thus. C: EE Databases 425 . they are based on the relational data model in which a relation is a two-dimensional table comprised of rows and columns. Procedures that must be followed by new users of the EE product. Oracle. and Ingres. allowing generic network access to all EE databases generated with the following RDBMS’s: Standard Engine (SE) Informix. you are not forced to re-enter common information for each project. such as symbol and part information. Procedures that must be followed by existing users of the EE product. Most relational databases use Standard Query Language (SQL). that is.) One reference database can be accessed by multiple project databases. This section contains: Descriptions of the EE databases and the Intergraph software. (For those familiar with EDES. A project is an associated collection of drawings and their database. The reference database is identified when you enter a project. the reference database replaces the concept of shared part entity files and active entity files. Schema descriptions for the EE project database and the EE reference database. RIS. a generic relational database interface. You can report and query from the reference database as well as the project database._ _______________ Appendix C: EE Databases Appendix C EE Databases All EE databases you create will be relational databases. Processes needed in the procedures above. The Electrical Engineer product line is supported by two relational databases: a project database and a reference database. that supports it. The project database contains information applicable to a particular project. The reference database contains information applicable to multiple projects. The EE products attach to their relational databases through Intergraph Corporation’s Relational Interface System (RIS). On-line Informix. RIS isolates the differences in specific vendors’ Relational Database Management Systems (RDBMS).

Different RDBMS’s establish users in different ways. which you define. in fact. Through the use the RIS risschema_mgr product. the very concept of a database differs greatly from one RDBMS to another. you can update schemas without knowing either the differences between RDBMS’s or the syntax of the RIS create schema statement. The RIS schema identifies a unique database/user combination in a given commercial database system._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . (See the appendix entitled RIS Schema Manager for more information on the RIS Schema Manager product.) 426 . to attach to an SQL-type database.February 2003 Relational Interface System (RIS) All EE products use a RIS schema.

but it can exist anywhere as long as the parameters file (win32app\ingr\share\RISversion\parms) points to it. (See the appendix entitled RIS Schema Manager for detailed information on using the RIS Schema Manager product._ _______________ Appendix C: Database and RIS Procedures Database and RIS Procedures You must adhere to the procedures that follow before using EE with a relational database. The risschema_mgr process updates and maintains the file. page 50). using the risschema_mgr process. Once you have created a schema on your empty database. The process resides locally on your machine and recognizes any RIS schema on any database. The risschema file is an ASCII file that contains the names. ownerships. you must use the RIS Schema Manager product to create a schema. After you have created an empty database. use the Update Schema option under Database Utilities (see Database Utilities. see the appendix entitled RIS Schema Definition File. local or remote. Access RIS Schema Manager through the Database Utilities option in the EE Environment. You can usually locate this file in the RIS product directory. or see INFORMIX documentation for other creation methods. For more information about the risschema file. and locations of all RIS schemas and databases. — You can locate the risschema file from another workstation using the risschema_mgr process and access any schemas created on that machine. You can manage the risschema file in any of the following ways: — You can create and maintain your own risschema file. You should consult the individual RDBMS documentation on installation procedures. that was created using RIS Schema Manager. Check the documentation delivered with the product for information on infxcreate.) This process will create the risschema definition file. To do so. For New Users You must first create an empty database and a user name through your chosen RDBMS. C: EE Databases 427 . INFORMIX users will now have to create all databases in ANSI mode. you need to populate that database with EE tables and default information.

sql file.February 2003 Update Schema (create_db) Process You can use this program to do the following: Update an existing empty RIS schema with EE tables and default information.cmd files.sql file. — OR — Modify an existing RIS schema’s tables to conform to the structure of a given . You should run the Update schema process from the EE Environment Project Menu. The process replaces the old table definition with the new table definition keeping column data where column names match.sql file -c . If you want to load a schema with default information. the process will: — add new tables listed in the . This is the command line syntax for the Update schema process: win32app\eenuc\bin\create_db [-v] [-q . Where a table lacks a unique index. 428 . you must have at least: — an SQL (. — load those tables having a unique index with data from the . — AND — — the corresponding . you can also include: — a command (.sql file. the process loads it only if the table is empty._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and then key in the command line syntax for the process. — modify existing tables if the definition of that table has changed in the .sql file. To run it outside of the EE Environment. If Update schema is used with a .unl file(s) which contain default information.sql file that has a different structure than the original .cmd) file that defines which .cmd file] schema name -v -q . you must first export the variable ENV_MSGS to win32app\ingr\eenuc\msg.sql) file which contains the table and column structure.unl files that are listed in the .cmd file displays SQL commands as they are executed schema definition file command file to load schema To create a new schema.sql file] [-c .unl files to load into which tables.

You can use this process to execute ANY valid RIS-supported SQL statement upon an existing schema. C: EE Databases 429 . with EE Raceway tables and default reference information.cmd sample_ref This will populate an empty sample_ref schema.sql -c \win32app\ingr\eerway\db\rwayref. Simply place it in a file and call that filename with the -q option. created through the risschema_mgr process on an existing schema._ _______________ Appendix C: Update Schema (create_db) Process Example: $ create_db -q win32app\ingr\eerway\db\rwayref.

February 2003 Reference Schema . it uses the DEFAULT key attributes. tray_spec. The key_column field is a unique index used to identify a particular row of default attributes in the reference schema. Each of the tables is delivered with one entry called DEFAULT. one-line. 430 . for example. drop points. The one-line table is delivered with both the DEFAULT and METRIC DEFAULT keys. one-lines. Some of the columns in the reference schema tables are required and cannot be modified or deleted. The actual column names are defined by the values of the key_columns and key_description in the mscatalog entry for the given table. the drawing. the project schema must be custom-built accordingly. But if the project schema is custom-built. and so forth) during a design session. Selecting the active one-line type parameters during a design session. If the system cannot find a key for some reason. fittings. Each of these keys will be the default key for all one-lines of a given one-line type unless you override the key during annotation for an individual one-line. including. 2. RCP. the reference schema needs to be custom-built only if you want defaults for any new column to exist in the reference schema. the reference schema tables contains two additional columns: key_column and key_description. Reporting. The DEFAULT key is used with the seed design file using English measurements. Default Attributes Some tables exist in the reference schema to support default attributes. one-lines._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . straights. You will identify these keys through the Active OneLine Type Parameters form. You will access the reference database during the following procedures: 1. You can establish default attributes for drawings. All specification information is carried in the reference database. raceway connect points (RCPs). while the METRIC DEFAULT is used with the seed design file using Metric measurements. For example. RCPs. if the reference schema is custom-built. and tray_part tables. and equipment pointers.General Description The Electrical Engineer reference database is a multi-table relational database containing default attribute information and specification information. When editing/reviewing annotation for EE Raceway elements (title blocks. Keys In addition to the default attribute columns. Each table must contain at least a subset of the column/attribute structure as its corresponding table in the project schema. Raceway One-Line Keys A key is stored for each one-line type within a drawing. 3.

Text annotation overrides any default values. The key you specify will serve as the default key for all RCPs unless you override the key during annotation for an individual RCP. The key you specify will serve as the default key for all equipment pointers unless you override the key during annotation for an individual equipment pointer. The key you specify will serve as the default key for all drop points unless you override the key during annotation for an individual drop point. Equipment Pointer Keys You will identify the key for equipment pointers through the Raceway Defaults form. Drop Point Keys You will identify the key for drop points through the Raceway Defaults form. Text annotation overrides any default values. C: EE Databases 431 . Text annotation overrides any default values.General Description Raceway Connect Point Keys You will identify the key for RCPs through the Raceway Defaults form._ _______________ Appendix C: Reference Schema .

approved 7 . For example. You must be familiar with the codelist tables that follow.approved 5 . You can add new approval status rows to this table.approved 11 .approved 3 . Only values in the reference database codelist tables are loaded into the project database.approved 4 .approved 10 .approved 9 . fitting. the reference database codelists are matched to the annotated values. and one_line tables in the project database.approved 6 .not approved 432 . The system issues you a warning if an annotated value does not match a value in the codelist. During loads of the project database.approved 8 . the codelist table ol_type in the reference database will contain all possible values that can be loaded into the column ol_type in the straight.blank 2 . Approval Status Codelist Table The approv_status codelist table defines the available approval status values. but you must not remove any of the existing rows. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION approval status index number approval status description The approval status rows delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 index_value 1 .February 2003 Codelists Codelists are tables in the reference database which contain all available values for a particular column of a table in the project database._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

COLUMN_NAME ee_car_num ee_cardinal TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION cardinal index number cardinal description The cardinal point values delivered with EE Raceway are: ee_car_num 0 1 2 6 7 8 12 13 14 ee_cardinal TOP LEFT CENTER LEFT BOTTOM LEFT TOP CENTER CENTER CENTER BOTTOM CENTER TOP RIGHT CENTER RIGHT BOTTOM RIGHT C: EE Databases Drawing Type Codelist Table The drawing_type codelist table defines the available drawing types. 433 . which is an integer value that the software uses to uniquely identify an index value._ _______________ Appendix C: Codelists Cardinal Codelist Table The cardinal codelist table defines the available cardinal point routing justification locations. The ee_rcp_ol_type column contains the index_column value for the one-line type to which the RCP is assigned. but you must not remove the existing row. You can add new drawing types to this table. The table also contains the ee_part_table column which itself contains the mscatalog number of the table holding the part information. You must not add or remove to this table. COLUMN_NAME code unknown TYPE Char(20) unknown DESCRIPTION drawing type unknown The drawing type delivered with EE Raceway is: code RACEWAY Manual Fitting Part Codelist Table The manual_part codelist table defines the manually-placed special fittings available with the product. The table contains the index_column column.

The table also contains the ee_spec. and ee_rcp_part tables which define the tables containing specification information for each one-line type. ee_part. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value ee_spec_table ee_part_table ee_ol_table ee_rcp_part_table ee_max_run_angle ee_priority_level TYPE integer char(20) integer integer integer integer integer integer DESCRIPTION one-line type index number one-line type description specification table mscatalog number spec parts table mscatalog number one-line table mscatalog number special fitting parts table number maximum bends allowed per run one-line type nest level The one-line types delivered with EE Raceway are: indx_col 1 2 3 4 5 index_value TRAY WIREWAY CONDUIT AIRWAY DUCTBANK ee_spec 240 242 244 247 260 ee_part 241 243 245 248 0 ee_ol 204 204 204 204 204 rcp_part 0 0 246 0 0 run_angle 0 0 360 0 0 priority 5 5 10 10 7 434 . The table contains the index_column column.February 2003 COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value ee_part_table ee_rcp_ol_type ee_manpart_type TYPE integer char(20) integer integer integer DESCRIPTION manual_part index number manual_part description special fitting parts table number one-line type index column number manual part type index number The special manual fittings delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 index_value conduit body pullbox light fixture ee_part_table 246 249 250 ee_rcp_ol_type 3 3 3 ee_manpart_type 0 0 1 One-Line Type Codelist Table The ol_type table defines the one-line types that are available in a raceway project. ee_ol. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The ee_priority_level column defines the routing priority for each one-line type.

which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. COLUMN_NAME system_num system_name TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION system index number system name 435 . The rcp_type table contains the index_column column. or update any of the systems delivered with EE Raceway. The system table contains the system_num column. nor should you modify the index_column values. You can add. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION rcp type index number rcp type description The RCP types delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 index_value <blank> ROUTE description general raceway connect point raceway connect point and route point System Codelist Table C: EE Databases The ee_system table must be loaded in the reference database before you can create any raceway design files. You can modify the index_value values. You must not add or remove rows from this table. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify a system name._ _______________ Appendix C: Codelists RCP Type Codelist Table This table defines how the EE Raceway software uses RCPs (Raceway Connect Points). remove.

You must not add or remove rows from the table. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION three-line type index number three-line type description The three-line types delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 11 12 14 index_value STRAIGHT ELBOW WYE CROSS PULLBOX CONDUIT BODY DROPOUT 436 . nor should you modify the index_column values. You can modify the index_value values._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The table contains the index_column column.February 2003 The systems delivered with EE Raceway are: system_num 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 system_name Control Communication High Voltage Low Voltage Alarm Instrumentation Signal Digital Analog Thermocouple RTD Medium Voltage Normal Lighting Emergency Lighting Security Fire Safety DC Power Control and Signal Three-Line Type Codelist Table The tl_type table defines the three-line types that are available with the EE Raceway product.

nor should you modify the index_column values._ _______________ Appendix C: Codelists Three_Line Subtype Codelist Table The tl_subtype table further defines the available three-line types. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. You can modify the index_value values. You must not add or remove rows from the table. The table contains the index_column column. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. You must not add or remove rows from the table. You can modify the index_value values. nor should you modify the index_column values. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION three-line subtype index number three-line subtype description The three-line subtypes delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 index_value <blank> VERTICAL INSIDE VERTICAL OUTSIDE VERTICAL HORIZONTAL LEFT HORIZONTAL RIGHT HORIZONTAL REDUCER LEFT REDUCER RIGHT REDUCER C: EE Databases Three-Line Qualifier Codelist Table The tl_qual table further defines the three-line types. The table contains the index_column column. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION three-line qualifier index number three-line qualifier description 437 .

The unit table contains the index_column column. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify a vendor name._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You must not add or remove rows from this table. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION units index number units description The units delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 index_value English Metric Vendor Codelist Table You must have a vendor in the vendor codelist table before loading any specification tables in the database. The vendor table contains the index_column column. You can modify the index_value values. nor should you modify the index_column values. You can add vendors as necessary to this table. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value catalog TYPE integer char(20) char(20) DESCRIPTION vendor index number vendor name catalog 438 .February 2003 The three-line qualifiers delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 5 index_value <blank> RIGID BENDABLE FLEXIBLE ADJUSTABLE Units Codelist Table This table (ee_unit) defines the units that are used for one-line dimension values. but do not remove the rows delivered with the product.

which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value._ _______________ Appendix C: The vendors delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 index_value default sample unknown English sample catalog delivered blank delivered blank delivered blank delivered blank Codelists Wire/Cable Code Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_code) defines the wire/cable code that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING. You may add or remove rows from this table. The wire/cable code table contains the index_column column. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(20) DESCRIPTION wire/cable code index value wire/cable code description C: EE Databases The wire/cable codes delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column AC AD AG AH AM AN AP AR AS CP CQ CV CW CX index_value AC AD AG AH AM AN AP AR AS CP CQ CV CW CX 439 . the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable codes represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table code column. The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry.

COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(20) DESCRIPTION wire/cable size index value wire/cable size description The wire/cable sizes delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 36 AWG 34 AWG 32 AWG 30 AWG 28 AWG 27 AWG index_value 36 AWG 34 AWG 32 AWG 30 AWG 28 AWG 27 AWG 440 . The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry. You may add or remove rows from this table.February 2003 Wire/Cable Configuration Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_config) defines the wire/cable configuration that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING. The wire/cable size table contains the index_column column. which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. You may add or remove rows from this table. the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable sizes represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table cable_size column. The wire/cable configuration table contains the index_column column. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(20) DESCRIPTION wire/cable configuration index value wire/cable configuration description The wire/cable configurations delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column \C PR TR index_value single conductor "pair 2 conductors "triad" 3 conductors Wire/Cable Size Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_size) defines the wire/cable size that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING. the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable configurations represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table config column. The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value.

which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value._ _______________ Appendix C: 26 AWG 24 AWG 22 AWG 20 AWG 18 AWG 16 AWG 14 AWG 12 AWG 10 AWG 8 AWG 6 AWG 4 AWG 3 AWG 2 AWG 1 AWG 1/0 AWG 2/0 AWG 3/0 AWG 4/0 AWG 250 MCM 300 MCM 350 MCM 400 MCM 500 MCM 600 MCM 700 MCM 750 MCM 800 MCM 900 MCM 1000 MCM 1250 MCM 1500 MCM 1750 MCM 2000 MCM 26 AWG 24 AWG 22 AWG 20 AWG 18 AWG 16 AWG 14 AWG 12 AWG 10 AWG 8 AWG 6 AWG 4 AWG 3 AWG 2 AWG 1 AWG 1/0 AWG 2/0 AWG 3/0 AWG 4/0 AWG 250 MCM 300 MCM 350 MCM 400 MCM 500 MCM 600 MCM 700 MCM 750 MCM 800 MCM 900 MCM 1000 MCM 1250 MCM 1500 MCM 1750 MCM 2000 MCM Codelists C: EE Databases Wire/Cable Color Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_color) defines the wire/cable insulation color that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING. You may add or remove rows from this table. 441 . The wire/cable insulation color table contains the index_column column. the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable insulation colors represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table color column. The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry.

February 2003 COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(20) DESCRIPTION wire/cable insulation color index value wire/cable insulation color description The wire/cable insulation colors delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column BLK W R GR ORN BL W/BLK R/BLK GR/BLK ORN/BLK BL/BLK BLK/W R/W GR/W BL/W BLK/R W/R ORN/R BL/R R/GR ORN/GR BLK/W/R W/BLK/R R/BLK/W GR/BLK/W ORN/BLK/W BL/BLK/W BLK/R/GR W/R/GR R/BLK/GR GR/BLK/ORN ORN/BLK/GR BL/W/ORN BLK/W/ORN W/R/ORN ORN/W/BL W/R/BL BLK/W/GR W/BLK/GR R/W/GR GR/W/BL ORN/R/GR index_value BLACK WHITE RED GREEN ORANGE BLUE WHITE/BLACK RED/BLACK GREEN/BLACK ORANGE/BLACK BLUE/BLACK BLACK/WHITE RED/WHITE GREEN/WHITE BLUE/WHITE BLACK/RED WHITE/RED ORANGE/RED BLUE/RED RED/GREEN ORANGE/GREEN BLACK/WHITE/RED WHITE/BLACK/RED RED/BLACK/WHITE GREEN/BLACK/WHITE ORANGE/BLACK/WHITE BLUE/BLACK/WHITE BLACK/RED/GREEN WHITE/RED/GREEN RED/BLACK/GREEN GREEN/BLACK/ORANGE ORANGE/BLACK/GREEN BLUE/WHITE/ORANGE BLACK/WHITE/ORANGE WHITE/RED/ORANGE ORANGE/WHITE/BLUE WHITE/RED/BLUE BLACK/WHITE/GREEN WHITE/BLACK/GREEN RED/WHITE/GREEN GREEN/WHITE/BLUE ORANGE/RED/GREEN 442 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

3 wire system) Low (Three phase. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 4 wire system) Low (Three phase. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 3 wire system) Low (Three phase. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. 2 wire system) Low (Single phase. C: EE Databases COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(40) DESCRIPTION wire/cable insulation voltage rating index value wire/cable insulation voltage rating description The wire/cable voltage ratings delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 120 120/240 208Y/120 240/120 240 480Y/277 480 600 2400 4160Y/2400 4160 4800 6900 8320Y/4800 12000Y/6930 12470Y/7200 13200Y/7620 13200 13800Y/7970 index_value Low (Single phase. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable insulation voltage ratings represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table voltage column. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 3 wire system) Low (Three phase. The wire/cable insulation voltage rating table contains the index_column column. The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry. 4 wire system) Low (Three phase. 4 wire system) Low (Three phase._ _______________ Appendix C: BL/R/GR BLK/W/BL W/BLK/BL R/W/BL GR/ORN/R GR/R/BL BL/R/ORN BLK/ORN/R BRN Y BLUE/RED/GREEN BLACK/WHITE/BLUE WHITE/BLACK/BLUE RED/WHITE/BLUE GREEN/ORANGE/RED GREEN/RED/BLUE BLUE/RED/ORANGE BLACK/ORANGE/RED BROWN YELLOW Codelists Wire/Cable Voltage Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_volt) defines the wire/cable insulation voltage rating that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING. 4 wire system) 443 . You may add or remove rows from this table. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase.

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 13800 20780Y/12000 22860Y/13200 23000 24940Y/14400 34500Y/19920 34500 46000 69000 Medium (Three phase, 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase, 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase, 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase, 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase, 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase, 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase, 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase, 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase, 3 wire system)

Wire/Cable Insulation Type Codelist Table
This table (ee_pcbl_insul) defines the wire/cable insulation type that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING. The wire/cable insulation type table contains the index_column column, which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. You may add or remove rows from this table, the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable insulation types represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table insulation column. The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(100) DESCRIPTION wire/cable insulation type index value wire/cable insulation type description

The wire/cable insulation types delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column A AA AI AIA A VA AVB AVL FEP FEPB MI MTW PFA PFAH RH RHH RHW SA SIS TA TBS index_value Asbestos (Without asbestos braid) Asbestos (With suitable braid material) Asbestos (Without asbestos braid) Impregnated Asbestos (With suitable braid material) Impregnated Asbestos & Varnished Cambric Impregnated Asbestos & Varnished Cambric (Flame retardant, cotton braid) Impregnated Asbestos & Varnished Cambric (AVL-lead sheath) Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene (Glass braid Asbestos or other Suitable braid material) Magnesium Oxide (Copper) Flame-, Moisture-, Heat- and Oil-Resistant Thermoplastic Perfluoroalkoxy Perfluoroalkoxy Heat-Resistant Rubber (Moisture-resistant, flame- non-metallic covering) Heat-Resistant Rubber (Moisture-resistant, flame- non-metallic covering) Moisture- and Heat-Resistant Rubber (Moisture-resistant, flame-non-metallic covering) Silicone Rubber (Asbestos, glass or other suitable braid material) Heat-Resistant Rubber Thermo-plastic and Asbestos (Flame-retardant, non-metallic covering) Thermo-plastic (Flame-retardant, non-metallic covering)

444

_ _______________
Appendix C: TFE THHN THHN/THWN THW THWN TW UF USE V XHHN Z Extruded Polytetra-fluoro-ethylene Flame-, Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic (Nylon jacket or equivalent) Flame-, (Moisture-) & Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic (Nylon jacket or equivalent) Flame-, Moisture- & Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic Flame-, Moisture- & Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic (Nylon jacket or equivalent) Flame-Retardant, Moisture- and Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic Moisture-Resistant, Moisture- and Heat-Resistant (Integral with insulation) Heat- and Moisture-Resistant (Moisture-resistant non-metallic covering) Varnished Cambric (Nonmetallic covering or lead sheath) Flame-Retardant Cross-Linked Synthetic Polymer Modified Ethylene Tetrafluoro-ethylene

Codelists

Yes-No Codelist Table
The ee_yes_no codelist table defines the available positive and negative user responses. You must not add or remove rows from this table. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION yes-no response index number yes-no response description

C: EE Databases

The Yes-No values delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 0 1 index_value NO Yes

445

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Fitting Environment Rules
The fitting environment rules are the rules stored in the reference database table tl_fit_env that control the Place Fitting by Rule commands. The software compares the one-line environment at an RCP in the design file with the rules stored in this table to determine which fitting to place at the RCP. You can add, remove, or update any of the rules delivered with EE Raceway. The software, at least, compares the number of intersection one-lines, the one-line type, and the angles between the intersectin one-lines with the rules in the fitting environment table to find a match. If found, the symbol in the part table stored will be placed at the RCP. COLUMN_NAME ee_ol_type ee_tl_type ee_tl_subtype ee_tl_qual ee_num_ols ee_pln_angles ee_prp_angles ee_part_table ee_symbol TYPE integer integer integer integer integer char(40) char(40) integer char(6) DESCRIPTION intersecting one-line’s one-line type number intersecting one-line’s three-line type number, zero if not applicable intersecting one-line’s three-line subtype number, zero if not applicable intersecting one-line’s three-line qualifier number, zero if not applicable number of intersecting one-lines planar angles between the intersecting one-lines. Angles must be defined relative to a single one-line. non-planar angles between the intersecting one-lines. Angles must be defined relative to a single one-line. fitting mscatalog table number fitting EDEN symbol name

The fitting environment rules delivered with EE Raceway are: olt 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 tlt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 tlst 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 tlq 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 nol 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 pln 180 90 90,180 90 90,180,270 90,180 90,180,270 prp 90 90 90 tbl 246 246 246 246 246 246 246 sym CC CLB CT CGUAM CX CGUAW CEABY

446

_ _______________
Appendix C:

Fitting Environment Rules

Intersecting Conduit One-lines Planar Angles = 90, 180, 270 Non-Planar Angle = 90

C: EE Databases

447

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Project Schema - General Description
The project schema contains information about the drawings that are part of a particular project. The schema stores information associated with the elements in each drawing; its one-lines, RCPs, and three-lines. Default and specification information is copied from the reference schema into the project schema when you run Load Database.

448

_ _______________
Appendix C:

Updating Schemas

Updating Schemas
Before you can update (that is, load with EE tables and default data) a schema, you must create the schemas using one of the currently-supported RDBMS’s (INFORMIX, ORACLE, INGRES). Additionally, you must use the schema creation form in RIS Schema Manager to create a valid RIS schema on the database.

Updating a Project Schema
Update the project schema from the Database Utilities menu in the Electrical Engineer environment, using the Update project schema option. The following fields accept your input for the Update schema process: Schema name This field accepts the name of the RIS schema to be updated. No paths are required, since this is a schema name, not a database name. Given the schema name, RIS will know where the appropriate database is located. Schema password This field accepts the name of the password for the specified schema, if one exists.

C: EE Databases

Sql and Cmd Files Accept the names of the sql and cmd (command) files associated with each application. The sql file contains the commands used to create tables, views, and to grant permissions within the schema, while the command file loads the schema tables with default data. These fields require a full path to the files. The application checkboxes to the left of these fields allow you to specify which EE product(s) are supplying the sql and cmd files to the process. If you select multiple applications, then Update project schema runs each application sequentially against the database.

Updating Reference Schemas
Update the reference schema from the Database Utilities menu in the Electrical Engineer environment, using the Update reference schema option. The following fields accept your input for the Update schema process: Schema name This field accepts the name of the RIS schema to be updated. No paths are required, since this is a schema name, not a database name. Given the schema name, RIS will know where the appropriate database is located. Schema password This field accepts the name of the password for the specified schema, if one exists. Sql and Cmd Files

449

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 Accept the names of the sql and cmd (command) files associated with each application. The sql file contains the commands used to create tables, views, and to grant permissions within the schema, while the command file loads the schema tables with default data. These fields require a full path to the files. The application checkboxes to the left of these fields allow you to specify which EE product(s) are supplying the sql and cmd files to the process. If you select multiple applications, then Update reference schema runs each application sequentially against the database.

Schema Names
When creating your RIS schemas, you should use the same name as your project, since this will be the default name when you enter the project. However, you can override the default by exporting the $EE_SCHEMA variable in your $HOME/.EErc file to be your project schema name.

450

_ _______________
Appendix C:

Modifying the Reference Schema

Modifying the Reference Schema
You can customize the database schema before creating a schema or after the schema exists. To modify the database schema before schema creation, simply include the necessary changes in the .sql file before Update schema is executed. The .sql file is a series of SQL statements recognized by RIS to create your database An existing database schema can also be modified. The SQL statements in the .sql file are the input to the Update schema process. The table definitions that exist in this file determine how the tables will look when complete. Therefore, columns can be added or removed from an existing schema according to the "create table" statements in the .sql file. For example, columns are added into the .sql file for the one_line table, these columns will be added into the existing rows of the existing one_line table. When this process finds a "create table" statement for a table that exists in the schema, the following actions take place: 1. 2. 3. 4. Saves rows from existing table. Drops existing table (also drops indexes). Creates new table according to "create table" statement. Loads new table with saved row information for column names that were in previous definition.

C: EE Databases

If rows exist in the updated table, any new columns that are added will be blank in each row. The new table will have only those columns specified in the "create table" statement in the table definition. Therefore, you need only to modify the ".sql" file in order to modify a schema. The following is a list of schema modification rules for Update Schema to keep in mind. 1. You lose any columns and column information that you have not specified in the "create table" statement. If you had used the RDBMS to alter the table by adding a column and then run Update schema without making the appropriate change to the ".sql" file, you would lose any data that may have been on that column. Columns that you added into an existing loaded table would have no data stored in them. Renaming of a column is processed by removing the column and adding another. The removed column in such a case will lose its data and the added column will be blank. You can modify the size of a column, for example, from "char(10)" to "char(200)" or "smallint" to "integer", but changing from "char" to "integer" is dangerous and an illegal conversion can occur. If you modify a character column to make it smaller (resizing char(20) to be char(10), for example), then any row containing data which exceeds the new character limit will be lost. The .unl file will always be loaded into a table which has a unique index. Any duplicate rows will be counted and ignored; the unique index prevents the entry of duplicate information when updating any EE application. If a table does not have a unique index, then the .unl file will be loaded only if the table is empty.

2. 3.

4.

5.

Table names can be changed except for table names that begin with the letters "ms" and "ee_". They must also be changed appropriately in the MSCATALOG table in order for the software to run properly. Keep in mind that the columns within the tables in the reference schema must be a subset of the columns of the corresponding tables in the project schema.

451

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 The databases are initially loaded with the *.unl files as defined in the command file. The Update schema process initiates the command file which automatically finds and loads the information in the .unl files into the database. These files can be edited by the system manager to include additional defaults, part data, and codelist values. Use caution when editing these files since they are in a format for loading sequentially into a table. Certain columns are defined in the .sql file as being non-null which means the data entered from the .unl file must not be null for that column. There are two ways to modify existing rows in the reference schema. The .unl files can be modified before the schema is updated. — OR —

You can modify the rows in the created schema through 1. the RDBMS’s interactive query product, such as INFORMIX’s ISQL or FORMS, or ORACLE’s sqlplus, or INGRES’s SQL. the RIS Interactive Query Utility (win32app\ingr\share\ris\bin\risgui.exe). DB Access’s Database Edit Utility (see the section in the appendix entitled EE Manager for more information on this utility) the EE Database Utilities (risschema_mgr utility – win32app\ingr\share\ris\bin\rismgr.exe)

2. 3.

4.

The following steps can be used as a guideline for modifying the reference schema before it is updated: 1. To see which .unl files are being loaded into the reference database, look at the command (.cmd) file you will be using. The following is a typical example of what can be contained in this file:

FILE "olt.unl" DELIMITER "|"; INSERT INTO ol_type;

These lines tell the update schema process that the file "olt.unl" is to be inserted into the ol_type table. In this case the "olt.unl" file will exist in the current directory but a full path name can be specified on this file (e.g. FILE win32app\ingr\eerway\db\olt.unl). The delimiter is one character long. It tells the process that the "|" character separates each column of data in the olt.unl file. Do not remove any lines from this file that would effect the current .unl files from being loaded. All existing .unl files must be loaded for proper product execution. 2. Edit the desired .unl file making sure the delimiter "|" is used between each field. Each line represents a row to be inserted into the database and each field represents the corresponding column in the database. The following is an example of what a line in the "olt.unl" file might look like: 1|TRAY|240|241|204|0|0|1|

452

_ _______________
Appendix C: In this example, "1" is the index_column value, "TRAY" is the index_value column value, "240" is the ee_spec_table column, etc. If in the "olt.unl" file you would like to add additional entries, you can edit this file. Make sure you line up the delimited fields with the tables’ columns. The following example demonstrates how to load a new .unl file containing your own specification information into the reference database. 1. 2. cd win32app\ingr\eerway\db Edit the command file rwayref.cmd. Insert the following lines into this file: FILE "catalog.unl" DELIMITER "|"; INSERT INTO tray_spec; 3. Create a new file in the current directory, naming it catalog.unl. Edit this file to include any tray specification information you want to load into the reference database, separating each column of data with a pipe symbol (|). For example:

Modifying the Reference Schema

1|1|4|18|18|0|0|12|10|STEEL|A|0418SHV|4x18 VENTRIB SHV| 1|1|4|24|24|0|0|12|10|STEEL|A|0424SHV|4x24 VENTRIB SHV|

C: EE Databases

4.

When you have finished editing the .unl file, run the Update reference schema process to load the specification information into the tray_spec table.

453

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description
This section lists and describes the tables in the EE Raceway reference database schema, and includes detailed information about the columns that comprise each table. An asterisk (*) indicates that you must not modify the column name. You should not modify those column names having a prefix of "ee_".

approv_status
This codelist table defines the available approval status values: blank, approved, not approved, and so forth. See the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. Column Name index_column index_value Type integer Char(20) Index no no Null no yes

index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify an approved status description. index_value: the column that contains the name of each available approved status.

away_part
This table stores the part specification information for the one-line type AIRWAY. Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle* ee_symbol* ee_spec_key* ee_spec2_key* ee_part_key* ee_description* Type integer integer integer real Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no dups no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes

ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type. ee_tl_subtype: the codelisted column used to define the three-line subtype. ee_tl_qual: the codelisted column used to define additional information about the three-line type.

454

Appendix C:

_ _______________

EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description

ee_angle: the column used to define the airway fitting bend angle. ee_symbol: the column used to define the airway part EDEN symbol name to the EE software. ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate airway specification table row containing general specification information. ee_spec2_key: if the current airway part is a reducer, this column is the key to the row in the other airway specification. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key.

away_spec
This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type AIRWAY. EE Raceway uses airways to reserve space for the routing of cable or other raceway material, and also to maintain connectivity to a raceway system. Column Name ee_units* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* ee_xs_cell* ee_spec_key* ee_description Type integer real real real real real Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no dups no no no no no uniq no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes no yes

C: EE Databases

ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the airway outside diameter or height to the EE raceway software. ee_out_width: the column used to define the airway outside width to the EE raceway software. ee_extension: the column used to define the airway fitting extension length to the EE raceway software. ee_transition: the column used to define the airway fitting transition length to the EE raceway software. ee_radius: the column used to define the airway fitting bend radius to the EE raceway software.

455

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the airway cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation. The only valid entries are: A, B, or C. The associated shapes are shown below.

ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key.

cardinal
This codelist table defines the available cardinal point locations (top left, center left, bottom left, and so forth). Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. Column Name ee_car_num ee_cardinal Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes

ee_car_num: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a cardinal point description. ee_cardinal: the column that contains the name of each available cardinal point.

456

nominal_size_1: the column used to define a conduit body nominal size. ee_part: the column used to define the conduit body part number. nominal_size_2: the column used to define a conduit body nominal size. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. ee_dimension_2: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. Column Name vendor ee_units* nominal_size_1 nominal_size_2 weight material ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_dimension_1* ee_dimension_2* ee_dimension_3* ee_dimension_4* ee_dimension_5* ee_dimension_6* ee_part_key* ee_description* ee_tl_type* volume style ee_pull_point C: EE Databases vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the conduit body special fitting. ee_symbol: the column used to define the conduit body part EDEN symbol name to the EE software. weight: the column used to define the conduit body weight.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer real real real Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 6) real real real real real real Char( 28) Char( 40) integer real Char( 20) integer Index dups no no no no no no no no no no no no no uniq no no no no no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes yes yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description cond_body This table stores the specification information for the manual fitting CONDUIT BODY. material: the column used to define the conduit body material. 457 . ee_dimension_3: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports.

458 . cond_fill_calc This table is used to specify the maximum allowable percent fill of a conduit based on the armor type of the cable outer jackets and number of cables within the conduit. Column Name ee_rule_set ee_jacket_armor ee_num_cables ee_max_fill Type Char( 20) Char( 10) integer real Index no no no no Null yes yes no yes ee_rule_set: identification of the rule set that applies to the raceway system fill calculations. ee_jacket_armor: material type of the cable outer jacket armor.February 2003 ee_dimension_4: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_dimension_5: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. volume: the column used to define a conduit body volume. ee_num_cables: number of cables in the conduit. ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type. ee_max_fill: maximum allowable percent fill. ee_dimension_6: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. for example NEC 1990. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. then the conduit is marked as being overfilled. If the cables contained in a conduit exceed the maximum allowable conduit fill. ee_pull_point: the codelisted column used to define the conduit body as a cable pull point. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key. style:the column used to describe the conduit body style or type. This calculation assumes a homogeneous mixture of either all LEAD or all NON-LEAD armor types for the cable outer jackets for the cables routed within the same conduit.

ee_angle: the column used to define the conduit fitting bend angle. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key. ee_spec2_key: if the current conduit part is a reducer. C: EE Databases 459 .Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer integer real real Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no no dups no uniq no Null no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description cond_part This table stores the part specification information for the one-line type CONDUIT. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_tl_subtype: the codelisted column used to define the three-line subtype. ee_part: the column used to define the conduit part number. this column is the key to the row in the other conduit specification. ee_tl_qual: the codelisted column used to define additional information about the three-line type. ee_weight: the column used to define the conduit part weight. ee_symbol: the column used to define the conduit part EDEN symbol name to the EE software. Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle* ee_weight* ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_spec_key* ee_spec2_key* ee_part_key* ee_description* ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type. ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate conduit specification table row containing general specification information.

material: the column used to define the conduit material. ee_radius: the column used to define the conduit fitting bend radius to the EE raceway software. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a conduit dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. ee_const_type: the column used to define construction type. Column Name vendor ee_units* nominal_size ee_dimension_1* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* weight material ee_const_type ee_xs_cell* ee_spec_key* ee_description Type integer integer real real real real real real real Char( 20) integer Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index dups no no no dups no no no no no no no uniq no Null no no yes yes no yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the conduit specification.February 2003 cond_spec This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type CONDUIT. weight: the column used to define the conduit weight per unit length. nominal_size: the column used to define a conduit nominal size. ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the conduit outside diameter to the EE raceway software. ee_transition: the column used to define the conduit fitting transition length to the EE raceway software._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 460 . ee_extension: the column used to define the conduit fitting extension length to the EE raceway software.

ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. The associated shapes are shown below. drawing This table defines both the columns that you can annotate for title blocks and their default column values. or C. code_desc: the column that contains the description of each available drawing type. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key. Column Name drawing_type* sheet* ee_key* ee_description* Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no uniq no Null no yes no yes C: EE Databases drawing_type: the column used to define the EE product drawing type. sheet: the column used to define the EE drawing sheet name. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. 461 . B. ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. Column Name ee_code code_desc Type Char(20) Char(20) Index uniq no Null no yes ee_code: the column used by the software to uniquely identify a drawing type description.Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the conduit cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation. The only valid entries are: A. drawing_type This codelist table defines what drawing types are available for use.

462 .February 2003 drop_point This table defines both the columns you can annotate for drop point symbols and their default column values. material: the column used to define the ductbank material. Column Name tag ee_dist_down_ol* ee_dist_to_rcp* ee_key* ee_description* Type Char(20) real real Char(28) Char(40) Index no no no unique no Null yes yes yes no yes tag: the column used to define the drop point tag. duct_spec This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type DUCTBANK. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the ductbank outside height to the EE Raceway software. ee_out_width: the column used to define the ductbank outside width to the EE Raceway software. ee_dist_down_ol: the column used to define the distance along the one-line to the drop point. ee_dist_to_rcp: the column used to define the distance between the one-line and the rcp._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Column Name ee_units ee_out_ht_diam ee_out_width material ee_xs_cell ee_spec_key ee_description Type integer real real Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no dups dups no no uniq no Null no no yes yes yes no yes ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values.

Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the ductbank cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation. ee_area: the column used to define the cross sectional area of the conduit of the given nominal size. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a conduit dimension value that corresponds to the same column in the cond_spec table. B. ee_cond_x_area This table stores the cross sectional area of conduit identified by its nominal size. column_name: the column within table_name that cannot be posted back to the graphics. ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. Column Name nominal_size ee_dimension_1 ee_area Type real real real Index uniq no no Null no yes yes C: EE Databases nominal_size: the column used to define a conduit nominal size that corresponds to the same column in the cond_spec table. The only valid entries are: A. 463 . ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key. or C. Column Name table_name column_name Type Char( 32) Char( 32) Index uniq uniq Null yes yes table_name: the name of the desired table containing a column that cannot be posted. The associated shapes are shown below. ee_graphic_only EE applications use this table to define which columns in the project database cannot be posted back to graphics through the Post Attribute process.

Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_config. ee_pcbl_config This codelist table defines the cable configurations that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command.February 2003 ee_pcbl_code This codelist table defines the codes that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EERWAY Conduit Sizing command. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_code description. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_config description. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_color color. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_color description. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_code._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. ee_pcbl_color This codelist table defines the colors that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. 464 .

Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. ee_pcbl_size This codelist table defines the cable/wire sizes that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 40) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_volt description. ee_pcbl_volt This codelisted table defines the cable/wire voltage ratings that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_volt. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_insul. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char(100) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an eepcbl_insul description.Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_pcbl_insul This codelist table defines the insulation types that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes C: EE Databases index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_size description. 465 . index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_size. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table.

466 . item_no: the unique identifier for each wire/cable. insulation: the insulation type of the wire/cable. Column Name system_num system_name Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes system_num: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a system name.February 2003 ee_pseudo_cable This table defines the cable/wires that are used in the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. Column Name ee_code config cable_size ee_color voltage insulation item_no ee_area ee_units ee_code: the cable code of the cable. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . cable_size: the size of the wire/cable. system_name: the column that contains the name of each available system. Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) real integer Index no no no no no no uniq no no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no ee_system This codelist table defines the systems that are available to contain EE Raceway graphics. ee_color: the insulation color of the wire/cable. config: the cable configuration of the cable. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. voltage: the insulation voltage rating of the wire/cable. ee_area: the cross sectional area of the wire/cable.

Multiple rows in the database could contain the same table name if multiple columns are required to make an entry unique. Column Name table_name column_name ee_comp_type* blank_allowed Type Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 10) integer Index uniq uniq uniq no Null yes yes yes yes C: EE Databases table_name: the name of the table that requires single data entry.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_units This codelist table defines the units that are used for one-line dimension values. ee_yes_no This codelist table defines the possible column values for a ’yes/no’ question in a table column. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_unit. where the information crosses products. ee_comp_type: is used by the EE processors to define what product will use the entry. If a table is not represented in the ee_unique table. blank_allowed: is used to define whether or not the column in column_name is allowed to be blank. Column Name index_column* index_value* index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_unit description. ee_unique EE applications use this table to define which columns make a row in a table unique for single data entry. column_name: the name of the column in table_name that makes an entry unique. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. this column is used to further describe what would make an entry unique. Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null yes yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify the ’yes/no’ response. a row will be loaded into the appropriate table for each graphic element. If not. 467 . In some entries. then a blank column value would cause the EE processes to create a new row in the database.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values.February 2003 index_value: the column that contains the ’yes/no’ column value. Column Name tag ee_key* ee_description* Type Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no uniq no Null yes no yes tag: the column used to define the space envelope tag. Space envelopes are not available with EE Raceway at the time of this printing. EE Raceway uses space envelopes to reserve blocks of space for raceway without maintaining connectivity to any raceway system. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. envelope This table defines both the columns you can annotate for space envelopes and their default column values. 468 .

469 . ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. ee_part_key: the unique key to appropriate reference database record for the default values.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type Char( 6) integer real real real Char( 28) real real real real Char( 40) Char( 3) real real real Char( 20) integer Char( 4) integer real Char( 6) integer Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) integer integer Index no no no no no uniq no no no no no no no no no no dups no no no no no no no no no no no Null yes yes yes yes yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description light_fixture This table stores the specification information for the manually placed equipment LIGHT_FIXTURE. voltage: the column used to define the light fixture’s voltage. Column Name ee_symbol voltage ee_dimension_1 ee_dimension_2 ee_dimension_3 ee_part_key fl_amps ee_dimension_4 ee_dimension_5 ee_dimension_6 ee_description item_type ee_dimension_7 ee_dimension_8 ee_dimension_9 item_code_num vendor num_wires num_phase_wires power_factor area_class oper_temp_deg_c text_1 text_2 text_3 text_4 ee_units ee_pull_point C: EE Databases ee_symbol: the column used to define the light fixture EDEN symbol name to the EE software. ee_dimension_2: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. ee_dimension_3: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports.

ee_dimension_6: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. ee_pull_point: the codelisted column used to define a light fixture as a cable pull point. ee_dimension_9: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. ee_dimension_7: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. ee_dimension_5: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement.February 2003 fl_amps: the column used to define a light fixture’s full load amps. 470 . power_factor: the column used to define a light fixture’s power factor. num_wires: the column used to define the number of wires in a light fixture. vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the equipment light fixture. ee_dimension_4: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. text_2: the column used to describe characteristics about the light fixture. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key item_type: the column used to define a light fixture’s item type._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_dimension_8: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. text_1: the column used to describe characteristics about the light fixture. area_class: the column used to define a light fixture’s area class. oper_temp_deg_c: the column used to define a light fixture’s operating temperature. text_4: the column used to describe characteristics about the light fixture. item_code_num: the column used to define a light fixture’s item code number. num_phase_wires: the column used to define the number of phase wires in a light fixture. text_3: the column used to describe characteristics about the light fixture.

Both DBAccess and RISRPT (RIS Report Writer) use this table. Column Name tablename entitynum screenform reporttable sqlreview fencefilter dastable alias_name key_columns key_description Type Char( 32) integer Char( 64) Char( 64) Char(240) Char(240) Char(32) Char( 64) Char( 80) Char( 32) Index no uniq no no no no no no no no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes tablename: the name of the table in the database. pullbox). It must exactly match the name of the desired table. there will be one row in mscatalog for each database table that is linked to graphic elements.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer Char( 20) integer integer integer Index uniq dups no no no Null no yes yes yes yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description manual_part This codelist table defines the available manually-placed special fittings (conduit body. C: EE Databases ee_manpart_type: the column used to tell the load processor to load the manual part into either the project database "fitting" table or the "panel" table. mscatalog Microstation 32 requires that every database used in graphics contain a table called mscatalog. Column Name index_column* index_value* ee_part_table* ee_rcp_ol_type* ee_manpart_type index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a manual_part description. This table holds the entity numbers for all other tables in the database. In general. ee_rcp_ol_type: the index_column number from the one-line type codelist table for the EE raceway connect point of the special fitting. Any table not directly linked to graphics/EE elements does not need to appear in mscatalog. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available manual_part. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. ee_part_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing special fitting part specification information. 471 .

RISRPT. key_columns: a column containing the column_name which uniquely identifies a particular row in the table. EE places the entity number in the EE header linkage of annotation in order to identify which table the text is linked to. sqlreview: an sql select statement that MicroStation 32 uses to review rows and columns. MicroStation 32. 472 . Column Name table_name column_name join_table code_column text_column index_column* index_value* Type Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) integer Index uniq uniq no no no no no Null no no no no no yes yes table_name: the name of the desired table containing a column with codelist values. A codelist is a data structure that represents a character string which is then represented in the database by integer or character codes. fencefilter: an sql select statement that MicroStation 32 uses to restrict elements during fence operations. EE uses this table to restrict input for a particular column to a pre-defined set of values. reporttable: a temporary table used by MicroStation 32. screenform: not currently used by MicroStation 32. alias_name: a column used by EE that contains the descriptive alias of tablename. dastable: specifies the name of the table that maps displayable attribute types to the sql select statements used by MicroStation 32 for loading text into displayable attributes. Is is created for each table having graphic linkages within a fence. It must be a positive integer in the range of 1 to 65535. column_name: the column within table_name which contains codelist values. mscodelist This table provides limited support for DMRS-like codelists. EE uses key_columns as the correlation key. and DBAccess all support this table. key_description: the descriptive alias for key_columns.February 2003 entitynum: the entity number assigned to a table. The MicroStation 32 database interface places the entity number of a table in the linkage it creates between a graphics element and a table row._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The entity number uniquely identifies a particular table in the database. The codelist approach minimizes storage requirements and simplifies database administration.

A value of 0 indicates that the column is read_only.Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description join_table: the codelist table. EE uses the mscolumns information to control display of column information during annotation. while a value of 1 indicates that it allows read/write access. code_column: the column in join_table that contains the code values. It must exactly match the column name in the database. access_flag: the column containing a code used to identify the accessibility of a particular column by an EE user. A column that does not exist as annotation linked to a graphics/EE element does not need to appear in mscolumns. if not NULL. 473 . Entity numbers between mscatalog and mscolumns must be consistent. mscolumns This table specifies column-specific data for EE tables. will impose additional conditions to allow multiple codelists to be represented in the same database table. the work_mode value is set to zero. In general. C: EE Databases Column Name entitynum attrnum column_name alias_name access_flag work_mode ee_column_order Type integer integer Char( 32) Char( 32) smallint smallint smallint Index uniq uniq no no no no no Null no no no yes no no no entitynum: the entity number assigned to the table whose columns are being described. The order in which attributes appear on the annotation form is determined by the value in the column ee_column_order. there is one row in mscolumns for each column in an attribute table (for those attributes that exist in annotation). text_column: the column that contains the actual values represented by the corresponding code value in code_column. column_name: the name of a column in the database. index_value: the column that provides the index to a specific list within a multiple codelist table. attrnum: the attribute number assigned to a particular column within a table. Since all EE Raceway column values are displayed on the primary form. alias_name: the column containing the descriptive alias of column_name. This column can be thought of as a filter which restricts the display of certain attributes depending on the mode of work the user is performing. index_column: a column name that. work_mode: the column containing the code that identifies the use of a particular column by the EE software.

This value is used to determine whether one one-line type can break or attach to another one-line type. ol_type This codelist table defines the available one-line types (tray. ee_priority_level: an integer value used to define the routing priority level of the one-line type._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 474 . and so forth). wireway. ee_ol_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing general one-line information. ee_part_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing the part specification information. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. ee_max_run_angle: an integer containing the maximum allowed value of the sum of all bend angles in a run. Column Name index_column* index_value* ee_spec_table* ee_part_table* ee_ol_table* ee_rcp_part_table* ee_max_run_angle* ee_priority_level* Type integer Char( 20) integer integer integer integer integer integer Index uniq dups no no no no no no Null no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify an ol_type description. conduit. ee_rcp_part_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing special fitting part specification information.February 2003 ee_column_order: the column used to determine the order in which to display attributes on the annotation form. A value of zero states that the sum of all bend angles in a run is unlimited. ee_spec_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing general specification information. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ol_type.

Column Name tag add_weight ee_ol_length* ee_spec_key* ee_key* ee_description* tag: the column used to define the one-line tag. ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate reference database record for the general specification information on the three-line elements. 475 . panel_descrip: the column which defines the panel/equipment description. ee_approv_status: the codelisted column used to define the approval status. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type Char( 20) real real Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes no no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description one_line This table defines both the columns you can annotate for raceway one-lines and their default column values. C: EE Databases ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_ol_length: the column used to define the weight per unit length. Column Name panel panel_descrip ee_approv_status ee_approv_date ee_create_date ee_last_rev_dat ee_key ee_description Type Char( 20) Char( 20) integer Char( 40) Char( 40) Char( 40) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes panel: the column which defines the panel/equipment name. add_weight: the column used to define an additional weight per unit length. panel This table defines both the columns you can annotate for panels/equipment and their default column values.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . prj_name: this column contains the project name.February 2003 ee_approv_date: the column used to define the date the approval status was changed. ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. prj_rule_set: this column contains the project rule set. base_rule_set: this column contains the base rule set. ee_create_date: the column used to define the date the panel/equipment was created. Column Name prj_number prj_name location prj_rule_set base_rule_set ee_key ee_description Type char(20) char(60) char(60) char(20) char(20) char(28) char(60) Index dups no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes no yes prj_number: this column contains the project number. ee_description:this column contains the key description. ee_last_rev_dat: the column used to define the date the panel/equipment was last revised. location: this column contains the location. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key project This table stores information for the project. ee_key: this column contains the EE Reference database key. 476 .

ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. Column Name vendor ee_units* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_dimension_1 weight material ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_part_key* ee_description ee_tl_type ee_pull_point vendor: the codelisted column used to define the pullbox vendor. ee_symbol: the column used to define the pullbox part Eden symbol name to the EE software. ee_part: the column used to define the pullbox part number.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer real real real real char(20) char(20) char(6) char(28) char(40) integer integer Index dups no dups dups dups no no no no uniq no no no Null no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description pullbox This table stores the specification information for the manual fitting PULLBOX. ee_pull_point: the codelisted column used to define a pullbox as a cable pull point. C: EE Databases 477 . ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key. material: the column used to define the pullbox weight material. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define the pullbox dimension value to Eden and the raceway reports. weight: the column used to define the pullbox weight. ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the pullbox outside height to the EERWAY software. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the untis of measurement. ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type. ee_out_width: the column used to define the pullbox outside width to the EERWAY software .

Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a rcp_type description. ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 478 .February 2003 rcp This table defines both the columns you can annotate for raceway connect points (RCPs) and their default column values. ee_part_key: the key to the appropriate reference database record for the values on the manually placed fitting. ee_transition: the column used to define the raceway connect point fitting transition length. ee_radius: the column used to define the raceway connect point fitting bend radius. ee_rcp_type: the codelisted column used to define the raceway connect point type. ee_extension: the column used to define the raceway connect point fitting extension length. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. Column Name tag ee_rcp_type* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* ee_part_key* ee_key* ee_description* Type Char( 20) integer real real real Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes tag: the column used to define the raceway connect point tag. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available rcp_type. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. rcp_type This codelist table defines additional information about EE Raceway connect points (RCPs).

ee_part_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing the fitting to be placed at the RCP. Angles must be defined relative from a single one-line.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer integer integer integer Char( 40) Char( 40) integer Char( 6) Index uniq no no no uniq uniq uniq no dups Null no no no no yes yes yes yes yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description tl_fit_env This table is used by the manual fitting command to determine which fitting to place at an RCP based on the intersecting one-lines and the fitting environment rules listed in this table. Zero if no check is to be performed. Column Name ee_ol_type ee_tl_type ee_tl_subtype ee_tl_qual ee_num_ols ee_pln_angles ee_prp_angles ee_part_table ee_symbol ee_ol_type: the index_column number from the one-line type codelist table of the intersecting onelines. ee_symbol: the column used to define the fitting EDEN symbol name to the EE software. ee_tl_type: the index_column number from the three_line type codelist table of the fitting to be placed at the RCP. C: EE Databases ee_tl_subtype: the index_column number from the three_line subtype codelist table of the fitting to be placed at the RCP. ee_num_ols: the column that contains the number of intersecting one-lines. ee_tl_qual: the index_column number from the three_line qualifier codelist table of the fitting to be placed at the RCP. ee_prp_angles: the column that contains the non-planar angles between the intersecting one-lines. 479 . Angles must be defined relative from a single one-line. Zero if no check is to be performed. ee_pln_angles: the column that contains the planar angles between the intersecting one-lines. Zero if no check is to be performed.

flexible. reducer. wye.February 2003 tl_qual This codelist table defines additional information about the available three-line types (rigid. and so forth). Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available tl_subtype. cross. 480 . tl_type This codelist table defines the available three-line types (straight. horizontal. and so forth). Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a tl_subtype description. tl_subtype This codelist table defines the available three-line subtypes (vertical. Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a tl_qual description. and so forth). index_value: the column that contains the description of each available tl_qual. bendable. elbow. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a tl_type description. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available tl_type.

to_support This table defines both the columns you can annotate for support equipment symbols and their default column values. ee_eqp_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. to_support symbols are not available with EE Raceway at the time of this printing.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type Char( 32) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no uniq no Null yes yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description to_equip This table defines both the columns that you can annotate for equipment pointer symbols and their default column values. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_part_key: the key to the appropriate reference database record for the values on the equipment. 481 . Column Name tag ee_key* ee_description* Type Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no uniq no Null yes no yes C: EE Databases tag: the column used to define the support pointer tag. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. Column Name ee_eqp_table ee_part_key ee_eqp_key* ee_description* ee_eqp_table: the name of the reference database table containing the equipment specification information.

ee_angle: the column used to define the tray fitting bend angle.February 2003 tray_part This table stores the part specification information for the one-line type TRAY. this column is the key to the row in the other tray specification. ee_weight: the column used to define the tray part weight. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key. ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate tray specification table row containing general specification information._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_part: the column used to define the tray part number. 482 . ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_tl_subtype: the codelisted column used to define the three-line subtype. ee_tl_qual: the codelisted column used to define additional information about the three-line type. ee_spec2_key: if the current tray part is a reducer. Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle* ee_weight* ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_spec_key* ee_spec2_key* ee_part_key* ee_description* Type integer integer integer real real Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no no dups no uniq no Null no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type. ee_symbol: the column used to define the tray part EDEN symbol name to the EE software.

Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer real real real real real real real real Char( 20) integer Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index dups no no dups no dups no no no no no no no uniq no Null no no yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description tray_spec This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type TRAY. ee_transition: the column used to define the tray fitting transition length to the EE raceway software. ee_dimension_2: the column used to define a tray dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. weight: the column used to define the tray weight per unit length. Column Name vendor ee_units* ee_dimension_1* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_dimension_2* ee_out_width* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* weight material ee_const_type ee_xs_cell* ee_spec_key* ee_description vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the tray specification. C: EE Databases 483 . ee_const_type: the column used to define construction type. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a tray dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the tray outside height to the EE raceway software. ee_radius: the column used to define the tray fitting bend radius to the EE raceway software. ee_extension: the column used to define the tray fitting extension length to the EE raceway software. ee_out_width: the column used to define the tray outside width to the EE raceway software. material: the column used to define the tray material. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement.

February 2003 ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the tray cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation. B. index_value: the column that contains the name of each available vendor. The only valid entries are: A. vendor This codelist table defines the vendors that are available for specifications. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle* ee_weight* ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_spec_key* ee_spec2_key* ee_part_key* ee_description* Type integer integer integer real real Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no no dups no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key. or C. 484 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Column Name index_column* index_value* catalog Type integer Char( 20) char(20) Index uniq dups no Null no yes yea index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a vendor name. ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. wway_part This table stores the part specification information for the one-line type WIREWAY. The associated shapes are shown below. catalog: the column that contains catalog information.

C: EE Databases wway_spec This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type WIREWAY. ee_symbol: the column used to define the wireway part EDEN symbol name to the EE software. ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate wireway specification table row containing general specification information. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a wireway dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. ee_spec2_key: if the current wireway part is a reducer. ee_angle: the column used to define the wireway fitting bend angle. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. Column Name vendor ee_units* ee_dimension_1* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_dimension_2* ee_out_width* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* weight material ee_const_type ee_xs_cell* ee_spec_key* ee_description Type integer integer real real real real real real real real Char( 20) integer Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index dups no no dups no dups no no no no no no no uniq no Null no no yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the wireway specification. 485 . ee_tl_qual: the codelisted column used to define additional information about the three-line type. ee_part: the column used to define the wireway part number. this column is the key to the row in the other wireway specification. ee_weight: the column used to define the wireway part weight. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key.Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_tl_subtype: the codelisted column used to define the three-line subtype.

ee_out_width: the column used to define the wireway outside width to the EE raceway software. B. or C. ee_dimension_2: the column used to define a wireway dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. ee_radius: the column used to define the wireway fitting bend radius to the EE raceway software. ee_extension: the column used to define the wireway fitting extension length to the EE raceway software. material: the column used to define the wireway material. ee_const_type: the column used to define construction type. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. 486 .February 2003 ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the wireway outside height to the EE raceway software. weight: the column used to define the wireway weight per unit length. ee_transition: the column used to define the wireway fitting transition length to the EE raceway software. The only valid entries are: A. ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the wireway cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation. The associated shapes are shown below.

_ _______________
Appendix C:

EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description

EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description
This section lists and describes the tables in the EE Raceway project database schema, and includes detailed information about the columns that comprise each table. An asterisk (*) indicates that you must not modify the column name. You should not modify those column names having a prefix of "ee_".

cabsch_spec
This table contains information about the cable schedule for underground cable design. Column Name revision_numb cable_numb numb_cables numb_conductor conductor_size cable_type_code service_voltage undgrnd_length abvgrnd_length from_equi_numb from_detail not_used plan_assem_dwg to_equi_numb to_detail to_plan_drw_num cont_sta_type quan_term_kits ol_diagram_numb not_used2 remarks drawing_numb drawing_rev Type Char( 3) Char( 8) integer Char( 5) Char( 8) Char( 6) Char( 7) real real Char( 15) Char( 8) Char( 6) Char( 20) Char( 15) Char( 8) Char( 20) Char( 4) Char( 6) Char( 20) Char( 8) Char( 38) Char( 20) Char( 2) Index no uniq no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes

C: EE Databases

revision_numb: the column containing the revision number. cable_numb: the column containing the area number, cable number, and cable number ID. numb_cables: the column containing the number of cables. numb_conductor: the column containing the number of conductors.

487

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 conductor_size: the column containing the conductor size. cable_type_code: the column containing the cable type. service_voltage: the column containing the service voltage. undgrnd_length: the column containing the underground length. abvgrnd_length: the column containing the above ground length. from_equi_numb: the column containing the From Equipment Number. from_detail: the column containing the From Detail Number. not_used: this column is reserved for later use. plan_assem_dwg: the column containing plan drawings or standard assembly drawing number. to_equi_numb: the column containing the To Equipment Number. to_detail: the column containing the To Detail Number. to_plan_drw_num: the column containing the To Plan drawing number. cont_sta_type: the column containing the control station type. quan_term_kits: the column containing the quantity of term. ol_diagram_numb: the column containing the one-line diagram number. not_used2: this column is reserved for later use. remarks: the column containing the remarks for cable schedule. drawing_numb: the column containing the drawing number. drawing_rev: the column containing the drawing revision. drawing_numb can have duplicate values but the combination of drawing_numb and cable_numb should be unique.

488

_ _______________
Appendix C:

EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description

cndsch_spec
This table contains information about conduit schedule for underground conduit design. Column Name revision_numb conduit_numb conduit_for cnd_from_where cnd_to_where undgrnd_cnd_size undgrnd_cnd_type undgrnd_cnd_length abvgrnd_cnd_size abvgrnd_cnd_type abvgrnd_cnd_length cnd_detail_numb detail_drw_numb cnd_ac_dimension cnd_station pow_conduct_volt pow_conduct_numb pow_conduct_size pow_conduct_type pow_conduct_length con_conduct_numb con_conduct_size con_conduct_type con_conduct_length grnd_wire_size grnd_wire_type grnd_wire_length ol_diagram_numb remarks drawing_numb drawing_rev Type Char( 2) Char( 10) Char( 12) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 5) real Char( 6) Char( 4) real Char( 7) Char( 12) Char( 12) Char( 6) Char( 5) integer Char( 7) Char( 4) real integer Char( 7) Char( 4) real Char( 6) Char( 4) real Char( 10) Char( 16) Char( 20) Char( 2) Index no uniq no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes

C: EE Databases

revision_numb: the column containing the conduit schedule revision number. conduit_numb: the column containing the area number, conduit number, and conduit number ID. drawing_numb can have duplicate values, but the combination of drawing_numb and conduit_numb should be unique. conduit_for: the column defines the purpose of the conduit, for example power, control, and so forth. cnd_from_where: the column containing the location name where the conduit starts from. cnd_to_where: the column containing the location name where the conduit goes to.

489

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 undgrnd_cnd_siz: the column containing the underground conduit size. undgrnd_cnd_typ: the column containing the underground conduit type. undgrnd_cnd_len: the column containing the length of the underground conduit. abvgrnd_cnd_siz: the column containing the above ground conduit size. abvgrnd_cnd_typ: the column containing the above ground conduit type. abvgrnd_cnd_len: the column containing the length of the above ground conduit. cnd_detail_numb: the column containing the conduit detail number. detail_drw_numb: the column containing the detail drawing number. cnd_ac_dimensio: the column containing the data for AC DIM. cnd_station: the column containing the information for control station. pow_conduct_vol: the column containing the power conductor voltage. pow_conduct_num: the column containing the power conductor number. pow_conduct_siz: the column containing the power conductor size. pow_conduct_typ: the column containing the power conductor type code. pow_conduct_len: the column containing the power conductor length. con_conduct_num: the column containing the control conductor number. con_conduct_siz: the column containing the control conductor size. con_conduct_typ: the column containing the control conductor type code. con_conduct_len: the column containing the control conductor length. grnd_wire_size: the column containing the ground wire size. grnd_wire_type: the column containing the ground wire type code. grnd_wire_lengt: the column containing the ground wire length. ol_diagram_numb: the column containing the one-line diagram number. remarks: the column containing remarks for the conduit schedule. drawing_numb: the column containing the drawing number.

490

_ _______________
Appendix C: drawing_rev: the column containing the drawing revision.

EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description

drawing
This table, used by all EE products, contains general information about each EE design file. Column Name mslink* drawing_type* ee_filename* sheet* load_date* ref_db* Type integer Char( 20) Char( 80) Char( 20) Char( 26) Char( 80) Index uniq no no uniq no no Null no no no no no no

mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the drawing table. drawing_type: the column used to define the type of EE drawing. ee_filename: the column containing the drawing file name and path.

C: EE Databases

sheet: the column used to contain the drawing sheet name. load_date: the column containing the date that the load processor loaded the drawing into the project database. ref_db: the column containing the schema name of the EE reference database.

drop_point
This table associates a row in the rcp table with a row in the one-line table. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_ol* ee_to_rcp* ee_dist_down_ol* ee_dist_to_rcp* tag Type integer integer integer integer real real Char( 20) Index uniq no dups dups no no no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes

mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the drop_point table. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one_line table.

491

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the rcp table. ee_dist_down_ol: the column containing the distance along the one-line to the drop point. ee_dist_to_rcp: the column containing the distance between the one-line and the rcp. tag: the column that contains the name of the drop point.

duct_fill
This table defines the cable/conduit that are placed in a duct one-line. Column Name ee_to_ol ee_to_drw ee_duct_cc_row ee_duct_cc_col ee_duct_cc_numb ee_drawing_numb Type integer integer integer integer Char( 12) Char( 20) Index dups dups no no no no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes

ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. ee_duct_cc_row: the row index of the conduit/cable. ee_duct_cc_col: the column index of the conduit/cable. ee_duct_cc_numb: cable/conduit area number, cable number, and cable number number ID. ee_drawing_numb: detail drawing number of the conduit/cable schedule.

ee_pseudo_cable
This table defines the wires/cables that fill conduit. This is performed with the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. Column Name mslink ee_to_ol ee_to_drw ee_quantity item_no Type integer integer integer integer Char( 20) Index uniq no no no dups Null no no no yes yes

mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the ee_pseudo_cable table. ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table.

492

_ _______________
Appendix C: ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. ee_quantity: the number of wires/cables associated with the given one-line of a given item_no. item_no: the column containing the unique key to the ee_pseudo_cable table of the reference schema.

EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description

ee_system
This table contains the names of all systems from every EE Raceway drawing loaded into the project database. Column Name mslink* system_name Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes

mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the ee_system table. system_name: the column that contains the names of the systems.

envelope
This table contains information about the raceway envelopes found in the drawing. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* tag Type integer integer Char( 20) Index uniq no dups Null no no yes

C: EE Databases

mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the envelope table. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. tag: the column that contains the envelope tag. Space envelopes are not available at time of printing.

493

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

fitting
This table contains information about the raceway fittings found in the drawing. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_ol* ee_to_rcp* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_out_width2 ee_dimension_1* ee_angle* ee_weight* cab_weight pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* vendor ee_units* ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_ol_type* ee_part* ee_description Type integer integer integer integer real real real real real real real real real real Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 40) Index uniq no dups dups no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no dups no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes

mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the fitting table. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table. ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the rcp table. ee_out_ht_diam: the column containing the outside height or diameter of the fitting. ee_out_width: the column containing the outside width of the fitting. ee_out_width2: the column containing the outside width of the reducer. ee_dimension_1: the column containing a dimension of the fitting. ee_angle: the column containing the fitting bend angle. ee_weight: the column containing the fitting weight per unit length.

494

_ _______________
Appendix C: cab_weight: the column containing the cable weight per unit length. pds_north: the column containing the PDS north coordinate of the fitting (calculated by Load Database). pds_elev: the column containing the PDS elevation coordinate of the fitting (calculated by Load Database). vendor: the column containing the codelist value of the vendor of the one-line type specification. ee_units: the column containing the codelist value of the design file units. ee_tl_type: the column containing the codelist value of the three-line type. ee_tl_subtype: the column containing the codelist value of the three-line subtype. ee_tl_qual: the column containing the codelist value of the three-line qualifier. ee_ol_type: the column containing the codelist value of the one-line type. ee_part: the column containing the straight section part number. ee_description: the column containing the fitting part description.

EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description

pds_east: the column containing the PDS east coordinate of the fitting (calculated by Load Database).

C: EE Databases

fit_to_sys
This table links a fitting to each system of which it is a member. Column Name ee_to_fit* ee_to_sys* ee_percent* Type integer integer real Index dups dups no Null no no yes

ee_to_fit: the column containing the mslink of a row in the fitting table. ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table. ee_percent: the column containing the percent amount of the fitting is contained in the system identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_sys.

495

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

mscatalog
This table contains the entity (table) numbers for all the tables in the EE Raceway project database. There will be one row in the mscatalog for each database table. Column Name tablename entitynum screenform reporttable sqlreview fencefilter dastable alias_name key_columns key_description Type Char( 32) integer Char( 64) Char( 64) Char(240) Char(240) Char(32) Char(32) Char( 80) Char( 32) Index no uniq no no no no no no no no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes

tablename: the name of the table in the database. It must exactly match the name of the desired table. entitynum: The entity number assigned to a table. It must be a positive integer in the range of 1 to 65535. The entity number uniquely identifies a particular table in the database. screenform: not currently used by MicroStation 32. reporttable: a temporary table used by MicroStation 32. Is is created for each table having graphic linkages within a fence. sqlreview: an sql select satement that MicroStation 32 uses to review rows and columns. fencefilter: an sql select statement that MicroStation 32 uses to restrict elements during fence operations. dastable: specifies the name of the table that maps displayable attribute types to the sql select statements used by MicroStation 32 for loading text into displayable attributes. alias_name: a column used by EE that contains the descriptive alias of tablename. key_columns: a column containing the column_name which uniquely identifies a particular row in the table. EE uses key_columns as the correlation key. key_description: the descriptive alias for key_columns.

496

_ _______________
Appendix C:

EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description

mscolumns
This table specifies column-specific data for EE tables. There is one row in mscolumns for each column in an attribute table. RISRPT and DBAccess use this table for reports. Currently, there are no EE processors using this table. Column Name entitynum attrnum column_name alias_name access_flag work_mode ee_column_order* Type uniq integer Char( 32) Char( 64) smallint smallint smallint Index uniq uniq no no no no no Null no no no yes no no no

entitynum: the entity number assigned to the table whose columns are being described. Entity numbers between mscatalog and mscolumns must be consistent. attrnum: the attribute number assigned to a particular column within a table. column_name: the name of a column in the database. It must exactly match the column name in the database. alias_name: the column containing the descriptive alias of column_name. access_flag: the column containing a code used to identify the accessibility of a particular column by an EE user. A value of 0 indicates that the column is read_only, while a value of 1 indicates that it allows read/write access. work_mode: the column containing the code that identifies the use of a particular column by an EE user. This column can also be thought of as a filter. Display of certain attributes can be restricted depending on the mode of work the user is performing. Since all EE Raceway column values are displayed on the primary form, the work_mode value is set to zero. ee_column_order: the column used to determine the order to display the attributes on the annotation form.

C: EE Databases

497

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

ol_to_sys
This table links a one-line to each system of which it is a member. Column Name ee_to_ol* ee_to_sys* ee_percent* prj_rule_applied Type integer integer real integer Index dups dups no no Null no no yes yes

ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table. ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table. ee_percent: the column containing the percent amount of the straight section is contained in the system identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_sys. prj_rule_applied: the column containing the applied project rule.

one_line
This table contains information about the raceway one-lines found in the drawing. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_rcp1* ee_to_rcp2* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_dimension_1* ee_dimension_2* ee_ol_length* weight cab_weight vendor ee_units* ee_ol_type* ee_spec_key* tag ee_radius ee_const_type Type integer integer integer integer real real real real real real real Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 20) real char Index uniq no dups dups no no no no no no no dups no no dups dups no no Null no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes

mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the one_line table.

498

_ _______________
Appendix C: ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. ee_to_rcp2: the column containing the mslink of the rcp placed at the end of the one-line in the design file. ee_out_ht_diam: the column containing the outside height or diameter of the one-line type. ee_out_width: the column containing the outside width of the one-line type. ee_dimension_1: the column containing a dimension of the one-line type. ee_dimension_2: the column containing a dimension of the one-line type. ee_ol_length: the column containing the run length of the one-line. weight: the column containing the one-line type weight per unit length. cab_weight: the column containing the cable weight per unit length. vendor: the column containing the codelist value of the vendor of the one-line type specification. ee_units: the column containing the codelist value of the design file units. ee_ol_type: the column containing the codelist value of the one-line type. ee_spec_key: the column containing the unique key to the one-line type specification table. tag: the column that contains the name of the one-line. ee_radius: the column that contains the fitting bend radius of the three-line type specification. ee_const_type: the column that contains the construction type.

EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description

ee_to_rcp1: the column containing the mslink of the rcp placed at the start of the one-line in the design file.

C: EE Databases

499

ee_last_rev_dat: the column containing the date the panel/equipment was last revised. ee_create_date: the column containing the panel/equipment creation date. panel: the column containing the panel/equipment name panel_descrip: the column containing the panel/equipment description. ee_part_key: the column containing the unique key to the appropriate record of equipment information in the reference database table. Column Name mslink prj_number prj_name location prj_rule_set base_rule_set Type integer Char( 20) Char( 40) Char( 60) Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq uniq uniq no no no Null no yes no no no yes 500 . ee_eqp_table: the column containing the name of the reference database table that contains additional equipment information. Column Name mslink panel panel_descrip ee_approv_status ee_approv_date ee_create_date ee_last_rev_dat ee_eqp_table ee_part_key Type integer Char( 20) Char( 20) integer Char( 26) Char( 26) Char( 26) Char( 32) Char( 28) Index uniq dups no no no no no no no Null no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the panel table.February 2003 panel This table contains information about all panels/equipment found in the drawing. project This table contains specification information for the project._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_approv_date: the column containing the date when the approval status changed. ee_approv_status: the column containing the approval status of the panel/equipment.

ee_asid: the column containing the asid number of the panel/equipment element in the design file identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_drw. prl_rule_set: the column containing the project rule set. ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the RCP table. 501 . location: the column containing location. ee_status: the column containing the revision status of the panel element in the design file (used by the Load Database process). Column Name ee_to_panel ee_asid ee_to_drw ee_to_rcp ee_status Type integer integer integer integer integer Index dups no dups dups no Null no no no yes no C: EE Databases ee_to_panel: the column containing the mslink of a row in the panel table. prj_number: the column containing the project number prj_name: the column containing the project name description. EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description panel_to_drw This table links a panel/equipment to each drawing in which it exists. base_rule_set: column containing the base rule set. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. rcp This table contains information about all raceway connect points (RCPs) found in the drawing._ _______________ Appendix C: mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the panel table. Column Name mslink* ee_rcp_type* tag ee_radius Type integer Char( 10) Char( 20) real Index uniq no no no Null no yes yes no mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the rcp table.

ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. Column Name ee_to_rcp* ee_asid* ee_to_drw* pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* Type integer integer integer real real real Index dups no dups no no no Null no no no yes yes yes ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the rcp table. ee_asid: the column containing the asid number of the rcp element in the drawing identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_drw. pds_north: the column containing the PDS north coordinate of the rcp (calculated by Load Database). rcp_to_drw This table links an rcp to each drawing in which it exists. ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table. tag: the column that contains the name of the rcp._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . pds_elev: the column containing the PDS elevation coordinate of the rcp (calculated by Load Database). ee_radius: the column containing the fitting bend radius. pds_east: the column containing the PDS east coordinate of the rcp (calculated by Load Database). rcp_to_sys This table links an rcp to each system of which it is a member.February 2003 ee_rcp_type: the column containing the codelist value of the type of rcp. 502 . Column Name ee_to_rcp* ee_to_sys* ee_percent* Type integer integer real Index dups dups no Null no no yes ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the rcp table.

ee_out_width: the column containing the outside width of the straight section. 503 ._ _______________ Appendix C: ee_percent: the column containing the percent amount of the fitting is contained in the system identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_sys. ee_dimension_1: the column containing a dimension of the straight section. ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table. ee_out_ht_diam: the column containing the outside height or diameter of the straight section. EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description straight This table contains information about the raceway straight sections found in the drawing. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. ee_dimension_2: the column containing a dimension of the straight section. ee_weight: the column containing the straight section weight per unit length. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_ol* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_tl_length* ee_dimension_1* ee_dimension_2* ee_weight* cab_weight pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* vendor ee_units* ee_ol_type* ee_spec_key* ee_part* material ee_description Type integer integer integer real real real real real real real real real real Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 40) Index uniq no dups no no no no no no no no no no dups no no dups no no no Null no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes C: EE Databases mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the straight table. ee_tl_length: the column containing the length of the straight section.

Column Name ee_to_str* ee_to_sys* ee_percent* Type integer integer real Index dups dups no Null no no yes ee_to_str: the column containing the mslink of a row in the straight table. ee_spec_key: the column containing the unique key to the one-line type specification table. pds_east: the column containing the PDS east coordinate of the straight section (calculated by Load Database). material: the column containing the straight section material._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_units: the column containing the codelist value of the design file units. ee_description: the column containing the straight section part description. vendor: the column containing the codelist value of the vendor of the one-line type specification. pds_elev: the column containing the PDS elevation coordinate of the straight section (calculated by Load Database). str_to_sys This table links a straight section to each system of which it is a member. ee_percent: the column containing the percent amount of the straight section is contained in the system identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_sys. ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table. 504 . ee_part: the column containing the straight section part number. ee_ol_type: the column containing the codelist value of the one-line type. pds_north: the column containing the PDS north coordinate of the straight section (calculated by Load Database).February 2003 cab_weight: the column containing the cable weight per unit length.

ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. 505 . Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_ol* ee_ol_coord* tag Type integer integer integer real Char( 20) Index uniq no no no dups Null no no no yes yes C: EE Databases mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the to_support table._ _______________ Appendix C: EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description sys_to_drw This table links a system name to each drawing in which the system exists. ee_asid: the column containing the asid number of the system element in the drawing identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_drw. to_support This table links the raceway one-line with a support. Column Name ee_to_sys* ee_asid* ee_to_drw* Type integer integer integer Index dups no dups Null no no no ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table. ee_ol_coord: the column containing the distance along the one-line to the support. ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table. tag: the column that contains the support tag. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. to_support symbols are not available at time of printing.

February 2003 506 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

To initiate the process. These tables contain all attribute information for the available one-line types. Enter your reference schema name and the appropriate table name. The first step in this preparation is to create two ASCII data files (<one-line type>_part. key in SPEC at the command prompt. D: Specs 507 . and will then write all records to that file. the reference database contains one table for each fitting type. Preparing the Specifications Preparing the specifications is one of the first tasks the system manager performs when setting up the EE Raceway product.unl to a file called <one-line type>_spec. You can edit these files manually using a standard ASCII editor or you can use the SPEC process delivered with EE Raceway.unl file easily and efficiently. Indicate whether or not you are adding records to an existing file (Is this a restart (y/n).unl file or to create a new . If you answer n to the prompt.sav file.unl and <one-line type>_spec. The two special fittings delivered by default with EE Raceway are conduit body and pullbox. The system will attach a . airway.unl file. The following information displays to the screen: Enter schema name: Enter table name: Is this a restart (y/n) Respond to the prompts according to your requirements. The process will then write all records to this .sav file. If you intend to add records to an existing . copy the appropriate <one-line type>_spec.sav extension to the specified table name. wireway. while the <one-line type>_part table contains the relevant data for each of the fittings within a specification. and conduit. This process allows you to add records to an existing .unl) to contain all the relevant data from the vendor catalogs. SPEC Process The SPEC process resides in the win32app\eerway\bin directory. the system will overwrite any records already existing in the specified .sav before running the process._ _______________ Appendix D: Specification Appendix D Specification Your reference database contains the specification tables (<one-line type>_part and <one-line type>_spec) that drive the EE Raceway product. For special fittings like conduit bodies and pullboxes. The <one-line type>_spec table contains all specifications. The specifications available at the time of printing are for tray.

sav file back to the corresponding . the system writes the information to the . Copy the . You can exit the process at any point by pressing CTRL -C._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 508 .sav file. It also displays the column values you entered for the previous record. Each value is verified according to the parameters defined inside the < >. press <RETURN> to accept the displayed values (in ()) or key in new values as necessary.unl file to keep the records you have added.sav file and redisplays the column names. Continue this process as long as you wish to add records to your .February 2003 The system processes the information. and then displays the column values for the table name you specified. in a format similar to the following example (for tray_spec): vendor <code list> () ee_units <code list> () ee_dimension_1 <real> () ee_out_ht_diam <real> () ee_dimension_2 <real> () ee_out_width <real> () ee_extension <real> () ee_transition <real> () ee_radius <real> () weight <real> () material <char-20> () ee_xs_cell <char-6> () ee_spec_key <char-28> () ee_description <char-40> () Key in values to the right of the () for each column value. For subsequent records. Once you enter the final value for the displayed table.

unl 2|1|0|50|0|600|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|6060SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|600|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|6030SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|450|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|4560SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|450|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|4530SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|300|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|3060SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|300|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|3030SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|150|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|1560SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|150|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|1530SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|85|0|600|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|6060SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|600|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|6030SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|450|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|4560SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|450|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|4530SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|300|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|3060SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|300|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|3030SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|150|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|1560SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|150|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|1530SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|50|0|600|0|0|600|0|ALUMINUM|A|6060AHV|VENTRIB AHV A 2|1|0|50|0|600|0|0|300|0|ALUMINUM|A|6030AHV|VENTRIB AHV A 2|1|0|50|0|450|0|0|600|0|ALUMINUM|A|4560AHV|VENTRIB AHV A 2|1|0|50|0|450|0|0|300|0|ALUMINUM|A|4530AHV|VENTRIB AHV A 2|1|0|50|0|300|0|0|600|0|ALUMINUM|A|3060AHV|VENTRIB AHV A D: Specs 509 . Note that the | serves as a delimiter between column values.unl Files The following are examples of ._ _______________ Appendix D: Sample .unl files you will load into your reference database tables.unl Files Sample . tray_spec.

unl files are input to the Update Reference Schema process which loads information in the <one-line type>_part and <one-line type>_spec tables. a dimension variable used by Eden. the index_column (codelist) value from the ee_units table. the spec table contains all specifications. tray_spec and tray_part. a dimension variable used by Eden._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . the outside width dimension in sub-units. 510 . As described previously.February 2003 tray_part. the . Sample Specification Tables This section describes the required column names of sample specification tables. tray_spec table Column Name vendor* ee_units* ee_dimension_1 ee_out_ht_diam ee_dimension_2 ee_out_width ee_extension Description the index_column (codelist) value from the vendor table. while the part table contains the relevant data for each of the fittings within a specification. the outside height dimension in sub-units.unl 2|2|5|90|0|A-15VA|VEL|1530AS| |A-15VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|A-30VA|VEL|3030AS| |A-30VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|A-45VA|VEL|4530AS| |A-45VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|A-60VA|VEL|6030AS| |A-60VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|AD-15VA|VEL|1530ADS| |AD-15VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|AD-30VA|VEL|3030ADS| |AD-30VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|AD-45VA|VEL|4530ADS| |AD-45VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|AD-60VA|VEL|6030ADS| |AD-60VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 4|5|1|90|0|ADL-15X-90|HRC|1590ADL| |ADL-15X-90|Horizontal Cross 1|8|1|0|0|ADL-30R15|CR|1560ADL|3060ADL|ADL-30R15-60|Concentric Reducer 1|8|1|0|0|ADL-30R15|CR|1590ADL|3090ADL|ADL-30R15-90|Concentric Reducer 1|9|1|0|0|ADL-30RL15|LR|1560ADL|3060ADL|ADL-30RL15-60|Left Reducer 1|9|1|0|0|ADL-30RL15|LR|1590ADL|3090ADL|ADL-30RL15-90|Left Reducer 1|10|1|0|0|ADL-30RR15|RR|1560ADL|3060ADL|ADL-30RR15-60|Right Reducer 1|10|1|0|0|ADL-30RR15|RR|1590ADL|3090ADL|ADL-30RR15-90|Right Reducer 1|1|1|0|0|ADL-30ST|STS|3060ADL| |ADL-30ST-60|Straight Section 1|1|1|0|0|ADL-30ST|STS|3090ADL| |ADL-30ST-90|Straight Section 3|5|1|90|0|ADL-30T-60|HRT|3060ADL| |ADL-30T-60|Horizontal Tee 3|5|1|90|0|ADL-30T-90|HRT|3090ADL| |ADL-30T-90|Horizontal Tee Update Reference Schema Once created. see Update Reference Schema in the section entitled Electrical Engineer (EE) Environment. the fitting extension. For information about running Update Reference Schema.

the index_column value from the tl_qual table. the Eden symbol. Sample . the tray material. D: Specs 511 . the weight per unit length of the run. see the appendix entitled EE Databases . the cross section symbol. the index_column value from the tl_subtype table. the tray part description. the fitting bend radius. the construction type. the fitting turn angle. the tray specification key. the unique tray part key. the unique tray specification key. the tray part weight. the tray specification description._ _______________ Appendix D: ee_transition ee_radius weight material ee_const_type ee_xs_cell ee_spec_key ee_description the fitting transition length.unl Files tray_part table Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle ee_weight ee_part ee_symbol ee_spec_key ee_spec2_key ee_key ee_description Description the index_column value from the tl_type table. the tray part catalog number. the secondary tray specification key for reducers. * For information about the codelist values.

45. and Adjustable 90.90.60.60.60. and Adjustable 30.90.45._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .45.90. and Adjustable 30.February 2003 Available Fittings The following is a list of the fittings currently supported by the EE Raceway Modeling product: FITTING Straight Elbow Elbow Elbow Wye Wye Wye Cross Cross Reducer Reducer Reducer Conduit body Pullbox TYPE ANGLE Horizontal Inside Vertical Outside Vertical Horizontal Vertical Reducer Horizontal Vertical Left Horizontal Right Horizontal Concentric 30.45 left and 45 right 90 90 90 90 512 .

Eden provides drawing commands called primitives.lib and resides in win32app\eerway\eden. You do not need a programming background to write Eden programs. For additional information about the Eden symbol language. You can write Eden code using whatever case conventions make it easiest for you to read. see the PDS Eden Interface Reference Guide. The library and its path are defined using the EE Configure command.).) Every Raceway symbol must contain a symbol processor definition and at least one of each of the following: Placepoint (EE attachment point) Datum point (EE RCP point) Graphical element E: Eden Symbols 513 . The delivered symbol library is called eden. Symbol Processor File A symbol processor file is the controlling function or logic used to produce the raceway straight sections. However. and special parts (conduit bodies. pullboxes. fittings. draw_arc. (See the chapter entitled Eden Processes for more information about running these processes. fittings.). you should be familiar with a standard ASCII editor like vi or emacs. etc._ _______________ Appendix E: Eden Symbol Generation Appendix E Eden Symbol Generation Eden is a high-level symbol definition language (modeled after the FORTRAN programming language) that allows you to design your own symbols for raceway straight sections. and special parts. To review or modify the symbols in this library. Primitives allow you to construct complex symbols by using a combination of simple commands (place_line. use the delivered Eden processes. etc.

angle . val6 ! ! ! Get Dimensions Required to create the horizontal elbow.or.eq. 0.eq. radius.0) then Call ABORT ( 0 ) Endif Call Begin ( NOHOLE ) Call Begin ( SURFACE ) ! ! ! Add dimension of tray to radius radius = radius + halfwid ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Calculate distances distance variables val1 val2 val3 val4 val5 val6 = = = = = = bendpoint on primary oneline primary distance to bendpoint on bent oneline secondary distance to bendpoint on bent oneline extension point on primary oneline primary distance to extpoint on bent oneline secondary distance to extpoint on bent oneline 514 .0 . angle.0 . angle height halfwid extension radius ORG BND1 BND2 EXT1 EXT2 ARC = = = = = = 19 20 21 22 23 24 = = = = = DIMENSION[4] DIMENSION[21] DIMENSION[22] / 2. val4.eq.February 2003 The best way to explain how a symbol processor file works is to show an example: Before creating an Eden symbol processor file. height . 0. val3. val1. ! ========================================================================= SYMBOL_PROCESSOR ’HEL’ #DESC = Tray Horizontal Elbow r8 halfwid. val5. 0. with or without extensions._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .0 DIMENSION[23] DIMENSION[25] NUMPTS = 4 If ( halfwid . extension. height. ========================================================================= ! ! Symbol Name: HEL ! ! Description: Horizontal Tray Elbow. you should have consulted the PDS Eden Interface Reference Guide or have taken a course in Eden symbol generation.or. val2.

height. NUMPTS. (Point[2]. Point[0]. 0. 1 Call Define_Point( Point[NUMPTS+i]. 0 ) then Do i = 1. halfwid. Point[NUMPTS+i] ) Enddo Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( -99. 0. Define_Point ( Point[EXT1]. -halfwid. Point[BND2]. Define_Point ( Point[ORG]. 0 ) 0. val3. val5. Define_Point ( Point[ARC]. val6. 1 Call Draw_Line ( Point[i]. -val1. Point[0]. Point[ARC] ) Call Rotate_Orientation( 180. -val1. Define_Point ( Point[BND2]. NUMPTS. 0 ) Call Draw_Line_String ( NUMPTS. Point[0]. Point[0]. Point[1] ) Call Draw_Line_String ( NUMPTS. 0 0 0 0 0 0 ) ) ) ) ) ) Define Placepoints Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[EXT2] ) Call Define_Orientation_By_Points ( Point[ORG]. 0 ) 0. 0. 0. Define_Point ( Point[EXT2]. Point[BND2] ) Call Define_Placepoint ( PP1. halfwid. -halfwid. Point[0].ne.0.0 ) val1 * DSIND( angle ) val1 * DCOSD( angle ) val1 + extension val4 * DSIND( angle ) val4 * DCOSD( angle ) Eden Symbol Generation Define bendpoints (point2 and point3) and bend origin (point4) Define_Datum_Point( DP[1]. 0. 0 ) Do i = 1. Point[NUMPTS+1] ) Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( -4. 0. val2. 0. Point[ORG]. 0. (Point[3]. Point[0]. Define_Point ( Point[BND1]. 0. 0. 0) Enddo Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( 1. Point[i]. Point[0] ) Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[EXT1] ) Call Define_Orientation_By_Points ( Point[BND1]. Point[0]. 0 ) Draw First Extension E: Eden Symbols If ( extension . 0.-extension. NORMAL ) Call Define_Placepoint ( PP2. 0 ) Endif 515 . 0 ) 0. -val4._ _______________ Appendix E: radius val1 = val2 = val3 = val4 = val5 = val6 = ! ! ! Call Call Call Call Call Call Call ! ! ! = radius + halfwid radius * DTAND( angle / 2. radius. Point[0] ) ! ! ! Define cross section points Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[BND1] ) Call Call Call Call ! ! ! Define_Point Define_Point Define_Point Define_Point (Point[1]. height. Point[0]. 0. Point[0]. 0. Point[0] ) Point[0]. 0. 0. (Point[4].

February 2003 ! ! ! Draw revolved shape Call Define_Orientation_By_Points(Point[1]. 0 ) then Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[BND2] ) Call Define_Orientation_By_Points(Point[ORG]. halfwid. 0. 0 ) 0. 0. 516 . Point[0]. -angle. 0) Enddo Call Call Call Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( 1. Point[1] ) Draw_Line_String ( NUMPTS. Point[NUMPTS+i] ) Enddo Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( -99. 0 ) Draw_Line_String ( NUMPTS. halfwid. height. extension. NUMPTS. the name of the symbol should correspond with the ee_symbol in the part table. 0._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . -halfwid. When defining parts in the reference database. Point[1]. 0.Point[BND2]. 0 ) 0. 0 ) Do i = 1. Point[0]. 0 ) Endif Stop End The first line of this file should always be: SYMBOL_PROCESSOR ’<name>’ The last two lines of the file should always be: Stop End This line defines the symbol name. NUMPTS. Point[i]. (Point[2]. (Point[4]. NUMPTS. 0 ) 0. 0. 0 ) ! ! ! Draw Second Extension If ( extension . For more information see the description of databases in the Workflow and Procedures chapter.ne. (Point[3]. Point[NUMPTS+1] ) Draw_Complex_Surface ( -4. 1 Call Draw_Line ( Point[i]. 1 Call Define_Point(Point[NUMPTS+i].Point[ARC]) Call Call Call Call Define_Point Define_Point Define_Point Define_Point (Point[1].Point[3]) Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[ARC] ) Call Draw_Revolved_Shape ( EL_LINESTR. 1. Point[0]. 0 ) Do i = 1. height.Point[2]. Point[0]. -halfwid.

see the table immediately following this description.. The elbow is drawn as a surface of revolution. EE Raceway uses a Datum Point to define the location of the RCP relative to the symbol..ee_out_ht_diam Spec Table .......ee_dimension_25 E: Eden Symbols These are from the secondary specification (if one exists): 51 52 53 Height_2 Width_2 Extension_2 Spec Table . extension. The creation of the horizontal elbow symbol is fairly straightforward given a knowledge of Eden primitives. while other critical points are defined relative to the origin.... and radius from the global array DIMENSION.......... In general. If the fitting has extensions..ee_transition Spec Table . For a description of which database columns are associated with what dimensions. the structure is as follows: Dimension 1 2 3 4 11 What Three Line Type Three Line Subtype Three Line Qualifier Angle Length From Manual Placement Form or Calculated Manual Placement Form or Calculated Manual Placement Form or Calculated Manual Placement Form or Calculated Manual Placement Form or Calculated These are from the specification table: 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 .... .. 50 Height Width Extension Transition Radius Dimension 1 Dimension 2 .. they are drawn as a surface of projection of a line string... height......ee_out_wid Spec Table .._ _______________ Appendix E: The symbol in the example defines the symbol name as Tray Horizontal Elbow. The symbol derives the values for angle..ee_out_ht_diam Spec Table . . Dimension 25 Spec Table .ee_dimension_1 Spec Table . width.. It uses Placepoints to define the point by which you can place a fitting using manual placement. Then the placepoints are defined at either end of the elbow.... Eden Symbol Generation DIMENSIONS The DIMENSION structure contains specific information that has been extracted from the database and passed through to Eden.. .ee_radius Spec Table . EE Raceway fills the DIMENSION array with values extracted from the reference database..ee_extension 517 ..... The RCP is defined in the active location with the active orientation........ the one-line will pass through a placepoint on the symbol and will terminate at the RCP. ..ee_extension Spec Table .. For specification-driven parts... .ee_dimension_2 ... Spec Table .ee_out_wid Spec Table .. ..

.. ......ee_radius Spec Table ..ee_dimension_25 The following structure is used for special parts: Dimension 26 27 .. .... Dimension 25 Spec Table .... ...... .ee_dimension_2 .. .February 2003 54 55 56 57 ........... ... ......... Dimension 60 From Part Table ..... Part Table .................. ......... ..... 80 Transition_2 Radius_2 Dimension 1 Dimension 2 .......ee_transition Spec Table ....... .._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide ....ee_dimension_1 Part Table .ee_dimension_1 Spec Table ....ee_dimension_60 518 . 80 What Dimension 1 Dimension 2 ............. ..... ...ee_dimension_2 ....... Spec Table ....

It identifies those files you can modify. The directory tree for EENUC and EERWAY is shown below. the PDS Component Loader delivers these files to \win32app\ingr. 519 ._ _______________ Appendix F: EE File Structure Appendix F EE File Structure F: File Structure This section describes the file structure for EE Nucleus and EE Raceway. By default. It also describes the contents of directories and some files.

Any file followed by an asterisk (*) is an executable./eenuc directory: Any file followed by a slash (name/) is a directory._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The list may differ slightly depending on which options are selected during installation.February 2003 EE Nucleus File Structure EE Nucleus (EE Nuc) is the core product for the EE product line. EE Nucleus will reside under the /usr#/ip32/eenuc directory. The following files exist under the . The product may reside on any file system. /usr/ip32/eenuc: /usr/ip32/eenuc/bin: /usr/ip32/eenuc/bin/c100: /usr/ip32/eenuc/config: /usr/ip32/eenuc/data: /usr/ip32/eenuc/db: 520 ..

— . and EE WPD. 521 . and then invokes the EE environment. EE Nucleus. eenuc/ — README – file containing description of product features and any fixes._ _______________ Appendix F: /usr/ip32/eenuc/doc: /usr/ip32/eenuc/forms: EE Nucleus File Structure F: File Structure /usr/ip32/eenuc/msg: /usr/ip32/eenuc/sym: The following list gives a brief description of some of the files. — product.def – product definition file. etc. problems.txt – File containing release notices. C100 for C100 executables or C400 for C400 executables. bin/ – contains the EE shell script and the environment process. — legend – copyright notice file. The EE shell script sets up variables specifying the location of MicroStation 32. comments. — remove. — EEnotice. The files are grouped by directory.sh – shell script used by the remove utility in deltools used to remove EE Nucleus from the machine. INFORMIX.EErc – File containing global symbol definitions.

— dba_rpt – DBAccess report process. config/ – Contains the file that assigns and exports any required variables. — infxcompress – file used for compression of standard engine databases. — create_db – create database process. — EE – Electrical Engineer environment shell script. — eeqpr – script to print 132 column reports to the laser printer. Also kills stray processes. INFORMIX variables.sh – shell script to create mscolumns table for reference database. — print. — clip – clears interprocess communication left after a process finishes. This file can be edited. — mount – supports less disk installation. data/ – Contains the ASCII files used to control certain environment procedures. — EEmgr – Electrical Enginner manager environment shell script. — reeprj – remote environment process. — eeconfig – file that maintains EE product configuration for workstation/server. and product variables.February 2003 — background – process that reports the exit status of a process run in the background. — infx_ol – file used for compression of on-line INFORMIX databases.dat – ASCII file for output file management. The file assigns MicroStation 32 variables. — mscrecol. — batch – process that reports the exit status of a process run in batch mode. — dba_shell – shell executed around dba_rpt. — eeprj – environment process. — assign – shell script that assigns and exports any required variables. — menu_shell – shell executed around eemgr to run the Edit Database process. — risql – EE reporting utility. — 132_header – file to allow printing in 132 column format. 522 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — eemgr – system manager environment process.

EE Nucleus File Structure F: File Structure 523 . forms/ – directory that contains all the environment forms. — ustn_tsk – DB Access file. db/ – directory that contains the DB Access menu library (mgrdba_lib). — dba* files – DB Access files. Required DBAccess files are also delivered in this directory.txt – less disk information. — eepsp.txt – EE project setup information. — lessd. msg/ – contains EE Nucleus message files. sym/ – contains EE symbol files. doc/ – directory that contains documentation.dat – ASCII file for manager function management._ _______________ Appendix F: — manager.

February 2003 EE Raceway File Structure This section lists and describes the directories and files delivered with EE Raceway._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . /usr/ip32/eerway: /usr/ip32/eerway/bin: /usr/ip32/eerway/bin/c100: /usr/ip32/eerway/cfg: /usr/ip32/eerway/config: /usr/ip32/eerway/data: 524 .

_ _______________ Appendix F: /usr/ip32/eerway/db: EE Raceway File Structure F: File Structure /usr/ip32/eerway/dgn: /usr/ip32/eerway/dgn/seed: /usr/ip32/eerway/doc: /usr/ip32/eerway/eden: /usr/ip32/eerway/help_source: 525 .

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 /usr/ip32/eerway/help_source/help_graphics: /usr/ip32/eerway/mdlapps: /usr/ip32/eerway/menus: /usr/ip32/eerway/msg: /usr/ip32/eerway/report: 526 .

— load – processor to load the project database.def – product definition file. — menu. The files are grouped by directory. — remove. 527 . cfg/ – Contains the application menu configuration files. — rmon – Controlling processor for interactive manipulations. These files can be modified. comments. data/ – Contains the ASCII files used to control process and report management for the EE Raceway product. eerway/ — README – file containing a description of the product features and any fixes. config/ – Contains the file that defines and exports all variables required by EE Raceway and those MicroStation 32 variables required by EE Raceway. bin/ – contains all process delivered with the EE Raceway product. unload drawing.cfg – EE Raceway menu configuration file.sh – shell script used by the remove utility in deltools used to remove EE Raceway from the machine. and clean database processes. problems. etc. — product. unload_cln – contains the unload sheet._ _______________ Appendix F: /usr/ip32/eerway/sym: EE Raceway File Structure F: File Structure /usr/ip32/eerway/tmp: delivered empty The following list gives a brief description of some of the files. — assign – shell script that defines and exports any required variables. — idet – Interference Detection Envelope File Creation process.

lib – the Eden symbol library file.cmds – command file for EE commands invoked by MicroMenu. — eden.dat – controls rule check report management.dgn – delivered metric drawing seed file. and cell library. available cell libraries. eden/ – contains the Eden symbol library. — rway_bar – bar menu for schematic commands. This may be customized. help_source/ – contains the text and source files required to support on-line Help. — process. — report.February 2003 — eden.dgn – delivered English drawing seed file. menus/ – Contains the all menus (panel and bar) supporting the product. — help_graphics – contains the graphics used in on-line Help. and any design files delivered with the product.dat – controls Eden processes. — rway. You can supply additional menu files.s – master help source file. function key menu.hp – master help pointer file containing pointers to both MicroStation 32 and EE Raceway Help. — mstr_rway. Also contains all symbol and icon files required to support delivered menus. msseed. — seed/ – contains the available seed design files. dgn/ – Contains the seed file directory.hp – help pointer file. This may be customized.unl files required for bulk loading special tables and the mscatalog table in the project database. — rule_chk.s – help source file. Also contains .dat – controls standard report management. db/ – Contains the delivered sql files for the project and reference database. — help_rway._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . – – seed. — mstr_rway.dat – controls process management. doc/ – contains documentation information on EE Raceway including README files from previous releases. — help_rway.unl files for bulk loading reference database tables are also provided. 528 . Sample . Attaches the function bar menu.

— rwaypnl. – rway_pnl – panel menu palette file.sym – symbol file for the panel menu.ace)and compiled (. sym/ – Contains all symbol files for EE Raceway menus. — annot_form – form file for annotation. — error. — rway_pnl/ – contains the rway_pnl binary menu files. These messages can be edited but messages can not be added. These messages can be edited but messages can not be added. 529 . The source files may be edited by the user. There is an . — status.sym – symbol file for the bar menu. This file can be extended.msg – message file containing all messages for the command field.bar – bar menu source file._ _______________ Appendix F: — merge_pnl/ – directory containing the merged panel menu consisting of EE Raceway and MicroStation.msg – message file containing all messages for the prompt field. — command. These messages can be edited but messages can not be added. report/ – Contains the source (. This directory also contains the available precision input forms. — rway_ref. — rwaydba_lib – DB Access template library. — rway_prj. — rway. These messages can be edited but messages can not be added.msg – message file containing messages for status field. – merge_pnl – panel menu file. tmp/ – Holds any temporary files. — rway. — alias.tbl – file containing the entity numbers for the project database tables.cmd – file used to correlate key-ins to commands.tbl – file containing the entity numbers for the reference database tables.pnl – panel menu source file.ace and an . The software requires this directory. — rwaybar. — prompt.msg – message file containing all error messages for the error field. and logo.arc file for each report listed below. EE Raceway File Structure F: File Structure msg/ – Contains EE Raceway message files and the file to correlate key-ins to EE Raceway commands.arc) SQL files for all delivered sch reports. prompting messages.

February 2003 530 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

dat 13.dat report.-O. report.Default.. The manager.dat. You may want to write your own processes. respectively.0 (EE Raceway) 12/14/93" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file. # The syntax of this data file is : # # Title | Command Line | Prompt.dat # This file is stored under the %EE_RWAY%\data directory.%EDEN_LIB%.bat -c \ | Enter library name .dat. # # The second field is a command line containing the name of the executable. # Any of the sub-fields in the third field can be omitted # # Change History: # Added the ability to list/extract user functions 31-May-95 # Compile EDEN Symbol | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden._ _______________ Appendix G: Customizing Environment Files Appendix G Customizing Environment Files This appendix contains printouts of the following files as they are delivered with EE Raceway: File eden.Default. eden. You can add defaults to this screen by modifying the file.\ | Enter option (-l=list or -o=insert).dat #ident "@(#)Eden processes:eden. # # The first column for a comment line must be the ’#’ character. # # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list.) as the delimeter # # They are : # Prompt...dat process.Switch # The default can be a global symbol or file.1 0.dat file controls the scrolling list for the options available through the system manager menu.. # # eden. Report.Path. reports or rule checks or change their names from what is delivered. \ | Enter symbol source file . . rule_chk. and Output. Report. Rule. . This section describes the syntax needed to modify the scrolling list for the Process. and print.dat..dat manager.dat Location win32app\ingr\eerway\data win32app\ingr\eerway\data win32app\ingr\eerway\data win32app\ingr\eerway\data win32app\ingr\eenuc\data win32app\ingr\eenuc\data G: Customizing Environment process. # The ’\’ is the line continuation character.. and Output menus. # # The third field and each subsequent field will contain three sub-fields # using the comma (.dat rule_chk.Switch | .dat control the scrolling lists for the Process. Rule.Path. # 531 .dat print.

bat -eu \ b | Enter library name . \ | Merge from library name .bat -u \ | Enter library name . # # E Edit EDEN Symbol File | %EE_RWAY% tor. Extract EDEN User Function From Library| %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden. # # # List EDEN User Functions | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden.... # # | E n t e r e d | Enter symbol file name...%EDEN_LIB%. # # # Extract EDEN Symbol From Library| %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden..%EDEN_LIB%. d # e n # . \ \ | Enter symbol name .bat -s \ | Enter library name . # # #Create Parameteric Help Library | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden.%EDEN_LIB%..%EDEN_LIB%....bat -l \ | Enter library name ... \ | Enter symbol name ... # # # Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden.bat -m \ | Merge into library name .. # # # List EDEN Symbol Library | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden.bat -C \ # | Enter library name .%EDEN_LIB%...February 2003 # # Delete EDEN Symbol | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden.. # # # Compress EDEN Symbol Library | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . \ a t | Enter symbol name ..%EDEN_LIB%.bat -e \ n | Enter library name .%EDEN_LIB%..bat -d\ | Enter library name .notepad. 532 .

These symbols # are exported by the EE environment when a project is entered.dat # This file is stored under the %EE_SCH%\data directory.-F # # Unload Sheet | %EE_RWAY%\bin\unld_cln.1 0.dat #ident "@(#)data:process. %EE_CURPRJ%\rway\dgn.. # Any of the sub-fields in the third field can be omitted # # NOTE: Many processes run off the project or reference schema (or both).dat 13.Switch # The default can be a global symbol or file. %EE_CURPRJ%\rway\dgn. # # process.dat process. . # Two environment symbols have been set up for these schemas: EE_SCHEMA # for the project schema and EES_REFDB for the reference.%RWAY_DGN%.Default. The password will # have to be handled accordingly.-f \ | Enter envelope name.-f # # # Unload Design | %EE_RWAY%\bin\unld_cln.exe -s \ | Enter sheet. # # The third field and each subsequent field will contain three sub-fields # using the comma (. # # The first column for a comment line must be the ’#’ character.. # So._ _______________ Appendix G: process.exe \ | Enter design name.Path.) as the delimeter # # They are : # Prompt.. %EE_CURPRJ%\rway\dgn.-e G: Customizing Environment 533 .%RWAY_DGN%. # # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list. any customized processes written should read these symbols in the # process instead of passing them on the command line. # The syntax of this data file is : # # Title | Command Line | Prompt. # # The second field is a command line containing the name of the executable. .0 (EE Raceway) 12/14/93" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file..exe \ | Enter design name.exe \ | Enter one design name.Default.-f # # Create Interference Envelope (given name) | %EE_RWAY%\bin\idet.<password> if a password is keyed in on the project form. This was # done to handle schema passwords.. # # Load Database | %EE_RWAY%\bin\load.%RWAY_DGN%. # # Cleanup database | %EE_RWAY%\bin\unld_cln. %EE_CURPRJ%\rway\dgn.Switch | .Path.. The symbol is exported as # <schema_name>.%RWAY_DGN%. # The ’\’ is the line continuation character.exe # # Create Interference Envelope (default name) | %EE_RWAY%\bin\idet.exe \ | Enter design name.

%EE_SCHEMA% # # Material takeoff report | %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell. # Any of the sub_fields in the third field can be omitted.cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib dummy %EE_RPTDB% \ | cond_body \ | Enter Reference schema.%EE_SCHEMA% # # Raceway bill of materials report| %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell.%EE_SCHEMA% \ | Enter low range (PDS coordinates: east north elev) \ | Enter high range (PDS coordinates: east north elev) # # Raceway Conduit Body report| %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell. # # Project drawing list | %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell.1 0.cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | rway_bom \ | Enter project schema..%EES_REFDB% # # 534 . # # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | rway_bom_v \ | Enter project schema.February 2003 report. # The second field is the command field.cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | mto_rpt \ | Enter project schema. # The third field is the name of the report which can be a global symbol # or a file name.cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | drwlst \ | Enter project schema.0 (EE Raceway) 6/1/92" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file. # # report.%EE_SCHEMA% # # Raceway bill of materials by volume| %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell. # # They are: # Prompt. .) as the delimeter.Default | . # The fourth field and each subsequent field will contain two sub-fields # using the comma (..dat 7. .dat #ident "@(#)data:report.dat # The syntax of this data file : # Title | Command Line | Report Name | Prompt.Default # The default can be a global symbol or file.

dat 13.cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | blank_ids \ | Enter project schema.. ..dat #ident "@(#)data:rule_chk.0 (EE Raceway) 12/14/93" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file. # The third field is the report name which can be a global symbol or file.dat rule_chk. Default | .dat # The syntax of this data file is : # Title | Command Line | Report Name | Prompt.%EE_SCHEMA% # # G: Customizing Environment 535 . . # Any of the sub_fields in the third field can be omitted.) as the delimiter # # They are: Prompt. # # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list. # # rule_chk. # The second field is the command field._ _______________ Appendix G: rule_chk.1 0.Default # The default can be a global symbol or file. # # Material takeoff blank part ID’s | %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell. # The fourth field and each subsequent field will contain two sub-fields # using the comma (.

A file name is automatically appended to # the command as the last parameter.. # The titles are the messages on the scrolling list.. # The third field is made up of four parts: prompt. # #VAX Line Printer| vaxprint # 536 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide ..dat #ident "@(#)env_data:print. The command "vaxprint" # could be a shell script or an exported shell function. # The first column of comment line must be #.path and switch.-q # Laser Printer 132 columns | %EE_NUC%\bin\eeqpr \ | Enter queue name. # TO SCREEN| SCREEN # # Local line printer # Local Printer| lp # # NQS print command to print to a laser printer # Laser Printer 80 columns | qpr -t text\ | Enter queue name.default.1 0.dat 21.DEFAULT.. # # This is an example of a way to print to a VAX. # (The path is not relevant).0 (EE Schematic) 3/9/94" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file. This field should be used to pass # information to the command..February 2003 print. # # print. # The syntax of this data file is : # TITLE | COMMAND | PROMPT. # The command can be any command to output a file.SWITCH..PATH.dat # This file is stored under %EE_NUC%\data directory.

Path.Switch a # The default can be a global symbol or file.. # # The second field is a command line containing the name of the executable._ _______________ Appendix G: manager.) as the delimeter n # # They are : b # Prompt.. # # The third field and each subsequent field will contain three sub-fields # using the comma (. . # The syntax of this data file is : # # Title | Command Line | Prompt. .INFORMIX SE | vterm -x %EE_NUC%\bin\infxcompress -T compress # d # b e #Compress database . G: Customizing Environment 537 . _ # Any of the sub-fields r the third field can be omitted in p # t # .dat #ident "@(#)env:manager...cmd \ |Enter schema name.1 0. # # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list.Path.dat # This file is stored under the %EE_NUC%\data directory. -s e # # m #Compress database .dat manager. # # manager.Switch | .. # The ’\’ is the line continuation character.INFORMIX Online | vterm -x %EE_NUC%\bin\infx_ol -T compress d # Create mscolumns table | %EE_NUC%\bin\mscrecol.dat 21. # # The first column for a comment line must be the ’#’ character.Default..0 (EE Nucleus) 3/9/94" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file. Edit database | %EE_NUC%etnt -l %EE_NUC%\db\mgrdba_lib \ | Enter x schema name.Default.

February 2003 538 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

the command name key-ins in the file will invoke the commands to which they correspond. the format of such an entry.1 0. just as would the key-in EERWAY Delete Element. You do not need to add entries to the alias. If you were to add this example to the alias.cmd file is an ASCII file located in win32app\ingr\eerway\msg. The alias. then the key-in EERWAY Remove Element would invoke the command EERWAY Delete Element. You can use any text editor to modify the file.0 (EE Raceway) 12/14/93" To create an alias for an EE Raceway command add an entry to this file consisting of the alas and the hardcode for that command in the following format: <alias> = <hardcode> The list of possible hardcodes follows: Command Name ———— EERWAY Active OLT Parameters EERWAY Add System Group EERWAY Annotate Element EERWAY Annotate Group EERWAY Annotate Title Block EERWAY Clone Element EERWAY Clone Group EERWAY Conduit Sizing EERWAY Copy Element EERWAY Copy Group EERWAY Create Cell EERWAY Delete Coincident RCPs EERWAY Define Duct Cross Section Hardcode ——– rwp addsysg annotate anntgrp anntblk clone cloneg rtwform cpele cpeleg crecell coinrcp ductform 539 .cmd file contains instructions for adding an entry. any alias you add to this file must not match any of the command name key-ins or hard-coded names listed below. if the sample alias entry (in the file below) were added to alias.cmd file explains how to create an alias for a particular command. To the left of the equal sign (=) in this example is the user-definable alias key-in name._ _______________ Appendix H: alias.cmd file.cmd # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # 13. The example in the alias. H: alias.cmd. Since the EE Raceway software has a reserved set of names for each Raceway command which are hard-coded into the EE Raceway software.cmd file This appendix contains a description and printout of the alias.cmd file (the # symbols indicate comment lines): #ident "@(#)rdmsg:alias. you would need only to key in r e to invoke the command. You need to key in just enough of the key-in name to make it unique. The alias. a sample entry. For example.cmd file.cmd file.cmd file The following is a print-out of the alias. The fixed (hard-coded) command name is to the right of the equal sign.cmd file Appendix H alias. and a list of EE Raceway command names and the hard-code for each command.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY Delete Duplicate One Lines Delete Element Delete Group Delete Title Block Design Parameters Display Element Info Display Entity and Mslink Display Fitting Info Display Run Info Display Sector and Word Display System and OLT Display Type and Asid Edit Manual Fitting Exit Fitting Environment Element Fitting Environment Group Group Control Highlight Asid Highlight Entity and Mslink Highlight Graphic Group Highlight Propagation Errors Highlight Sector and Word Highlight System Elements Insert One Line Vertex Insert RCP Levels Control Load Database Minimize Joints Minimize Joints Group Modify One Line Move Element Move One Line Segment Move One Line Vertex Move Title Block OLT Definition Place Drop Point Place Equipment Pointer Place Manual Fitting Place One Line Place Title Block Propagate Element Propagate Group Propagation Control Remove Fitting Remove One Line Vertex Remove RCP Replace System Group Rotate Cross Section Route Around Vessel Run Reports Run Rule Checks Set Active OLT Set Active OLT Parameters Set Active Point Set Active System Set Conduit Sizing Attributes Set Symbology Control Symbology Control System Definition Text Defaults Toggle Spider Display dupols dltele dlteleg dlttblk ueleform eleinfo prtrlnk tlfinfo runinfo prtsw prtsysol prtasid manedit rexit rulefit rulefitg grpform hiasid hirlnk higg hiprerr hisw hisys insolvert addrcp levels loaddb minjnt minjntg modol mvele mvolseg mvolvert mvtblk oltdef plcdpnt plctoeqp manform plcol plctblk prjele prjeleg propform rmfit rmolvert rmrcp repsysg rotcs rtvess runrpt runrul actolt setact actpnt actsys setcsa setgsc symbform sysdef txtdef togspider 540 .

cmd file H: alias._ _______________ Appendix H: # # example: EERWAY Remove Element = dltele alias.cmd file 541 .

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 542 .

cmds 543 . If you do not want the rway.cfg active mmenus ee_rway:rway..ammfile.cmd Appendix I rway. you can comment out the export variable RWAY_CMD using the EE Configure command.prAttaching EE Raceway Menus.pr I: rway.cmd file may also be edited by the user.cmd file to be executed. The rway. This file is located in the directory path win32app\eerway\db and activates the rway._ _______________ Appendix I: rway.cmd is the MicroMenu (umenu) command file that is used to attach the EE Raceway menus..) Below is the file as it is delivered in the product directory: m. (Place a pound sign (#) in front of any line you do not want executed.cmd The file rway. MicroStation reads this file and processes the commands as if keyed in by the user.amm m. It is run automatically when you enter the EE Raceway environment. add mmenus ee_rway:menu. You can disable any of these features by commenting out the line(s) that enable the feature.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 544 .

is supported. It doesn’t have to be the schema your report is running off of. and the RIS Report-Writer Reference Guide. Documentation explaining how to create and compile customized reports with RIS-DB ACCESS is available in the DB ACCESS Reference Guide. The EE Raceway reports report on the project database. either local or remote. i. RIS Dataview or RIS Report Writer are all supported by this processor. in some cases.e.[wtr_p5] [-?] -s <schema name> Returns a usage statement like the one listed above. RIS Report Processing A report processor is provided with EE Raceway to run RIS-based reports._ _______________ Appendix J: Reports Appendix J Reports This section describes each report delivered with EE Raceway. layout. Project Dataview. J: Reports -l <template library> -t <report template> -M <menu template> -w <where clause> 545 . All EE Raceway reports are currently written for RIS-DBACCESS. The name of the menu you wish to run from your menu template library.. the reference database and. This information will be helpful if you want to use a delivered report as a template for a customized report. the Project Data View Reference Guide. Used to restrict the report output to a certain type of condition. It specifies the attributes used in the report and describes some of the internal operation behind report generation. It is used as a "default" schema to enter DB Access. Created through DB Access. All EE Raceway reports are compatible for use with either RIS Report-Writer (RISRPT) or DB Access (DBA). Any RISsupported relational database. This is the library of templates created to run reports from. Report templates created through DB Access. "where name = ’joe smith’ and number = 32". Usage: dba_rpt [-?] -s <schema> -l<template library> [-t<template>|-M<menu template>] -w<where clause> -o<output file> -S<schema list> [-F<database find>] [wtr_p0]. This is the name of any current RIS schema. The name of the report you wish to run from your report template library. and print conditions. both. or RIS Report-Writer this is your report source code..

rpt" added to the end. whatever that schema’s position was in that list (first.) the report template will look at the schema in that same position when it is executed. default file name that they write to. the "-o" option can be used. with a "....) 546 . Thus.. Certain variables may be exported.. -S <schema list> -F <database find> [wtr_p0]. and referenced by the literal string "wtr_p0". etc.February 2003 -o <output filename> All reports have a hardcoded.. since all EE Raceway reports were developed with the project schema listed first and the reference schema listed second.") and places the result into the third parameter (wtr_p2)) These are parameters that can be passed to a report template.e. second. If you wish to override this name.) This is the list of schemas your report actually runs through. etc. RIS Dataview or RIS Report-Writer to create or alter existing templates. be careful of how your list looks before you develop a report template. * (The schemas in this list need to be in the same order as they were in DBA_SCHEMA_LIST when the report was originally developed.[wtr_p5] When you create a template._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The first parameter is read into wtr_p0. The correct order is <project schema> <reference schema>.. (The current standard is that the output filename be the same as the template name. * selects one character string from the database based on the select statement entered (i. and use a schema from the schema list. and will be picked up as defaults if switches are not used. Example: "-S prj_schema ref_schema". "select value_a from table_b where. They are: DBA_SCHEMA (the "-s schema". up to a maximum of six parameters (wtr_p5). third. A default schema used to enter RIS) DBA_SCHEMA_LIST (schema list the report runs off of) * DBA_LIB (the report template library) It is useful to export these variables before entering DB Access.

used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib drwlst template. J: Reports 547 . Selects the desired columns from those tables. Information Output: Drawing. Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and. 3. found in $EE_NUC/bin.a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file. load_date. 2. Formats information into readable form. filename.sheet Associated Software/Files 1. Project Database drwlst (RIS) ._ _______________ Appendix J: Project Drawing List (drwlst) Project Drawing List (drwlst) This report lists all drawings currently loaded in the project database. ref_db. dba_rpt . sheet. This file: Selects the desired database tables. Sorted by (Highest to lowest priority) drawing.the RIS process. and sorts them by sheet name. drawing_type.

ee_ol_type. ee_tl_type. dba_rpt . Information Output: System.the RIS process. used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib mto_rpt template. found in $EE_NUC/bin. ee_tl_subtype. Formats information into readable form. ee_part. ee_ol_type. description Fitting. 548 . Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and. Project Database mto_rpt . ee_tl_length. ee_out_width. ee_out_ht_diam. 2. This file: Selects the desired database tables. ee_out_ht_diam. and outputs the related system name for the particular straight or fitting. Selects the desired columns from those tables. ee_out_width. ee_part Associated Software/Files 1._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file.February 2003 Material Takeoff Report (mto_rpt) This report outputs information from both the straight and the fitting tables. 3. system_name Straight.

Selects the desired columns from those tables.a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file. 2.the RIS process. This file: Selects the desired database tables. J: Reports 549 . Information Output: Straight. Formats information into readable form. 3. ee_ol_type. ee_out_width. Project Database rway_bom ._ _______________ Appendix J: Raceway Bill of Materials Report (rway_bom) Raceway Bill of Materials Report (rway_bom) This report adds the length of the straight sections for each part ID. used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib rway_bom template. dba_rpt . ee_part. ee_ol_type. ee_out_width. Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and. and outputs the number of fittings for each part ID. the length of the elbows is added to the straight sections. ee_out_ht_diam. found in $EE_NUC/bin. For flexible conduit elbow fittings. ee_tl_subtype. ee_tl_length. ee_out_ht_diam. ee_part Associated Software/Files 1. ee_tl_type. description Fitting.

For flexible conduit elbow fittings. and a southing coordinate of 3000 should be keyed in as a value of -3000 in the northing direction. the length of the elbows is added to the straight sections._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 234 532 34 It should be understood that westing and southing coordinates must be the negative of their opposite directional coordinate. These low and high ranges define a cubic volume from which the report is pulled.February 2003 Raceway Bill of Materials by Volume Report (rway_bom_vol) This report adds the length of the straight sections for each part ID. you are required to define a low and high range in PDS coordinates. The output is only for a specified volume from the input parameters. For instance. A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume When running a Bill of Materials by Volume report. 550 . and outputs the number of fittings for each part ID. The coordinate values need to be in subunits and entered in the form field with a space between the coordinates: easting northing elevation For example. You can find the coordinates you want to use by using the active point coordinate display on the precision input form. Any Raceway component extending outside the clipping volume defined by the High and Low Range Coordinates will not be included in the report output. a westing coordinate of 100 should be keyed in as a value of -100 in the easting direction.

ee_part Associated Software/Files 1. Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and. ee_out_ht_diam. J: Reports 551 .Appendix J: _ _______________ Raceway Bill of Materials by Volume Report (rway_bom_vol) Information Output: Straight. This file: Selects the desired database tables. ee_tl_length. 2. ee_ol_type. found in $EE_NUC/bin.a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file. Formats information into readable form. used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib rway_bom_vol template. ee_out_width.the RIS process. ee_tl_type. ee_part. ee_ol_type. description Fitting. ee_out_width. Project Database rway_bom_vol . 3. Selects the desired columns from those tables. ee_tl_subtype. dba_rpt . ee_out_ht_diam.

ee_out_width. ee_ol_type. ee_part Associated Software/Files 1. and outputs the related system name for the particular straight or fitting. system_name Straight. Information Output: System. ee_out_ht_diam. 3. description Fitting.a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file. Selects the desired columns from those tables. 2. Formats information into readable form. This file: Selects the desired database tables. used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib blank_ids template. ee_out_ht_diam._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .the RIS process. ee_tl_type. ee_out_width. Project Database blank_ids . ee_tl_subtype. ee_ol_type. ee_part. found in $EE_NUC/bin. 552 . ee_tl_length. dba_rpt .February 2003 Raceway Blank Part IDs (blank_ids) This report outputs information from both the straight and the fitting tables whose part id (ee_part) information is blank. Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and.

When you select Reset. RIS Schema Manager terminates. RIS initiates that particular action by displaying one of the forms defined below. 553 . If you select any of the buttons. It can also be used to display information about any existing schemas. If you select one of the schemas in the list. You can access RIS Schema Manager from EE Database Utilities or by clicking Start > Programs > RIS version number > RIS Schema Manager. For more detailed information on the RIS Schema Manager. any active secondary forms are erased. then information about that schema is displayed. refer to the Relational Interface System (RIS) Reference Guide. and dropping RIS schemas. When you select Cancel (X). changing. The RIS Schema Manager is a stand-alone utility for creating._ _______________ Appendix K: RIS Schema Manager Appendix K RIS Schema Manager K: RIS Schema Mgr. This form consists of a list of all the schemas known to RIS and several buttons corresponding to the actions of the Schema Manager. and the RIS Schema Manager rereads the risschema file.

You can specify a schema in two ways: either by keying in the schema name in the Schema Name field. or by choosing a schema from the list on the RIS Schema Manager form. with the exception of the Schema Name field.February 2003 Schema Information Form This form is. It reads information about existing schemas._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 554 . Selecting Cancel (X) exits the Schema Information form. a read only form.

The database-specific information about that schema is entered in the Create Schema input fields. and corresponds directly to the RIS create schema statement. 555 . Selecting Reset clears all input fields on the form. select one of the Network Protocol fields. This form creates new RIS schemas. information about that database is entered into the Create Schema input fields. 2. Select the Display Databases button. A form listing all the known RIS databases is displayed. If you select one of the databases. Selecting the Force button forces the system to create the schema despite corrupted data or other errors it may encounter. You can enter database-specific information on the Create Schema form using one of three methods: 1. This method is particularly convenient when creating additional schemas for a database. To change the order of the Network Protocol fields. Once you have entered all necessary information. input fields for that information display. This is your only alternative if the schema is created on a database which is unknown to RIS. The value you selected originally moves to the bottom of the list. Selecting the Local Machine button fills the Node Address field with the addresses of the local machine. its value will be replaced with the value of the field below it. Select an existing schema on the RIS Schema Manager form. 3. select Run to create the schema. Key in all information in the input fields. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form._ _______________ Appendix K: Create Schema Form Create Schema Form K: RIS Schema Mgr. If the selected database type requires additional information.

When you select one of these options. To modify the user password. only those gadgets associated with the action are enabled. the user password. To select a schema to drop. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. To modify the schema node. while selecting Reset clears all the fields on the form.February 2003 Drop Schema Form This form drops RIS schemas. Alter Schema Form This form performs three functions: it modifies the schema password. To select the schema to be altered. 556 . and the schema node. You must enter both the original and new passwords to modify the schema password. When you have entered all necessary information. Selecting Reset clears all the fields on the form. select Run to alter the schema. either enter the schema name in the Schema Name field. either enter the schema name in the Schema Name field. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. you need only to enter the new password. Selecting Run drops the schema. enter the new addresses in the Node Address fields. or select a schema from the list on the RIS Schema Manager form. This action can also be used to change the order of the fields or to change the order of the protocols. or select a schema from the list on the RIS Schema Manager form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Selecting any of these buttons initiates an action. 557 . If the selected schema requires a password._ _______________ Appendix K: Data Definition Form Data Definition Form K: RIS Schema Mgr. column type. Drop Table. and displays one of the subforms defined in following sections. Selecting Reset cancels any subforms. A field to search for a specific column is also provided. and indexes defined for the schema specified in the schema name field. views. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the Table Information form. Table Information Form This form displays the definition of the specified table. and Alter Table) will accept input. column name. and clears the list. and whether or not nulls are allowed in the column are displayed for each column in the table. The column position. The form buttons represent the data definition actions of the Schema Manager. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the Data Definition form. This form consists of a list of all the tables. or by choosing the table from the list on the Data Definition form. then you must enter it before the subforms (Create Table. You can specify a table either by keying in the table name in the Table Name field.

while choosing the Mode Run button actually causes the action to take place. Select the Mode Run button to drop the column. new columns can be added to the table definition. The Create Table operates in three modes which are represented by the three buttons: Insert Column. Select Reset to clear the form. or chosen from the list on the Data Definition form. Drop Column. Then there is the second set. In Drop Column Mode. Select Cancel (X) to exit the form. In Modify Column Mode. referred to as the Mode Control buttons. the new column is inserted in front of the chosen column. Select the Mode Run button to insert the column. If the name of an existing table is entered into the Table Name field. This form has two sets of Control buttons. The column to be modified must be specified by keying in the column name in the Column Name Search field. the definition of that table will be loaded into the Create Table form. Select the Mode Run button to modify the column. It cannot be used to modify existing tables. select Run to create the table. or by selecting the column in the table definition list. columns can be dropped from the table definition. and Modify Column. These three buttons place the form in a particular mode. In Insert Column Mode. in the upper right corner of the form.February 2003 Create Table Form This form creates tables in the schema specified on the Data Definition form. or by selecting the column in the table definition list. 558 . If a column is chosen in the table definition list. Selecting the Mode Reset button clears the form mode. which behaves as expected. The Create Table form is used only to create new tables. This can be useful when creating several similar tables. column definitions can be modified. The column to be dropped must be specified by keying in the column name in the Column Name Search field. There is the usual set. which is used to execute and reset the different modes of the form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The ability to load existing table definitions into the form exists just to provide a template or starting point for a new table. Once the table definition is complete. Otherwise the new column is appended to the list.

Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. Selecting Reset clears the form._ _______________ Appendix K: Create Table Form Drop Table Form This form drops tables in the schema specified on the Data Definition form. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. It can only append one new column to an existing table. Selecting Run drops the table. K: RIS Schema Mgr. Alter Table Form This form alters existing tables in the schema specified on the Data Definition form. This form behaves in the same way as the RIS Alter Table command. Once the new column is defined. 559 . Selecting Reset clears the form. select Run to alter the table. The table to be dropped can be specified by keying in the table name in the Table Name field or by selecting the table from the list on the Data Definition form.

February 2003 Schema File Form This form locates the risschema file that you are using on the network. it provides a Checksum Schema File option. Selecting Reset clears the form. Additionally._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . an error-checking mechanism that ensures that the data EE reads from a remote risschema file is correct. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. 560 . Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. Selecting Reset clears the form settings. and it also allows you to specify which RDBMS(s) your schemas can use. Set Form This form allows you to toggle the database mode ANSI setting on and off.

the schema lock file is not replaced as it should be. If the filename is not a full pathname. L for LU6. Sometimes when RIS is abnormally terminated. RIS will look for the file in the directory where RIS was installed on the given machine.2 The network address (must be an address. If there is no network address given. D for DNP (DECnet). Access to the schema file is controlled by the presence of another file. The schema definition file consists of database and schema entries which are associated by a DBID (database ID) key value. The locate schfile command in the interactive utility can be used to put the appropriate entry in the parameters file. I for Ingres. T for TCP/IP. The communication protocol to be used to communicate with the database. the schema definition file will be created or used on the local machine. the lock file must be replaced manually. Multiple files often result in a large number of inconsistencies. The schema file is accessible only if the schema lock file exists. referencing the file risschema in the directory where RIS was installed. currently supported values are X for Informix. The parameters file is shipped with a default schema definition file specification. Currently supported values are X for XNS. it is still advisable to use only one schema file. It is stored in a central location on the network and is used by all RIS client programs to ensure that all RIS clients use the same set of schema definitions. not a name) The name of the schema The database user name The database user password (encrypted) L: Schema Definition NETADDR SCHNAME USR USRPASS 561 . The location of the schema definition file must be in the ris/parameters file on the client machine. This file is the schema lock file. and D for DB2 The database name as in the create schema statement. Although you can use multiple files. then the schema file is in use. The values found in the create schema option clause. The parameters file describes the network address and filename of the schema definition file. There can be multiple schema entries for each database entry. The name of the schema lock file is the same as the schema file with the addition of the . Here is a description of the fields in the schema definition file: DBID DTYPE DBNAME PARMS PROTOCOL The database ID. a unique key to identify the database The database type.LCK extension. If the lock file does not exist. O for Oracle. It must be a name or pathname as required by the dbms._ _______________ Appendix L: RIS Schema Definition File Appendix L RIS Schema Definition File The RIS schema definition file maintains all schema definitions known to RIS. In these cases. A line separates entries.

This value is case-sensitive.142. The valid value is lu6. The valid value is s370 and the default value is s370. There are two logical units. This value is case-sensitive. the name of the Clipper System Administrator assigned to the logical unit that allows communication to the RIS program on the IBM machine.155 PROTOCOL= 562 . one on the Clipper.142. The valid value is mvs and the default value is mvs. The name the IBM System Administrator called the RIS server when it was installed on the IBM. All users must be able to create and delete files in the directory where the schema file is located. This value is case-sensitive.155 PROTOCOL= NETADDR= PROTOCOL= NETADDR= DIR=/usr/informix SQLEXEC= DBTEMP= TBCONFIG= ——————————————————————————– DBID=1 DTYPE=X DBNAME=/usr/ee/sample PROTOCOL=X NETADDR=0001349b. The network protocol that RIS uses to get to the IBM machine where the DBMS resides. The environment that the RIS/DBMS uses.February 2003 ARCH OS ENV The system architecture that the RIS/DBMS runs on. The operating system that the RIS/DBMS uses. Following is a sample schema definition file: CHECKSUM:1249378903 TIMESTAMP:728930074 ——————————————————————————– DBID=2 DTYPE=X DBNAME=/usr/ee/sample_ref PROTOCOL=X NETADDR=0001349b. The name the Clipper System Administrator assigned to the mode that allows communication to the RIS program on the IBM machine. NET_PROTOCOL RIS_LU or HOST_LU MODE HOST_PROGRAM A schema file must be readable and writable by all users. the other on the IBM.08-00-36-32-e4-00 PROTOCOL=T NETADDR=129._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .2 and the default value is lu6.2.135.08-00-36-32-e4-00 PROTOCOL=T NETADDR=129. This value is case-sensitive. The LU names are generated when RIS is installed. The valid value is cics and the default value is cics. This value is case-sensitive. the CICS transaction name.135.

This allows for additional protocols in the future. Currently._ _______________ Appendix L: NETADDR= PROTOCOL= NETADDR= DIR=/usr/informix SQLEXEC= DBTEMP= TBCONFIG= ——————————————————————————– SCHNAME=sample_ref USR=ee USRPASS=pz_-!=%#oa/#@?%qHt%h&jXJ2vj(tyeY%i)pV BEGIN_GRANTEES END_GRANTEES DBID=2 ——————————————————————————– SCHNAME=sample USR=ee USRPASS=’<j8. All these entries are created by the create schema statement.H:. If the file is corrupted or removed.zW%wU5yg)U:IeK9tGB6R@Ezn:˜>’k BEGIN_GRANTEES END_GRANTEES DBID=1 RIS Schema Definition File L: Schema Definition Note that there is a list of protocols in the database entry. 563 . they can be recreated by reissuing the create schema statements. only the first protocol in the list will be used.

February 2003 564 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Once you have successfully entered your password. Make sure the directory path to the password file exists. will prompt you to re-enter the password for verification. SYS_PASSW_FILE=d:\users\EEpasswd where \users is the path and \EEpasswd is the password file name. double click on the EE Manager icon to display the Verify Password form. the EE Manager form displays: 565 . The password file will be created the first time you enter EE Manager using the file name you specified. For detailed information on setting environment variables. To run EE Manager. It is a process separate from the EE environment and should only be run by a system manager or by someone who has a working knowledge of the overall EE system. if you are entering the environment for the first time. the environment variable SYS_PASSW_FILE must be set to a complete path of a password file. M: EE Manager EE Manager will prompt you for a password and. Once SYS_PASSW_FILE is set. see Appendix N._ _______________ Appendix M: EE Manager Appendix M EE Manager EE Manager is an environment created specifically for system manager functions.

and update rows. delete rows. It uses DB Access to query and edit tables.February 2003 The password can be a maximum of 8 characters and is not case sensitive._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 566 . In this Appendix Edit Database edits any schema that exists in the RIS dictionary.

From this screen you can edit the current find criteria. You can place the screen cursor at any point along the slide bar and press <D> to move the slide bar button directly to a new row. this command finds all rows in the current table. The number on the button changes to reflect the row. A universe is located by selecting Process Query in the Database Edit environment. A group of rows that match the current "query" criteria is called a universe. press and hold the middle button on the mouse and drag the button. and functions which enable you to change. select and confirm the Edit database option from the System Manager menu. or edit the value displayed in the field. Select the arrows to move forward and backward through the rows in the universe. delete. Release the mouse button to display the row. which shows the current find criteria. Process Query — Searches the database to find all rows of the current table that meet the find criteria. These buttons include various Query functions. Field Descriptions Initialize Query — Initializes (clears) the current find criteria. which allow you to search the database. and insert a row or group of rows. If no find criteria exist. To go directly to a certain row. M: EE Manager Buttons at the bottom of the Database Edit form provide functions for manipulating the attached relational database. Edit Query — Displays the Edit Query screen. 567 . or load find criteria from a file in the attached library. place the screen cursor on the slide bar button. save the current find criteria as a file to the attached library. Current Row — Controls the display of rows in the current universe._ _______________ Appendix M: Database Edit Functions Database Edit Functions To enter the Database Edit environment.

Update Active — Lets you enter data without changing the displayed row in the database.February 2003 Review — Generates a formatted column-by-column listing of the current universe. As long as this command is active. You can also use the Update Active command to enter information for a new row when attaching new linkages in graphics. You can use the Update Active command to enter the column values you want for a row and then Insert Row to create a row with the displayed information. A box containing a list of the various relational operators displays. Change All — Changes the value for one or multiple columns for all rows in the current universe. Change Row — Activates the Change Row mode. You can generate a review for all rows with database linkages to graphic elements within a fenced area in a design file. you can use the Insert Row command to add the displayed data as a row to the database. with logical AND having precedence over logical OR. Multiple column searches are processed in order. Fields with these key-in modes are placed only when you customize a screen menu. The field under the AND/OR toggle lets you edit the active relational operator. 568 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . the Database Edit screen has only Change Row fields. When you are certain the data is correct. Relational Operators let you search for ranges of column values such as greater than and less than. You can either edit the displayed value or select the right side of the field (a small box with dashes). which overrides the key-in mode for Key Columns. OR finds any row that contains either the previous find criteria or any current column value you specify. Selecting Add Query puts the screen in Add Query mode. When you select Update Active. Insert Row — Inserts a new row based on the column values for the displayed row. You can select a relational operator from the list to make it the active relational operator. Add Query columns. you can enter data on the displayed row without changing the database. AND finds any rows that contain both the previous find criteria and any current column value you specify. and Update Active fields. You can toggle individual fields ON or OFF by selecting the field’s corresponding column name on the Database Edit screen. Insert Row will not create a new row if a column is a SERIAL column (INFORMIX) or if it has a UNIQUE INDEX and a displayed column value duplicates the value for an existing row. By default. Delete All — Deletes all rows in the current universe from the database upon user verification. Fields On/Off — Toggles all column fields ON or OFF. any key-in in the screen menu is added as find criteria and is NOT made as a change in the database. Add Query — Used with the AND/OR toggle and relational operators to establish find criteria. The following are the available relational operators: = != < > <= >= !! : equal to (default) : not equal to : less than : greater than : less than or equal to : greater than or equal to : substring search The AND/OR toggle lets you establish either a logical AND or OR operation.

Database Edit Functions M: EE Manager 569 ._ _______________ Appendix M: Delete Row — Deletes the displayed row from the database upon user verification.

February 2003 570 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

cfg is located.cfg file to the list. Reset — The Reset button writes the contents of the ee. N: EE Configure User Environment Variables — The list below this label contains the list of all the environment variables along with their path. Variable — The field next to this label displays the Environment Variable name when any row is selected in the list menu.cfg file. 571 . Value — The field next to this label displays the value of the Environment Variable when any row is selected in the list menu. Delete — The Delete button deletes the corresponding variable and its value from the list._ _______________ Appendix N: EE Configure Appendix N EE Configure EE Configure is a process created specifically for setting environment variables for EE Raceway on a Windows NT platform. This process is separate from EE Environment and allows changes to the value of a variable in the ee. Set — The Set button writes the corresponding variable and its value to the list. Descrip — The field next to this label displays the description associated with the selected Environment Variable. Double-click on the EE Config icon to display the Configure EE Environment form. Field Descriptions Enter the EE File Name — The field below this label contains the complete path and filename where the current configuration file ee.

This same field can be used to add a new variable. appears in the Descrip field. The corresponding value of the environment variable appears in the Value field. Edit the entry in the Value field. Click on the Set button to accept the new value. The description. Click on Cancel to disregard any changes. Double click on the EE Configure icon. The variable will no longer appear in the User Environment Variables list. 8. 6.February 2003 Browse — The Browse button lets you select the required ee. if any. Select the environment variable you want to change from the User Environment Variables list. 4. click on the Delete button.cfg file. To edit the values of other variables. click on OK to accept the changes and to overwrite the ee. When complete. 7. the Configure EE Environment form displays the list of user environment variables and their corresponding value. The User Environment Variables list now contains the new value for this variable. 5. To delete the variable. Steps 1. 3. The name of the environment variable appears in the Variable field. 572 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . continue the same process as above.cfg file. 2.

NQS) between two or more nodes establish a client/server relationship. A column data type that stores alphanumeric character data. and the keyboard. a node which accesses data or performs a function on the remote resource (usually a server). A group of columns defines a table in a database. the menus. active depth Glossary active process application software batch processing batch queue branch point cancel button N: EE Configure cell A permanent association of elements that can be stored and placed as a group. The active process has a highlighted window icon strip. All network operations (database. The process which is displayed in the Process ID field. In network operations. beginning with the root directory (/) that locates a file. Instructions from the user to perform a function on specified data. it controls the message fields. A queue. An attribute of a database table. and then manipulated as individual elements. unlike system software which runs other software. Software designed to meet specific needs. Select the confirm button to initiate a specified option. created through NQS. Select the cancel button to exit the form or option. The button located in the upper right corner of a form containing a red X or the word cancel. The plane in a 3-D design upon which you can place elements and perform manipulations. A branch point allows for placement of branch components. A method of processing data which collects a series of operations into a group (or ‘‘batch’’) and executes the group in a continuous stream without user intervention. A batch queue handles scheduling for processes submitted through the Batch options screen menu._ _______________ Glossary absolute path name The sequence of directories. NFS. A button that appears in the upper right corner of a form and contains a green check mark or the word confirm. A point on a pipeline which separates piping segments so that they can be assigned different segment parameters. See also path name and relative path name. character client column command confirm button 573 . or channel for moving requests.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . bus errors. coordinates core files cursor data button data entry field data point database database table default delete delimiter device 574 . and floppy disk. you can use a spherical coordinate system to help define points on a sphere.0. whereby points are located by traversing the X. coordinate systems have their origin defined as 0. interpreted. The image files written by System V for a number of reasons. Normally. The most common coordinate system is the rectangular coordinate system. disk drive. A geometric relation used to denote the location of points in the design cube. a component onto which a user cannot log. and activate windows and perform window manipulations. tape drive. for example. A nonaddressable component of a network. or erase. The part of the database that is made of rows and columns and contains information about the project and design elements. The pointer that the user moves on the screen to indicate an item or area. An ordered set of absolute or relative data values that specify a location in a coordinate system. Data points select commands from the panel menus and Menu Bar. For example.February 2003 coordinate coordinate system The location of a point along the X. Other coordinate systems are used to more easily express the coordinates of specific geometric entities. Y. A separating mark or space. and to select commands from forms and menus. and Z axes of the design cube. and user-generated quit signals. place elements. though this is not required. To remove. A collection of comprehensive informational files having predetermined structure and organization that can then be communicated. eliminate. a character or sequence of contiguous characters that mark the end of a string of characters. to accept previously selected elements. identify and accept elements. The predetermined value of a parameter that is automatically supplied by the system or program whenever a value is not specified by the user. A point placed by pressing the data button on the mouse. Also known as key-in field. the most common of which are memory violations. destroy. that is. and you can use a cylindrical coordinate system to help define points on a cylinder. The mouse button used to place data points and tentative points. or Z axis.0. or processed by a specific program. illegal instructions. The field on a screen used to accept user-supplied data. Y.

difference in longitude.) of interest about which information is stored. Because many of the screen menus in the application software are built with I/FORMS. See also relative path name. Interference envelopes are given different levels and display symbology to distinguish them from primitives._ _______________ directory display-list box A file that contains the names of other files. or a checklist. An object (project. Gadgets can display default values or act as data entry areas. Glossary A small box with horizontal dashes located at the end of a form key-in field. The set of acceptable values for a value within a component. such as a button. drawing. A path name that tells the system where to locate a file. domain dragging easting entity envelope file file specification filename form full path name N: EE Configure gadget A portion of a form. The first items of information in a file which precede any actual data. The name of the entire path or directory hierarchy to a file. Input can then be selected from the list with a data point instead of keying in the information. or positive. An interface or screen menu designed with the I/FORMS product. header hierarchy icon Informix Ingres interference envelope 575 . See interference envelope. that responds to information. a list of the data available for that field is displayed. a field. A term used in plane surveying that describes an east. a symbol that graphically identifies a command. A classified structure with superiors (roots) and subordinates (dependents) for grouping files or commands. An equipment modeling primitive or parametric component that is used in conjunction with or instead of model graphics for interference checking. you must have the FORMS_S product on your workstation. The header contains information on the structure and contents of the file. element. and so forth. including the file name. Another term for the dynamic function that attaches the cursor to an element so you can see it move. A relational database management system supported by RIS. A pictorial representation or image. A user-defined name given to an interactively created file. A relational database management system supported by RIS. The name should be relevant to the contents of the file. When selected. a relational database table.

An attribute (column) in a table which is chosen as the access vehicle to individual rows of the table. A point on an element. Also known as a data entry field. It is necessary for each node to identify and communicate with another node in the network. The area that appears in the MicroStation Command Window when you are working in a design file. Any addressable device (such as a workstation or a server) that is connected to a network. A graphic representation or schema. the system that provides access to data that is distributed among machines through an interconnection of host computers and workstations. that can be assigned to the node address of a device on a network. and the Key-in field. or it can mean the connected system. It is divided into the Command Status field. Network File System. A word recognized by the software that provides access to a certain function. The network enables the connected nodes to share data and system control. The term network can mean the devices that connect the system. The field on a screen used to accept user-supplied data. a view in which the horizontal lines of an element are drawn at an angle to the horizontal and all verticals are projected at an angle from the base. A term used to describe a north coordinate location in the plant coordinate system. The hard-wired Ethernet address assigned to each node when it is manufactured. NFS allows you to mount a remote resource to your local workstation so you can access the data as though it were local.February 2003 invert elevation isometric The lowest point on the internal diameter of the pipe. the Current Command field. or alias. to which you can snap. the Prompt field._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The strip at the top of the screen that contains icons for selecting commands. NFS is usually used to access centralized data on a server. including vertices. An interconnection of host computers and workstations that enables them to share data and control. Relating to or being a drafting system characterized by three equal axes at right angles. key key-in field keypoint keyword menubar message area model network NFS node node address node name northing 576 . A name.

but is level. having no elevations or depressions. and is three-dimensional. report formats and other information of a similar manner. NQS Glossary Oracle origin origin point orthogonal view parameter path A sequence of directories leading to a file or a sequence of menus leading to a command. RDB reference database relative path name rotate 577 . graphics symbology. to transform by revolution about a specific axis. Use of NQS involves setting up local resource queues on the system(s) where the resources reside and setting up ‘‘pipe queues’’ on the systems that are to have access to the resources. y. vendor’s catalog data. and z-axes intersect. job specifications. label descriptions. This point does NOT include a gasket allowance. Network Queuing System. A spatial element in geometry that may or may not have a boundary. the software package that allows you to define network-wide batch and device queues. path name PDS pipe queue N: EE Configure place data point plane To identify a specific element. Reference Database. A property whose value determines the characteristics or behavior of something. A relational database management system supported by RIS. commodity libraries. In coordinate geometry. but rather represents the face-of-flange coordinate. See also absolute path name and relative path name. A view which is a projection of the model onto a plane along lines which are orthogonal to the plane. A collection of reference data containing information relative to industry design codes. The sequence of directories leading from the current directory to a particular file._ _______________ nozzle A special equipment modeling primitive that contains the connection point to piping. the point where the x. Plant Design System A controlled channel for moving requests to batch or device queues on remote systems and for receiving status and/or data in response. To turn. to change the angular orientation. The sequence of directories leading to a file. or indicate a specific point in the design file. The point at which the coordinate system is placed. See also path name and absolute path name.

This means that unneeded files and data.February 2003 row A unit of related information in a table. style. and querying relational databases. modifying. and so forth. and z axes. either stored in sequential locations in memory or printed as an array of rows and columns of data items of the same type. Vectors can be manipulated geometrically and are represented as a coordinate triple (x. A collection of data for quick reference. A quantity possessing both magnitude and direction. including color. generally represented as a line. dash-dot. stay on the disk until they are called for. One collection of column values for a table. Language developed by IBM for creating. that are stored in an attribute. and weight. External memory for a computer that can be used as if it were an extension of the computer’s internal memory. To switch. y. Views are created with their own x. NFS. A view allows you to see a prescribed volume of the design cube. The display style of an element. The skin of a three-dimensional geometric element. either entered by the user or determined by the software. rubberbanding schema schema file server Structured Query Language SQL style surface symbology table toggle user name values variable vector view virtual memory 578 . The software uses virtual memory to store data. All network operations (database. NQS) between two or more nodes establish a client/server relationship. to change between two alternatives. the software can perform processing more quickly. the node which maintains common data or performs a common task needed by clients. Because the internal processing memory stores a minimal amount of data. A quantity that may assume any one of a set of values. The view axes maintain this relationship regardless of the rotation with respect to the design cube.y plane of the view is parallel to the screen. The x._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . while the z-axis can be thought of as coming straight out of the view towards you.y. The symbology of an element such as continuous dashes. A file that outlines the overall logical structure of a rule base or a database. A name that provides access to an account on the system. In network operations.z). See also active depth. The defined area of vision on a screen. The animation dynamic that enables you to specify the position of a data point while the element changes as you move the cursor. A description of the overall structure of the rulebase or database. solid. Data.

_ _______________ working directory The directory from which you are accessing files. Glossary N: EE Configure 579 .

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 580 .

234. 233 RCP 178 annot_form 529 application manager information 27. 109. 235 override keys 179. 550 bin/ 521. 290 activate design volume coordinate system 320 plant coordinate system 320 active angle 256 one-line type parameters access column 290 clear 291 display toggle 290 list column 290 override 291 save to memory 289 select 290 parameters 146 point coordinates display 121 define 145 active coordinate system 320 add query 568 systems 245 airway place 132 alias. 234 by group 233 clear button 180. 235 source column 179. 234 list column 179. 527 blank part ids 552 C cable code codelist 439 color codelist 441 configuration codelist 440 insulation type codelist 444 Index N: EE Configure 581 . 234 override button 180. 327. 110 workstation skills 26 batch 522 bill of materials 549 by volume 72. 235 display toggle 179. 539 alter schema form 556 table form 559 angle active 256 annotate element 178 access column 179._ _______________ Index A access column 179. 234 select button 180. 527 attributes default 430 setting raceway 256 automatic fit 151 propagation 298 size 151 B background 522 bar commands palette 98 basic concepts database 115 drawing 108 propagation 113 setup 27. 415. 234 model 285 one-line 178. 425 approval status codelist 432 archive form 46 option 86 archive project network protocol TCP/XNS 46 remote node name/address 46 asid id display 316 highlight 309 assign 522.cmd 529.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 271 cfg/ 527 change all 568 row 568 change system parameters 221 changing one-line type 294 parameters one-line type 289 propagation 297 raceway 256 symbology 264 system 295 cleanup database 340 clear annotate element 180.February 2003 cable (continued) size codelist 440 voltage codelist 443 cardinal point codelist 433 cell create commands 269 drop point 277. 276 model 271 library 269. 278. 279 equipment pointer 274. 235 one-line type parameters 291 clip 522 clone element 188 by group 239 codelists 432 approval status 432 cardinal point 433 drawing type 433 manual fitting 433 one-line type 434 RCP type 435 system 435 three-line qualifier 437 subtype 437 type 436 units 438 vendor 438 wire/cable code 439 color 441 configuration 440 insulation type 444 voltage 443 codelists (continued) wire/cable size 440 yes/no 445 coincident RCP checks 209 color parameters 256 combine coincident RCPs 209 command palettes 97 command. 527 construct point 123 construction class display 306 control number 165 set symbology 262 symbology 264 coordinate system design volume 320 plant 320 show active 320 coordinate system 320 coordinates display 121 copy clone element 188 by group 239 element 184 by group 231 menu 43 option 78 582 . 275.msg 529 commands construct point 123 extend/reduce run 125 midpoint on segment 123 Commands Integrated 368 compile eden symbol 349 compress eden symbol library 359 conduit place 132 place stub up 167 seamless tubing 114 sizing 155 attributes 268 config/ 522.

_ _______________ create cell 269 drop point 277. 332 batch file 335 palette 102 procedures 427 project 115 reference 115 relational 427 report 326 rule checks 329 setup 33 database (continued) utilities 50 RIS schema utilities 51 update project schema 52 update reference schema 55 db/ 523. 275. 278. 527 database 321. 522 cross section ductbank definition 164 rotate 140 rotation angle 256 scale factor 256 crosses 195 cutback mode 150 D data definition form 557 files 522. 276 model 271 menu 39 option 61 schema form 555 tables 558 drop mode 558 insert mode 558 modify mode 558 three-lines 194 create_db 428. 528 dba_rpt 522 dba_shell 522 DbEdit 567 defaults attributes 430 raceway 256 RCP key 257 text 266 define active point 145 duct cross section 164 group 226 one-line type 260 parameters 146 raceway defaults 256 system 258 delete all 568 duplicate one-lines 211 eden symbol 351 element 212 by group 251 fitting 216 menu 44 one-line vertex 217 option 79 RCP 214 design commands 129 conduit sizing 155 define duct cross section 164 file command menu bar 96 insert one-line vertex 160 insert RCP 138 option 63 palette 99 place drop point 142 equipment pointer 144 manual fitting 147 one-line 132 rotate cross section 140 route around vessel 135 set Index N: EE Configure 583 . 425 cleanup 340 edit 567 add query 568 change all 568 change row 568 current row box 567 delete all 568 edit query 567 initialize query 567 insert row 568 process query 567 review 568 toggle 568 update active 568 load 323. 279 equipment pointer 274.

278._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .dat 528 edit eden symbol file 366 manual fitting 198 model annotation 285 query 567 EE configure 571 databases 425 environment 35 forms archive 46 restore 48 manager 565 menus 36 copy 43 create 39 database utilities 50 delete 44 enter 40 product menu 42 nucleus file structure 520 raceway file structure 524 584 . 279 keys 431 place 142 schema form 556 table form 559 ductbank cross section definition 164 place 132 duplicate one-line checking 211 DVCS 320 E eden/ 528 eden example 514 list functions 355 mode 113 eden (continued) option 67 batch mode 69 operating modes 68 processes 347 compile symbol 349 compress symbol library 359 delete symbol 351 edit symbol file 366 extract symbol 361 extract user function 363 list symbol library 353 list user functions 355 merge symbol libraries 357 symbol compile 349 compress library 359 delete 351 edit file 366 extract 361 generation 513 list library 353 merge libraries 357 processor file 513 user function extract 363 eden.February 2003 design (continued) set (continued) active parameters 146 unload 336 design volume coordinate system 320 dgn/ 528 directory structure 520 display annotation 306 asid id 316 construction class 306 element information 301 element type 316 field 121 link 317 one-line type 318 screen 93 sector/word 315 system 318 toggle annotate element 179. 234 one-line type parameters 290 document organization 19 outline 25 purpose 19 downloading 29 drawing process 108 setup 110 type codelist table 433 drop point create cell 277.

276 keys 431 place 144 error. 84.cmd 543 seed English 528 metric 528 structure EE nucleus 520 EE raceway 524 fittings 195. 83.bar 529 eeconfig 522 eemgr 522 eeprj 522 eeqpr 522 EERWAY command menu bar 96 environment 59 create 61 design 63 eden 67 batch mode 69 operating modes 68 processes 64 batch mode 66 operating modes 65 reports 70 rule checks 73 utilities 75. 79. 87. 512 delete 216 edit/insert manual fitting 198 environment rules 446 place by rule 207 by group 243 place manual fitting 147 floppy/network toggle 86 Index N: EE Configure 585 . 86. 82. 89 palette 97 palettes 97 elbows 195 elements annotate 178 by group 233 clone 188 by group 239 copy 184 by group 231 delete 212 by group 251 display information 301 highlight by asid id 309 by link 312 by sector/word 307 identifying 103 modify commands 173 modifying 175 move 186 placing 129 propagate 194 by group 241 type display 316 engineering units 267 enter menu 40 environment EE 35 EE Raceway 59 variables 422 environment rules for fittings 446 environments graphics palettes 97 equipment pointer create 274. 275._ _______________ ee.msg 529 errors messages 377 propagation 314 extend/reduce run 125 extract eden symbol from library 361 eden user function from library 363 F field routed raceway 161 filename highlight asid id 309 highlight link 312 files data 522. 80. 527 eden symbol processor 513 password 565 purge 81 rway. 78. 81.

234. 119 keys 430 drop point 431 equipment pointer 431 one-line 430 override 115 RCP 431 L levels set active 299 library cell 269. 567 input precision 119 insert one-line vertex 160 RCP 138 row 568 installation 27 databases 33 downloading 29 Integrated Commands 368 palette 97 Using 369 interference detection 118.s 528 help_source/ 528 highlight element by asid id 309 by link 312 by sector/word 307 propagation errors 314 horizontal spacing 165 I identifying elements 103 IGDS toggle 83 increase size only 157 increase/decrease size 157 information about elements 301 initialize query 157. 361 eden user function 363 eden user functions 355 link display 317 highlight 312 list column 179. 332 batch file 335 lock model 282 M main form EE archive 46 restore 48 586 . 266 graphics environment palettes 97 group annotate 233 copy 231 define 226 delete 251 minimize joints 248 propagate 241 H help_graphics 528 help_rway._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 342.hp 528 help_rway.February 2003 force 555 forms/ 523 forms maximize/minimize 120 precision input customizing 417 function eden library 355 G graphic symbology 262. 271 eden symbol 353. 359. 264. 344 introduction 25 J joints minimize 219 by group 248 K key-ins precision 104. 290 eden symbol library 353 user functions 355 load 527 database 323. 357.

_ _______________ main menu EE 36 copy 43 create 39 database utilities 50 delete 44 enter 40 product menu 42 EERWAY create 61 design 63 eden 67 processes 64 report 70 rule checks 73 utilities 75 manual fitting edit/insert 198 part codelist table 433 place 147 material takeoff 548 maximize form 120 menu.sh 522 msg/ 523.cfg 527 menus 91 command menu bar 96 directory 528 EERWAY command menu bar 96 menu_shell 522 merge eden symbol libraries 357 merge_pnl/ 529 merge_pnl 529 messages display fields 93 error 377 MicroMenu umenu 543 midpoint on segment 123 minimize form 120 minimize joints 219 by group 248 model annotate 285 move annotation 283 commands 280 using 281 create model cell 271 lock 282 unlock 284 model commands palette 101 modify 173 add systems by group 245 annotate element 178 by group 233 clone element 188 by group 239 combine coincident RCPs 209 copy element 184 by group 231 define group 226 delete duplicate one-lines 211 element 212 by group 251 fitting 216 one-line vertex 217 RCP 214 edit/insert manual fitting 198 elements 175 group commands 223 define group 226 minimize joints 219 by group 248 move element 186 one-line segment 190 one-line vertex 192 one-line route 204 palette 99 place fitting by rule 207 by group 243 propagate element 194 by group 241 reference schema 451 remove RCP 214 replace systems by group 246 modify element palette 98 modify group palette 100 move element 186 model annotation 283 move/move to toggle 121 one-line segment 190 one-line vertex 192 mscrecol. 529 mslink display 317 highlight 312 Index N: EE Configure 587 .

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 234.February 2003 msseed. 289 part verification 297 password echo toggle 46.s 528 N network/floppy toggle 86 new users database preparation 427 nucleus file structure 520 O one-line annotate 233 changing sizes 178. 290 one-line type parameters 291 setting 263 P palettes bar commands 98 database 102 design 99 EERWAY 97 Integrated Commands 97 MicroStation commands 98 model commands 101 modify 99 modify element 98 modify group 100 runtime setup 101 setup commands 100 utilities 102 parameters active 111 active angle 256 color 256 one-line type 289 access column 290 clear 291 display toggle 290 list column 290 override 291 override keys 290 save to memory 289 select 290 propagation 297 raceway 256 set active 146. 48. 55 file 565 PCS 320 PDS reference model from 372 review attributes 371 review clash 375 window to named PDS item 374 percent fill 157 percentage of raceway changing 221 place drop point 142 equipment pointer 144 field routed raceway 161 fitting by rule 207 by group 243 manual fitting 147 588 . 52. 233 delete duplicates 211 vertex 217 insert vertex 160 keys 430 modify route 204 move segment 190 move vertex 192 place 132 route around vessel 135 type codelist table 434 define 260 display 318 parameters 289 access column 290 clear 291 display toggle 290 list column 290 override 291 override keys 290 save to memory 289 select 290 priority 434 set active 294 types 110 output option 89 override button annotate element 180.hp 528 mstr_rway. 179.dgn 528 mstr_rway. 235 keys 115.

567 process. 527 receive option 84 reduce run 125 reducers 195 reeprj 522 reference database 115 schema description 454 guide 25 schema 510 description 430 modifying 451 updating 449 Index N: EE Configure 589 .dat 528.def 521. 533 processes 331 cleanup database 340 eden 347 interference detection 342. 527 product.dat 522. 297 sketch 113. 536 priority 434 procedures 107 process query 157. 297 parameters 111 part verification 297 setup 297 style 297 purge option 81 Q query add 568 edit 567 initialize 567 process 567 R raceway defaults set 256 field routed 161 processes 331 RCPs 112 combine coincident RCPs 209 default key 257 delete 214 insert 138 keys 431 type codelist table 435 weight 257 README 521. 527 project database 115 schema description 487 drawing list 547 schema general description 448 update 449 prompt. 65 processor file 513 product menu 42 removal 521._ _______________ place (continued) one-line 112. 344 load database 332 batch file 335 option 64 batch mode 66 operating modes 65 unload design 336 sheet 338 processing toggle 53.msg 529 propagate 113 automatic propagation 298 element 194 by group 241 fittings 195 highlight errors 314 modes 297 eden 113. 132 RCP 138 stub up 167 placepoint 150 plant coordinate system 320 precision input 119 active point coordinates display 121 construct point 123 customizing 417 display fields 121 extend/reduce run 125 midpoint on segment 123 move/move to toggle 121 key-ins 104 prerequisite 26 print. 55.

327. 527 rename option 82 replace systems by group 246 report. 535 runs 112 runtime setup 287 display element information 301 palette 101 propagation setup 297 set active levels 299 one-line type 294 one-line type parameters 289 system 295 rway_bar 528 rwaybar.dat 528.sym 529 rway.tbl 529 S save to memory 289 scale factor cross section 256 schema 115 create 555 definition file 561 fields 561 description 454.dat 528. 534 reports 117. 487 drop 556 file 560 590 . 545 bill of materials 549 by volume 72.February 2003 reference PDS model 372 relational databases 427 interface system (RIS) 426 report processing 545 relational interface system (RIS) alter schema 556 alter table 559 data definition 557 drop schema 556 drop table 559 schema creation 555 schema file 560 set 560 table creation 558 table information 557 remove one-line vertex 217 RCP 214 script 521. 550 blank part ids 552 database 326 directory 529 material takeoff 548 option 70 project drawing list 547 templates 546 restore form 48 option 87 restore project from archive TCP/XNS toggle 48 XNS/TCP toggle 48 review PDS attributes 371 PDS clash 375 RIS 115.sym 529 rway_prj. 426 procedures 427 schema manager 553 alter schema form 556 alter table form 559 create schema form 555 create table form 558 data definition form 557 RIS (continued) schema manager (continued) drop schema form 556 drop table form 559 force 555 schema file form 560 schema information form 554 set form 560 table information form 557 schema utilities 51 rotate cross section 140 orientation 151 rotation angle cross section 256 rule checks database 329 option 73 templates 546 rule_chk.pnl 529 rwaypnl._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .tbl 529 rway_ref.cmds 528 rwayh_pnl 529 rway.cmd file 543 rway.

449 project 449 reference 449 utilities 51 screen display 93 seamless tubing 114 sector/word display 315 highlight 307 seed/ 528 seed. 109 unlock model 284 setup commands palette 100 sheet unload 338 show active coordinate system 320 size changing one-line size 178.dgn 528 select button annotate element 180. 235 one-line type parameters 290 send option 83 set 560 active levels 299 one-line type 294 one-line type parameters 289 parameters 146 point 145 system 295 conduit sizing attributes 268 defaults 256 symbology control 262 text defaults 266 setup commands 253 conduit sizing attributes 268 create cell 269 define one-line type 260 system 258 lock model 282 model 280 model annotation 285 move 283 propagation 297 set raceway defaults 256 symbology control 262 setup (continued) set (continued) text defaults 266 symbology control 264 system manager 27.msg 529 straights 195 structure EE Raceway 524 file 520 stub up 167 subsystems 295 sym/ 523._ _______________ schema (continued) information form 554 modifying reference 451 names 450 project 448 reference 430 update 428. 529 symbol eden compile 349 compress 359 delete 351 extract 361 list library 353 merge libraries 357 file edit eden 366 generation 513 example 514 processor file 513 symbology 110 changing 264 control 264 Index N: EE Configure 591 . 234 SPEC process 507 specification 507 specification tables 510 start-up sequence 92 status. 233 sizing conduit 155 sizing attributes 268 sketch mode 113 skills workstation 26 software downloading 29 source column 179.

449 upgrading workstation 28 user function eden extract 363 utilities 303 display element type and asid id 316 link 317 sector/word 315 system and one-line type 318 highlight by asid id 309 by link 312 by sector/word 307 propagation errors 314 option 75 archive 86 copy 78 delete 79 output 89 purge 81 receive 84 rename 82 restore 87 send 83 undelete 80 palette 102 reference PDS model 372 review PDS attributes 371 592 . 52. 65 tools reference PDS model 372 review PDS attributes 371 review PDS clash 375 window to named PDS item 374 tray place 132 tray_part table 511 tray_spec table 510 typefaces 21 U umenu 543 undelete 80 units codelist table 438 engineering 267 working 104 . 55.February 2003 symbology (continued) control (continued) set 262 system 110. 109. 55 processing 53. 48. 415._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 449 project 52.unl files 509 unload 527 design 336 sheet 338 unlock model 284 update active 568 schema 428. 425 replace systems group 246 set active 295 system percentage changing 221 T tables codelists 432 information form 557 TCP/XNS protocol archive project 46 TCP/XNS toggle restore project from archive 48 templates reports 546 rule checks 546 text defaults 266 set 266 text nodes 266 text strings 266 nodes 266 strings 266 three-line codelist table 436 create 194 qualifier codelist table 437 subtype codelist table 437 tmp/ 529 toggle construction display on/off 306 IGDS 83 network/floppy 86 password echo 46. 449 reference 55. 295 add 245 codelist table 435 define 258 display 318 manager information 27.

327._ _______________ utilities (continued) review PDS clash 375 schema 51 toggle construction display on/off 306 window to named PDS item 374 V vendor codelist table 438 specification 507 vertical spacing 165 vessel routing around 135 volume bill of materials 72. 550 W weight RCP 257 window to named PDS item 374 wire code codelist 439 color codelist 441 configuration codelist 440 insulation type codelist 444 size codelist 440 voltage codelist 443 wireway place 132 workflow 107 databases 115 drawing process 108 drawing setup 110 eden symbol generation 513 one-line types 110 parameters 111 place one-line 112 propagation 113 propagation parameters 111 reports 117 setup 109. 110 symbology 110 systems 110 working units 104 workstation skills 26 upgrading 28 wyes 195 X XNS/TCP toggle archive project 46 Index N: EE Configure 593 .

February 2003 594 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

00.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum February 2003 DPDS3-PB-200005C For PDS version 07. .02.** This document supplements DPDS3-PB-200005B.

............................................................. 628 Reference PDS Model (replaces 16........................... 629 EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description (replaces panel) ................................ 633 EE Nucleus File Structure ................ 613 Mirror Copy Element............................................................................................. 599 Utilities ....... 611 Mirror Element . 623 Mirror Copy Group.... 619 Rotate Copy Group ............................ 625 Move Group.......................2)...................................................................................................................................3) ................................................................................ 597 Modeling...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 598 Load Reference Schema ..................................... 602 Modify Element Commands (replaces 9................... 634 EE Raceway File Structure......................................................... 607 Rotate Element.....................................2) ......................................................................................................... 609 Rotate Copy Element..........................................................................................................................................................................................................4)............... 621 Mirror Group ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 627 Annotate Model........................ 631 EE File Structure (replaces Appendix F) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Table of Contents PDS Electrical Raceway Environment ................................................................................................... 637 596 ............................................ 617 Rotate Group................................................................................................. 615 Modify Group Commands (replaces 9.................................................................... 601 Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment (replaces 5......

597 . Load Reference Schema – Allows you to update the Raceway reference schema. EDEN symbols. reporting. the EE Raceway Environment form displays. Commands Modeling – Allows you to open a design file in the PDS Raceway modeling environment. and rule checks. Utilities – Allows you to access EE Raceway commands for EE Raceway processes.PDS Electrical Raceway Environment When you select the Electrical Raceway Environment command on the PD_Shell form.

Click Accept. 598 . 3. Click Accept.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Modeling This option allows you to select a design file to open in the modeling environment. 4. Steps 1. The Raceway Designer form displays. Select a design area from the list. 2. The selected model displays in MicroStation. Select a model from the list.

CMD File Network Address – Specifies the network address of the CMD file that defines which . SQL Filename – Specifies the file name of the SQL file containing the correct table and column structure.cmd files.sql file that has a different structure from the original . You can use this command to update an existing empty RIS schema with EE tables and default information.unl files to load into which tables.unl files that are listed in the .Load Reference Schema This option allows you to update the reference schema for the active project. 599 .sql file. keeping column data where column names match. The process replaces the old table definition with the new table definition.sql file. If a table lacks a unique index.sql file. Field Descriptions Reference Schema – Specifies the reference schema for the active project. or to modify the tables in an existing RIS schema to conform to the structure of a given .sql file. If you update the schema with a . — Modifies existing tables if the definition of that table has changed in the . the process loads it only if the table is empty. SQL File Path – Specifies the file path of the SQL file containing the correct table and column structure. the command makes the following changes: — Adds new tables listed in the . — Load those tables that have unique index numbers with data from the . SQL File Network Address – Specifies the network address of the SQL file containing the correct table and column structure.

600 .unl files to load into which tables. CMD Filename – Specifies the file name of the CMD file that defines which .unl files to load into which tables.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 CMD File Path – Specifies the file path of the CMD file that defines which .

Report – This command accesses the standard EE Raceway reports. Report. Refer to section 4 and Appendix J of the EE Raceway Reference Guide for more information on this command. EDEN. These processes allow you to manipulate drawings and the project database. Commands Process – This command accesses all available EE Raceway processes. Rule – This command accesses the standard EE Raceway Rule Checks.Utilities This option accesses the EE Raceway Process. These rule checks are reports that identify violations of certain design rules by working on the project database. Refer to section 5 and Appendix J for more information on this command. EDEN – This command allows you to design and maintain your own symbols for Raceway elements. 601 . Refer to sections 4 and 15 of the EE Raceway Reference Guide for more information on this command. These reports contain information on the project and reference databases. Refer to sections 4 and 14 of the EE Raceway Reference Guide for more information on this command. and Rule commands.

Palettes are groups of commands that are accessible from the EERWAY command menu bar on the MicroStation command window. You should become familiar with the name and functionality of each command on each palette. and Mirror Copy commands on the Modify Element and Modify Group palettes • Move Group command on the Modify Group palette See the following text for details. then selecting Integrated Commands > Palette from the resulting menu. Next to each icon is the name of the form or command it represents. • This section presents the palettes that are used in the EE Raceway graphics environment. Each command is described in full in later sections of this text. 602 .1 version of the document). This section presents the palettes in the order that they are accessible if you look at each menu going from left to right across the EERWAY command menu bar on the MicroStation command window. Integrated Commands This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. then selecting EERWAY from the resulting menu.4) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 103-108 in the PDS 7. EERWAY This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment (replaces 5. The following information has been modified: Rotate. Mirror. Rotate Copy.

603 . This palette contains the MicroStation commands as discussed in the MicroStation documentation. then selecting Palette. then selecting Bar Commands from the resulting menu. then selecting Modify Element Commands from Modify menu.Bar Commands This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. or it can be activated by selecting Modify Element from the Modify palette as shown later in this section. This palette can also be activated by selecting Modify from the MicroStation command window. Modify Element This palette is activated by selecting Modify Element from the EERWAY palette.

604 . then selecting Modify from the resulting menu. Modify This palette is activated by selecting Design from the MicroStation command window.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Design This palette is activated by selecting Design from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Palette from the resulting menu.

then selecting Palette. 605 . then selecting Modify Group Commands.Modify Group This palette is activated by selecting Modify Group from the Modify Palette. then selecting Palette. You can also activate this palette by selecting Modify from the MicroStation command window. Setup Commands This palette is activated by selecting Setup from the MicroStation command window.

then selecting Palette. 606 .EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Model Commands This palette is activated by selecting Model Commands from the Setup Commands palette. Runtime Setup This palette is activated by selecting Runtime from the MicroStation command window.

Annotate Element — Places. and delete specified elements. onelines. annotation. Move Element — Moves an element to a specified location in the design file.2) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 181-182 in the PDS 7. and to check for duplicate one-lines and coincident RCPs in the design file. The following information has been modified: Rotate. Copy Element — Copies an element as specified within the design file. within the design file. or by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. reviews. • The Modify Element palette is activated by selecting the Modify Element command from the Modify palette. 607 . copy. including RCPs. then selecting Modify Element Commands. The Modify Element commands manipulate individual elements. Clone Element — Copies an element multiple times in the same direction. and edits intelligent annotation for raceway elements. and Mirror Copy commands See the following text for details. Rotate Copy. Note: Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. You can use individual commands to move.Modify Element Commands (replaces 9. Mirror. three-lines. and three-lines. to review or edit element annotation. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. and so forth).1 version of the document). then selecting Palette. Modify Element commands also allow you to propagate one-lines in your raceway model. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements.

Mirror Copy Element — Copies an element and flips the copy about a specified point in the design file. Check Duplicate One-lines — Checks for duplicate or overlapping one-lines in the design file. Edit/Insert Manual Fitting — Modifies fittings that were manually placed in the model. Place Fitting by Rule — Places a non-standard fitting at an RCP using a set of rules defined in the reference database. Change System Parameters — Changes the system percentage and the project rule for a selected element. Remove RCP — Deletes a specified RCP (raceway connect point) from the design file. Modify One-Line — Modifies the route of an existing one-line element. Delete Fitting — Removes fittings from the design file. Rotate Copy Element — Copies an element and rotates the copy to a specified location in the design file. Rotate Element — Rotates an element to a specified location in the design file. Propagate Element — Expands one-line elements into three-dimensional elements. Delete Element — Removes a valid raceway element. Mirror Element — Flips an element about a specified point in the design file.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Move One-Line Segment — Moves a one-line segment while maintaining connectivity to existing elements. Move One-Line Vertex — Moves an internal one-line vertex. from the design file. and elements associated with it. Minimize Joints — Reduces the number of vertices in an identified one-line to a minimum. Remove One-Line Vertex — Deletes an internal vertex from an existing one-line. Check Coincident RCPs — Checks for coincident RCPs in the design file. 608 .

and equipment pointers will also be moved. you can locate elements. accept input. Plan View – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the plan view plane. three-line fittings.Rotate Element This command rotates individual raceway elements as specified within the design file. Using the form. You can use this command to move one-lines. click the button for the plane and type the angle in the Angle field. Angle – Key-in field used to specify the angle for each plane. To change the angle. RCPs. For detailed information about precision input. All associated annotation. all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position. three-line fittings. North Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the north elevation plane. All associated annotation. see Precision Input Form. The selected elements are rotated about the east-west axis passing through the rotation point. all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP. and annotation. route one-lines. and equipment pointers will also be moved. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. and exit a command. If an RCP is rotated. If a one-line is rotated. Field Descriptions Rotation Point – Displays the location of the rotation point. reject input. reset a command action. East Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the east elevation plane. The selected elements are rotated about the up-down axis passing through the rotation point. drop points. The selected elements are rotated about the north-south axis passing through the rotation point. 609 . equipment pointers. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form.

Specify the point around which to rotate the element. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. The system highlights the specified element. 610 . 2. 5. 4. The Specify Rotation form displays. Click Accept. Specify the planes and angles at which to rotate the element. Steps 1. Select the Rotate Element command.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 At any point during this operating sequence. The Rotate Element precision input form displays. the system displays the message Element not found. Identify the element you intend to rotate and accept it with <D>. If you do not locate an acceptable element. The element rotates to the specified position. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. 3. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form.

To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. reject input. and exit a command. 611 . You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. You can use this command to copy and rotate one-lines and their associated elements. route one-lines. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. North Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the north elevation plane. The selected elements are rotated about the up-down axis passing through the rotation point. see Precision Input Form. Plan View – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the plan view plane. East Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the east elevation plane. reset a command action. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. click the button for the plane and type the angle in the Angle field. The selected elements are rotated about the north-south axis passing through the rotation point. At any point during this operating sequence.Rotate Copy Element This command creates rotated copies of individual raceway elements as specified within the design file. To change the angle. Field Descriptions Rotation Point – Displays the location of the rotation point. Using the form. Angle – Key-in field used to specify the angle for each plane. The selected elements are rotated about the east-west axis passing through the rotation point. you can locate elements. For detailed information about precision input. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. accept input.

Specify the point around which to rotate the element.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Steps 1. The system highlights the specified element. The Rotate Copy Element precision input form displays. 3. Select the Rotate Copy Element command. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. If you do not locate an acceptable element. Specify the planes and angles at which to rotate the element. Click Accept. The element copy displays at the specified position. 2. 612 . Identify the element you intend to rotate and copy and accept it with <D>. the system displays the message Element not found. The Specify Rotation form displays. 4. 5.

Using the form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. and annotation. and equipment pointers will also be moved. Angle – Specifies the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. If a one-line is mirrored. you can locate elements. all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP. three-line fittings. Field Descriptions Mirror Point – Displays the location of the specified mirror point. The elements are rotated about the plane formed by the secondary and the normal. You can use this command to mirror one-lines. and equipment pointers will also be moved. toggle among the three axes (Primary. At any point during this operating sequence. To change the displayed angle. About – Specifies the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. route one-lines. reset a command action. three-line fittings. To change the displayed axis. accept input. All associated annotation. I Button – Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. For detailed information about precision input. equipment pointers. drop points. and exit a command. If an RCP is rotated. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. select the field and type a new angle. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form.Mirror Element This command flips individual raceway elements about a point as specified within the design file. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. reject input. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. All associated annotation. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. RCPs. Secondary. see Precision Input Form. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position. To reset a 613 .

4. Click Accept. If you do not locate an acceptable element. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. 3. 2. The Orient Mirror form displays. Select the Mirror Element command. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. Specify the mirror plane on which to mirror the element. Identify the element you intend to mirror and accept it with <D>. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. Specify the point about which to mirror the element. 5. The system highlights the specified element. The element rotates to the specified position. Steps 1. The Mirror Element precision input form displays.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. 614 . the system displays the message Element not found.

It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. Steps 1. Select the Mirror Copy Element command. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. 615 . About – Specifies the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. The elements are rotated about the plane formed by the secondary and the normal. I Button – Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. reject input. accept input. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. At any point during this operating sequence. and exit a command. Field Descriptions Mirror Point – Displays the location of the specified mirror point. toggle among the three axes (Primary. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. you can locate elements. select the field and type a new angle. The Mirror Copy Element precision input form displays. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. see Precision Input Form. You can use this command to copy and mirror one-lines and their associated elements. To change the displayed angle. To change the displayed axis. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form.Mirror Copy Element This command creates mirrored copies of individual raceway elements as specified within the design file. Using the form. For detailed information about precision input. Secondary. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. route one-lines. reset a command action. Angle – Specifies the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee.

5.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 2. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. 616 . 3. The element copy displays at the specified position. The Orient Mirror form displays. Specify the point around which to mirror the element. The system highlights the specified element. Specify the plane on which to mirror the element. If you do not locate an acceptable element. Click Accept. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. Identify the element you intend to mirror and copy and accept it with <D>. the system displays the message Element not found. 4.

Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. You can use individual Modify Group commands to move. Note: Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. You can also propagate onelines in a particular group using these commands. annotation. Groups are temporary associations of Raceway and other elements in your model. and delete elements of specified groups. and so forth). and to review or edit element annotation. Mirror Copy.Modify Group Commands (replaces 9. Mirror.3) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 229-230 in the PDS 7. then selecting Palette. or by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. The following information has been modified: Rotate.1 version of the document). Rotate Copy. copy. and Move Group commands See the following text for details. 617 . The Modify Group palette is activated by selecting the Modify Group command from the Modify palette. then selecting Modify Group Commands. • The Modify Group commands define and manipulate groups within a design file. three-lines. The Modify Group commands allow you first to define a group of elements and then to manipulate the group in part or as a whole.

Propagate Element by Group — Expands some or all one-line elements of a specified group into three-dimensional elements. Annotate Element by Group — Places. Clone Group — Copies a group multiple times in the same direction. Replace Systems Group — Changes the defined active system type of a one-line. Delete Element by Group — Removes from the design file some or all elements of a specified group. Mirror Copy Group – Copies and mirrors some or all elements from a specified group to a new location in the design file.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Topics Define Group — Identifies raceway elements for inclusion in a particular group. Rotate Group – Rotates some or all elements of a specified group to a new location in the design file. Add Systems Group — Defines multiple systems for a single one-line. reviews. Copy Element by Group — Copies within the design file some or all elements of a specified group. Mirror Group – Mirrors some or all elements from a specified group to a new location in the design file. Minimize Joints by Group — Reduces to a minimum the number of vertices of some or all one-lines in a specified group. and edits intelligent annotation for raceway elements within a specified group. 618 . Place Fitting by Rule Group — Places non-standard fittings using a set of rules defined in the reference database. Move Group – Moves some or all elements from a specified group to a new location in the design file. Rotate Copy Group – Copies and rotates some or all elements from a specified group to a new location in the design file.

For detailed information about precision input. All associated annotation. East Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the east elevation plane. Plan View – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the plan view plane. You can use this command to move one-lines. you can locate elements. all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position. If an RCP is rotated. RCPs. Using the form. equipment pointers.Rotate Group This command rotates a group of raceway elements as specified within the design file. all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP. To change the angle. reset a command action. and equipment pointers will also be moved. and annotation. The selected elements are rotated about the north-south axis passing through the rotation point. 619 . All associated annotation. accept input. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. drop points. click the button for the plane and type the angle in the Angle field. Angle – Key-in field used to specify the angle for each plane. The selected elements are rotated about the east-west axis passing through the rotation point. Field Descriptions Rotation Point – Displays the location of the rotation point. and equipment pointers will also be moved. three-line fittings. The selected elements are rotated about the up-down axis passing through the rotation point. North Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the north elevation plane. If a one-line is rotated. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. and exit a command. reject input. three-line fittings. route one-lines. see Precision Input Form.

Specify the point around which to rotate the group. 3. Steps 1. 4. For groups in Single Element mode. you can accept or reject constituent elements and set the rotation point and planes for each accepted element. The group rotates to the specified position. Specify the planes and angles at which to rotate the group. the system displays the message Group not found. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. The message disappears when you identify a valid group. Click Accept. Note: These steps are applicable for groups in Entire Group mode. If you do not locate an acceptable group. The Rotate Group precision input form displays. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Identify the group you intend to rotate and accept it with <D>.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 At any point during this operating sequence. The system highlights the specified group. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. 620 . The Specify Rotation form displays. 2. 5. Select the Rotate Group command.

Angle – Key-in field used to specify the angle for each plane. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form.Rotate Copy Group This command creates a rotated copy of a group of raceway elements as specified within the design file. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Select the Rotate Copy Group command. To change the angle. click the button for the plane and type the angle in the Angle field. route one-lines. accept input. Steps 1. 621 . Using the form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. reject input. The selected elements are rotated about the up-down axis passing through the rotation point. Plan View – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the plan view plane. The selected elements are rotated about the east-west axis passing through the rotation point. reset a command action. and exit a command. At any point during this operating sequence. you can locate elements. North Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the north elevation plane. Field Descriptions Rotation Point – Displays the location of the rotation point. The selected elements are rotated about the north-south axis passing through the rotation point. East Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the east elevation plane. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. see Precision Input Form. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. For detailed information about precision input.

Note: These steps are applicable for groups in Entire Group mode. The system highlights the specified group. If you do not locate an acceptable group. 622 . 4. The Specify Rotation form displays. Specify the planes and angles at which to rotate the group. Identify the group you intend to rotate and copy and accept it with <D>. The group copy displays at the specified position. 5. The message disappears when you identify a valid group. 3. Click Accept. Specify the point around which to rotate the group. the system displays the message Group not found. you can accept or reject constituent elements and set the rotation point and planes for each accepted element. For groups in Single Element mode.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 The Rotate Copy Group precision input form displays. 2.

the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. All associated annotation. three-line fittings. If one-lines are mirrored. Field Descriptions Mirror Point – Displays the location of the specified mirror point. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position. Angle – Specifies the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. At any point during this operating sequence. three-line fittings. you can locate elements. Secondary. toggle among the three axes (Primary. reject input. The elements are rotated about the plane formed by the secondary and the normal. All associated annotation. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. and equipment pointers will also be moved. I Button – Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix.Mirror Group This command flips a group of raceway elements about a point as specified within the design file. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. accept input. reset a command action. For detailed information about precision input. To change the displayed angle. About – Specifies the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. route one-lines. To change the displayed axis. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. To reset a 623 . and equipment pointers will also be moved. If an RCP is rotated. Using the form. select the field and type a new angle. see Precision Input Form. and exit a command.

Note: These steps are applicable for groups in Entire Group mode. you can accept or reject constituent elements and set the mirror point and mirror plane for each accepted element. 624 . the system displays the message Group not found. The Orient Mirror form displays. The Mirror Group precision input form displays. Identify the group you intend to mirror and accept it with <D>. 3. The group moves to the specified position. 4. 5. Select the Mirror Group command. 2.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. If you do not locate an acceptable group. The message disappears when you identify a valid group. Specify the point about which to mirror the group. Click Accept. For groups in Single Element mode. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Steps 1. The system highlights the specified group. Specify the mirror plane on which to mirror the group.

Steps 1. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. 625 . reject input. accept input. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. route one-lines. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. reset a command action. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. see Precision Input Form. About – Specifies the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. Select the Mirror Copy Group command. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Angle – Specifies the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. I Button – Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. The elements are rotated about the plane formed by the secondary and the normal.Mirror Copy Group This command creates a mirrored copy of a group of raceway elements as specified within the design file. toggle among the three axes (Primary. Using the form. and exit a command. At any point during this operating sequence. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. For detailed information about precision input. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. The Mirror Copy Group precision input form displays. To change the displayed angle. select the field and type a new angle. Secondary. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Field Descriptions Mirror Point – Displays the location of the specified mirror point. To change the displayed axis. you can locate elements.

4. Note: These steps are applicable for groups in Entire Group mode. The group copy displays at the specified position. Specify the plane on which to mirror the group. Specify the point around which to mirror the group. 626 . The message disappears when you identify a valid group. the system displays the message Group not found. 5. Identify the group you intend to mirror and copy and accept it with <D>. Click Accept. The system highlights the specified group. you can accept or reject constituent elements and set the mirror point and mirror plane for each accepted element. The Orient Mirror form displays. If you do not locate an acceptable group. 3.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 2. For groups in Single Element mode.

You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. 627 . see Precision Input Form. Identify the group you intend to move and accept it with <D>. The Move Group precision input form displays. the system displays the message Group not found. Specify an origin point from which to move the group. you can locate elements. The system highlights the specified group. 2. At any point during this operating sequence. and exit a command. Select the Move Group command. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. The group moves to the specified position. Steps 1. Using the form. route one-lines. 4. For detailed information about precision input. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. reject input. Specify a placement point to which to move the group.Move Group This command moves a group of raceway elements to a new location in the design file. If you do not locate an acceptable group. reset a command action. accept input. The message disappears when you identify a valid group. 3.

4. 628 . however. 2. you are prompted to place the annotation in the model. If the user does not specify a sheet number. Select Confirm to accept the new annotation. 3.dgn file name of the raceway model. The following information has been modified: Automatic sheet number See the following text for details. This command cannot prevent the duplication of sheet numbers within a project.1 version of the document). If you toggled Display to On. will prevent such duplication. Select the Annotate Model command. the sheet number is automatically set to match the . 285 in the PDS 7. —OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. The Load Database process. toggle the Display fields in the form to On.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Annotate Model Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (p. If you want to display the annotation in the model. Steps 1. The sheet number should be unique for each drawing. Select the Column value field for sheet on the form and key in a new sheet number. The Annotate Element form displays. • This command adds or changes the annotation for the model.

Area/Model – Specifies whether to attach all models in a design area or an individual model. Select the design area that contains the model you want to attach. click Attach. Propagated/Sparse – Specify whether you want to attach the sparse model or the corresponding propagated model. The following information has been modified: Display. Display Toggle – Specify whether to display the reference model in the active model views. Areas – Lists all design areas defined in the active project. Parameters Disciplines – Lists all disciplines. and Locate toggles See the following text for details. Snap. This option only displays if you are attaching a structural model. — Attach by Area – Attaches all model in the selected design area. • The Reference PDS Model command attaches and detaches models from the PDS project to the model as reference files. click Attach. Select the discipline that contains the model you want to attach. The model to attach can be from any discipline and design area in the project. — Attach by Model – Displays all models in the design area so you can select which model you want to attach. then. then.Reference PDS Model (replaces 16.1 version of the document).2) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 372-373 in the PDS 7. 629 . Snap Toggle –Allows you to snap to any segment in the reference file.

or Locate toggles for all the attached models in all disciplines. Detach – Detaches the selected reference model. Apply To All – Defines the settings for the Display. Apply To Discipline – Defines the settings for the Display. Snap. 630 . You must select a Discipline and a Design Area before you can select a reference model to attach. You must click Show Attachments and select the reference model you want to detach before clicking Detach. Show Attachments – Displays all reference models attached to the active model. or Locate toggles for the all attached models in the discipline of the selected model.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Locate Toggle – Allows you to data point to any component in the reference file. Exit – Exits the Reference Model command. Snap. Attach – Attaches a reference model.

panel This table contains information about all panels/equipment found in the drawing. The following information has been modified: PDS coordinates in Panel table • Note about ee72upg. Note: For project databases created with EE Raceway versions prior to 7. You should not modify those column names having a prefix of "ee_". pds_north.exe file See the following text for details. Note: An asterisk (*) indicates that you must not modify the column name. Before running the upgrade utility.1 version of the document). PROJECT_LOCATION.2.EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description (replaces panel) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 487 and 500 in the PDS 7. and pds_elev columns to the panel and msconfig tables of the existing project database. Column Name mslink panel panel_descrip ee_approv_status ee_approv_date ee_create_date ee_last_rev_dat ee_eqp_table ee_part_key Type integer Char( 20) Char( 20) integer Char( 26) Char( 26) Char( 26) Char( 32) Char( 28) Index uniq dups no no no no no no no Null no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes 631 .exe utility in the \eenuc\bin folder to add the new pds_east. it is necessary to use the ee72upg. and includes detailed information about the columns that comprise each table. and EE_SCHEMA. use EE Configure to verify that values are set for EERD_TBLS. • This section lists and describes the tables in the EE Raceway project database schema.

EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 pds_east pds_north pds_elev real real real no no no yes yes yes mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the panel table. ee_create_date: the column containing the panel/equipment creation date. pds_east: the column containing the PDS east coordinate of the panel (calculated by Load Database). pds_elev: the column containing the PDS elevation coordinate of the panel (calculated by Load Database). ee_approv_date: the column containing the date when the approval status changed. 632 . ee_eqp_table: the column containing the name of the reference database table that contains additional equipment information. ee_approv_status: the column containing the approval status of the panel/equipment. ee_part_key: the column containing the unique key to the appropriate record of equipment information in the reference database table. ee_last_rev_dat: the column containing the date the panel/equipment was last revised. pds_north: the column containing the PDS north coordinate of the panel (calculated by Load Database). panel: the column containing the panel/equipment name panel_descrip: the column containing the panel/equipment description.

It identifies those files you can modify. the PDS Component Loader delivers these files to /win32app/ingr/.EE File Structure (replaces Appendix F) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 529-540 in the PDS 7. It also describes the contents of directories and some files. The directory tree for EENUC and EERWAY is shown below.1 version of the document). 633 . • This section describes the file structure for EE Nucleus and EE Raceway. The following information has been modified: Windows folder listings replace CLIX directory structure See the following text for details. By default.

EE Nucleus will reside under the win32app\ingr\eenuc directory..\eenuc directory: \eenuc \eenuc\bin \eenuc\data \eenuc\db \eenuc\doc \eenuc\font \eenuc\forms 634 .EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 EE Nucleus File Structure EE Nucleus (EE Nuc) is the core product for the EE product line. The product may reside on any file system. The following files exist under the . The list may differ slightly depending on which options are selected during installation.

bin – contains the EE executable files and the environment process. comments. — EEnotice.exe – command used to remove EE Nucleus from the machine. etc.txt – File containing release notices. — dba_rpt – DBAccess report process. 635 . — license. — . — remove.\eenuc\help \eenuc\msg \eenuc\share \eenuc\sym The following list gives a brief description of some of the files. — dba_shell. — create_db – create database process. — batch – process that reports the exit status of a process run in batch mode.txt– copyright notice file.txt – file containing description of product features and any fixes. INFORMIX. and then invokes the EE environment. The files are grouped by directory. — background – process that reports the exit status of a process run in the background. problems. eenuc — readme. The EE executable files set up variables specifying the location of MicroStation.cmd – command executed around dba_rpt. and EE Raceway.EErc – File containing global symbol definitions. EE Nucleus.

Required DBAccess files are also delivered in this directory. share sym – contains EE symbol files. data – Contains the ASCII files used to control certain environment procedures.dat – ASCII file for manager function management. forms – directory that contains all the environment forms. doc – directory that contains documentation.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 — ee72upg. — mscrecol. — reeprj – remote environment process.cmd – command executed around eemgr to run the Edit Database process. 636 .cmd – command to create mscolumns table for reference database.exe – executable command that updates the EE Raceway Project Database. — menu_shel.bat – batch file to print 132 column reports to the laser printer. — eeconfig – file that maintains EE product configuration for workstation/server.exe – Electrical Engineer manager environment executable. — Eemgr. — eeqpr. — dba* files – DB Access files. db – directory that contains the DB Access menu library (mgrdba_lib). — manager. — print. help msg – contains EE Nucleus message files.dat – ASCII file for output file management.exe – environment process. — eeprj.

\eerway \eerway\bin \eerway\data \eerway\db \eerway\dgn 637 .EE Raceway File Structure This section lists and describes the directories and files delivered with EE Raceway.

txt – file containing a description of the product features and any fixes. 638 . problems. comments. The files are grouped by directory.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 \eerway\doc \eerway\eden \eerway\mdlapps \eerway\msg \eerway\report \eerway\sym \eerway\tmp Delivered empty The following list gives a brief description of some of the files. eerway — readme. etc.

— unload_cln – contains the unload sheet.unl files for bulk loading reference database tables are also provided. dgn – Contains the seed file directory. available cell libraries. — process. db – Contains the delivered sql files for the project and reference database.dat – controls process management. — rmon – Controlling processor for interactive manipulations. 639 .dat – controls standard report management. and clean database processes. — eden.dat – controls rule check report management. and any design files delivered with the product. bin – contains all process delivered with the EE Raceway product. — load – processor to load the project database.exe – executable file used to remove EE Raceway from the machine. These files can be modified. — report.dat – controls Eden processes.dgn – displays the structure of the EE Schema.— remove. Also contains . data – Contains the ASCII files used to control process and report management for the EE Raceway product. — idet – Interference Detection Envelope File Creation process. — rule_chk. unload drawing.unl files required for bulk loading special tables and the mscatalog table in the project database. Sample . — rway_schma.

640 .dgn – explains the structure of the Raceway views.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 — rway_view.

These messages can be edited but messages cannot be added.msg – message file containing all error messages for the error field.msg – message file containing all messages for the command field. — command. This may be customized. These messages can be edited but messages cannot be added.— seed – contains the available seed design files.dgn – delivered metric drawing seed file. — msseed. — prompt.msg – message file containing all messages for the prompt field. — error. mdlapps msg – Contains EE Raceway message files and the file to correlate key-ins to EE Raceway commands. — seed. This file can be extended. eden – contains the Eden symbol library.dgn – delivered English drawing seed file. — alias. — eden.cmd – file used to correlate key-ins to commands. This may be customized. doc – contains documentation information on EE Raceway including README files from previous releases.lib – the Eden symbol library file. These messages can be edited but messages cannot be added. 641 .

This directory also contains the available precision input forms.sym – symbol file for the panel menu. These messages can be edited but messages cannot be added. report – Contains the source (. 642 .msg – message file containing messages for status field.sym – symbol file for the bar menu. — status.arc file for each report listed below. The software requires this directory. prompting messages. — rwaybar. sym – Contains all symbol files for EE Raceway menus. There is an . tmp – Holds any temporary files. — rwaydba_lib – DB Access template library.tbl – file containing the entity numbers for the project database tables. The source files may be edited by the user.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 — rway_prj. — rwaypnl. — rway_ref.ace)and compiled (. and logo.arc) SQL files for all delivered sch reports.tbl – file containing the entity numbers for the reference database tables.ace and an .

630 Reference PDS Model command. 610. 630 Load Reference Schema command. 610 Rotate Group command. 629 Annotate Model command. 616 modify. 614 mirror copy. 606 PDS reference model. 620 schema load reference. 601 643 . 616 Mirror Copy Group command. 624 mirror copy. 612 file structure EE. 604. 628 rotate. 605 modify element. 638 group mirror. 618 Move Group command. 599 utilities. 630 reference schema load. 620 rotate copy. 599 Mirror Copy Element command. 607 setup.Index annotate model. 622 Rotate Element command. 634 Nucleus file structure. 608 Modify Group commands. 635 EE Raceway. 604 design. 618 runtime setup. 608 rotate copy. 607 modify. 629 EE file structure. 634 EE Nucleus. 628 palettes bar commands. 624 model annotate. 635 Raceway file structure. 629 Modify Element commands. 605 EE Raceway. 622 intergrated commands Reference PDS Model. 602 model commands. 614 Mirror Group command. 638 element mirror. 626 modify. 612 Rotate Copy Group command. 608 modify group. 602 Intergrated Commands. 606. 626 Mirror Element command. 602 EERway. 618 move. 599 Rotate Copy Element command.

00.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum October 2004 DPDS3-PB-200005D For PDS version 07. .03.** This document supplements DPDS3-PB-200005C.

...........650 Appendix A Error Messages.Table of Contents Integrated Commands (replaces 16) ..........................648 Area Volume Graphics....................................................................................................................652 645 ........................................................................................................646 Using the Integrated Commands ...............647 Reference PDS Model (replaces 16...................................................................2)....................................................................

and view the area volume graphics for clash and design areas. providing greater interoperability among the various disciplines. then selecting Palette from the resulting pull-down menu. display information about the reference models attached to the current model. The Integrated Commands palette is activated by selecting Integrated Commands from the EE Raceway File Menu Bar. These commands allow you to review an element’s attributes. review the PDS clashes in a model. not when running standalone EE Raceway.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Integrated Commands (replaces 16) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 369-370 in the PDS 7. Note: The Integrated Commands are only available when running EE Raceway inside PDS.1 version of the document). 646 . create a window containing a specific element. The following information has been modified: Area Volume Graphics command See the following text for details. • The Integrated Commands are common to EE Raceway and several other PDS modules.

and must have an existing clash in the design area. Before Using These Commands Review PDS Attributes – You must have an existing component in the active model or in an attached PDS reference file. Operating Information See individual command descriptions for specific operating information. Review PDS Clash – You must first have run IFC Clash Detection. you can use these commands throughout the design session. 647 . Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for using the commands in this group. Window to Named PDS Item – You must have existing items in the active model or in an attached PDS reference file.Using the Integrated Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. See the command description for more details. Area Volume Graphics – You must turn Construction Graphics on in MicroStation. Reference PDS Model – There are no prerequisite conditions for using this command.

then. See the following text for details. click Attach.2 version of the document). Area/Model – Specifies whether to attach all models in a design area or an individual model. The default value for this toggle is Propagated. The following information has been modified: Added default value for Sparse/Propagated toggle.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Reference PDS Model (replaces 16. 648 . Locate Toggle – Allows you to data point to any component in the reference file. then. This option only displays if you are attaching a structural model. Areas – Lists all design areas defined in the active project. • The Reference PDS Model command attaches and detaches models from the PDS project to the model as reference files. click Attach. The model to attach can be from any discipline and design area in the project. Snap Toggle –Allows you to snap to any segment in the reference file. — Attach by Model – Displays all models in the design area so you can select which model you want to attach. Propagated/Sparse – Specify whether you want to attach the sparse model or the corresponding propagated model. Parameters Disciplines – Lists all disciplines. Select the design area that contains the model you want to attach. Select the discipline that contains the model you want to attach.2) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 629-630 in the PDS 7. Display Toggle – Specify whether to display the reference model in the active model views. — Attach by Area – Attaches all model in the selected design area.

Snap. You must select a Discipline and a Design Area before you can select a reference model to attach. Detach – Detaches the selected reference model. Attach – Attaches a reference model. Exit – Exits the Reference Model command. You must click Show Attachments and select the reference model you want to detach before clicking Detach.Apply To Discipline – Defines the settings for the Display. or Locate toggles for all the attached models in all disciplines. 649 . or Locate toggles for the all attached models in the discipline of the selected model. Apply To All – Defines the settings for the Display. Snap. Show Attachments – Displays all reference models attached to the active model.

Use this command if the boundaries of the area are changed. For the Drawing Graphics environment. you can control the symbology of the volume graphics using the PDS Drawing Annotation Category Data option in the Project Data Manager in Project Administrator. Hilite Graphics . Please refer to the Project Administrator Reference Guide for information on changing the volume graphic symbology. Before you can see the volumes in the Equipment. the following system environment variables must be defined to control the symbology and level of the volumes in the Piping. In addition. you must turn on the Constructions view attribute. Equipment. Raceway. and FrameWorks Plus environments.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Area Volume Graphics The Area Volume Graphics command displays the interference checking and design areas in the model so that you can see their location. To add graphics. You can activate the View Attributes dialog box by pressing CTRL+B. Raceway. 650 .Removes the selected area from the model.Updates areas that are already displayed in the model. Commands Place Diagonal Lines .Displays diagonal lines within the volume marker for easier identification in the model. Add/Revise Graphics – Adds design area volume graphics to the model. click Add/Revise Graphics. PE_HVAC.Highlights the area in the model. and FrameWorks Plus environments: AREA_VOLUME_GRAPHICS_COLOR AREA_VOLUME_GRAPHICS_WEIGHT AREA_VOLUME_GRAPHICS_STYLE AREA_VOLUME_GRAPHICS_LEVEL Please refer to the Project Setup Technical Reference for more information on setting environment variables. PE_HVAC. Remove Graphics . double-click the desired discipline. Update Graphics . and double-click the desired area name.

Exit . 651 .Show – Displays all the design areas attached to the model.Closes the dialog box and exits the command. Can be used to exit any of the other commands on this dialog box at any stage.

The following information has been modified: Changed color range from 0-127 to 0-255 in Color error message. Active Raceway type not found Reason: There is no active one-line type defined in the design file.1 version of the document). Asid <numeric value>. 652 . Recovery: Key in an acceptable command name. <string> connected to invalid system! Reason: The element belongs to a system that failed to load. Ambiguous Command Reason: The command name you keyed in is not unique. The likely reason for the error and the recovery are listed with the error message wherever this is possible. Asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system loads without errors. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system loads without errors. • This appendix has an alphabetical listing of error messages you may receive when you are running EE Raceway Modeling. fitting connected to invalid oneline! Reason: The fitting is connected to a one-line that failed to load. See the following text for details. Asid <numeric value>. fitting connected to invalid system! Reason: The fitting is attached to a one-line or RCP belonging to a system that failed to load. Recovery: Make corrections so that the one-line loads without errors.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Appendix A Error Messages Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 377-414 in the PDS 7. Recovery: Use the Set Active One-Line Type to set an active one-line type.

Recovery: Review the fitting in the design. <string> has invalid codelist value! Reason: Element annotation does not match with entries in a codelist table. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system will load without errors. Recovery: Make corrections to the RCP so that it loads without errors. then the given specification does not have that part defined in its part table. straight connected to invalid oneline! Reason: The straight is attached to a one-line that failed to load. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system will load without errors. raceway connect point has invalid codelist value! Reason: Element annotation does not match with entries in a codelist table. Asid <numeric value>. straight connected to invalid system! Reason: The straight is attached to a one-line belonging to a system that failed to load. Asid <numeric value>. raceway connect point connected to invalid system! Reason: The RCP belongs to a system that failed to load. Asid <numeric value>. Asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Change element annotation. Recovery: Change element annotation. Asid <numeric value>. part could not be found for fitting! Reason: A part matching the description of the fitting could not be found in the part table. Asid:<numeric value> <string> 653 . Recovery: Make corrections so that the one-line will load without errors. Asid <numeric value>. If the fitting is a specification-driven part. <string> not on valid raceway connect point! Reason: The element is attached to an RCP that failed to load.Asid <numeric value>.

". Cannot Override <string> Reason: The field or key cannot be overridden. Reason: There is a corrupt one-line segment or the one-line type user element has been removed. call Intergraph support. Invalid olt on oneline. Recovery: None. "$". Cannot attach to database Reason: The database does not exist or you do not have privilege. Invalid sys on oneline. If the problem persists. Recovery: Be sure the database exists and that you have privilege. when highlighting by sector and word. Reason: There is a corrupt one-line segment or the system user element has been removed. Recovery: The program will restore the original text. Recovery: Verify that a valid one-line type is active. Recovery: Contact Intergraph support. Cannot access filelist <string>! Reason: The file containing the filelist is not available. 654 . Cannot Place Cross Section. Cannot convert to RAD50: <<string>> Reason: A key-in contains characters that cannot be converted to RAD50.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Reason: Display the element’s asid number along with a message. Recovery: Key-in in only characters. Bad user data in design file: cannot continue! Reason: Element has been corrupted. Cannot Place Cross Section. Recovery: Contact Intergraph support. Bad user data on raceway element Reason: Element has been corrupted. or ". digits. and replace the one-line. Recovery: Give the correct filename or access to the file.

Could not find a cross section on one line Reason: Cross section was removed using the Delete command. Cell exists in library: <string> Reason: During cell creation. Column does not exist Reason: The given column number is greater than the number of columns in the table. Could not find alias file Reason: The alias file containing the command names and acceptable key.Recovery: Verify that a valid system is active. Recovery: Use the Delete command to remove the associated one-lines and then replace them. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range 0 to 255.ins is not in the proper location. and replace the one-line. Could Not Read PDS Data Element Reason: The PDS user element is not found in the design file. Recovery: Contact Intergraph support. Recovery: Have the system manager place the file where it belongs. Either the element was removed externally or this design file is not a Raceway or PDS design file. Recovery: Key in another column number for the given table. call Intergraph support. Cell <string> not found in library Reason: The cell name you keyed in does not exist in the cell library. Corrupt or no informational link on raceway element Reason: Element has been corrupted. Recovery: Either key in another name or delete the cell from the cell library so it may be recreated. 655 . Recovery: None. Color not in range 0 to 255 Reason: The input is not within the valid range for a color. Recovery: Key in another cell name. the name input already exists in the attached cell library. If the problem persists.

Reason: Environment variable EE_CURPRJ needs to be exported in order to run this process from the command line. Could not open file <string> Reason: No permission to open file or the file does not exist. Could not read one-line user element Reason: Rmon could not read the one-line user element. Could not open design file Reason: No permission to open file or the file does not exist. Recovery: Export EE_CURPRJ = <current or project directory> Could not get defaults from reference db Reason: Entries for element not found in reference database. Recovery: Replace the corrupted element or call Intergraph support.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Could not find EE_CURPRJ. Recovery: Check the file permissions and the existence of the file. Reason: Corrupt user data on one-line or RCP. Recovery: Check the file permissions and the existence of the file. Could not open <string> Reason: No permission to open file or the file does not exist. 656 . Please export this variable. Could not get one line type part table from user data. Could not get one line type from user data. based on cause of error. Could not open logfile <string> Reason: A number of factors may result in this error. Recovery: Replace the corrupted element or call Intergraph support. Recovery: Add entries to appropriate tables. Recovery: There are various recoveries. Reason: Corrupt user data on one-line or RCP. Recovery: Check the file permissions and the existence of the file.

Could not retrieve specifications for key <string> Reason: You key in a value for the key to the secondary table. status = <numeric value> Reason: The process tried to write a TCB variable to the design file. Recovery: Make sure you have write access to the design file. Recovery: None. Recovery: None. Could not retrieve codelist values Reason: The value placed in the codelist column does not appear in the codelist table. Could not read the PDS 2 user element Reason: The Raceway design file was not created using a PDS or EE Raceway seed file. Could not read the PDS 1 user element Reason: The Raceway design file was not created using a PDS or EE Raceway seed file. Recovery: Key in a new key value. Defaults do not exist for <string> key = <string> 657 . Recovery: Change the value to one that appears in the codelist table. Recovery: Check to see that the design file has a type 63 element and at least 7 blocks in it. Cutback Error at oneline <numeric value> Reason: Problems occurred in calculating the cutback from the fitting at the end of a oneline. Could not write to TCB. Could not read system user element Reason: Rmon could not read the system user element.Recovery: Check to see that the design file has a type 63 element and at least 7 blocks in it. Could not read the Raceway user element Reason: Rmon could not read the Raceway user element. Recovery: Check to see that the design file has a type 63 element and at least 7 blocks in it.

insert it into the reference database. or replace the one-line so that it has enough room to create the fitting. Recovery: Key in a filename with fewer than 128 characters. A: Error Messages Design file name <string> too long Reason: The filename you specified exceeds 128 characters. 658 . Recovery: Enter correct directory name. Drop point cell ‘‘<string>’’ not found in library Reason: The drop point cell does not exist in the library. Design file <string> does not exist! Reason: The referenced design file was cannot be found. Recovery: Enter design filename. Recovery: Enter correct filename. Recovery: Make sure the key is correct. Reason: There was inadequate room to place fitting. Elbow Error: acute angle at oneline index <numeric value>. Reason: Acute bends are not supported in this release. The database is case-dependent. Directory <string> not found Reason: A referenced directory cannot be found. change the spec. Recovery: Create a drop point cell and/or enter the correct drop point cell name in the EE Raceway defaults form. If the key does not exist.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Reason: An entry in the database does not exist for the specified key. Design filename required! Reason: No filename entered. Recovery: Modify the radius or extension of the fitting. Elbow Error with cutback <numeric value> at index <numeric value>. so it will go past the previous fitting or end of linestring.

Recovery: Rotate the cross section or place one-line again. Element has no parent Reason: The element with the given asid has no parent element. Recovery: Try to rotate cross sections or place one-line again. Reason: The cross sections were not placed with the same vertical orientation. Elbow Error: contradictory vertical directions at index <numeric value>. 659 . Elbow Error: contradictory widths at index <numeric value>. Recovery: Enter a new value. Recovery: Enter a new asid number. Elbow Error: contradictory heights at index <numeric value>. Error building user data Reason: Could not build user data. Elbow Error: contradictory horizontal directions at index <numeric value>. Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. Recovery: Try to rotate cross sections or place one-line again. Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. Reason: Cross section cannot be propagated around bend without being skewed.Recovery: None. Elbow Error: skewed angle at oneline index <numeric value>. Reason: Height of the cross sections must be equal. Element not found Reason: There does not exist an element with the given sector/word or asid. Reason: The cross sections were not placed with the same horizontal orientation. Reason: Widths of the cross sections must be equal.

err file and the rway/tmp directory have read/write privileges. Error getting column names from reference for table <string>! Reason: No privilege. Error getting annotation information for element! Reason: Element in design file is corrupt. Recovery: Place or annotate title block.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Recovery: Exit the command and retry. Error getting information from <string> table! Reason: Table not found in schema. Recovery: Change access to design file. Recovery: Change access to design file. Recovery: Make sure the pro. Error getting values from reference for table <string>! 660 . Error getting mslinks for tables! Reason: Tables missing in project database.err did not close properly. Propagation status may not be recorded. Error closing propagation log file. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Error getting sheet name from design file! Reason: Title block not found or not annotated. Recovery: Add appropriate tables to project database. Error could not write user element! Reason: No write access to design file. Error could not write to design file! Reason: No write access to design file. Recovery: Add table to schema or change schema. Reason: File pro. Recovery: Delete and replace element in design file.

Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Error loading drop point! Reason: No privilege for this operation. Error loading fittings! Reason: No privilege for operation. Recovery: Add mscodelist table to reference table. Reason: Could not open Eden symbol library.Reason: Values for table not found in reference database. Error loading drawing! Reason: No privilege for operation. Error initializing eden library ‘‘<string>’’. Error initializing unique table! Reason: ee_unique table missing from the reference database. Error in graphic bang placement. Error invalid column name in unique table! Reason: Incorrect entry in ee_unique table. Error loading one-lines! 661 . Reason: Internal error. Recovery: Add entries to reference database. Recovery: Add privilege to the database. Recovery: Correct entry. Error initializing validity table! Reason: Mscodelist table not found. Recovery: Add the ee_unique table to the reference database. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Recovery: Make sure that RWAY_EDEN_LIB and EDEN_LIB are set up properly in your .EErc file.

Recovery: Modify the Eden symbol. 662 .EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Reason: No privilege for operation. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Error loading raceway connect points! Reason: No privilege for operation. Recovery: Change annotation of element. Recovery: Add privilege to the database. Recovery: Add privilege to database. one datum point. Error marking elements for deletion! Reason: ee_to_drw column missing a table. Error loading straights! Reason: No privilege for operation. Reason: The Eden symbol definition must contain at least one placepoint. Recovery: Add columns and try again. Error opening database! Reason: Schema not found. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Error merging annotation from design file! Reason: Element annotation columns do not match columns in project database. Recovery: Add schema or enter correct schema name. Error loading systems! Reason: No privilege for operation. Error loading to equipment! Reason: No privilege for this operation. and one element. Error No Placepoints or No Elements.

Error opening project database! Reason: Schema not found. Error opening reference database! Reason: Schema not found. Error querying ref db for mscodelist Reason: The mscodelist table does not exist or there is no connect permission. Recovery: Delete the one-line containing the RCP and place it again. 663 . Recovery: Add schema to database or change EES_REFDB. Recovery: Add schema to database or change schema name. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Error parsing cross section Reason: An error occurred while parsing a cross section. ustn returned status of <numeric value>! Reason: Microstation could not open specified design file. Recovery: Run the Create Database process with the rwayref. Recovery: Delete the one-line and place it again. Error parsing RCP Reason: An error occurred while parsing a raceway connect point (RCP). Recovery: Refer to Microstation documentation for recovery.Error opening design file <string>. Recovery: Delete the one-line containing the RCP and place it again. Recovery: Run the Create Database process with the rwayref. Error reading TCB of design file! Reason: TCB corrupted. Error querying ref db for mscatalog Reason: The mscatalog table does not exist or there is no connect permission. Error parsing one-line Reason: An error occurred while parsing a one-line.sql file.sql file.

Error reading file list <string>! Reason: No access to read file list. Recovery: Add privilege. Error unloading connect points! Reason: No privilege to delete from database.Design file may be corrupted Reason: Could not save the symbology to the design file. Recovery: Correct entry in mscatalog. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Error unloading Sheet! Reason: Sheet not found. The sheet name must be unique within the database. Error saving symbology . Error reading user element of design file! Reason: User element missing or corrupt in design file. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Recovery: Change file list name or protection on file list. Recovery: Add privileges to database. Recovery: Edit the sheet name. Error spawning server Reason: Could not open reference schema.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Error reading database column names! Reason: No access to column names. Error reading database table names! Reason: Table name in mscatalog table invalid. Recovery: Return to the environment and make sure you are using the correct reference schema. Error sheet name cannot be duplicated! Reason: A drawing with the given sheet name already exists in the database. 664 . Recovery: Enter correct sheet name.

Recovery: Key in a value. Recovery: Read previous error messages to determine cause. so it will go past the previous fitting or linestring. Field may not contain an empty value Reason: Field cannot be left blank. Error starting or stopping graphic bang. The process creates a zero-length envelope. Fatal error! Vector length was negative. Errors occurred during interference detection process! Reason: Fatal error occurred during process. Recovery: None. Errors existed during unload Reason: Errors in other procedures. Recovery: Add privilege to database. overwrite or append? Reason: The specified file already exists. 665 . Recovery: Write over the existing file or attach new file to existing file. Recovery: Fix other errors. Reason: There was inadequate room to place fitting. Reason: Interference detection found an item of size = 0 (length). Fitting Cutback Error at RCP asid <numeric value>. File <string> exists. Reason: Internal error.Error unloading drawing! Reason: No privilege to delete from database. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Error updating row in <string> table! Reason: No privilege to write to database.

Reason: The cross sections cannot be propagated at the fitting without being skewed. Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. 666 . a form could not be displayed by the software. Form could not be created Reason: A form could not be created by the software.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Recovery: Modify the radius. Form could not be displayed Reason: Once created. Fitting Error: Illegal angle at RCP asid <numeric value>. Form creation error Reason: The software could not create a form. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Recovery: Replace the one-line that forms the illegal angle. Possible memory allocation problem. extension or transition of the fitting. Fitting Orientation Error at RCP asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Try rotating cross sections or replacing the one-lines. Recovery: Fatal error. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range 0 to 255. at a cross. Try to exit and re-enter the software. Reason: Heights of cross sections are inconsistent. all four one-lines must be at right angles to each other. Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. Reason: Widths of cross sections are inconsistent and no reducing fitting is allowed in this case. Reason: An illegal angle exists. Fitting Error: contradicting at RCP asid <numeric value>. or replace the one-line so that it has enough room to create the fitting. Font not in range 0 to 255 Reason: The input was not within valid range for a font. For example. change the spec. Fitting Error: contradicting widths at RCP asid <numeric value>.

Form error reading form file <string> Reason: I-Forms could not read the referenced form file. Recovery: Enter a value within the range of -2147483648 to 2147483647. Form error could not find form file <string> Reason: The referenced form file could not be found in the path defined by EE_FORM_PATH. Recovery: Enter a value within the range of -32768 to 32767. Integer not in range -32768 to 32767: <string> Reason: The value entered exceeds the range or the input is corrupted. Function locked out: no permission Reason: This function has been disallowed by the system manager. Recovery: Fix problem as specified by earlier error messages. Forms environment not initialized Reason: Fatal error. Recovery: Exit and reenter the product. Interference Detection initialization error! Reason: Could not open design filelist or read the design file. Integer not in range -2147483648 to 2147483647: <string> Reason: The value entered exceeds the range or the input is corrupted. Recovery: Make sure the referenced form file exists in the path defined by EE_FORM_PATH which is defined in the product. Graphic group not found Reason: No elements found in the design file with the given graphic group.Recovery: Exit and re-enter the product./config/assign file. Recovery: Remove the function name from the EERWAY_LOCKED_OUT variable in the . Recovery: Make sure the referenced form file exists in the path defined by EE_FORM_PATH which is defined in the product. 667 .

Recovery: Create a valid drop point cell through cell creation. Recovery: Change the criteria on the Manual Placement form or modify the symbol.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Invalid annotation type Reason: Annotation of the wrong type was found inside the fence block annotation when trying to close a cell. Invalid Connection Reason: The identified RCP has a higher priority level than the identified one-line. Recovery: Modify the reference database to contain a symbolname for each part. 668 . Reason: The symbolname is blank. Invalid graphic group number Reason: The graphic group number is outside the valid range. <numeric value>. For example. Recovery: Key in another asid id. Invalid Eden Symbolname ’<string>’. Invalid height/width for cross section type <string>. Invalid cell: <string> Reason: The given cell is not the type the command expected. Recovery: Delete the highlighted element or move it outside the fence area. Invalid Eden Processor Input. Reason: The height or width is less than or equal to zero. Recovery: Key in a cell of the type the command is expecting. Recovery: Select another graphic group number. Recovery: Make sure the priority level of the identified RCP is less than or equal to the priority level of the one-line. Place Title Block must be given a title block cell. Invalid asid id Reason: An element cannot be found in the design file with the given asid id. Reason: Could not create Eden symbol with the given criteria. Invalid drop point cell: ‘‘<string>’’ Reason: The cell is not a valid drop point.

Recovery: Modify reference database height/width for the active specification. If it is a cable entry.Only two one-lines can be attached Reason: The RCP has more or fewer than two one-lines attached. Invalid input Reason: You entered an incorrect value. Invalid Part Found at oneline asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Delete the RCP and place the one-line again. Invalid RCP . Invalid Part Found at RCP asid <numeric value>. Invalid key in . Invalid integer: <string> Reason: The value entered is not a valid integer. Recovery: You can only remove an RCP with exactly two one-lines attached. For example. vertex <numeric value>. Recovery: Turn Part Verification off OR add the fitting to the database. Invalid mix of EDF and text: <string> Reason: Field consists of text and Enter Data Fields for the same string. quantity must be an integer greater than 0. Invalid real number: <string> 669 . Recovery: Key in another value. Reason: The fitting at the RCP cannot be verified with the database. Recovery: Make the field either all text or all EDF. Reason: The elbow or straight at the one-line cannot be verified with the database. Recovery: Key in a new value greater than 0. Recovery: Turn Part Verification off OR add the elbow or straight to the database. Invalid RCP – No one-lines attached Reason: There are no one-lines associated with the raceway connect point (RCP).quantity can not be set to 0 Reason: The value you entered is not a valid input. click on the REMOVE button to delete. Recovery: Enter an integer value.

Recovery: Fix other problems. Recovery: Enter another entity/mslink. Invalid/No ris link on element Reason: An element with the given entity/mslink could not be found in the design file. Invalid title block Reason: Not a valid title block. Recovery: Key in another title block cell name. Recovery: Enter another sector/word value. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range of 1 to 63. Invalid response Reason: You entered an invalid response to a system prompt.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Reason: The value entered must contain a decimal with a preceding number. Load initialization error! Reason: Some other initialization error procedure failed. Recovery: Enter a valid response. Invalid equipment pointer cell: ‘‘<string>’’ Reason: The cell is not a valid equipment pointer. Invalid sector/word values Reason: An element could not be found at the given sector/word location in the design file. Recovery: Re-enter a valid real number. Invalid ulink on element Reason: Not a valid ulink for the element. 670 . Level not in range 1 to 63 Reason: The input was not within the valid range for a level. Recovery: Create a valid equipment pointer through cell creation. Recovery: Delete the element and place it again or recreate the element.

CB. and place the element or RCP. Multiple annotation for column <numeric value> Reason: Only one annotation element per column is allowed. No active one line type defined Reason: You did not define an active one-line type in the design file. Recovery: Delete all but one title block. Recovery: Enter LT. CC. RT. 671 . Recovery: Define an active one-line type using the Set Active One-Line Type command. LC. No active group defined Reason: The selected group operation requires that you define an active group. Recovery: Delete the highlighted area. .. LC. CT.. or RB. Recovery: Key in a cell name to close or exit the command. More than one title block found! Reason: More than one title block exists in the design file. current = <numeric value> Reason: The sum of all the angles in the current one-line exceeds the maximum as defined in the one-line type. Must be LT.Max run angle = <numeric value>.or RB in the justification field. Mismatched annotation Reason: Annotation was found that has no parent inside of the fence area. No active system defined Reason: You did not define an active system in the design file. Recovery: Specify a group to be active. Reason: Invalid text justification entered. Must enter cell name to close Reason: You tried to close a cell without keying in a name. RC. Recovery: Terminate before exceeding the max. Recovery: Delete all but one of the highlighted elements. LB.

672 . Recovery: Exit completely and re-enter the product. B. Recovery: Attach a cell library (rc=celllibraryname. Recovery: Press the Override button and key in the value again. No overrides allowed without override button on Reason: The Override button is not depressed. Recovery: Add the EE Raceway tables to the database. Recovery: Key in another name. No or Illegal Cross section type <string>. No elements in fence Reason: The defined fence does not contain a valid element within its borders. Recovery: Modify the reference database to include A. No memory available! Recovery: Exit the process and re-enter and/or reboot the workstation.cel). Reason: The cross section must be of type A. C for the cross section type. Recovery: Redefine the fence to include a valid element. or C in the active specification. No Duplicate Group Name Allowed Reason: The new group name matches the name of an existing group. No memory available for form Reason: The forms software could not allocate enough memory for creation of the form.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Recovery: Define an active system using the Set Active System command. No cell library attached Reason: A cell library is not attached to the design file. B. No raceway one-line type defined Reason: You must have at least one one-line type defined from the reference database in the design file. No columns available for annotation Reason: The database does not contain the EE Raceway database tables.

Recovery: Define a one-line type from the reference database using the Define One-Line Type command. Recovery: Populate the database with parts. No valid elements in group Reason: The active group does not contain any valid elements for the specified group manipulation command. No valid special part tables exist Reason: There are no special parts tables in the database. No systems defined in this design file Reason: You must have at least one system defined from the reference database in the design file. No valid spec exist for this oneline type Reason: No specifications exist in the database for this one-line type. No valid special parts exist for this table 673 . Recovery: Populate the database. Recovery: Make sure the active specification is in the database through Define Raceway Parameters. No valid parts exist for this oneline type Reason: The database has no parts for this specification of the one-line type. No valid dimensions exist for this oneline type Reason: The database has no parts for this specification of the one-line type. Recovery: Add read/write permissions to file. No valid spec keys exist for this oneline type Reason: Problem retrieving the active specification. Recovery: Define a system from the reference database using the Define System command. No read/write access to file <string> Reason: No permission to read and write to the specified file. Recovery: Populate the database. Recovery: Populate the database with parts.

EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Reason: There are no special parts defined in the active table. Recovery: The design file must be created using the EE Raceway seed file. No values found in the codelist Reason: The codelist table contains no rows. Recovery: Populate the database. 674 . Reason: Eden symbol must have at least one datumpoint and at least one placepoint defined. Placepoints/Datumpoints are not defined properly. Problem retrieving symbology from one line type element. Placing Straight Section with No Length. Option not allowed Reason: The selected option is not allowed. Recovery: Insert the rows into the codelist table that corresponds to the column. No write access to cell library Reason: The attached cell library is read only. Recovery: Select another option. Recovery: Give length in the Length field on the Manual Placement form. Recovery: Attach a cell library that has read/write permissions or assign write permission to the current cell library. Not an EE RACEWAY design file Reason: The design file was not seeded with the EE Raceway seed file. One-lines do not contain same systems Recovery: Identify one-lines that contain the same systems. One-line is a member of a different system Recovery: Change the active systems to that of the identified one-line. Reason: The straight must be place with a length greater than 0. Recovery: Modify the Eden symbol.

Projecting oneline with asid <numeric value>. title block. Recovery: None. Recovery: Identify one of these elements. Select failed. Recovery: Export EES_REFDB. Recovery: Enter schema name. Problem with shared memory! Reason: Internal error. Raceway title block not found Reason: Unable to locate a title block in the design file. Raceway element not found Reason: Unable to locate a valid raceway element (one-line. RCP). Recovery: Create the appropriate table. no rows found fitting the given criteria 675 . three-line. Schema name required Reason: No schema name entered. The required columns’ names are prefixed with "ee_". Project schema not defined Reason: EE_SCHEMA has not been exported. Reference schema table missing required columns Reason: A required column in the table for the element you are annotating is NOT in the table or in the mscolumns table. Reason: This identifies which one-line is being projected. Reference schema name required! Reason: EES_REFDB has not been exported. Recovery: Call Intergraph support.Reason: One-line type user data corrupt on one-line OR the system symbology user elements have been corrupted. Recovery: Place a title block in the design file. Recovery: Export the variable EE_SCHEMA.

therefore. Table number <numeric value> not in mscatalog Reason: The specified table number / table name entry does not exist in the reference database. Sheet Name is required Reason: No sheet name entered. cannot be edited. The value must be greater than zero Reason: The width must be greater than zero.unl file or inserting a row through SQL. Recovery: Specify new find criteria. Sheet not found in database! Reason: Sheet name not in drawing table. Recovery: Enter a new value greater than zero. Recovery: Identify a valid text element. Recovery: Add the missing entry into the mscatalog table by loading the mscat. Style not in range 0 to 7 Reason: The input was not within the valid range for style. Recovery: Enter sheet name. 676 .EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Reason: Could not find rows in the database fitting the specified find criteria. Symbol file not found: <string> Reason: The symbol file EE_SYM_FILE could not be found in the symbol path EE_SYM_PATH. Recovery: Change sheet name. Recovery: Make sure EE_SYM_FILE and EE_SYM_PATH are defined in the directory. Text element not found Reason: A text element could not be located.Some fields review only Reason: Some fields are locked once you place the title block and. Title block placed . Recovery: Enter a new value within the range 0 to 7.

not in project! Reason: The referenced column was found in the reference not the project database. The system cannot calculate the height and direction of projection of this complex shape. Warning Fittings at oneline <numeric value> overlap Reason: Fittings at either end of the one-line overlap. Warning Column <string> found in reference. Warning Drawing not valid type! Reason: The title block annotation does not match the annotation type table.Recovery: None. Recovery: None Unload initialization error! Reason: No privilege to read table or column names. Rebuild cell so that the complex shape meets a line or surface at 90 degrees. Recovery: Highlight the cell with that Asid and look to see if an envelope needs to be built for the complex shape in that cell. Recovery: Modify the specification or parts through annotation OR modify or replace the one-lines. Recovery: Add privileges to the database. To ensure a measure of 90 degrees. Warning Cannot calculate envelope for non-planar complex shape with Asid = <numeric value> Reason: Found a cell containing a complex shape which does not meet any lines or surfaces at a 90 degree angle. Too many one-lines at RCP <numeric value> Reason: Cannot propagate with this many one lines. Recovery: Change the title block annotation. you can add a column to the project database and copy the values over. snap to the angle. Truncated <numeric value> characters Reason: The number of characters allowed in the field has been exceeded by <numeric value> characters. Recovery: Place a manual fitting. Recovery: If necessary. 677 .

Warning must accept/reject System selection Reason: You must accept/reject the system selection form before performing a group operation. you must key in a group name. Warning invalid symbol path: <string> Reason: The symbol path EE_SYM_PATH could not be found. Recovery: Make sure EE_FORM_PATH is defined in the . Weight not in range 0 to 31 Reason: The input was not in the valid range for weight./config/assign file and that its value is a full path. 678 . Recovery: Accept or reject the one-line type selection form. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range of 0 to 31.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Warning invalid form path: <string> Reason: The form path EE_FORM_PATH could not be found. Recovery: Make sure EE_SYM_PATH is defined in the . Recovery: Key in the desired group name. Warning must accept/reject One Line Type selection Reason: You must accept/reject the one-line type selection form before performing a group operation. Warning must keyin a group name Reason: When performing the selected group operation./config/assign file and that its value is a full path. Recovery: Accept or reject the system selection form.

..................................................................................................................... 648 Reference PDS Model command....650 Reference PDS Model ..........652 integrated commands...Index Area Volume Graphics command ..............650 error messages .............648 PDS reference model ................................................. 650 679 ........... 648 volume graphics displaying ...646 Area Volume Graphics ......................................................

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful